Original Instructions

PARAMETER LIST ALARM LIST M-CODE LIST

for

INTEGREX e - 1060V II INTEGREX e - RAMTEC V VORTEX 1060V/8

MANUAL No. : H575HA0020E

Serial No. :

Before using this machine and equipment, fully understand the contents of this manual to ensure proper operation. Should any questions arise, please ask the nearest Technical Center or Technology Center.

IMPORTANT NOTICE
1. Be sure to observe the safety precautions described in this manual and the contents of the safety plates on the machine and equipment. Failure may cause serious personal injury or material damage. Please replace any missing safety plates as soon as possible. 2. No modifications are to be performed that will affect operation safety. If such modifications are required, please contact the nearest Technical Center or Technology Center. 3. For the purpose of explaining the operation of the machine and equipment, some illustrations may not include safety features such as covers, doors, etc. Before operation, make sure all such items are in place. 4. This manual was considered complete and accurate at the time of publication, however, due to our desire to constantly improve the quality and specification of all our products, it is subject to change or modification. If you have any questions, please contact the nearest Technical Center or Technology Center. 5. Always keep this manual near the machinery for immediate use. 6. If a new manual is required, please order from the nearest Technical Center or Technology Center with the manual No. or the machine name, serial No. and manual name.
Issued by Manual Publication Section, Yamazaki Mazak Corporation, Japan 11. 2010

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Preface
Safety precautions relating to the CNC unit (in the remainder of this manual, referred to simply as the NC unit) that is provided in this machine are explained below. Not only the persons who create programs, but also those who operate the machine must thoroughly understand the contents of this manual to ensure safe operation of the machine. Read all these safety precautions, even if your NC model does not have the corresponding functions or optional units and a part of the precautions do not apply.

Rule
1. This section contains the precautions to be observed as to the working methods and states usually expected. Of course, however, unexpected operations and/or unexpected working states may take place at the user site. During daily operation of the machine, therefore, the user must pay extra careful attention to its own working safety as well as to observe the precautions described below. Although this manual contains as great an amount of information as it can, since it is not rare for the user to perform the operations that overstep the manufacturer-assumed ones, not all of what the user cannot perform or what the user must not perform can be fully covered in this manual with all such operations taken into consideration beforehand. It is to be understood, therefore, that functions not clearly written as executable are inexecutable functions. The meanings of our safety precautions to DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION are as follows:

2.

3.

: Failure to follow these instructions could result in loss of life. DANGER : Failure to observe these instructions could result in serious harm to a human life or body. WARNING : Failure to observe these instructions could result in minor injuries or serious machine damage. CAUTION

HGENPA0044E

S-1

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Basics
! After turning power on, keep hands away from the keys, buttons, or switches of the operating panel until an initial display has been made. WARNING ! Before proceeding to the next operations, fully check that correct data has been entered and/or set. If the operator performs operations without being aware of data errors, unexpected operation of the machine will result. ! Before machining workpieces, perform operational tests and make sure that the machine operates correctly. No workpieces must be machined without confirmation of normal operation. Closely check the accuracy of programs by executing override, single-block, and other functions or by operating the machine at no load. Also, fully utilize tool path check, Virtual Machining, and other functions, if provided. ! Make sure that the appropriate feed rate and rotational speed are designated for the particular machining requirements. Always understand that since the maximum usable feed rate and rotational speed are determined by the specifications of the tool to be used, those of the workpiece to be machined, and various other factors, actual capabilities differ from the machine specifications listed in this manual. If an inappropriate feed rate or rotational speed is designated, the workpiece or the tool may abruptly move out from the machine. ! Before executing correction functions, fully check that the direction and amount of correction are correct. Unexpected operation of the machine will result if a correction function is executed without its thorough understanding. ! Parameters are set to the optimum standard machining conditions prior to shipping of the machine from the factory. In principle, these settings should not be modified. If it becomes absolutely necessary to modify the settings, perform modifications only after thoroughly understanding the functions of the corresponding parameters. Modifications usually affect any program. Unexpected operation of the machine will result if the settings are modified without a thorough understanding.

Remarks on the Cutting Conditions Recommended by the NC

! Before using the following cutting conditions: - Cutting conditions that are the result of the MAZATROL Automatic Cutting Conditions Determination Function - Cutting conditions suggested by the Machining Navigation Function - Cutting conditions for tools that are suggested to be used by the Machining Navigation Function Confirm that every necessary precaution in regards to safe machine setup has been taken especially for workpiece fixturing/clamping and tool setup. ! Confirm that the machine door is securely closed before starting machining. Failure to confirm safe machine setup may result in serious injury or death.

WARNING

S-2

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Programming
! Fully check that the settings of the coordinate systems are correct. Even if the designated program data is correct, errors in the system settings may cause the machine to operate in unexpected places and the workpiece to abruptly move out from the machine in the event of contact with the tool. ! During surface velocity hold control, as the current workpiece coordinates of the surface velocity hold control axes approach zeroes, the spindle speed increases significantly. For the lathe, the workpiece may even come off if the chucking force decreases. Safety speed limits must therefore be observed when designating spindle speeds. ! Even after inch/metric system selection, the units of the programs, tool information, or parameters that have been registered until that time are not converted. Fully check these data units before operating the machine. If the machine is operated without checks being performed, even existing correct programs may cause the machine to operate differently from the way it did before. ! If a program is executed that includes the absolute data commands and relative data commands taken in the reverse of their original meaning, totally unexpected operation of the machine will result. Recheck the command scheme before executing programs. ! If an incorrect plane selection command is issued for a machine action such as arc interpolation or fixed-cycle machining, the tool may collide with the workpiece or part of the machine since the motions of the control axes assumed and those of actual ones will be interchanged. (This precaution applies only to NC units provided with EIA/ISO functions.) ! The mirror image, if made valid, changes subsequent machine actions significantly. Use the mirror image function only after thoroughly understanding the above. (This precaution applies only to NC units provided with EIA/ISO functions.) ! If machine coordinate system commands or reference position returning commands are issued with a correction function remaining made valid, correction may become invalid temporarily. If this is not thoroughly understood, the machine may appear as if it would operate against the expectations of the operator. Execute the above commands only after making the corresponding correction function invalid. (This precaution applies only to NC units provided with EIA/ISO functions.) ! The barrier function performs interference checks based on designated tool data. Enter the tool information that matches the tools to be actually used. Otherwise, the barrier function will not work correctly. ! The system of G-code and M-code commands differs, especially for turning, between the machines of INTEGREX e-Series and the other turning machines. Issuance of the wrong G-code or M-code command results in totally non-intended machine operation. Thoroughly understand the system of G-code and M-code commands before using this system.
Sample program Machines of INTEGREX e-Series The milling spindle rotates at 1000 min . The turning spindle rotates at 1000 min1.
1

WARNING

Turning machines The turning spindle rotates at 1000 min1. The milling spindle rotates at 1000 min1.

S1000M3 S1000M203

S-3

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

! For the machines of INTEGREX e-Series, programmed coordinates can be rotated using an index unit of the MAZATROL program and a G68 command (coordinate rotate command) of the EIA/ISO program. However, for example, when the B-axis is rotated through 180 degrees around the Y-axis to implement machining with the turning spindle No. 2, the plus side of the X-axis in the programmed coordinate system faces downward and if the program is created ignoring this fact, the resulting movement of the tool to unexpected positions may incite collisions. To create the program with the plus side of the X-axis oriented in an upward direction, use the mirror function of the WPC shift unit or the mirror imaging function of G-code command (G50.1, G51.1). ! After modifying the tool data specified in the program, be sure to perform the tool path check function, the Virtual Machining function, and other functions, and confirm that the program operates properly. The modification of tool data may cause even a field-proven machining program to change in operational status. If the user operates the machine without being aware of any changes in program status, interference with the workpiece could arise from unexpected operation. For example, if the cutting edge of the tool during the start of automatic operation is present inside the clearance-including blank (unmachined workpiece) specified in the common unit of the MAZATROL program, care is required since the tool will directly move from that position to the approach point because of no obstructions being judged to be present on this path. For this reason, before starting automatic operation, make sure that the cutting edge of the tool during the start of automatic operation is present outside the clearance-including workpiece specified in the common unit of the MAZATROL program. ! If axis-by-axis independent positioning is selected and simultaneously rapid feed selected for each axis, movements to the ending point will not usually become linear. Before using these functions, therefore, make sure that no obstructions are present on the path. ! Before starting the machining operation, be sure to confirm all contents of the program obtained by conversion. Imperfections in the program could lead to machine damage and operator injury.

CAUTION

S-4

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Operations
! Single-block, feed hold, and override functions can be made invalid using system variables #3003 and #3004. Execution of this means the important modification that makes the corresponding operations invalid. Before using these variables, therefore, give thorough notification to related persons. Also, the operator must check the settings of the system variables before starting the above operations. ! If manual intervention during automatic operation, machine locking, the mirror image function, or other functions are executed, the workpiece coordinate systems will usually be shifted. When making machine restart after manual intervention, machine locking, the mirror image function, or other functions, consider the resulting amounts of shift and take the appropriate measures. If operation is restarted without any appropriate measures being taken, collision with the tool or workpiece may occur. ! Use the dry run function to check the machine for normal operation at no load. Since the feed rate at this time becomes a dry run rate different from the program-designated feed rate, the axes may move at a feed rate higher than the programmed value. ! After operation has been stopped temporarily and insertion, deletion, updating, or other commands executed for the active program, unexpected operation of the machine may result if that program is restarted. No such commands should, in principle, be issued for the active program. ! During manual operation, fully check the directions and speeds of axial movement. ! For a machine that requires manual homing, perform manual homing operations after turning power on. Since the software-controlled stroke limits will remain ineffective until manual homing is completed, the machine will not stop even if it oversteps the limit area. As a result, serious machine damage will result. ! Do not designate an incorrect pulse multiplier when performing manual pulse handle feed operations. If the multiplier is set to 1000 times and the handle operated inadvertently, axial movement will become faster than that expected.

WARNING

CAUTION

S-5

REQUEST TO THE USER

REQUEST TO THE USER

Request for Saving Data of Machining Programs
Machining programs saved on the hard disk of the NC unit may not be read out in the event of accidental hard disk trouble. The user, therefore, is earnestly requested to back up and store every machining program of importance at regular intervals onto an external memory (USB memory, memory card, etc.). - The procedure for data storage is detailed in the Operating Manual, Part 3 (OPERATING NC UNIT AND PREPARATION FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION), Chapter 9, (DISPLAY RELATED TO DATA STORAGE). - Always use an initialized USB memory. The location of the USB connector depends on the machine model, as shown below.
MATRIX (on the INTEGREX, VARIAXIS, etc.)

USB memory

MATRIX NEXUS (on the QTN, etc.)

MATRIX NEXUS (on the HCN, etc.)

On machines with a random ATC feature, each actual ATC operation changes the tool data (in pocket numbers). Be sure not to run the machine after loading the externally stored data of the TOOL DATA display without having confirmed the datas correspondence to the current tooling on the magazine. Otherwise the machine cannot be be guaranteed to operate normally.

S-6

BEFORE USING THE NC UNIT

BEFORE USING THE NC UNIT

Limited Warranty
The warranty of the manufacturer does not cover any trouble arising if the NC unit is used for its non-intended purpose. Take notice of this when operating the unit. Examples of the trouble arising if the NC unit is used for its non-intended purpose are listed below. 1. 2. 3. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any commercially available software products (including user-created ones) Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any Windows operating systems Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any commercially available computer equipment

Operating Environment
1. Ambient temperature During machine operation: 0 to 50C (32 to 122F) 2. Relative humidity During machine operation: 10 to 75% (without bedewing) Note: As humidity increases, insulation deteriorates causing electrical component parts to deteriorate quickly.

Keeping the Backup Data

Note: Do not attempt to delete or modify the data stored in the following folder. Recovery Data Storage Folder: D:\MazakBackUp

Although this folder is not used when the NC unit is running normally, it contains important data that enables the prompt recovery of the machine if it fails. If this data has been deleted or modified, the NC unit may require a long recovery time. Be sure not to modify or delete this data.

S-7

BEFORE USING THE NC UNIT

- NOTE -

S-8 E

CONTENTS
Page

1 2

INTRODUCTION .................................................................................. 1-1 PARAMETER ....................................................................................... 2-1

2-1 Outline ................................................................................................................2-1
Types of parameters............................................................................................... 2-1 Precautions............................................................................................................. 2-2

2-1-1 2-1-2

2-2

Parameter List ....................................................................................................2-3

User parameter....................................................................................................... 2-3 Machine parameter............................................................................................... 2-37 Data I/O parameter ............................................................................................... 2-69

2-2-1 2-2-2 2-2-3

2-3

Detailed Description .........................................................................................2-74

Structure of the parameter list .............................................................................. 2-74 User parameter User parameter User parameter User parameter User parameter User parameter User parameter POINT (D) ................................................................................ 2-76 LINE/FACE/3D (E) ................................................................... 2-99 EIA/ISO (F)............................................................................. 2-124 SOFT LIMIT (I) ....................................................................... 2-182 SYSTEM (SU) ........................................................................ 2-188 TURNING (TC)....................................................................... 2-209 SOLID (SD) ............................................................................ 2-253 CALL MACRO (J)............................................................. 2-256 MEASURE (K).................................................................. 2-262 TABLE (L) ........................................................................ 2-295 FEED VEL. (M) ................................................................ 2-336

2-3-1 2-3-2 2-3-3 2-3-4 2-3-5 2-3-6 2-3-7 2-3-8 2-3-9

Machine parameter

2-3-10 Machine parameter 2-3-11 Machine parameter 2-3-12 Machine parameter

C-1

2-3-13 Machine parameter 2-3-14 Machine parameter 2-3-15 Machine parameter 2-3-16 Machine parameter 2-3-17 Data I/O parameter 2-3-18 Data I/O parameter 2-3-19 Data I/O parameter 2-3-20 Data I/O parameter

TIME CONST. (N) ............................................................ 2-351 ANOTHER (S) .................................................................. 2-359 SPINDLE (SA).................................................................. 2-369 BARRIER (BA) ................................................................. 2-388 CMT parameter (CMT) ..................................................... 2-416 TAPE parameter (TAP) .................................................... 2-419 DNC parameter (DNC) ..................................................... 2-430 OTHER (IOP/DPR/IDD).................................................... 2-441

ALARM ................................................................................................. 3-1

3-1 Outline ................................................................................................................3-2
Alarm display .......................................................................................................... 3-2 Precautions............................................................................................................. 3-3

3-1-1 3-1-2

3-2

Detailed Description ...........................................................................................3-4

Structure of the alarm list........................................................................................ 3-4 No. 1 - No. 99, No. 1000 - No. 1099 (System/Drive error)...................................... 3-5 No. 100 - No. 199, No. 1100 - No. 1199 (CNC machine control error) ................. 3-12 No. 200 - No. 399, No. 1200 - No. 1399 (PLC machine control error).................. 3-26 No. 400 - No. 499, No. 1400 - No. 1499 (CNC screen operation error)................ 3-48 No. 500 - No. 599, No. 1500 - No. 1599 (I/O error) .............................................. 3-68 No. 600 - No. 699, No. 1600 - No. 1699 (MAZATROL program error) ................. 3-80 No. 700 - No. 799, No. 1700 - No. 1799 (MAZATROL program error) ................. 3-93 No. 800 - No. 899, No. 1800 - No. 1899 (EIA/ISO program error)...................... 3-105

3-2-1 3-2-2 3-2-3 3-2-4 3-2-5 3-2-6 3-2-7 3-2-8 3-2-9

3-2-10 No. 900 - No. 999, No. 1900 - No. 1999 (EIA/ISO program error)...................... 3-121 3-2-11 No. 2000 - No. 2099 (3D setup error) ................................................................. 3-133

C-2

3-2-12 No. 2100 - No. 2199 (Interference error) ............................................................ 3-137 3-2-13 No. 2200 - No. 2299 (CAM data output error) .................................................... 3-140

M-CODE LIST....................................................................................... 4-1

C-3

- NOTE -

C-4 E

INTRODUCTION

INTRODUCTION
This manual describes the meaning and setting of various parameters, and the meaning and elimination procedure of various alarms used for the MAZATROL MATRIX System. This document also gives the list of M-codes. For detailed description of the MAZATROL MATRIX System, refer to the Operating Manual of the machine. Read this manual and the Operating Manual of the machine carefully in order to make the best use of the possibilities of the MAZATROL MATRIX System.

1-1

INTRODUCTION

- NOTE -

1-2 E

PARAMETER

2
2-1

PARAMETER
Outline
1. Scope of this chapter This chapter describes the parameters you can change as required. How to read the list is described in the beginning. Always refer to this list to change parameters. Precautions on this chapter This chapter also gives parameters relating to optional functions. Accordingly, the list includes parameters which cannot be changed. Check the type of machine purchased by you and its specifications before you read the list.

2.

Note 1: The contents of this list are subjected to change without notice, for NC unit or machine improvement. Note 2: Any questions about the contents of this list should be communicated to Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

2-1-1

Types of parameters
Parameters, which refer to constants specific to the NC machines and equipment and the data necessary for cutting operations, possess a very important meaning. Parameters can be broadly divided into the following three types according to their meaning. - User parameters The data required for processes such as point machining, line machining, plane machining, turning, and EIA/ISO programmed machining, is registered. The USER PARAMETER display is used to register the user parameters. - Machine parameters Constants related to the servomotors and spindle motors, machine status data etc. are registered. The MACHINE PARAMETER display is used to register the machine parameters. - Data I/O parameters The data required for connection to external units such as a CMT unit and a tape unit, is registered. The DATA I/O PARAMETER display which can be selected on the DATA I/O display is used to register the data I/O parameters.

2-1

PARAMETER

2-1-2

Precautions
1. Details of the parameters may differ according to the machine used, the presence/absence of an option(s), the production time of the NC machines and equipment, etc. Therefore, do not use the parameters of other machines. The parameter list is supplied in the form of data sheets within the NC electronic cabinet at shipment of the machines. Be careful not to lose the list. Before making changes to details of a parameter, make sure that the parameter is the one to be changed. If details of the parameter to be changed cannot be clearly understood, contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center. When changing details of a parameter, maintain records of the old and new data. If the particular machine is not used for a long time, then the battery to protect the parameter memory will run down. (Battery alarm) In that case, errors will occur in the parameters and thus machine malfunctions may result. To prevent this, first check the existing details of the parameters closely against the separate parameter list and then make the necessary changes to the parameters. In addition to the parameters listed in this document, those related to PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) are also available; refer to the OPERATING MANUAL of the machine for details of the PLC-related parameters and the PLC Parameter List in the ELECTRIC WIRING DIAGRAM.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

7.

2-2

PARAMETER

2-2
2-2-1

Parameter List
User parameter
1. POINT (D)
Address (bit) D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 Outline Height of the second R-point during point machining Nominal diameter of spot-machining tool Number of revolutions during dwell at hole bottom in spot-machining cycle Maximum allowable spot-chamfering hole diameter element Prehole through speed during inversed spot-facing Drill-machining cycle setting element Drill-machining cycle setting element Maximum diameter of holes machinable on one drill Maximum diameter of holes machinable on two drills Maximum diameter of holes machinable on three drills Through-hole/tap-prehole machining overshoot Stop-hole machining hole-bottom clearance Spot-machining hole diameter (fixed value) Depth-of-cut setting element for drilling (ALMINUM) Depth-of-cut setting element for drilling (except AL) Number of revolutions during dwell at hole bottom for chamfering cutter or spot-machining tool in chamfering cycle Interference clearance of chamfering cutter Return feed rate for reaming or boring (cycle 3) Number of revolutions during dwell at hole bottom for end milling Radial depth-of-cut setting element for end milling Reference bottom-finishing allowance for end milling Tapping-cycle dwell time Prehole clearance for end milling

2-3

PARAMETER

Address (bit) D24 D25 D26 D27 D28 D29 D30 D31 D32 D33 D34 D35 D36 D37 D38 D39 D40 D41 D42 D43 D44 D45 D46 D47 D48 D49 D50

Outline Number of revolutions during dwell at hole bottom for boring Boring-bar tip relief Returning distance from hole bottom for boring or back-boring Bottom-finishing amount of boring Chip removal time Number of incomplete threads in tapping cycle Tapper elongation amount for tapping Number of spindle revolutions until spindle CCW rotation begins in tapping cycle Back-boring tool tip relief Prehole-drilling diameter setting element for reamer (drilling) Prehole-drilling diameter setting element for reamer (boring) Prehole-drilling diameter setting element for reamer (end milling) Reamer-prehole diameter setting element for boring or end milling Reamer-prehole diameter setting element for end milling Number of revolutions during dwell at spot-faced hole bottom for inversed spot-facing R-point height during point-machining Height of the third R-point during point machining Number of incomplete threads in tapping cycle for piped screw Selecting an automatic calculation method for the amount of chamfer with the tapping unit Gradual decrements in drilling depth Minimum gradual drilling depth Reamer-prehole machining overshoot Feed override for the section to be chamfered in the planetary tapping cycle Amount of return at hole bottom during the planetary tapping cycle Auto-set feed rate for pre-hole machining in the planetary tapping cycle

2-4

PARAMETER

Address (bit) D51 D52 D53 D54 D55 D56 D57 D58 D59 D60 D61 D62 - D72 D73 - D77 D78 - D82 D83 - D90 D91 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 D92 0 1 2 3 Auto-set feed rate for planetary tapping cycle

Outline

Reduction ratio for the G00-based relief rate during a very-deep-hole drilling cycle Number of times of pecking up to the return of the tool to a position near the starting point of the very-deephole drilling cycle of a drilling or turning-drilling unit Deceleration rate at cutting start for very-deep-hole drilling cycle/decremental very-deep-hole machining cycle Drilling return distance for very-deep-hole drilling cycle/decremental very-deep-hole machining cycle Number of revolutions during dwell at chip ejection position and hole bottom for very-deep-hole drilling cycle/decremental very-deep-hole machining cycle Return speed for very-deep-hole drilling cycle/decremental very-deep-hole machining cycle Feed rate reduction distance ratio at cutting start of a very-deep-hole drilling cycle/decremental very-deephole machining cycle Surface speed reduction ratio at cutting end of a very-deep-hole drilling cycle/decremental very-deep-hole machining cycle Automatic setting ratio of axial cutting feed rate during chamfering Nominal diameter of chamfering cutter, set during automatic tool development for a point machining unit Learning of cutting conditions (DEP-Z range) Learning of cutting conditions (WID-R range) M04 is output/not output after the tool has dwelled at the hole bottom during a tapping cycle. The tool dwells/does not dwell after M04 has been output at the hole bottom during a tapping cycle. The tool dwells/does not dwell after it has been returned to the R-point during a tapping cycle. If a drill is used in the pre-machining of the centering drill cycle, the R-point height is set to D1 or not. The finishing tool path is shortened/not shortened during a true-circle processing cycle (end milling). The tool path is shortened/not shortened during a true-circle processing cycle (chamfering). If a pre-machining tool sequence is included in the same unit, the R-point height of the drill is set/not set to D1 or D42. The R-point height of the chamfering cutter during the cycle 2 is set to D42 or not. The R-point height of the spot-machining tool during the chamfering cycle (cycle 2) is set to D42 or not. During a true-circle processing (end milling) cycle, E17 is used for axial feed or not. The R1-point height of the back spot facing is set to D1 or not. If a chamfering cutter is included in the premachining tool sequence of the same unit, the R-point height of the reamer is set to D1 or not. If a chamfering cutter is included in the pre-machining tool sequence of the same unit, the R-point height of the tapping is set to D1 or not.

2-5

PARAMETER

Address (bit) 4 5 6 7 D93 D94 D95 D96 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 D97 - D104 D105 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 D106 0 1 2

Outline The position cleared radially or axially by D17 from the workpiece section concerned is subjected to check for interference or not. Dwell time designation for synchronous tapping in a MAZATROL program valid/invalid During planetary tapping, chips are ejected/not ejected automatically prior to the threading process. Unidirectional positioning for point-machining Unidirectional positioning for point-machining Auto-setting method for tapping Surface speed calculation for spot drill used Element that determines the counterboring pattern Setting of the RGH BCB (inversed faced hole machining), BK-CBORE (back boring), and CBOR-TAP (counterbore-tapping) units in MAZATROL programs (for INTEGREX j) Handling the X-axial coordinates of non-turning TPC relay points Machine operation when machining units are not preceded by an indexing unit

2-6

PARAMETER

Address (bit) 3 4 5 6 7 D107 - D144

Outline

2.

LINE/FACE/3D (E)
Address (bit) Outline Closed-pattern cutting start point and escape point setting element Cutting start point and escape point setting element (the first clearance) Reference allowance of finishing in radial direction Element used to set the cutting start point and escape point (the second clearance) Reference allowance of finishing in axial direction Allowance of cutting start point in axial direction (the second clearance) Radial interference clearance of chamfering cutter Allowance of axial-cutting start position (the first clearance) Depth-of-cut-R automatic setting element (Face milling, End milling-top, End milling-step) Axial interference clearance of chamfering cutter Radial interference clearance of face milling unit and angular face milling unit Tool path setting element for end milling-top unit Depth-of-cut-R automatic setting element (Pocket milling, Pocket milling-mountain, Pocket milling-valley) Tool path setting element for face milling-top unit (reciprocating short) Peripheral-cutting feed rate override for end milling-mountain unit Axial-cutting feed rate override Override in case of the overall width cutting for pocket-machining Returning feed rate override in case of bidirectional cutting for rough-machining of the end milling-slot unit.

E1 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 E7 E8 E9 E10 E11 E12 E13 E14 E15 E16 E17 E18 E19

2-7

PARAMETER

Address (bit) E20 E21 E22 E23 E24 E25 E26 E27 E28 E29 E30 E31 E32 E33 E34 E35 E36 E37 E38 E39 - E54 E55 E56 E57 E58 E59 E60 E61 E62

Outline Axial cutting feed override during Z-axial cutting in the pecking mode of face machining Wall-cutting overlap in closed figure Override value of automatic corner over-riding Effective removal allowance (upper limit) of automatic corner overriding Effective removal allowance (lower limit) of automatic corner overriding Effective angle (upper limit) of automatic corner overriding Calculation coefficient for the finishing feed of line milling Radial direction feed rate calculation reference diameter for finish cutting in line machining unit Finishing feed rate calculation reference feed rate in line machining unit Selection of whether the cutting conditions in the shape sequence during VFC mode are to be modified An element that determines the starting point and escape point of radial cutting when CLOSED is specified for the wall attributes at the starting point and ending point of open-pattern line machining Element that determines the amount of OPEN attribute wall protrusion in pocket-machining shape units Element that automatically determines an approaching radius in a Z-direction helical approach scheme Approaching gradient for a Z-direction helical approach scheme Element that automatically determines an approaching distance in a Z-direction tapered approach scheme Approaching gradient for a Z-direction tapered approach scheme Element that automatically determines an escape distance in the Z-direction tapered escape scheme The amount of return of pecking in the Z-axial pecking mode of face machining The returning feed rate of pecking in the Z-axial pecking mode of face machining 3-D, Axial cutting-feed overriding 3-D, Inversion check of curved-surface pattern 3-D, Severity check of cutting pitch 3-D, Tool-diameter compensation 3-D, Allowance of axial-cutting start position 3-D, Normal cutting allowance 3-D, Search length for parallel cutting 3-D, Search length for right-angle cutting

2-8

PARAMETER

Address (bit) E63 E64 E65 E66 E67 - E75 E76 E77 E78 E79 - E82 E83 E84 E85 E86 E87 E88 E89 E90 E91 E92 E93 E94 E95 E96 E97 E98 E99 0 1 2

Outline 3-D, Pattern display division segment (FL direction) 3-D, Pattern display division segment (GL direction) 3-D, Radial cutting allowance for area check 3-D, Axial cutting allowance for area check 3-D, Processing error tolerance 3-D, Entire-width override 3-D, Radial cutting allowance for high-speed rough processing (workpiece size appointment) 3-D, Multiplying factor set for tolerance 3-D, Region of radial machining during high-speed rough processing (offset appointment) 3-D, Region of axial machining during high-speed rough processing (offset appointment) 3-D, Region of radial machining during high-speed rough processing: X (workpiece size appointment) 3-D, Region of radial machining during high-speed rough processing: +X (workpiece size appointment) 3-D, Region of radial machining during high-speed rough processing: Y (workpiece size appointment) 3-D, Region of radial machining during high-speed rough processing: +Y (workpiece size appointment) 3-D, Region of axial machining during high-speed rough processing (workpiece size appointment) Tool-path pattern selection for end milling-mountain unit Tool-path pattern selection for pocket milling unit Tool-path pattern selection for pocket milling-mountain unit Tool-path pattern selection for pocket milling-valley unit Tool-path pattern selection for line-machining unit Tool-path pattern selection for end milling-slot unit Tool-path pattern selection for end milling-top unit Cutting method selection for end milling-mountain, pocket milling-valley unit Milling feed rate specification range for the shape sequence of the MAZATROL program Bottom/wall simultaneous finishing mode for pocket machining

2-9

PARAMETER

Address (bit) 3 4 5 6 7 E100 - E103 E104 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 E105 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 E106 - E144

Outline Interference check between the approach point and the cutting starting point of face machining Returning position for each cutting operation during face machining Returning position during face machining Returning position during line machining Infeed position when a CLOSED attribute is assigned to the wall of line machining Calculation of the ZC machining feed rate B-axis user-defined angle setting during C-axis central line machining Selection of the surface on which to describe a line machining shape in the ZC mode

2-10

PARAMETER

3.

EIA/ISO (F)
Address (bit) Outline G61.1 corner deceleration coefficient (%) G61.1 arc-clamping speed coefficient (%) For high-speed smoothing control Fixed value (0) Fixed value (0) Minimum allowable height of stepped sections for deceleration in high-speed smoothing control mode Fixed value (0) Corner deceleration speed coefficient for high-speed smoothing control Circular cutting clamp speed coefficient for high-speed smoothing control Vector constant for 3-D, tool-diameter compensation Return amount of pecking in drill high-speed deep-hole cycle or in G73 Allowance amount of rapid-feed stop in deep-hole drilling cycle or in G83/G283 Rotation center of coordinates (axis of abscissa) Rotation center of coordinates (axis of ordinate) Horizontal length of coordinate rotation Vertical length of coordinate rotation Angle of coordinate rotation Maximum permissible difference in arc radius Fixed value of scaling factor Maximum inside-corner angle available with automatic corner override (G62) Deceleration area of automatic corner overriding (G62) Handling of G92 (spindle speed clamp value) command at restart Threading chamfering angle Override value of automatic corner overriding (G62)

F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 - F26 F27 F28 F29

2-11

PARAMETER

Address (bit) F30 F31 F32 F33 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F34 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F35 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 G-code type selection

Outline

Selection of a roughing priority type for program layout Operation when argument R is omitted from the maximum/minimum spindle speed setting Incorporation of the MAZATROL tool length into the current position counter valid/invalid Type of the turning tool to be automatically set in the MAZATROL program, created by loading an M640T or T-NEXUS program Modal indication for G-code group No. 1 in the fixed cycle mode Modal indication on radius data input for X-axis in the mode of 3D coordinate conversion (G68.5) Cancellation of the ram spindle offset command (G52.1) when the RESET key is pressed valid/invalid Representation on the POSITION display for G49 (only for the INTEGREX e Series) Parts count override in the middle of automatic operation Programming type for inclined-surface machining Compensating movement for a T-code with a movement command in one block Application of Z-OFFSET and C-OFFSET values for the tape operation mode Selection whether or not multiple material pieces can be arranged on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display Automatic setting of the material model for a MAZATROL program of initial-point scheme on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display When assigning G-code for a cutting function not to be represented with the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD being selected for automatic operation, operation is continued/alarm state When a program prepared and stored for the Hard Disk operation is called up as a subprogram with the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD being selected for automatic operation, operation is continued/alarm state Representation of cutting-off or parting operation by turning on the VIRTUAL MACHINING and 3D MONITOR displays Representation of cutting-off or parting operation by milling on the VIRTUAL MACHINING and 3D MONITOR displays Alarming/No alaming when the feed-overriding value has been changed in the flow of automatic operation with the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD being active

2-12

PARAMETER

Address (bit) F36 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F37 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F38 F39 F40 F41 F42 F43 F44 F45 F46 F47 - F66 F67

Outline

Display of the chuck and tailstock areas for an EIA/ISO program on the TRACE or TOOL PATH CHECK display Number of effective decimal digits in the tool axis vectors components (I, J, K) for tool tip point control type 2 (G43.5) Rotational axis prefiltering Temporary cancellation of geometry compensation for G0 (rapid traverse) in the mode of tool tip point control Alarming/No alaming for a subprogram call command given in a manual program (MANL PRG) unit (for turning machines only) Plane to be used for an EIA/ISO program (called by a subprogram unit) and a manual program unit Operating method selection in tape mode Threading termination waiting time processing Deceleration area r during Z-axis measurement Measurement area d during Z-axis measurement Measuring speed f Deceleration area r during X-axis measurement Deceleration area d during X-axis measurement Common variable name

2-13

PARAMETER

Address (bit) F68 F69 F70 F71 F72 F73 F74 F75 F76 F77 F78 F79 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F80 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 EIA/ISO program restart method

Outline

Availability of multiple-machining and designated number of repetitions in the EIA/ISO subprogram Machining order control Selection of the shape correction function of the MAZATROL program M-code execution time for time study S-code execution time for time study T-code execution time for time study B-code execution time for time study Basis rate for tool life judgment Selection of separating ratio of graphic display Holding of memory monitor address valid/invalid Selection of menu display Key history function valid/invalid Tool search method Selection of tap gear Display of tools currently in use valid/invalid Initial value of synchronous/asynchronous tapping during tapping tool registration Display of a MAZATROL monitor window valid/invalid MAZATROL function valid/invalid Automatic display of the navigation window on the occurrence of an alarm valid/invalid MAINTENANCE CHECK display at power on, displayed/not displayed Third page of the MAINTENANCE CHECK display, displayed/not displayed GRAPHIC MAINTENANCE display on the occurrence of an alarm, displayed/not displayed Learning of cutting conditions valid/invalid Editing on the CUTTING CONDITION LEARN display valid/invalid Destination of spare tool correction by the workpiece measurement

2-14

PARAMETER

Address (bit) F81 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F82 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F83 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F84 0 1 2 Program editing prohibited (in 9000s) Program displaying prohibited (in 9000s) Fixed value (0) Add-in MAZATROL valid/invalid Program editing prohibited (in 8000, 9000s) Program displaying prohibited (in 8000, 9000s)

Outline

Retaining the program transfer settings valid/invalid Input error prevention function valid/invalid Characteristics estimation result graph, displayed/not displayed Selection of inch/metric representation in POSITION display, TOOL DATA display, and TOOL OFFSET display modes valid/invalid Basis for tool life judgment X-axis diameter display on the POSITION display valid/invalid Whether the stored tools registration function on the VISUAL TOOL MANAGEMENT display is to be made valid or invalid when the visual tool ID/data management functions are valid Automatic setting of the grooving tool length Index tool wear correction setup during automatic operation Output of the alarm history data as text data valid/invalid Operation record function valid/invalid Attribute of the starting/ending point of line machining after loading a program of M640 series onto the MATRIX (only for a program of Z-offset scheme) Tool offset data is taken or not into account for the POSITION counter during execution of EIA programs Fixed cycle (B J) Spare tool search for EIA

2-15

PARAMETER

Address (bit) 3 4 5 6 7 F85 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F86 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F87 0 1 2 3 4 5

Outline Timing to validate new workpiece offset data specified with a system variable Machine coordinate system (G92) selection Incremental/absolute data command in high-speed machining mode Tape operation, Not operated until the buffer is full/Operated at a unit of EOB When no tool data has been designated during EIA/ISO program execution with the MAZATROL tool length data validated, operation is executed/alarm state Table rotational machining Radial interference check Type of coordinate system for controlling the tool tip point Tool tip point control scheme Fixed value (0) Reset to cancel G68.2, valid/invalid Display of surface definition Output of the B-axis unclamping code before B-axis indexing, valid/invalid Output of M250 (Spindle Speed Confirmation) before a turning feed, valid/invalid Milling-spindle start timing for a milling unit (with MILL&TURN. set under TYPE of UNo. 0) Override scheme for G0 during tool tip point control Display of the PART SHAPE window Override scheme for G1 during tool tip point control Selection of rotary axis reference position for tool tip point control Selection of whether or not the machine is to be offset by each change only in the deviation vector Selection of whether or not the check for mismatch of the workpiece origin and table rotation center is to be conducted Data alteration checking function valid/invalid (tool-related function) Feed rate display method for the superposition system Single-block mode cancellation during fixed cycle invalid/valid Common variables (#500 and on) are cleared by resetting or at the program end, invalid/valid

2-16

PARAMETER

Address (bit) 6 7 F88 F89 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F90 F91 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F92 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Outline Local variables are cleared by resetting or at the program end, invalid/valid Common variables (#100 to #199) are cleared by resetting or at the program end, invalid/valid Specifications related to the conversion from MAZATROL program into an EIA program [For EIA conversion] Output of shape data [For EIA conversion] G-codes for synchronous tapping: G74/G84 or G84.2/G84.3 [For EIA conversion] Output of F command [For EIA conversion] Mill-turning unit conversion, alarm/shifted path [For EIA conversion] Output destination, standard area/ backup area [For EIA conversion] Returning to the second zero point before tool change (output of G30) Fixed value (0) In response to move command without decimal point, tool moves by 1/tool moves by 10 Coordinate system shift using a MAZATROL program, valid/invalid Stroke inside check before movement/Stroke outside check before movement Metric (Initial G20 is valid/invalid)/Inch In response to move command without decimal point: G00 interpolation/non-interpolation G33E command is for the number of threads per inch/command is for thread cutting with precise lead Modal at power-on or at reset (G17 or G19/G18) Modal at power-on or at reset (G17 or G19/G18) Dwell command method Tool-length compensation (G43 or G44) axis Tool-diameter compensation (G41 or G42) start up/cancel type Tool-diameter compensation (G41 or G42) interference check Fixed-cycle hole-drilling axis

2-17

PARAMETER

Address (bit) 7 F93 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F94 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F95 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F96 0 1

Outline ACT-/NOSE-R in the TOOL DATA display for an EIA/ISO program, invalid/valid Modal at power-on or at reset (G94/G95) Modal at power-on or at reset (G91/G90) Tool length of tool data for an EIA/ISO program, invalid/valid Feed rate during machine lock Middle point during reference-point return Single-block operation mode at user macro operation instruction Fixed value (0) Movement to hole-drilling position in fixed-cycle mode External deceleration signal valid/invalid Tool length offsetting during G28/G30 execution, canceled/performed Modal at power-on or at reset (G01/G00) Tool command method using T-codes Fixed value (0) Fixed value (1) Tool offset amount effectuated in an EIA/ISO program Interrupt function using user macro instruction, valid/invalid Handling of macroprogram interruption and call Automatic return position to restart the program (Fixed to 1) G00 (positioning) command feed rate for dry run Manual-pulse interrupt amount cancellation with reset key, valid/invalid Coordinate system corresponding to G54 set with reset key, valid/invalid Selection of variable number for tool offset amount Fairing function valid/invalid

2-18

PARAMETER

Address (bit) 2 3 4 5 6 7 F97 F98 F99 F100 F101 F102 F103 F104 F105 F106 F107 F108 F109 F110 F111 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Outline Processing for arc command blocks in high-speed machining mode, nonuniform feed/uniform feed Selection of a corner judgment criterion in high-speed machining mode Selection of a cutting feed clamping speed in high-speed machining mode Rotational axis shape correction valid/invalid Selection of G-code of the coordinates system to be used in the EIA conversion function Number of macro variable to be used in the EIA conversion function Offset amount for the subprogram WNo. to the main WNo. concerned in case of output with subprogram in the EIA conversion function Spline cancel length Spline cancel angle Fine spline interpolation curve error (Block including the point of inflection) Spline interpolation fairing block length Fine spline interpolation curve error (Block including no inflection point) Small block judgment length Corner deceleration angle increment value Number of common variables between turrets (#100 onward) Number of common variables between turrets (#500 onward) Selection of display type of tapping tool on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display Use/disuse of dry run during thread cutting Use/disuse of feed hold during thread cutting Direction of rotation of the C-axis during C-axial threading with G01.1 EIA tool command suffix valid/invalid Tool correction amount selection for EIA/ISO programs Execution mode selection for a fixed turning cycle

2-19

PARAMETER

Address (bit) 7 F112 F113 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F114 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F115 F116 F117 F118 F119 F120 F121 F122 F123

Outline Form of single-block stop during a fixed turning cycle Selection of measurement data items to be printed out Counting all types of use under the same tool number for the tool life management on the TOOL DATA display executed/not executed Data handling on the milling tool of a group that has expired in tool life Data handling on the turning tool of a group that has expired in tool life Tool life management of the FLASH tool Tool life management Life time Tool life management Maximum available wear offset data X Tool life management Maximum available wear offset data Y Tool life management Maximum available wear offset data Z Selection of the maximum C-axial cutting feed rate for the inch system Selection of the operation occurring during the control of the tool tip point when command G49 is issued (when the tool length offset value is canceled) B-axis angle check during measurement of the turning tool for which OUT is specified in section to be machined, valid/invalid Moving axes by using G49 (tool length cancel) in G43 (tool length offset) mode, valid/invalid Selecting a rethreading function Output timing of a tool life alarm Initial setting of G53.5 Judging tool life from the count of machined workpieces, valid/invalid Restart/TPS approach speed Feed rate of the threading runout X-axis Feed rate of the threading runout Y-axis Feed rate of the threading runout Z-axis Runout feed rate for the inside diameter threading cycle Clamping speed for the threading cycle X-axis Clamping speed for the threading cycle Y-axis Clamping speed for the threading cycle Z-axis

2-20

PARAMETER

Address (bit) F124 F125 F126 - F132 F133 F134 F135 F136 F137 F138 F139 F140 F141 142 143 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 144 0 1 2 3 4 5

Outline Permissible data alteration amount 1 for input error prevention function Permissible data alteration amount 2 for input error prevention function Pitch of tapping tool for display in detail on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display Thread depth of tapping tool for display in detail on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display Tool-drawing accuracy on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display Amount of offset for dummy workpiece shape on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display Number of jaws indicated on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display for No. 1 turning spindle Number of jaws indicated on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display for No. 2 turning spindle Angle offset for the jaws indicated on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display for the No. 1 turning spindle Angle offset for the jaws indicated on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display for the No. 2 turning spindle Roughness level of the circular milling unit (precision tornado cycle) Operation when workpiece counting is made valid while the automatic operation INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD is enabled Status of the [STORE WORKPCE MATERIAL] menu function when the power is turned on Operation when a specific G-code is issued while the automatic operation INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD is enabled Setting a minus value for argument Q in hobbing, valid/invalid

2-21

PARAMETER

Address (bit) 6 7 F145 F146 F147 F148 F149 - F151 F152 F153 F154 F155 - F158 159 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F160 F161 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Outline

Rapid feed override when data alteration is detected Selection of the material models part to be taken off (hidden) on the VIRTUAL MACHINING and 3D MONITOR displays in the flow of turning operation under synchronization of both spindles Selection of the material models part to be taken off (hidden) on the VIRTUAL MACHINING and 3D MONITOR displays in the flow of milling operation Compensation amount for G41/G42 given in a manual program (MANL PRG) unit Fixed value (0) Fixed value (0) Parameter for system internal setting Timing of data creation for the MACHINING NAVIGATION - RESULT display with workpiece counting made valid Whether or not to display on the POSITION display a spindle output diagram stored in the setting file Shape/wear offset number separation, valid/invalid Shape offset handling Tool offset timing Tool offset vector handling if reset function is executed Shape offset handling if offset number 0 is entered Simplified wear offset, valid/invalid C/Z offset when a MAZATROL program is called from an EIA program Setting prohibited

2-22

PARAMETER

Address (bit) 7 F162 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F163 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F164 F165 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F166 0

Outline C/Z offset when an EIA program is called from a MAZATROL program Movement/No movement according to the particular amount of offset during independent start of tool tip point control Type of passage of tool tip point through singular point Chamfer/corner R-command address selection Fixed hole-machining cycle return selection 6 digits in T-command for turning Use of the M Pro scheme as the method of selecting the Length correction axis bit MAZATROL program check for missing Z-offset, valid/invalid Encoder polarity selection Bar feeder scheduling function, valid/invalid Incorporation of wear offset data into the current position display in EIA/ISO program mode, valid/invalid Incorporation of wear offset data into the current position display in MAZATROL program mode, valid/invalid Position of thread turning tool nose on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display Barrier check on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display valid/invalid Menu on the DATA I/O display (floppy disk), displayed/hidden Menu on the DATA I/O display (tape), displayed/hidden Menu on the DATA I/O display (CMT), displayed/hidden Automatic tool data setting conditions High-speed synchronous tapping function, valid/invalid X-axis movement to minus side during polar coordinate interpolation, enabled/disabled Polar coordinate interpolation of the C-axis, in radius/diameter C-axis indexing when EIA subprogram is called from MAZATROL program Modal or non-modal state of Q command in deep hole drilling cycle Conversion of tool set data for milling tool based on head swivel angle when G53.5 is commanded Behavior of automatic operation of an EIA program when Z-offset is not set Setting at CONTI. of the end unit during tool path check, valid/invalid Alteration of tool set value (tool length) on the TOOL DATA display in the automatic operation mode, enabled/disabled

2-23

PARAMETER

Address (bit) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F167 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 F168 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Outline Type of wear offset indicated in the milling tool list on the TOOL DATA display ID No./Tool name selection on the TOOL DATA display Selection whether the selected plane on the TRACE or TOOL PATH CHECK display is to be held Operation conducted when the [RESTART] menu key is pressed following completion of the search in EIA modal restarting mode Tool diameter auto-setting for the end mill, face mill, and ball end mill on the TOOL DATA display Display of the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD status specification menu in the manual operation mode Automatic backup function Threading (by turning) shift angle (Q-command) unit Handling the diameter/radius of point R during the hole-machining fixed cycle Handling the tool measured using the G137H command Handling the single-process mode when operation is completed/reset Connecting the path linearly/Alarm, if the arc internal correction value is greater than the arc radius Handling the X-axis command in G68.5 Wear correction direction Updating the current position by a press of the reset key in manual operation mode Rotational center offset is added/not added to the tool length when the tool axial tool length offset command (G43.1) is issued. Axis for the milling tool wear correction and TOOL EYE compensation amount for the B-axis rotational turret Holding the amount of manual handle pulse interruption [RESTART2NONMODAL] menu function during stop of an EIA program execution invalid/valid Correction pattern for the groove/protrusion width measurement

2-24

PARAMETER

4.

SOFT LIMIT (I)

Address (bit) Outline Shift amount of unidirectional positioning (G60) Upper (plus direction) user soft-limit Lower (minus direction) user soft-limit Function for making the G0 speed variable, Variable override: Minimum value Function for making the G0 speed variable, Variable control area Function for making the G0 speed variable, Variable control area lower limit Function for making the G0 speed variable, Variable control area upper limit Rotary center of a workpiece Clamping value for the amount of handle interruption 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Execution of G28 (reference-point return) Manual zero-point return operation Removal of control axes, valid/invalid Mirror image with respect to the machine zero point, valid/invalid User software limits (I2, I3) valid/invalid Tool-tip relief after spindle orientation during execution of G75, G76, G86 or point-machining (boring or backboring), valid/invalid Direction of tool-tip relief after spindle orientation during execution of G75, G76, G86 or point-machining (boring or back-boring)

I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 I10 I11 I12 I13

I14

0 1 2 3 4 5

2-25

PARAMETER

Address (bit) 6 7 I15 I16 I17 I18 I19 I20 I21 I22 I23 I24

Outline

Amount of work hand rotational error correction (Work hand angle: 0) Amount of work hand rotational error correction (Work hand angle: 45) Amount of work hand rotational error correction (Work hand angle: 90) Fixed point 1 specified by the user Fixed point 2 specified by the user

5.

SYSTEM (SU)
Address (bit) Outline Reference axis of abscissa for plane selection Axis 1 parallel to the axis of abscissa for plane selection Axis 2 parallel to the axis of abscissa for plane selection Reference axis of ordinate for plane selection Axis 1 parallel to the axis of ordinate for plane selection Axis 2 parallel to the axis of ordinate for plane selection Reference height axis for plane selection Axis 1 parallel to the height axis for plane selection Axis 2 parallel to the height axis for plane selection Selection of tool change command output position Movement of axes during approach Rotating position specified in the indexing unit after tool change

SU1 SU2 SU3 SU4 SU5 SU6 SU7 SU8 SU9 SU10 SU11 SU12

2-26

PARAMETER

Address (bit) SU13 SU14 SU15 SU16 SU17 SU18 SU19 SU20 SU21 SU22 - SU48 SU49 SU50 SU51 SU52 SU53 SU54 - SU96 SU97 SU100 SU101 SU102 SU103 SU104 SU105 SU106 SU107 SU108 SU109 SU110 SU113 Axis name of the transfer axis

Outline

Tool nose mark display color on the TOOL PATH CHECK display/TRACE display Name of thrust axis for servo axis Movement to C-axis index swivel position when Z-offset scheme is used Background color for the MDI window Character color for the MDI window Selecting the method of axis movement to the tool change command output position or to the position designated at RETURN of the end unit Coefficient for polygonal machining spindle acceleration Selection of returning operation after the execution of the workpiece transfer unit corresponding to the work hand angle to be changed Delay timer for the parts catcher Tool turning clearance (radial value) in X-axis Tool turning clearance in Z-axis Lower-turret retraction function - Tool number of the retraction tool 1 Lower-turret retraction function - Tool number of the retraction tool 2 Lower-turret retraction function - Fixed point of the retraction position Return distance (radial value) in X-axis at wall during rough cutting in bar machining or in corner machining of EIA/ISO program Return distance in Z-axis at wall during rough cutting in bar machining or in corner machining of EIA/ISO program Cutting depth in the composite-type fixed cycle Pecking return distance in grooving of EIA/ISO program Cut depth (diametral value) for final cut in composite-type thread cutting cycle of EIA/ISO program Minimum cut depth clamping value (radial value) in composite-type thread cutting cycle G276 of EIA/ISO program Safety clamp speed Safeguarding strength Tip mass Tool length setting range check function - settable data range

2-27

PARAMETER

Address (bit) SU114 SU122 SU123 SU124 SU125 SU152 SU153 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SU154 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SU155 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Outline

Admissible motion range on the primary rotational axis for workpiece placement error correction Admissible motion range on the secondary rotational axis for workpiece placement error correction M-code selection for tapping cycle Display of BUFFER on the POSITION display Display of REMAIN on the POSITION display Display of POSITION on the POSITION display Automatic retraction of the lower turret for MAZATROL programs C-axis Clamp machining method for MAZATROL programs (line/linear machining for the C-axis CYLIND mode) MAZATROL point machining with C-axis clamped (M210) C-axis Clamp machining method for MAZATROL programs (line/linear machining for the C-axis FACE mode) Displaying tool-setting values for ATC-type turret Tool length setting range check function Display of BUFFER during G18.2/G18.3 mode Display of REMAIN during G18.2/G18.3 mode Display of POSITION during G18.2/G18.3 mode Display of BUFFER during G17.1 - G17.5 mode Display of REMAIN during G17.1 - G17.5 mode Display of POSITION during G17.1 - G17.5 mode Fixed value (1) Correction timing of the touch sensor tool length during EIA/ISO programmed or MDI operation (for machining center specifications only) Operation at an EIA subprogram call from a MAZATROL program Judgment method for tool change command output during MAZATROL programmed operation Tool change command output at the start of MAZATROL programmed operation Reference value for judging tool breakage during laser tool measurement

2-28

PARAMETER

Address (bit) SU156 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SU157 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SU158 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SU159 SU168 Type of deep hole drilling cycle G83/G87

Outline

Execution of the restarting search for a block in the mode of G68 when tool length compensation (G43/G44) remains valid with a turning tool mounted Execution of the restarting search for a block after the cancellation of the cross command The scheme of axis movement during an approach and during movement to the tool change command output position for machining at the work hand side Conditions for returning to the tool change command output position in the manual program unit (MANL PRG) Movement to the tool rotating position for tool change command for the same TNo. Operation to be performed if either TURN POS X, Y, or Z of the indexing unit is left blank. Preparatory C-axis positioning to 0 for a manual program unit (MANL PRG) with a milling tool after a turning unit Selection of whether or not the B-axis rotation radius is to be included into the clearance position for changing the indexed cutting edge on one and the same FLASH tool Checking the rotational axes correction values in workpiece placement error correction for MAZATROL programs

2-29

PARAMETER

6.

TURNING (TC)
Address (bit) Outline Cut depth reduction rate for rough cutting in bar machining unit, corner machining unit, and copy machining unit Acceleration rate in up-going taper for rough cutting in bar machining unit Acceleration rate in up-going wall slope (90) for rough cutting in bar machining unit Selection of escape pattern from wall (90) in rough cutting cycle Deceleration rate in down-going taper for rough cutting in bar machining unit Deceleration rate in down-going wall slope (90) for rough cutting in bar machining unit Acceleration rate on outside stock contour for rough cutting in copy machining unit Acceleration pitch error ratio in thread cutting unit Rough cutting residue ratio in cutting off cycle in groove cutting unit Cut depth allowable incremental rate for rough cutting in groove cutting unit, edge machining unit and copy machining unit Deceleration rate at cutting start in turning-drilling unit Deceleration rate at cutting end in turning-drilling unit Deceleration rate at rough cutting start in bar machining unit and copy machining unit Maximum permissible rate of increase of the initial cutting depth during roughing Deceleration clearance at start of rough cutting in bar machining unit and copy machining unit Tolerance for escape in high speed rough cutting cycle of bar machining unit Pitch error correction during threading acceleration Fixed value (0) Turning-drilling cut depth calculation coefficient Reamer return speed calculation coefficient in the turning-drilling unit Incomplete threading portion length calculation coefficient for turning-tap tip Turning-tapper elongation calculation coefficient Thread height calculation coefficient for outside diameter, face/rear thread cutting (metric) Thread height calculation coefficient for inside diameter thread cutting (metric) Thread height calculation coefficient for outside diameter, face/rear thread cutting (inch) Thread height calculation coefficient for inside diameter thread cutting (inch) Recessing width for #1 to #3

TC1 TC2 TC3 TC4 TC5 TC6 TC7 TC8 TC9 TC10 TC11 TC12 TC13 TC14 TC15 TC16 TC17 TC18 TC19 TC20 TC21 TC22 TC23 TC24 TC25 TC26 TC27

2-30

PARAMETER

Address (bit) TC28 TC29 TC30 TC31 TC32 TC33 TC34 TC35 TC36 TC37 TC38 TC39 TC40 TC41 TC42 TC43 TC44 TC45 TC46 TC47 TC48 TC49 TC50 TC51 TC52 TC53 TC54 TC55 Recessing depth #1 to #3 Recessing width for #4 Recessing depth for #4 Recessing width for #5 Recessing depth for #5 Recessing width for #6 Recessing depth for #6

Outline

Safety contour clearance Outside diameter clearance (radial value) Safety contour clearance Inside diameter clearance (radial value) Safety contour clearance Front clearance Safety contour clearance Back clearance Thread cutting clearance (radial value) Groove cutting clearance (radial value) in X-axis Groove cutting clearance in Z-axis Workpiece transfer clearance Amount of edge clearance after roughing in the edge-machining unit Drilling depth decrement in turning-drilling unit Pecking return distance in turning-drilling unit Drilling cut depth clamp value in turning-drilling unit Spindle speed clamp value in cutting off cycle Number of times that the feed rate is to be reduced during the #4 and #5 cutting-off cycles of a grooving unit Dwell at the hole bottom during non-through hole drilling cycle of the turning-drilling unit Dwell (specification of spindle rotation number) at groove bottom in groove cutting unit Feed rate for escape by short distance Cut depth per cycle for machining inside diameter in bar machining unit Reverse feed tolerance for contour machining

2-31

PARAMETER

Address (bit) TC56 TC57 TC58 TC59 TC60 TC61 TC62 TC63 TC64 TC65 TC66 TC67 TC68 TC69 TC70 TC71 TC72 TC73 TC74 TC75 TC76 TC77 TC78 TC79 TC80 TC81 TC82

Outline Overtravelling in X-axis direction in edge machining unit Workpiece pressing speed in workpiece transfer unit Spindle speed (min1) of two spindles in workpiece transfer while the spindles are rotating in workpiece transfer unit Workpiece pressing distance in workpiece transfer unit Simultaneous operation pattern for transfer Selection of tool change command output position for FLASH tool Amount of relief after transfer using the workpiece transfer unit (Spindle mode 0 to 5) Amount of relief after transfer using the workpiece transfer unit (Spindle mode 6 and 7) Specification of first M-code for parts catcher control Minimum index angle of the FLASH tool Return distance (radial value) in X-axis at wall during rough cutting in bar cutting unit, in corner machining unit or in mill-turning unit of MAZATROL programs Return distance in Z-axis at wall during rough cutting in bar cutting unit, in corner machining unit or in millturning unit of MAZATROL programs Number of revolutions during dwell for pecking of grooving FLASH tool Number of cutting edges to be used for the tool not registered in the tool file Feed stopping rotation dwell time during the chip cutting cycle Number of times of roughing in the composite-type fixed cycle (G273, G73) Return speed at pecking portion in groove cutting unit and turning-drilling unit Pecking return distance in groove cutting unit of MAZATROL programs Overlap distance for machining wide groove in groove cutting unit Escape value after machining in edge machining unit Acceleration distance clamp value for thread cutting unit Cut depth (radial value) for final cut in thread cutting unit of MAZATROL programs Minimum cut depth clamping value (radial value) in thread cutting unit of MAZATROL programs Angle of the tool nose during the G276/G76 mode Final finishing repeat times in the composite-type fixed cycle (G276, G76) Chamfering data calculation coefficient in thread cutting unit and thread cutting cycle (G276/G292, G76/G92)

2-32

PARAMETER

Address (bit) TC83 TC84 TC85 - TC94 TC95 TC96 TC97 TC98 TC99 TC100 TC101 TC102 TC103 TC104 TC105 TC106 TC107 TC110 TC111 TC113 TC114 TC116 TC117 TC118 TC119 TC120 TC137 TC138 TC140 TC141 0 1 2 3

Outline Number of cutting operations to be performed on finishing allowance corresponding to standard pattern (#0) of threading unit Feed rate to be auto-set for finishing Specification of the pocket for the long boring bar Fixed value Fixed value Type of retraction during workpiece transfer Returning operation after machining specified in the end unit ATC operation after machining when not specified in the end unit Selection of droop sampling axis Selection of cycle counter sampling axis Amplitude limit of table vibration Clearance for rechucking using the workpiece transfer unit Designation of MOVE C in a workpiece transfer unit of a program of workpiece scheme (only for the INTEGREX e-H Series) CUTTING CONDITON LEARN display Workpiece length range CUTTING CONDITON LEARN display Max. workpiece outside diameter range Composite-type fixed cycle G273 amount of X-axial release Composite-type fixed cycle G273 amount of Z-axial release Distance to the front end of the long boring bar Use/disuse of acceleration in up-going slope during rough cutting cycle in bar machining unit Use/disuse of deceleration in down-going slope during rough cutting cycle in bar machining unit Selection between use/disuse of acceleration distance check at start of thread cutting unit Selection between start position shift/start angle shift for thread number offset in thread cutting unit

2-33

PARAMETER

Address (bit) 4 5 6 7 TC142 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TC143 TC144 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TC145 0 1 2 3 4 5

Outline Selecting an angle margin for nose shape compensation Selecting an angle margin for nose shape compensation CHUCK JAW DATA display name/code selection Whether to make the partition plate and the workpiece barrier valid Fixed value (0) Selecting an inter-unit relief path when a succession of I.D. turning units using the same tool exist and there is no movement to the rotating position of the tool Selection of the jaw data reference method Using angle tool holder valid/invalid Selection whether an alarm is to be issued if the ending position of workpiece pressing is reached during transfer of the workpiece X-axis retraction position during workpiece transfer as specified in the workpiece transfer unit of the MAZATROL program Upper turret retraction during machining with the lower turret (for MULTIPLEX series) Whether the end tool of the long boring bar can be changed Automatic selection of the relief path for the continuous I.D. machining Movement of the workpiece transfer axis for opposed turret machine C-axis clamping during workpiece transfer with C-axis positioning, valid/invalid Automatic output of spindle rotation command when turning tool is used in the manual program unit ATC and RETURN of the end unit after single-process operation ATC and RETURN of the end unit for repetition (CONTI. = 1) Relief path G00/G01 selection for edging Handling when no tools are specified for the manual program unit OFFSET unit Z-axial inversion during turning Handling of the G04 command in the manual program unit Operation by cutting-feed override 0 in G31 command mode Mode selection after C-axis transfer using the workpiece transfer unit Selection of a calculation method for tail barrier end reference Output of maximum spindle speed command specified in the common unit

2-34

PARAMETER

Address (bit) 6 7 TC146 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TC147 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TC148 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TC149 0

Outline Alarm display when tools different in shape (infeed angle, nose angle and nose R) are designated for the upper and lower turret in balanced cutting Operation of the path inversed with respect to the traveling direction of the tip (only for copy machining) Selection of the turning spindle rotation timing when the relay point for the turning approach is specified X-axis command in the manual program unit Tool path when the infeed angle or the relief angle is 0 or less C-axis command output for the second workpiece transfer unit onward when workpiece transfer units of a BAR moving pattern exist in succession Automatic setting of M8 as an M-code to be outputted at the beginning of a unit which is selected for the single-process operation C-offset values to be used on HD1 and HD2 for a two-workpiece machining unit Whether or not to modify the numeric positional indication with respect to the workpiece coordinate system according to the tool offset setting in the TPC data Modal condition about diameter/radius value input for the unit succeeding a manual program or subprogram unit Z/C offset value to be used in the EIA/ISO subprogram after workpiece transfer in the MAZATROL program Whether pressing is to be made selectable for workpiece transfer units of a BAR moving pattern Tool nose position of an inside-turning grooving tool for machining on the back side Z-axial withdrawal after M-code unit execution Display of an icon for threading position storage

2-35

PARAMETER

Address (bit) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TC150 TC154

Outline

Machine operation on tool path check of a program for which workpiece scheme is selected and T. CENTER is specified for X and Y, but Z is left blank in the basic coordinates system unit (WPC)

7.

SOLID (SD)
Address (bit) Outline Machine coordinate selection Table type Table axial direction Distance of model movement per time Amount of model rotation per time Minimum table dimension X Maximum table dimension X Minimum table dimension Y Maximum table dimension Y Minimum table dimension Z Maximum table dimension Z Amount of table chamfer

SD1 - SD48 SD49 SD50 SD51 SD52 - SD96 SD97 SD98 SD99 SD124 SD125 SD126 SD127 SD128 SD129 SD130 SD131 SD132 SD168

2-36

PARAMETER

2-2-2
1.

Machine parameter
CALL MACRO (J)
Address (bit) J1 - J40 J41 - J80 J81 - J88 J89 - J107 J108 J109 - J112 J113 - J116 J117 - J118 J119 - J120 J121 - J130 J131 - J140 J141 - J142 J143 - J144 J145 - J184 J185 - J264 G-code macroprogram call M-code macroprogram call (J44, J48, J52, J56, J60: Parameter for system internal setting Setting prohibited) Parameter for system internal setting Barrier setup chuck reference position 1 on the No. 2 spindle side/NC tailstock position Barrier setup chuck reference position 2 on the No. 2 spindle side Barrier-setting/cancelling M-code to be used for barrier teaching Setting the M-code for making the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function valid/invalid during automatic operation Selecting whether to output the M-code for making the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function valid/invalid during automatic operation M-code macroprogram call (extended) [Option] Setting prohibited Outline

2.

MEASURE (K)
Address (bit) Outline Rotational radius of the C-axis Minimum rotational angle Shaping control axis Unbalanced axis

K1 K2 K3 K4 - K6 K7 K8 K9

2-37

PARAMETER

Address (bit) K10 K11 K12 K13 K14 K15 K16 K17 K18 K19 K20 K21 K22 K23 K24 - K28 K29 K30 K31 K32 K33 K34 K35 K36 K37 K38 K39 K40 Fixed value Selection of language to be displayed Fixed value (0) Measurement skip feed rate (X-axis, Z-axis) Measurement approach speed (X-axis, Z-axis) Measurement skip speed (C-axis) Measurement approach speed (C-axis)

Outline

Specification of measuring tolerance (lower limit) [valid only for L106 bit 6 = 1] Specification of measuring tolerance (upper limit) [valid only for L106 bit 6 = 1] Measurement stroke for workpiece measurement Measurement stroke for tool nose measurement Coefficient to determine rotation angle when retrying measurement C reference face Measurement retry frequency when retrying reference face C measurement Retry frequency for workpiece measurement Parameter for system internal setting Setting prohibited

Simultaneous control: Delay counter for automatic correction of synchronizing errors Approach speed for laser tool length measurement Approach speed for laser tool diameter measurement Pre-measuring speed for laser tool length measurement Pre-measuring speed for laser tool diameter measurement Pre-measuring spindle speed for laser tool length measurement Pre-measuring spindle speed for laser tool diameter measurement Parameter for system internal setting External deceleration speed Work number called during S-code macroprogram appointment Work number called during T-code macroprogram appointment Work number called during second auxiliary function macroprogram appointment Setting prohibited

2-38

PARAMETER

Address (bit) K41 K42 K43 K44 K45 K46 K47 K48 K49 K50 K51 K52 K53 K54 K55 K56 K57 K58 K59 K60 K61 K62 K63 K64 K65 K66 K67 G31 skipping speed G31.1 skipping speed G31.2 skipping speed G31.3 skipping speed G31.4 skipping speed

Outline

Excessive pressing error spread (Amount of drooping) Spindle FB alarm detection method First number of the standby M-codes Total number of the standby M-codes M-code during workpiece measurement retry operation Parameter for system internal setting Vocal output language selection Vocal output sound level Vocal output warning reference value Name of second auxiliary function Type of S-code macroprogram appointment call Type of T-code macroprogram appointment call Type of second auxiliary function macroprogram appointment call Fixed value (4) Fixed value (1) Fixed value (1) Fixed value (1) Fixed value (2) Fixed value (1) Fixed value (1) Fixed value (1) Setting prohibited

2-39

PARAMETER

Address (bit) K68 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 K69 K70 K71 K72 K73 K74 K75 K76 K77 K78 K79 K80 K81 K82 K83 K84 K85 K86 K87 - K89

Outline Coordinate system with reference to which the offset amounts are to be used in tool length offset for the selected machining surface (For machines of five-surface machining by angular tools) Whether all the barrier cancel data in the program is to be cleared by executing the MMS unit in a MAZATROL program G31.1 skip conditions G31.2 skip conditions G31.3 skip conditions G31.4 skip conditions G4 skip conditions Emergency stop contactor cutoff time (Safety supervisory function) Contactor control output device 1 (Safety supervisory function) Contactor control output device 2 (Safety supervisory function) Door switch input device (Safety supervisory function) Number of door switches (Safety supervisory function) Supervisory speed filtering time during servo-off (Safety supervisory function) Warning reference value (Vocal output) Timer for machining management Fixed value Maximum amount of compensation for workpiece thermal expansion Maximum allowable amount of compensation for workpiece thermal expansion in each interpolating cycle Special linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for threading Parameter for system internal setting Setting prohibited

2-40

PARAMETER

Address (bit) K90 K91 K92 K93 K94 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 K95 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 K96 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Return override during synchronous tapping Alternative M-code for M96 Alternative M-code for M97 Fixed value (2)

Outline

Selection of whether menu function is to be made invalid after operation has been stopped by [ATC STOP] W-axis command code selection for the MDI mode Selection whether the difference in angle between the upper and lower turrets is to be incorporated into the current C-axis position display of HD2 Fixed value (0) Tool position compensation during T-command execution, performed/not performed Coordinate system update during handle pulse interrupt, performed/not performed Fixed value (0) Acceleration/deceleration time constant for handle pulse feed Software limits for G30 execution valid/invalid In-position check valid/invalid G0 command in-position check valid/invalid Timing of manual free feed finish signal Fixed value (0) Axis/Cutting interlock alarm display, valid/invalid Suppression of lost motion in modes other than the G1 command mode, valid/invalid Fixed value (0) Fixed value (0)

2-41

PARAMETER

Address (bit) 7 K97 K98 K99 K100 K101 K102 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 K103 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 K104 0 1 2 3 4 Fixed G0 inclination

Outline

B-axis misalignment correction, name of parallel axis B-axis misalignment correction, name of orthogonal axis Dynamic offset, name of rotational axis Dynamic offset, name of parallel axis Dynamic offset, name of orthogonal axis Compensation method for the sensing tools eccentricity and stylus radius in workpiece measurement and coordinate measurement, M Pro compatible/MATRIX scheme Z-axis direction for setting the TPC relay points of a measurement unit Selection of setup data (jaw data and tailstock position) to be used in EIA/ISO programs Setting the direction of rotation for milling tools mounted on the turret Handling of the sign assigned to hobbing address D Synchronous control error auto-correction valid/invalid Fixed value DDB micron unit Thermal displacement compensation interval Output of S-code and T-code at restart Whether FIXED PT can be selected at RETURN of the end unit of the MAZATROL program Output of a laser measurement B-axis 0-degree command after ATC, valid/invalid Direction of the laser axis of the laser measuring instrument (L16/K104 bit 2) Direction of the laser axis of the laser measuring instrument (Parallel to the Y-axis/X-axis) Voice Adviser (Vocal output function) valid/invalid Type of voice

2-42

PARAMETER

Address (bit) 5 6 7 K105 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 K106 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 K107 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Vocal guidance for warm-up operation

Outline

Rapid feed command when cutting feed override is set to 0%, operation is executed/alarm state Feed rate for an approach to the starting point in EIA modal restarting mode Specification of incremental axis radius value Fixed value (1) S-code macro call invalid/valid T-code macro call invalid/valid Second auxiliary function macro call invalid/valid Fixed value (0) Fixed value (0) Input in millimeter/inch Execution conditions for user macroprogram interrupt Start timing for user macroprogram interrupt Fixed value (0) Fixed value Fixed value (0) Fixed value (0) Fixed value (0) Fixed value (0) Fixed value (0) Motion distance in the manual pulse feed mode for the axis whose position is displayed in diameter value Deceleration for arc valid/invalid Fixed value (0)

2-43

PARAMETER

Address (bit) K108 K109 K110 K111 K112 K113 K114 K115 K116 K117 K118 - K120 K121 K122 K123 K124 K125 K126 K127 K128 K129 - K144 Permissible error range for synchronous control Judgment angle near a singular point Clamping speed in safety supervisory mode 3 Machine type

Outline

Axis number of the horizontal axis in the rectangular coordinate system Axis number of the vertical axis in the rectangular coordinate system Axis number of the height axis in the rectangular coordinate system Rotational direction of the rotary axis Axis number of the first rotary axis Horizontal axis rotational center offset of the first rotary axis Vertical axis rotational center offset of the first rotary axis Height axis rotational center offset of the first rotary axis Axis number of the second rotary axis Horizontal axis rotational center offset of the second rotary axis Vertical axis rotational center offset of the second rotary axis Height axis rotational center offset of the second rotary axis

2-44

PARAMETER

3.

TABLE (L)
Address (bit) Outline Stylus eccentricity of touch sensor (X-component) Stylus eccentricity of touch sensor (Y-component) Radius of stylus ball of touch sensor (X-component) Radius of stylus ball of touch sensor (Y-component) Z-axis stroke for tip position memory (TEACH function) Tool-breakage judgment distance for TBR function Tool-breakage restoration mode for TBR function (for M35 external tool breakage detection) Skipping stroke limit for MMS Selection of random ATC specifications Interval between magazine pockets Touch sensors interference direction Tolerance for manual measurement Allowable angle for parallelism and right angle in manual measurement Escapement for straightness measurement Macro program number for straightness measurement Parameter for system internal setting Setting prohibited

L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 L11 L12 L13 L14 L15 L16 L17 L18 L19 L20 L21 L22 L23 L24 L25 L26

Minimum angle of head indexing command (for INTEGREX j) Presence/absence of tailstock Output type of index (rotary) table Data of the tool nose measurement sensor, Sensor width along the X-axis Data of the tool nose measurement sensor, Sensor width along the Z-axis Tool nose measurement sensor reference position, X-axis Tool nose measurement sensor reference position, Z-axis Tool nose measurement sensor reference position, Y-axis

2-45

PARAMETER

Address (bit) L27 L28 L29 L30 L31 - L34 L35 L36 L37 L38 L39 L40 L41 L42 L43 L44 L45 L46 L47 L48 L49 L50 L51 L52 L53 L54 L55 L56 Timer setting for manual TOOL EYE measurement

Outline

Amount of Z-axial retreat from the approach point for TOOL EYE measurement Machine efficiency Selection of machining navigation case introduction messages Use in machine manufacturer macro Minimum index angle of index table M/B-code for index of index table Selection of execution/non execution of indexing unit Availability of specification of index table angle in end unit Simultaneous operation of indexing unit with ATC Initial value of index table angle Indication of index table angle Selection of automatic setting on/off for nose position correction of a drilling tool Index table angle command Maximum number of pallets in pallet changing unit To prepare or not to prepare next pallet change Number of long boring bars Simultaneous operation of pallet change with ATC Rewriting of head number Tool command system in MDI operation Writing of machining management data with macro variable Showing of program number in PALLET MANAGEMENT display Selection of automatic operation mode Spindle load meter display type Method of measurement of coordinates by tool edge memorizing function (TEACH)

2-46

PARAMETER

Address (bit) L57 L58 L59 L60 L61 L62 L63 L64 L65 L66 L67 L68 L69 L70 L71 L72 L73 L74 L75 L76 L77 L78 L79 L80 L81 L82 L83 Rewriting of tool data during automatic operation Head index angle indication system Input selection for HEAD OFFSET display Head quantity Output timing of AHC and APC Head relay point X1 Head relay point Y1 Head relay point X2 Head relay point Y2 Return/No return to head indexing point Z

Outline

Length between the end surface of the spindle and the center of head rotation Head correction value X Head correction value Y Axis movement from machining face on escapement Shift of basic coordinate for oblique face machining Time constant for shape correction acceleration/deceleration filter 2 Cutting feed rate for pre-interpolational acceleration/deceleration control Time constant for pre-interpolational linear control during cutting feed rate acceleration/deceleration Acceleration rate for high-speed cutting Angle for deceleration at corner before interpolation Amount of X-axial retreat from the approach point for TOOL EYE measurement In-position width for changeover of the synchronized-tapping gain Linear to arc deceleration rate Parameter for system internal setting Table thickness Spindle head radius Setting prohibited

2-47

PARAMETER

Address (bit) L84 L85 L86 L87 L88 L89 L90 L91 L92 L93 L94 L95 L96 L97 L98 L99 L100 L101 L102 L103 L104 L105 L106 0 1 2 3 4

Outline Correction value of alignment deviation X (Upper face) Correction value of alignment deviation Y (Upper face) Correction value of alignment deviation X (0-degree face) Correction value of alignment deviation Y (0-degree face) Correction value of alignment deviation X (90-degree face) Correction value of alignment deviation Y (90-degree face) Correction value of alignment deviation X (180-degree face) Correction value of alignment deviation Y (180-degree face) Correction value of alignment deviation X (270-degree face) Correction value of alignment deviation Y (270-degree face) X/Y travel distance during EIA-programmed tool measurement Offset number auto-setting for EIA-programmed tool measurement Amount of shifting during offset number auto-setting for EIA-programmed tool measurement M-code to be output when selecting menu function for the MDI tool designation Max. tool length for laser tool length measurement Cycle time for saving the operational status management data Laser sensor position X Laser sensor position Y Laser sensor position Z Approach point X for laser tool diameter measurement Approach point Y for laser tool diameter measurement Approach point Z for laser tool diameter measurement Measuring equipment selection Selection of a rotational reference coordinate system for WPC-th Selection of measuring equipment Selection of whether workpiece measurement results and tool measurement results are to be stored into tool data of the lower turret Selection of whether to enable or disable the fixed amount compensation function

2-48

PARAMETER

Address (bit) 5 6 7 L107 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 L108 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 L109 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Outline B-axis user-defined angle setting in the coordinate measurement unit and workpiece measurement unit invalid/valid Non-compensation area for the tool measurement and execution timing of tool and workpiece measurement operation Selection of laser measuring menu display Tool path drawing Tailstock function valid/invalid Tailstock type Whether tail thrust is also to be displayed in pounds (lbs) LBB No. setting for the grooving I.D. tool, threading I.D. tool, or touch sensor, valid/invalid XYZ-axis operation for the first T-command after cycle start A-axis operation for the first T-command after cycle start Heavy tool designation valid/invalid Fixed value (0) Fixed value (0) Fixed value (0) Fixed value (0) Fixed value (0) Incorporating the C-axis coordinate into the TOOL PATH CHECK, TRACE, and SHAPE CHECK displays of the VRX machine Fixed value (0) Displaying the milling tool nose in the MAZATROL program of the TOOL PATH CHECK display Software limit 4 - Interference axial direction (1st set) Software limit 4 - Interference axial direction (2nd set) Software limit 4 - Interference axial direction (3rd set) Software limit 4 - Interference axial direction (4th set)

2-49

PARAMETER

Address (bit) L110 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 L111 L112 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 L113 L114 L115 L116 L117 L118 L119 L120 L121 L122 Opposed-spindle lathe specifications Vertically inverted spindle specifications Axis name of the secondary spindle

Outline

Whether to disable or enable the display of section to be machined in the milling tool sequence RAM spindle specification Correction axis for LENGTH B Z-axis direction Whether traction tailstock is present or absent Whether traction work rest 1 is present or absent Whether traction work rest 2 is present or absent Whether traction work rest 3 is present or absent Whether traction work rest 4 is present or absent Interference check reference axis (1st set of axes) Interference check reference axis (2nd set of axes) Interference check reference axis (3rd set of axes) Interference check reference axis (4th set of axes) Interference check axis (1st set of axes) Interference check axis (2nd set of axes) Interference check axis (3rd set of axes) Interference check axis (4th set of axes) Interference clearance (1st set of axes) Interference clearance (2nd set of axes)

2-50

PARAMETER

Address (bit) L123 L124 L125 L126 L127 L128 L129 L130 L131 L132 L133 L134 L135 L136 L137 L138 L139 L140 L141 L142 L143 L144 Interference clearance (3rd set of axes) Interference clearance (4th set of axes) Rotational axis prefiltering time constant

Outline

Positioning direction of the head rotation - -axis for oblique plane indexing Acceleration/deceleration filter (1st stage), G1 time constant Acceleration/deceleration filter (1st stage), G0 time constant Acceleration/deceleration filter (2nd stage), G1 time constant Acceleration/deceleration filter (2nd stage), G0 time constant <For tool tilt type> <For tool tilt type> <For tool tilt type> Tool rotational axis offset, horizontal axis offset amount for the 1st rotational axis Tool rotational axis offset, vertical axis offset amount for the 1st rotational axis Tool rotational axis offset, height axis offset amount for the 1st rotational axis

<For table tilt type> Y-axial runout of the A-axis <For table tilt type> Z-axial runout of the A-axis <For tool tilt type> <For tool tilt type> <For tool tilt type> Tool rotational axis offset, horizontal axis offset amount for the 2nd rotational axis Tool rotational axis offset, vertical axis offset amount for the 2nd rotational axis Tool rotational axis offset, height axis offset amount for the 2nd rotational axis

Minimum usable tool diameter of the measurable chamfering tool Waiting time for the completion signal of M35 (tool breakage detection) from PLC Stroke limit 4 (for MR-J2-CT axis), Task delay period Stroke limit 4 (for MR-J2-CT axis), MR-J2-CT gain Stroke limit 4 (for MR-J2-CT axis), MR-J2-CT time constant Stroke limit 4 (for MR-J2-CT axis), MR-J2-CT rapid feed rate

2-51

PARAMETER

4.

FEED VEL. (M)

Address (bit) Outline Rapid feed rate Feed rate for initial zero-point return Cutting feed rate limit Offset of machine coordinates system Second zero-point coordinating value Third zero-point coordinating value Fourth zero-point coordinating value Maximum software limit specified by manufacturer (+ direction) Maximum software limit specified by manufacturer ( direction) Command unit Coding of address of axis Coding of incremental axis Axis name (for display) Shifting distance of the watchdog-less home position Axis name (for axis name changing) Zero-point shift amount 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Unit of output from MCP to servo amplifier Direction of machine zero-point return Error correction schema with servo on Type of axis Rotational direction of servo motor (for movement in (+) direction) Alarm/No alarm with axis removed Type of C-axis

M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8 M9 M10 M11 M12 M13 M14 M15 M16 M17

M18

0 1

2-52

PARAMETER

Address (bit) 2 3 4 5 6 7 M19 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 M20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 M21 0 1 2 3 4 Machine zero-point position Watchdog-less axis X-axis current position display in radius/diameter

Outline

Automatic/manual simultaneous absolute-value updating Absolute-value detection In-position checking method Homing operation starting position check Backlash scheme to be adopted for watchdog-type returning to home position Rotational direction of the rotation axis (Dynamic offset II) KOMET tool axis specification Method of jog/rapid feed stopping when the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD is valid Rapid-feed acceleration/deceleration type, Linear acceleration/deceleration Rapid-feed acceleration/deceleration type, First-order lag Rapid-feed acceleration/deceleration type, Second-order lag Rapid-feed acceleration/deceleration type, Exponential acceleration/linear deceleration Cutting-feed acceleration/deceleration type, Linear acceleration/deceleration

2-53

PARAMETER

Address (bit) 5 6 7 M22 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 M23 M24 M25 M26 M27 M28 M29 M30 M31 M32 M33 M34 M35 M36 M37 M38

Outline Cutting-feed acceleration/deceleration type. First-order lag Cutting-feed acceleration/deceleration type, Second-order lag Cutting-feed acceleration/deceleration type, Exponential acceleration/linear deceleration Deceleration time constant for rapid-feed exponential acceleration/linear deceleration Type of stroke-end stop Type of stroke-end stop Illegal axis area upper limits Illegal axis area lower limits Optimum acceleration control: Target speed Rapid feed clamping speed 1 for superposition control Rapid feed clamping speed 2 for superposition control Cutting feed clamping speed for superposition control Safety speed for Safety supervisory mode 2 Safety speed for Safety supervisory mode 3 Safety clamping speed for Safety supervisory mode 2 Safety clamping speed for Safety supervisory mode 3 Speed supervisory door selection Safety clamping speed reduction judgment coefficient Interference check distances for INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD, primary check distance

2-54

PARAMETER

Address (bit) M39 M40 M41 M42 M43 - M48

Outline Interference check distances for INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD, secondary check distance Ram spindle stored stroke end, upper limit Ram spindle stored stroke end, lower limit Interference check distance for INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD during automatic operation

5.

TIME CONST. (N)

Address (bit) Outline Rapid-feed time constant (linear acceleration/deceleration) Cutting-feed time constant (linear acceleration/deceleration) Rapid-feed time constant (First-order lag) Time constant for post-interpolation rapid feed acceleration/deceleration filter Cutting-feed time constant (First-order lag) OT time Creeping speed during initial zero-point return Amount of grid ignorance during initial zero-point return Grid spacing Rapid-feed backlash Cutting-feed backlash Width to which the machine posture change correction is to be applied Machine posture change correction value Servo amplifier channel number Servo amplifier rotary switch number Axis system number

N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18 N19 N20

2-55

PARAMETER

Address (bit) N21 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 N22 - N24 N25 N26 N27 N28 N29 N30 N31 N32 N33 N34 N35 N36 - N48 Linear-type rotational axis Rotational axis shortcut Fixed value (0) Fixed value Reference axis for superposition control Superposition axis for superposition control Relative polarity of control axis Current position immediately after cross machining Time constant for deceleration rate calculation Invalid/Valid

Outline

Accuracy coefficient for deceleration rate calculation Rapid feed time constant for superposition Cutting feed time constant for superposition Time constant for shape correction rapid feed acceleration/deceleration filter Time constant for cutting feed (for M881) Time constant for cutting feed (for M882) Time constant for cutting feed (for M883) Time constant for cutting feed (for M884) Time constant for cutting feed (for M885) Time constant for cutting feed (for M886)

6.

ANOTHER (S)
Address (bit) Outline Feed forward gain for the MAZAK Precision Rapid Boring Tornado Option Feed forward gain

S1 S2 S3 S4

2-56

PARAMETER

Address (bit) S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19 S20 S21 S22 S23 S24 S25 S26 S27 S28 S29 S30 S31 S32 Rotational center of the table Absolute position detection parameter

Outline

Upper limit (on Z-axis) of machining range for table rotating machining Feed-forward gain G00 Axis of rotation of the tilting table Corner position of the tilting table Axis of rotation of the tilting table (Used for the automatic program origin calculation function) G00 in-position width G01 in-position width Fixed value Unbalanced axis torque offset Torque limit buffer reduction ratio 1 Torque limit buffer reduction ratio 2 Tool change completion position of the long boring bar end tool APC completion position Completion position of gantry robot operation Cutting feed clamping speed during tool tip point control Reference workpiece zero point Central position on the upper surface of the tilt table (VARIAXIS) Central position of table upper surface (other machining centers) Central position of tilt table rotation (VARIAXIS) Ram spindle offset amount Center of the workpiece to be directly mounted on the table of the machines equipped with an additional table Position of the work hand rotating axis in relation to the machine zero point Distance from the axis of rotation of the work hand to the reference position of the vice for the work hand Specification of the machine coordinates of the floating reference point Rapid traverse speed for the mode of tool tip point control

2-57

PARAMETER

Address (bit) S33 S34 - S48

Outline Reference position X for the TEACH function, to be used for setting the LENGTH B item of an angular tool (For machines of five-surface machining by angular tools)

7.

SPINDLE (SA)
Address (bit) Outline Maximum spindle speed in each speed range (range 1 to 8) Constants for calculating each gear speed of the spindle (range 1 to 8) Maximum spindle speed during tapping cycle (range 1 to 8) Spindle speed during gear shifting (range 1 to 4) Load meter reference output scaling factor (high-speed coil) Load meter reference output base rotational speed (high-speed coil) Load meter reference output scaling factor (low-speed coil) Load meter reference output base rotational speed (low-speed coil) Acceleration/deceleration time constant for the synchronous tapping (range 1 to 8) Spindle orientating speed Minimum spindle speed Channel number for the spindle amplifier Spindle amplifier rotary switch number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Spindle speed range changing method, in relation to switching the torque factors for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type Spindle speed range changing method, in relation to switching the torque factors for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type 2 Homing direction for synchronous tapping Homing direction for synchronous tapping Defines the specified direction as the Z-phase detection direction Spindle index gear correction Direction of orientation Direction of orientation

SA1 - SA8 SA9 - SA16 SA17 - SA24 SA25 - SA28 SA29 SA30 SA31 SA32 SA33 - SA40 SA41 SA42 SA43 SA44 SA45

SA46

0 1

2-58

PARAMETER

Address (bit) 2 3 4 5 6 7 SA47 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SA48 SA49 SA50 SA51 SA52 SA53 SA54 SA55 SA56 SA57 SA58 SA59 SA60 C-axis position control changeover type

Outline

Synchronous tapping position control changeover type Z-phase detection direction C-axis homing direction C-axis homing direction Synchronous tapping command polarity Considering/Ignoring the spindle/motor gear ratio Encoder signal input destination Speed attainment detection width Spindle type Number of gears on spindle Turning spindle type Spindle 1/4h (1/2h) rated torque for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type L coils Spindle 1/4h (1/2h) rated torque for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type H coils Spindle 1/4h (1/2h) rated torque for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type Spindle gear position 3 Spindle 1/4h (1/2h) rated torque for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type Spindle gear position 4 Spindle viscous friction coefficient cms for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type Range 1 Spindle viscous friction coefficient cms for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type Range 2 Spindle viscous friction coefficient cms for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type Range 3 Spindle viscous friction coefficient cms for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type Range 4

2-59

PARAMETER

Address (bit) SA61 SA62 SA63 SA64 SA65 SA66 SA67 - SA73 SA74 - SA80 SA81 SA82 SA83 SA84 SA85 SA86 SA87 SA88 SA89 SA90 SA91 SA92 SA93 SA94 SA95 SA96 SA97 SA98 SA99

Outline Spindle coulombic friction coefficient fms for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type Range 1 Spindle coulombic friction coefficient fms for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type Range 2 Spindle coulombic friction coefficient fms for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type Range 3 Spindle coulombic friction coefficient fms for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type Range 4 Cutting force calculation filter for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type Maximum permissible speed of the rotational axis for polygonal/hobbing machining Rotational speed in the following spindle output diagrams: MACHINING NAVIGATION-RESULT/MACHINING NAVIGATION-PPEDICTION/Monitoring Functions/POSITION Output in the following spindle output diagrams MACHINING NAVIGATION-RESULT/MACHINING NAVIGATION-PPEDICTION/Monitoring Functions/POSITION Spindle limit speed selection for spindle position control time constants Limit speed 1 Spindle limit speed selection for spindle position control time constants Limit speed 2 Spindle limit speed selection for spindle position control time constants Limit speed 3 Spindle position control time constants Time constant 1 Spindle position control time constants Time constant 2 Spindle position control time constants Time constant 3 Spindle speed operating time constant changeover revolutions 1 Spindle speed operating time constant changeover revolutions 2 Spindle speed operating time constant 1 Spindle speed operating time constant 2 Spindle speed operating time constant 3 Z-phase detection speed Amount of synchronous tapping zero point shifting Homing speed for synchronous tapping Maximum revolutions in manual operation mode Amount of orientation position shifting Reduction ratio of the synchronous tapping time constant for high-speed synchronous tapping Orientation time constant

2-60

PARAMETER

Address (bit) SA100 SA106 SA107 SA113 SA114 SA115 SA116 SA117 SA118 SA119 SA120 SA121 SA122 SA123 SA124 SA125 SA126 SA127 SA128 SA129 SA130 SA131 SA132 SA133 SA134 SA135 SA137 SA138 SA139 SA140

Outline Rotational speed in the following spindle output diagrams at continuous rating: MACHINING NAVIGATIONRESULT/MACHINING NAVIGATION-PPEDICTION/Monitoring Functions/POSITION Output in the following spindle output diagrams at continuous rating: MACHINING NAVIGATIONRESULT/MACHINING NAVIGATION-PPEDICTION/Monitoring Functions/POSITION Spindle speed supervisory mode 2 for safety supervision Spindle speed supervisory mode 3 for safety supervision Spindle safety clamping mode 2 for safety supervision Spindle safety clamping mode 3 for safety supervision Selecting the spindle door of the spindle whose speed is to be monitored Deceleration judgment coefficient on safety speed clamping of the spindle to be supervised for safety PLG pulse rate for spindle index gear tooth correction Amount of branching [1] point correction for spindle index gear tooth Amount of branching [2] point correction for spindle index gear tooth Amount of branching [3] point correction for spindle index gear tooth Amount of branching [4] point correction for spindle index gear tooth Amount of branching [5] point correction for spindle index gear tooth Amount of branching [6] point correction for spindle index gear tooth Amount of branching [7] point correction for spindle index gear tooth Amount of branching [8] point correction for spindle index gear tooth #1 notch filter frequency for cutting-load detection pecking cycle #1 notch filter depth for cutting-load detection pecking cycle #2 notch filter frequency for cutting-load detection pecking cycle #2 notch filter depth for cutting-load detection pecking cycle Breakage detection torque for cutting-load detection pecking cycle Maximum spindle orientation speed Number of spindle gears Number of motor gears Turret indexing gear ratio

2-61

PARAMETER

Address (bit) SA141 SA143 SA144 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Outline

Positive threading spindle rotational direction and encoder polarity Gear conversion during spindle rotation valid Spindle gear changeover valid Turret indexing valid

8.

BARRIER (BA)
Address (bit) Outline Chuck outside diameter (for chuck barrier) No. 1 turning spindle Chuck width (for chuck barrier) No. 1 turning spindle Chuck inside diameter (for chuck barrier) No. 1 turning spindle EIA program workpiece outside diameter Chuck outside diameter (for chuck barrier) No. 2 turning spindle Chuck width (for chuck barrier) No. 2 turning spindle Chuck inside diameter (for chuck barrier) No. 2 turning spindle Tail body outside diameter (for tail barrier) Tail body length (for tail barrier) Tail spindle outside diameter (for tail barrier) Length with tail spindle at back end (for tail barrier) Tail head outside diameter (for tail barrier) Tail head length (for tail barrier) Tail head taper angle (for tail barrier) Tail head biting diameter (for tail barrier)

BA1 BA2 BA3 BA4 BA5 BA6 BA7 BA8 BA9 BA10 BA11 BA12 BA13 BA14 BA15

2-62

PARAMETER

Address (bit) BA16 BA17 BA18 BA19 BA20 BA21 BA22 BA23 BA24 BA25 BA26 BA27 BA28 BA29 BA30 BA31 BA32 BA33 BA34 BA35 BA36 BA37 BA38 BA39 BA40 BA41 BA42 Tail barrier, tail extruding length Tail barrier, workpiece length Tail barrier, tail reversing position Z

Outline

Distance from the Z-axis machine zero point to the spindle edge No. 1 turning spindle Distance from the Z-axis machine zero point to the spindle edge No. 2 turning spindle Jaw number for EIA program barrier No. 1 turning spindle Jaw number for EIA program barrier No. 2 turning spindle Turret outside diameter (turret type tool post) Turret width (turret type tool post) Turret reference position X (turret type tool post) Turret reference position Z (turret type tool post) Tool holder mounting position Type 1 Tool holder width in X-axis direction Type 1 Tool holder width in Z-axis direction Type 1 Tool holder mounting position Type 2 Tool holder width in X-axis direction Type 2 Tool holder width in Z-axis direction Type 2 Tool holder mounting position Type 3 Tool holder width in X-axis direction Type 3 Tool holder width in Z-axis direction Type 3 Tool holder mounting position Type 4 Tool holder width in X-axis direction Type 4 Tool holder width in Z-axis direction Type 4 EIA tool barrier, tool holder mounting position EIA tool barrier, tool holder width X EIA tool barrier, tool holder width Z Barrier type

2-63

PARAMETER

Address (bit) BA43 BA44 BA45 BA46 BA47 BA48 BA49 BA50 BA51 BA52 BA53 BA54 BA55 BA56 BA57 BA58 BA59 BA60 BA61 BA62 BA63 BA64 BA65 BA66 BA67 BA68 BA69 First tool number (in the 1st set of tools) Number of tools (in the 1st set of tools) First tool number (in the 2nd set of tools) Number of tools (in the 2nd set of tools) Turret type Axis name of the head to be rotated Axis number of the inclined axis Fundamental axis number Inclined-axis control, vector of virtual Y Inclined-axis control, vector of real X Inclined-axis control, vector of real Y Selection of work spindle for hobbing

Outline

Turning spindle number for polygonal machining (D1) Turning spindle number for polygonal machining (D2) Turning spindle number for polygonal machining (D3) Turning spindle number for polygonal machining (D4) Spindle forward rotation M-code for tapping cycle Spindle reverse rotation M-code for tapping cycle Amount of runout of the B-axis center Amount of offset for the B-axis spindle distance Holder angle of angle tool holder B-axis tool reference position X B-axis tool reference position Z Deceleration area Z Measuring area Z Deceleration area X Measuring area X

2-64

PARAMETER

Address (bit) BA70 BA71 BA72 BA73 BA74 BA75 - BA78 BA79 - BA82 BA83 - BA86 BA87 - BA90 BA91 BA92 BA93 BA94 BA95 BA96 BA97 BA98 BA99 BA100 BA101 BA102 BA103 BA104 BA105 BA106 BA107 BA108

Outline Distance between the reference points on both turrets System number to be used when argument L is omitted from G112 Feed override for retracting the tap Barrier valid/invalid 1 (chuck, sub-chuck, tailstock) Barrier valid/invalid 2 (Lower turret, work rest) Barrier setup turret reference position Barrier setup chuck reference position 1 Barrier setup chuck reference position 2 Barrier reference position for a powered tailstock Distance from spindle edge to partition plate Central position X when viewed from machine zero point Upper/lower turret tool angle difference (HD1) Upper/lower turret tool angle difference (HD2) Tool nose measurement, sensor width along the X-axis Tool nose measurement, sensor width along the Z-axis Tool nose measurement, X-coordinate of the sensors reference point Tool nose measurement, Y-coordinate of the sensors reference point Tool nose measurement, Z-coordinate of the sensors reference point Tool nose measurement, X-coordinate of the sensors reference point (for lower turret/HD2) Tool nose measurement, Y-coordinate of the sensors reference point (for lower turret/HD2) Tool nose measurement, Z-coordinate of the sensors reference point (for lower turret/HD2) Tool nose measurement, sensor width along the X-axis (for lower turret/HD2) Tool nose measurement, sensor width along the Z-axis (for lower turret/HD2) Adjustment FdT for servo axis thrust hold Dead zone Filter Servo axis thrust hold droop

2-65

PARAMETER

Address (bit) BA109 BA110 BA111 BA112 BA113 BA114 BA115 BA116 BA117 BA118 BA119 BA120 BA121 BA122 BA123 BA124 BA125 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 BA126 0 1 2

Outline Offset amount (X) during automatic tool setting value calculation Offset amount (Z) during automatic tool setting value calculation Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration time constant for time constant changeover M-code (M881) Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration time constant for time constant changeover M-code (M882) Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration time constant for time constant changeover M-code (M883) Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration time constant for time constant changeover M-code (M884) Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration time constant for time constant changeover M-code (M885) Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration time constant for time constant changeover M-code (M886) Outside diameter of the turret for Virtual Machining Width of the turret for Virtual Machining Selecting a head having a lower-turret TOOL EYE Mounting position X for an assembly tool model Mounting position Z for an assembly tool model Turret reference position X (for VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display) Turret reference position Z (for VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display) Fixed value (0) EIA tailstock barrier, tailstock usage valid/invalid Tailstock present/absent EIA tool barrier, tool holder present/absent Barrier tool nose position (EIA, automatic) Setting of BA11 is handled as tailstock extruding length, valid/invalid Output of spindle revolution M-code specified in same block as synchronous tapping, valid/invalid Alarm stop when [BARRIER CANCEL] menu function is valid at the start of the automatic operation, valid/invalid Alarm stop when jaw Nos. are not specified at the start of the automatic operation, valid/invalid System to be made valid without system selection for queuing Y-axis interference type Y-axis moving range display

2-66

PARAMETER

Address (bit) 3 4 5 6 7 BA127 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 BA128 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 BA129 0 1 2 3 4 5 Tool command scheme FLASH tool valid/invalid

Outline

Milling spindle orientation command (M219), output/no output System without turret Shape of the tailstock center for Virtual Machining, single stage/twin stage M249 command for preparing for tool change before moving the tool to the tool change position using a MAZATROL program, output/no output For programs of Z-offset scheme: Fixed value (1) Simultaneous output of TTM6M200 and TTM6M202 NC tailstock (servo axis thrust control) M90/M91 output for machines with turret Type of the clamping and unclamping M-codes that the NC automatically output for machines equipped with a spindle head of swiveling type Whether or not to read the current settings (tailstock position) on the SET UP MANAG. display at the beginning of the execution of each program NC tailstock pushing direction Method of automatic determination of the virtual nose point for a tool measuring unit Display of THRUST F. and HORSE PW for the AFC function in the first set of tool data (BA43, BA44) Display of THRUST F. and HORSE PW for the AFC function in the second set of tool data (BA45, BA46) Turret lathe with an ATC unit Display of [TURRET UNCLAMP] for machines with an ATC-type turret Fixed value Selection of whether or not to measure the milling tool length with the tool measuring unit Display of [BARRIER CANCEL] menu item with [BARRIER CANCEL TEACH] made valid For other programs: Invalid

2-67

PARAMETER

Address (bit) 6 7 BA130 BA132

Outline

2-68

PARAMETER

2-2-3
1.

Data I/O parameter

CMT parameter (CMT)
Address (bit) CMT1 CMT24 CMT25 CMT26 CMT32 Type of processing to be executed if the tool quantity data within the NC memory mismatches that of the CMT Outline

2.

TAPE parameter (TAP)

Address (bit) Outline Type of terminator Terminator code 1 Terminator code 2 Output of CR during ISO code punching DC code parity Feed section DC code output [ code for paper tape reader/puncher for EIA ] code for paper tape reader/puncher for EIA # code for paper tape reader/puncher for EIA code for paper tape reader/puncher for EIA = code for paper tape reader/puncher for EIA : code for paper tape reader/puncher for EIA ( code for paper tape reader/puncher for EIA ) code for paper tape reader/puncher for EIA Tape operation port selection Paper tape puncher parity-V check

TAP1 TAP2 TAP3 TAP4 TAP5 TAP6 TAP7 TAP8 TAP9 TAP10 TAP11 TAP12 TAP13 TAP14 TAP15 TAP16 TAP17 TAP23 TAP24 TAP25

2-69

PARAMETER

Address (bit) TAP26 TAP27 TAP28 TAP29 TAP30 TAP31 TAP32

Outline Bit parameter related to paper tape reader/puncher Bit parameter related to program end code (M) for paper tape reader Number of characters in feed section for paper tape puncher Number of characters in the space between O-number and program for paper tape puncher Number of characters in the space between programs for paper tape puncher

3.

DNC parameter (DNC)

Address (bit) Outline Type of terminator Terminator code 1 Terminator code 2 DC code parity Number of NC transmission retries during DNC file transfer Number of NC reception retries during DNC file transfer Number of NC transmission/reception retries during DNC command message transfer @ waiting time during DNC transmission , TEXT waiting time during DNC transmission EOT waiting time during DNC transmission NC stop time after reception of ! NC reset time after digital-out NC stop time from reception DNC command reply message waiting time DNC machine number NC transmission stop time of DNC (from reception to transmission)

DNC1 DNC2 DNC3 DNC4 DNC5 DNC6 DNC8 DNC9 DNC10 DNC11 DNC12 DNC13 DNC14 DNC15 DNC16 DNC17 DNC18 DNC19 DNC20

2-70

PARAMETER

Address (bit) DNC21 DNC22 DNC24 DNC25 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DNC26 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 DNC27 DNC28 DNC29 DNC30 DNC31 DNC32

Outline NC transmission stop time of DNC (from transmission to transmission) Type of processing to be executed if the tool quantity data within the NC memory mismatches that which has been transferred from the DNC memory Handling of tool data and tool files in the M PLUS format, valid/invalid After program reception, a search is made/not made for the work number of that program. Details of an alarm occurring in DNC are displayed or not. Loading of programs having the same work number as that of the registered program in NC becomes impossible or not. The function of the PROGRAM LOCK/ ENABLE switch is released or not. Three digit G-format and G10 format codes input/output for MAZAK data transfer protocol Binary to ASCII format input/output of MAZAK data transfer protocol All programs having work numbers smaller than No. 9000 are erased/not erased at the start of program reception. Number of retry times with detection of a physical error Tool data/tool file message format Waiting time for a response from the COM port driver

2-71

PARAMETER

4.

Other (IOP/DPR/IDD)
Address (bit) Outline Overwriting associated with loading of the program of the same work number Overwriting associated with loading of the tool model of the same name Selection between M640T and M640MT for loading MAZATROL programs in text file format Data entry for communication with the magazine-side display unit Fixed value (0) Baud rate Stop bit Data bit

IOP1 - IOP4 IOP5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IOP6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IOP7 IOP8 IOP9 IOP10 IOP16 DPR1 DPR2 DPR3 DPR4 DPR5 DPR7

2-72

PARAMETER

Address (bit) DPR8 DPR9 DPR10 DPR11 DPR12 DPR13 DPR14 DPR15 DPR16 IDD1 IDD16 ISO code CR output and the output file size Method of handshaking DC code parity Feed section DC code output Waiting time Output format Selection of an output destination port

Outline

Number of characters or the number of lines in feed section DPRNT operation port selection

2-73

2
2-3

PARAMETER

Detailed Description
Structure of the parameter list
Each parameter list is written in the following format:
Classification

2-3-1

[1]
Meaning

Display title

[2]
Description

Address

[4] [3]
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

[9] [5] [6] [7] [8]

[1] [2] [3]

Classification of parameters (USER, MACHINE or DATA I/O) Characters displayed at the upper part of the screen Parameter address displayed on the screen - Bit input type parameters have the bit No. shown in the parentheses below address. Example:
Address Setting value for parameter P1 (bit 0) is indicated here P1 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7

P1 (bit 0)

[4] [5]

Meaning of the parameter Applicable program M....................Effective only for MAZATROL programs E ....................Effective for EIA/ISO programs M, E ...............Effective for MAZATROL programs and EIA/ISO programs

2-74

PARAMETER

[6]

Conditions under which a changed parameter becomes valid Example 1: Immediate designates that new parameter value becomes effective upon parameter change. Example 2: At power on designates that new parameter value will become effective after procedure below.

! !

1. Change parameter setting value. (By procedure similar to changing of ordinary data)

2. Press power off button on the operation panel. 3. Press power on button on the operation panel. Example 3: If At I/O startup is specified The system operates at the parameter data entered before the start of I/O. If the parameter data is modified during I/O operation, the new data will not become valid until the I/O operation has been completed. If After stop of movement is specified When the movement of the machine is completed, the program will operate with the new parameter value. Changing the parameter during the machine movement will not make the new parameter value valid during the movement. If Next block is specified When the next block is loaded, the program will operate with the new parameter value. Changing the parameter while the block is being loaded will not make the new parameter value valid in that block.

Example 4:

Example 5:

[7] [8] [9]

Units of data displayed Allowable range of data (for an effective data range, refer to Description column.) Details or meaning of the parameter

2-75

PARAMETER

2-3-2

User parameter
USER

POINT (D)
Display title

Classification

POINT
Description

Address

Meaning

Height of the second R-point

Initial point D1 Second R-point MPL001

Height of the second R-point during point machining The height of the R-point during point machining is basically D41, however, it is changed to D1 under the following conditions. Tool sequence Drill Conditions - Bit 6 of parameter D91 is set to 1 (D1 valid). - There is a spot drill in the pre-machining tool sequence of the same unit. - Bit 2 of parameter D92 is set to 1 (D1 valid). - There is a chamfering cutter in the premachining tool sequence of the same unit.

D1

Reamer

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 999 to 999

However, when a drill is included in the pre-machining tool sequence in case of a drilling tool sequence, the height is changed to D42. (!D42)

The nominal diameter of a spot-machining tool that is automatically set during automatic tool development. Example: Nominal diameter of spot-machining tool SNo. 1 TOOL CTR-DR NOM- No. HOLE- 10. HOLE-DEP "

20.
D2

D2

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate mm/0.1 in 0 to 99 Z-axis feed dwell time at the hole bottom in a spot-machining cycle. Set this time in spindle revolutions.

Number of revolutions during dwell at hole bottom in spot-machining cycle

D3

When the spot-machining tool reaches the hole bottom, the Z-axis will firstly stop moving until the spindle makes D3 revolutions, and then return to the original position at the rapid feed rate.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Revolutions 0 to 9 (Stops at hole bottom.) MPL002

2-76

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

POINT
Description

Address

Element used to set the maximum spot-chamfering hole diameter (d) during automatic tool development D2 Maximum allowable spot-chamfering hole diameter element d Spot-chamfering occurs if d D2 D4. If d > D2 D4, the chamfering cutter is developed automatically.

D4

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 99

Chamfering

MPL003 The feed rate of a tool as it is being passed through the prehole during an inversed spot-facing cycle Note: 0.5 mm/rev if this parameter setting is 0.

Prehole through speed during inversed spot-facing

D5
At the feedrate of D5
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 100 mm/min / 10 in/min 0 to 99 Element used to automatically set drill-machining cycles during automatic tool development Machining cycle Drill-machining cycle setting element Conditions

MPL004

D6 D7
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0 to 9

Drilling cycle High-speed deep-hole drilling cycle Deep-hole drilling cycle

DEPTH DIA
D6 <

D6 D7

DEPTH DIA DEPTH DIA

D7 <

2-77

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

POINT
Description

Address

Element used to automatically set the number of drills which are automatically developed according to the hole diameter of the drill unit Number of drills developed 1 2 3 Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate mm/0.1 in 0 to 99 Alarm D8 D9 Conditions DIA D8 < DIA D9 < DIA D10

Maximum diameter of holes machinable on one drill

D8

D10 < DIA

Maximum diameter of holes machinable on two drills

D9

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate mm/0.1 in 0 to 99

Maximum diameter of holes machinable on three drills

D10

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate mm/0.1 in 0 to 99 Element used to automatically set the hole-drilling, endmilling, and boring depths during automatic tool development of inversed spot-facing, tapping, back-boring, through-hole drilling, through-hole counter-boring, and spot-faced tapping units

Through-hole/tap-prehole machining overshoot

D11

DEPTH D11

DEPTH D11 MPL005

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 99

Example: SNo. 1 TOOL CTR-DR NOM- 10. No. HOLE- 10. HOLE-DEP
21. (DEPTH + D11)

Note: See also parameter D30 for tapping units.

2-78

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

POINT
Description

Address

Element used to automatically set the hole-drilling depth during automatic tool development of stop-hole counter-boring and stop-hole boring units

DEPTH

Stop-hole machining hole-bottom clearance

D12
Example: SNo. Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 99 1 TOOL DRILL NOM- 10. No. HOLE- 10.

D12

MPL006

HOLE-DEP

19. (DEPTH tool tip compensation D12)

Note: This parameter is invalid when the residual hole diameter is not 0. Hole diameter is automatically set during automatic tool development when spot-chamfering is not to be performed.
D13

Spot-machining hole diameter (fixed value)

D13
Example: SNo. 1 TOOL CTR-DR NOM- 20. No. HOLE- HOLE-DEP " D13

MPL007

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate mm/0.1 in 0 to 99

10.

Element used to automatically set the depth-of-cut per drilling operation during automatic tool development Depth-of-cut setting element for drilling (ALMINUM) HOLE- D14 : when the material of the stock workpiece is AL (aluminum) in article MAT. 6 HOLE- D15 : when the material of the stock workpiece is other than AL in article MAT. 6

D14

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 0 to 10

Depth-of-cut setting element for drilling (except AL)

D15

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 0 to 10

2-79

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

POINT
Description

Address

Z-axis feed dwell time at the hole bottom in the chamfering cycle of chamfering cutter or spot-machining tool. Set this time in spindle revolutions. Number of revolutions during dwell at hole bottom for chamfering cutter or spotmachining tool in chamfering cycle When the chamfering cutter reaches the hole bottom, the Z-axis will firstly stop moving until the spindle makes D16 revolutions, and then return to the original position at the rapid feed rate. Note: This parameter is invalid for chamfering with true-circle processing. (Stops at hole bottom.)

D16

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Revolutions 0 to 9

MPL008

The clearance in order to prevent tool interference with a wall of the workpiece or with the hole bottom during a chamfering cycle Use in the case of D92 bit 4 = 0: The safety clearance (D17) is radially or axially used only when an interference could actually occur. Note: A tip of the tool is allowed to enter the safety clearance area as long as there remains ever so short a clearance. D17

Interferes.

Interference clearance of chamfering cutter

D17 Interferes.

D17

MPL009

Use in the case of D92 bit 4 = 1: The safety clearance (D17) is radially or axially used for restrictively shifting the position of that workpiece section which is subjected to check for interference. Note: No tip of the tool is allowed to enter the safety clearance area.

D17

D17

Judged as an interference

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 99

D17

D17
MPL009

2-80

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

POINT
Description

Address

The feed rate at which the tool is returned from the hole bottom during reaming or boring.

Return feed rate for reaming or boring (cycle 3)

D18

D18

MPL010
Notes: 1. Valid only when the setting of DEPTH for the reamer (tool sequence) is G01. 2. Valid only when the setting of PRE-DIA for the boring tool (tool sequence) is CYCLE 3. 3. If this parameter is 0, the tool is returned at the same feed rate as that of cutting. Z-axis feed dwell time at the hole bottom in an end milling cycle. Set this time in spindle revolutions. When the end mill reaches the hole bottom, the Z-axis will firstly stop moving until the spindle makes D19 revolutions, and then return to the original position at the rapid feed rate.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 100 mm/min / 10 in/min 0 to 9

Number of revolutions during dwell at hole bottom for end milling

D19

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Revolutions 0 to 999 (Stops at hole bottom.)

Note: This parameter is invalid for true-circle processing. MPL011

Element used to automatically set the radial depth-of-cut per end milling operation Depth-of-cut = nominal diameter D20 Radial depth-of-cut setting element for end milling Depth-of-cut is automatically set according to the value of this parameter when nominal diameter of the end mill is input. Example:
SNo. TOOL NOM- No. HOLE- HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH 1 END MILL 20. 40. 10. 30. 0. 12. "

D20

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate % 0 to 100

(NOM- D20)

Reference bottom-finishing allowance for end milling

The reference value for calculation of a bottom-finishing allowance which corresponds to the roughness level of the end milling (tool sequence). The finishing allowance in the case of roughness level 4 becomes the value of this parameter, and the values for all other roughness levels are set using the expressions listed in the table below. Roughness 0 to 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Bottom-finishing allowance 0.0 D21 D21 0.7 D21 0.7 0.7 D21 0.7 0.7 0.7 D21 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 D21 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7

D21

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 99

2-81

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

POINT
Description

Address

Dwell time at the hole bottom or at the R-point. This value is valid when 1 is set for bit 0, 1 or 2 of parameter D91.

Tapping-cycle dwell time

D22

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.01 s 0 to 99

Note: This parameter is valid only when the setting for roughness (RGH) of tapping (tool sequence) is FIX.

The excess amount of prehole diameter over nominal diameter that is used to specify whether the Z-axis is to be moved at a rapid feed rate or at a cutting feed rate during true-circle processing with the end mill Prehole clearance for end milling
D23 D23

D23

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate mm/0.1 in 0 to 99 Z-axis feed dwell time at the hole bottom in a boring cycle. Set this time in spindle revolutions. When the boring bar reaches the hole bottom, the Z-axis will firstly stop moving until the spindle makes D24 revolutions, and then the spindle orientation will be performed. Note:
Cutting feed Rapid feed MPL012

Number of revolutions during dwell at hole bottom for boring

D24

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Revolutions 0 to 9 (Stops at hole bottom.)

This parameter is invalid if the roughness (RGH) of the boring (tool sequence) is 0.

MPL013

The amount of relief provided for the tip of a boring bar to be kept clear of the hole wall after spindle orientation

D25
Boring-bar tip relief

D25
During boring
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 99

During returning

MPL014

Notes: 1. Valid only when the setting for the prehole diameter of the boring (tool sequence) is CYCLE 1. 2. For the relief direction of the tool tip, see the description of bit 3 and bit 4 of I14.

2-82

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

POINT
Description

Address

The distance which the boring or back-boring tool is returned at the same feed rate and milling spindle speed as for the preceding operation after the tool has reached the hole bottom Returning distance from hole bottom for boring or back-boring

D26
D26
MPL015

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 99

[1] Has reached the hole bottom.

[2] Returned at the same feedrate.

[3] Returned at a rapid feedrate.

Note: Not valid if the setting for the roughness (RGH) of the boring (tool sequence) is 1. Invalid

D27

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

The distance which the boring bar is fed in at 70% of the original feed rate and milling spindle speed to finish the hole bottom

Bottom-finishing amount of boring

D28

D28

MPL016

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 99

The feed rate is reduced to 70% of the original value before the hole bottom is reached. Note: Not valid if the setting for the roughness (RGH) of the boring (tool sequence) is 1. The time required for a chip removal tool to complete a chip removal operation after the tool has been positioned to the hole

Chip removal time

D29

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate s 0 to 99

2-83

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

POINT
Description

Address

To set number of incomplete threads in tapping cycle for metric screws and unified screws. In tapping, internal thread is tapped extra for the depth of (D30 pitch) in the direction of Z. This is also used as an element for automatically determining hole-drilling depth (HOLE-DEP) in the automatic tool development of the tapping unit. Number of incomplete threads in tapping cycle
DEPTH D30 Pitch D11 MPL07

D30

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Thread 0 to 9

Example:

SNo. TOOL 1 DRILL

NOM- No. HOLE- HOLE-DEP 19. 10. 10. {DEPTH + D11 + (D30 pitch)}

[Related parameter] D43: Number of incomplete threads in tapping cycle for piped screws Excess amount of tool return due to elongation of the tapper during tapping cycle Set this value in spindle revolutions.

Tapper elongation amount for tapping

D31

D31 Pitch

R-point

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Revolutions 0 to 9 The number of inertial turns in tapping cycle that the spindle has rotated clockwise during the time from output of a spindle CCW rotation command to the start of spindle CCW rotation
MPL019

Number of spindle revolutions until spindle CCW rotation begins in tapping cycle

D32

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Revolutions 0 to 99 The amount of relief provided for a back-boring tool tip to be kept clear of the prehole walls as it is being passed through the prehole in the oriented state of the spindle

Back-boring tool tip relief

D33

D33
[1] During back-boring [2] During passage MPL019

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 99 Note: For the relief direction of the tool tip, see the description of bit 3 and bit 4 of I14.

2-84

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

POINT
Description

Address

Invalid

D34

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Element used to automatically set the prehole-drilling diameter during automatic tool development of the reamer unit (When the pre-machining process is drilling.) DIA

Prehole-drilling diameter setting element for reamer (drilling)

D35

DIA D35

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.01 mm/0.001 in 0 to 999 Example: SNo. TOOL 1 DRILL NOM- 10. HOLE- 10. (DIA D35)

MPL020
No.

Prehole-drilling diameter setting element for reamer (boring)

Element used to automatically set the prehole-drilling diameter during automatic tool development of the reamer unit (When the pre-machining process is boring.) DIA

D36

DIA D36

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.01 mm/0.001 in 0 to 999 Example: SNo. TOOL 1 DRILL NOM- 10. HOLE- 10. (DIA D36)

MPL020
No.

Prehole-drilling diameter setting element for reamer (end milling)

Element used to automatically set the prehole-drilling diameter during automatic tool development of the reamer unit (When the pre-machining process is end milling.) DIA

D37

DIA D37

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.01 mm/0.001 in 0 to 999 Example: SNo. TOOL 1 DRILL NOM- 10. HOLE- 10. (DIA D37)

MPL020
No.

2-85

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

POINT
Description

Address

1)

In automatic tool development of the reamer unit, if the pre-machining process is boring: DIA

Reamer-prehole diameter setting element for boring or end milling

D38

Boring-hole diameter = DIA D38

MPL021

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.01 mm/0.001 in 0 to 999

Example: SNo. TOOL 1 BOR BAR 2)

NOM- 10.

No.

HOLE- 10. (DIA D38)

In automatic tool development of the reamer unit, if the pre-machining process is end milling: DIA
First end milling hole diameter = DIA D39 Second end milling hole diameter = DIA D38 MPL022

Reamer-prehole diameter setting element for end milling

D39

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.01 mm/0.001 in 0 to 999

Example: SNo. TOOL NOM- 1 END MILL 15. 2 END MILL 10.

No.

HOLE- 20. (DIA D39)

21. (DIA D38)

Z-axis feed dwell time at the spot-faced hole bottom in an inversed spot facing cycle. Set this time in spindle revolutions. When the inversed spot-facing tool reaches the hole bottom, firstly the Z-axis will stop moving until the spindle makes D40 revolutions, and then the rotational direction of the spindle will reverse.

Number of revolutions during dwell at spotfaced hole bottom for inversed spot-facing

D40
(Feeding stops at hole bottom.) Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate Revolutions 0 to 9

MPL023

R-point height of each tool in the point-machining unit Example:

Initial point
R-point height during point-machining

R-point

D41

D41 Machining surface MPL024

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate mm/0.1 in 0 to 99 Note: For the inversed spot-facing unit or the back-boring unit, this parameter can also be used for setting the clearance amount at the hole bottom. (!D1, D42)

2-86

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

POINT
Description
Height of the third R-point

Address

Initial point D42 Third R-point MPL001

Height of the third R-point during point machining

The height of the R-point during point machining is basically D41, however it is changed to D42 under the following conditions. Tool sequence Conditions - Bit 6 of parameter D91 is set to 1 (D42 valid). Drill - There is a drill in the pre-machining tool sequence of the same unit. - Bit 7 of parameter D91 is set to 1 (D42 valid). - CYCLE 2 is selected for the machining cycle. - Bit 7 of parameter D91 is set to 1 (D42 valid).

D42

Chamfering cutter

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 999 to 999

Spot

- CYCLE 2 in the chamfering cycle is selected for the machining cycle.

To set number of incomplete threads in tapping cycle for piped screws (PT, PF, PS). In tapping, internal thread is tapped extra for the depth of (D43 pitch) in the direction of Z. Number of incomplete threads in tapping cycle for piped screw This is also used as an element for automatically determining hole-drilling depth (HOLE-DEP) in the automatic tool development of the tapping unit.
DEPTH D43 Pitch

D43

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Thread 0 to 9 Example: SNo. TOOL 1 DRILL

D11

MPL07

NOM- No. HOLE- HOLE-DEP 19. 10. 10. {DEPTH + D11 + (D43 pitch)}

Select an automatic calculation method for the amount of chamfer with the tapping unit. 0: Following calculation expression is used: Selecting an automatic calculation method for the amount of chamfer with the tapping unit Amount of chamfer = (MAJOR- + 2 PITCH) PRE-DIA 2

D44

1: Following calculation expression is used (same as M32): Amount of chamfer = MAJOR- PRE-DIA 2

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1

Note: Select 1 if a loss of the threaded section is likely due to overchamfering as compared with a small TAP-DEP value. Ex.: Sheet metal tapping

2-87

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

POINT
Description

Address

q1

1st time

i-th time Drilling depth q1 q2

Gradual decrements in drilling depth

qi

qn qi b qn

D45

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.01 mm/0.001 in 0 to 9999 (!D46)

q1: 1st drilling depth qi : i-th drilling depth qn: Residual hole depth b : Minimum drilling depth D46 qi = q1 D45 (i 1) (If qi b) qi = b (If qi < b)

Number of times

Set the minimum gradual drilling depth. However, if the residual hole depth is smaller than D46, actual drilling depth will be the same as the residual hole depth. Minimum gradual drilling depth

D46

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.01 mm/0.001 in 0 to 9999 Element used to automatically set the hole depth (HOLE-DEP) of drilling, end milling and boring during automatic tool development of the reamer unit (!D45)

Reamer-prehole machining overshoot

DEPTH DEPTH D47 For end milling or boring MPL025

D47
D47

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.01 mm/0.001 in 0 to 999 Example:

For drilling

SNo. TOOL 1 DRILL

NOM- 10.

No. HOLE- 10.

HOLE-DEP 21. (DEPTH + D47)

2-88

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

POINT
Description

Address

Feed override for the section to be chamfered in the planetary tapping cycle

Feed override for the section to be chamfered in the planetary tapping cycle Chamfering feed = Pre-hole machining feed in tapping tool sequence D48/100

D48

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate % 0 to 999

Chamfering section

The amount of return at hole bottom during the planetary tapping cycle Specify data by the number of threads. Amount of return = Tapping pitch D49/10 Amount of return at hole bottom during the planetary tapping cycle

D49

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 thread 0 to 999

Amount of return

The feed rate for pre-hole machining will be auto-set to D50 when the planetary tapping cycle is selected.
Auto-set feed rate for pre-hole machining in the planetary tapping cycle
SNo. TOOL NOM- No.HOLE- HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR 1 TAP M10. 10. 23.7 PLANET

D50
Program type Conditions M Immediate

D50

0.15

FIX P1.5

50

1.5

Unit Setting range

0.01 mm/rev 0.001 in/rev 0 to 9999 The feed rate will be auto-set to D51 when the planetary tapping cycle is selected.
SNo. TOOL NOM- No.HOLE- HOLE-DEP PRE-DIA PRE-DEP RGH DEPTH C-SP FR M M

Auto-set feed rate for planetary tapping cycle

1 TAP

M10.

10.

23.7

PLANET

0.15

FIX P1.5

50

D51

0.04

D51
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0.01 mm/rev 0.001 in/rev 0 to 9999

2-89

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

POINT
Description

Address

Set the reduction ratio for the G00-based relief rate during the very-deephole drilling in a drilling or turning-drilling unit.

Reduction ratio for the G00-based relief rate during a very-deep-hole drilling cycle

Cutting feed Rapid feed (G00)

D52

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate % 0 to 100 Set the number of times of pecking to be executed before returning the tool to a position near the starting point of the very-deep-hole drilling cycle of a drilling or turning-drilling unit.
Example:

If D53 = 3:
Cutting feed Rapid feed Starting point

D53

Number of times of pecking up to the return of the tool to a position near the starting point of the very-deep-hole drilling cycle of a drilling or turning-drilling unit

After pecking has been repeated three times, the tool returns to a position near the starting point.

Ending point

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Times 0 to 9999

2-90

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

POINT
Description

Address

D54 F= F 100

F : Specified feed rate F' : Feed rate at cutting start

End point

Programmed start point

Deceleration rate at cutting start for verydeep-hole drilling cycle/decremental verydeep-hole machining cycle

Drill

D54
l
Feed rate at F' over distance l from the programmed start point
NM211-00268

l= l=0

D 2 tan/2

(0 < < 180) ( 180)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate % 0 to 100

D55

D55

D55

Drilling return distance for very-deep-hole drilling cycle/decremental very-deep-hole machining cycle

G1 G0

D55
P2 D4 D3 D2 D1
NM211-00252

P1

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 9999

P1: Start point P2: End point Dn (n = 1 to 4) = Cut depth

D56

Number of revolutions during dwell at chip ejection position and hole bottom for verydeep-hole drilling cycle/decremental verydeep-hole machining cycle

Set the number of revolutions of the milling spindle during dwell time at the chip ejection position and the hole bottom for the very-deep-hole drilling cycle or the decremental very-deep-hole machining cycle.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Revoluitons 0 to 255

2-91

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

POINT
Description

Address

Set the return speed for the very-deep-hole drilling cycle or the decremental very-deep-hole machining cycle. Return speed for very-deep-hole drilling cycle/decremental very-deep-hole machining cycle

D57
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0.001 mm/rev 0.0001 in/rev 0 to 9999 Set the feed rate reduction distance from the reference point at cutting start of a very-deep-hole drilling cycle (blind hole, through hole) during the point machining. Specify the ratio with respect to the drill diameter. If the nominal diameter of the drill is D, the feed rate reduction distance L at cutting start is calculated using the following calculation expression: L = D D58/100 The feed rate is reduced by the ratio specified in D54 (feed rate reduction ratio at cutting start) by the distance L from the reference point (R). Feed rate reduction distance ratio at cutting start of a very-deep-hole drilling cycle (blind hole, through hole)

L = D Feed rate reduction distance ratio R Clearance

D58

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After movement stop % 0 to 300

2-92

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

POINT
Description

Address

Set the surface speed reduction ratio at cutting end of a very-deep-hole drilling cycle (through hole) during the point machining. If the surface speed during drilling is S, the surface speed S at cutting end is calculated using the following calculation expression: S = S D59/100 The surface speed is reduced to S by speed reduction distance immediately before the hole bottom (hb specified in the program).

Surface speed reduction ratio at cutting end of a very-deep-hole drilling cycle (through hole)

D59

Distance to the hole bottom hb

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After movement stop % 0 to 100 Set the ratio between automatic setting value for the feed rate in the axial cutting and that in the radial cutting during chamfering in the point machining.

Automatic setting ratio of axial cutting feed rate during chamfering

D60

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After movement stop % 0 to 100 Set the nominal diameter of a chamfering cutter that is automatically set during automatic tool development for a point machining unit of MAZATROL programs.

Nominal diameter of chamfering cutter, set during automatic tool development for a point machining unit

D61

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 999

2-93

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

POINT
Description

Address

Invalid

D62 to D72
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Specify DEP-Z range for the end mill and the face mill from the learning data of cutting conditions. When learning data on the condition that DEP-Z is in the following range has been stored in the memory, learning is not effectuated again. For a DEP-Z range of the end mill, set a value of DEPTH/NOM- (at a unit of 0.1%). 0 to D73 .................. DEP-Z range (for end mill) 1 D73 to D74 ............. DEP-Z range (for end mill) 2 D74 to D75 ............. DEP-Z range (for end mill) 3 For a DEP-Z range of the face mill, set a value of DEPTH (at a unit of 0.1 mm or 0.01 in). 0 to D76 .................. DEP-Z range (for face mill) 1 D76 to D77 ............. DEP-Z range (for face mill) 2 Specify WID-R range for the boring bar, back boring bar and end mill from the learning data of cutting conditions. When learning data on the condition that WID-R is in the following range has been stored in the memory, learning is not effectuated again. For a WID-R range of the boring bar and back boring bar, set a value of DEPTH (at a unit of 0.1 mm/0.01 in). 0 to D78 ................... WID-R range (for boring bar and back boring bar) 1
D78 to D79 .............. WID-R range (for boring bar and back boring bar) 2

D73 to D77

Learning of cutting conditions (DEP-Z range)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1% (0.1 mm/0.01 in) 0 to 1000

D78 to D82

Learning of cutting conditions (WID-R range)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1% (0.1 mm/0.01 in) 0 to 1000

For a WID-R range of the end mill, set a value of DEPTH/NOM- (at a unit of 0.1%). 0 to D80 ................... WID-R range (for end mill) 1 D80 to D81 .............. WID-R range (for end mill) 2 D81 to D82 .............. WID-R range (for end mill) 3 Invalid

D83 to D90
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-94

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

POINT
Description

Address

76543210

(1: Execution, 0: No execution) M04 is output after the tool has dwelled at the hole bottom during a tapping cycle. The tool dwells after M04 has been output at the hole bottom during a tapping cycle. The tool dwells after it has been returned to the R-point during a tapping cycle. If a drill is used in the pre-machining of the centering drill cycle, the R-point height is set to D1. The finishing tool path is shortened during a truecircle processing cycle (end milling). The tool path is shortened during a true-circle processing cycle (chamfering). If a pre-machining tool sequence is included in the same unit, the R-point height of the drill is set to D1 or D42. The R-point height of the chamfering cutter during the cycle 2 is set to D42. The R-point height of the spot-machining tool during the chamfering cycle (cycle 2) is set to D42.

D91

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

76543210

(1: Execution, 0: No execution) During a true-circle processing (end milling) cycle, E17 is used for axial feed. The R1-point height of the back spot facing is set to D1. If a chamfering cutter is included in the premachining tool sequence of the same unit, the Rpoint height of the reamer is set to D1. If a chamfering cutter is included in the premachining tool sequence of the same unit, the Rpoint height of the tapping is set to D1.

D92

The position cleared radially or axially by D17 from the workpiece section concerned is subjected to check for interference. Dwell time designation for synchronous tapping in a MAZATROL program (1: Valid, 0: Invalid) During planetary tapping, chips are ejected automatically prior to the threading process.
Note: Timing of dwell execution of bit 5 is determined by settings in bit 0 to 2 of parameter D91.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

2-95

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

POINT
Description

Address

Unidirectional positioning for point-machining

76543210

(1: Execution, 0: No execution)

CTR-DR (Spot-machining tool)

DRILL (Drill) REAMER (Reamer) TAP (Tap) BCK FACE (Inversed spot-facing tool) BOR BAR (Boring tool) B-B BAR (Back-boring tool) CHAMFER (Chamfering cutter)

D93

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

Unidirectional positioning for point-machining

76543210

(1: Execution, 0: No execution)

END MILL (End mill)

Planetary tapping Tornado cycle

D94

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits Selection of the auto-setting method to be used for the MAZATROL program data items of the tapping unit (TAPPING and CBOR-TAP) and the diameter item of pipe taps on the TOOL DATA display.

76543210
For pipe-tapping items 0: Conventional method 1: The text file concerned is referred to for the auto-setting of pipe-tapping data items in a MAZATROL program as well as on the TOOL DATA display. Auto-setting method for tapping For unified thread items 0: Conventional method 1: The text file concerned is referred to for the auto-setting of the pre-hole diameter (PREDIA) within a tapping unit (for unified thread). For metric thread items 0: Conventional method 1: The text file concerned is referred to for the auto-setting of the pre-hole diameter (PREDIA) within a tapping unit (for metric thread). Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

D95

2-96

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

POINT
Description

Address

76543210
Surface speed calculation for spot drill used 0: Based on machining hole diameter 1: Based on nominal diameter of the tool Element that determines the counterboring pattern (whether to execute diameter enlarging) 0: Determines the counterboring pattern from the nominal diameter in tool data and the hole diameter in the program. 1: Determines the counterboring pattern from the tool diameter in the tool data and the hole diameter in the program. Setting of the RGH BCB (inversed faced hole machining), BK-CBORE (back boring), and CBOR-TAP (counterbore-tapping) units in MAZATROL programs (for INTEGREX j) 0: Invalid 1: Valid

D96

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After stop of movement Bit Binary, eight digits Invalid

D97 to D104
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

76543210
Handling the X-axial coordinates of non-turning TPC relay points 0: Radius value 1: Diameter value

D105

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After stop of movement Bit Binary, eight digits

2-97

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

POINT
Description

Address

76543210
Alarm 1602 SET INDEX UNIT BEFORE MACHINING will occur when machining units are not preceded by an indexing unit. 0: Invalid 1: Valid

D106

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits Invalid

D107 to D144
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-98

PARAMETER

2-3-3

User parameter
USER

LINE/FACE/3D (E)
Display title

Classification

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

Meaning

Element used to set cutting start point and escape point for closed-pattern line- or face-machining
Example:

Defined closed pattern SRV-R E2

Closed-pattern cutting start point and escape point setting element

Defined closed pattern

E2 Escape point E1 MPL026

E1

Cutting start point

E1
[Applicable units] - LINE OUT, LINE IN, CHMF OUT and CHMF IN - Wall finishing of STEP, POCKET, PCKT MT and PCKT VLY

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 999 Element used to set the cutting start point and escape point for line- or face-machining (the first clearance)
Example: NOM-/2 SRV-R

E2

Cutting start point

Cutting start point and escape point setting element (the first clearance)
NOM-/2 < SRV-R

E2

SRV-R

Escape point

E2

E2

Cutting start point

Escape point E2 SRV-R MPL027

[Applicable units] - All line-machining units - Face-machining units other than FCE MILL, TOP EMIL, and SLOT Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 999
Notes: 1. See the diagram of parameter E1 also. 2. Positioning of E2 at the escape point can be selected using E95, but only for line-machining units.

2-99

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

Invalid

E3

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

The reference value of each finishing allowance R (FIN-R) which is automatically set when the roughness levels of the line- or face-machining units have been set The finishing allowance R in the case of roughness level 4 becomes the value of this parameter, and the values for all other roughness levels are calculated using the expressions listed in the table below.
Roughness 0 to 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FIN-R 0.0 E4 E4 0.7 E4 0.7 0.7 E4 0.7 0.7 0.7 E4 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 E4 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7

Reference allowance of finishing in radial direction

E4

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 999

Element used to set the cutting start point and escape point (the second clearance)

Element used to set the cutting start point and escape point (the second clearance) E2 is used generally as a clearance on the X-Y plane, however, E5 is used when the condition meets both of 1) and 2) mentioned below. 1) 2) There is pre-machining in the same unit. The parameter (E91 to E95) that makes E5 effective is set to ON (1).

E5

[Applicable units] LINE OUT, LINE IN, STEP, POCKET, POCKT MT, PCKT VLY Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 999 The reference value of each finishing allowance Z (FIN-Z) which is automatically set when the roughness levels of the line- or face-machining units have been set The finishing allowance Z in the case of roughness level 4 becomes the value of this parameter, and the values for all other roughness levels are calculated using the expressions listed in the table below.
Roughness 0 to 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FIN-Z 0.0 E6 E6 0.7 E6 0.7 0.7 E6 0.7 0.7 0.7 E6 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 E6 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7

[Related parameters]
E91 bit 3, E92 bit 3, E93 bit 3, E94 bit 3, E95 bit 7

* Parameter that effectuates E5 in the applicable unit.

Reference allowance of finishing in axial direction

E6

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 999

2-100

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

Allowance of cutting start point in axial direction (the second clearance)

Allowance of cutting start point in axial direction For the line- or face-machining, E9 is used as an axial clearance for rapid access to the machining point from the initial point, however, E7 is used when the condition meets both of 1) and 2) mentioned below. 1) 2) There is pre-machining in the same unit. The parameter (E91 to E97) that makes E7 effective is set to ON (1).

E7

[Applicable units] All line-/face-machining units except the face milling and angular face unit. Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 99 The amount of clearance that prevents interference of the chamfering cutter with the walls during face-machining [Related parameters]
E91 bit 2, E92 bit 2, E93 bit 2, E94 bit 2, E95 bit 6, E96 bit 1, E97 bit 2

* Parameter that effectuates E7 in the applicable unit.

E8
Radial interference clearance of chamfering cutter

E8
Interferes.
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 999 Element used to set the position in which the cutting feed in axial direction is to be started after the line- or face-machining tool has been moved from the initial point toward the workpiece at a rapid feed rate Allowance of axial-cutting start position (the first clearance)
Example:
Initial point

Interference distance

MPL028

E9
E9
SRV-Z

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 999 Element used to automatically set the radial depth-of-cut (WID-R) of the tool sequence in FCE MILL, TOP EMIL or STEP unit
MPL029

Depth-of-cut-R automatic setting element (Face milling, End milling-top, End millingstep)

WID-R = Example:

NOM- E10 10

E10

SNo. TOOL NOM- No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R R1 FCE MILL 100A ? ? XBI 1. 19. "

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 10% 0 to 9

NOM- E10 10

2-101

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

The amount of clearance that prevents interference of the chamfering cutter with the bottom during chamfering

Axial interference clearance of chamfering cutter

E11
Interference depth Interferes.

E11

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 40

MPL030

The amount of clearance that prevents interference between the tool and the figure during face milling
Example:

Radial interference clearance of face milling unit and angular face milling unit

Escape point

Defined figure

E12

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 999

Cutting start point

E12

E12

MPL031

Element used to set the tool path internal to the figure for end milling-top unit
Example:

Tool path setting element for end milling-top unit

E13

Tool diameter E13 10 Tool diameter E13 10 Defined figure MPL032

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 10% 1 to 9

Element used to automatically set the radial depth-of-cut (WID-R) of the tool sequence in POCKET, PCKT MT or PCKT VLY unit Depth-of-cut-R automatic setting element (Pocket milling, Pocket milling-mountain, Pocket milling-valley)
WID-R = Example:
SNo. TOOL NOM- No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R R1 END MILL 20. ? ? CW G01 10. 12.

NOM- E14 10

E14

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 10% 0 to 9

NOM- E14 10

2-102

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

Element used to set the tool path external to the defined figure for reciprocating-short machining with face milling unit Tool path setting element for face millingtop unit
Example:
Tool diameter E15 10

E15

(reciprocating short)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 10% 1 to 9

Tool diameter E15 10 Defined figure MPL033

Override value of the idle-cutting feed rate at which tool of end millingmountain unit is to be moved around the outer form of the workpiece
Note: Valid only when bit 0 of E91 is 1 and its bit 7 is 0. Example:
Defined figure

Peripheral-cutting feed rate override for end milling-mountain unit

E16
FR E16 10 FR

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 10% 1 to 20 Override value of the feed rate at which the tool of a line- or facemachining unit (excluding face milling unit) is to be moved to the machining surface in an axial direction
Notes:
MPL034

Axial-cutting feed rate override

E17

1. Valid only when ZFD (or AFD) of tool sequence is G01. 2. Feed overriding is invalid when this parameter is 0. Example:

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 10% 0 to 9
FR

E17 10

E9

SRV-Z Machining surface

MPL035

Override value of feed rate when the pocket-machining radial depth-of-cut becomes equal to the tool diameter
Example:
FR E18 10

Override in case of the overall width cutting for pocket-machining

E18
MPL036

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 10% 0 to 9

Note: Overriding for overall width cutting is not valid when this parameter is 0.

[Applicable units] Rough-machining of POCKET, PCKT MT, PCKT VLY and STEP

2-103

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

Override value of tool returning feed rate in the rough-machining process of the end milling-slot unit, when the bidirectional cutting is executed. Returning feed rate override in case of bidirectional cutting for rough-machining of the end milling-slot unit.
E19 FR 100 Note: The override value is invalid, when bit 5 of parameter E96 is set to OFF, or this parameter is set to 0.

E19

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate % 0 to 999

[Applicable unit] Returning path in rough-machining of SLOT

This parameter indicates the feed override value for axial pecking movement to the surface to be machined using a face-machining unit excepting a face milling unit. Axial cutting feed override during Z-axial cutting in the pecking mode of face machining
E20 Feed rate during pecking operation = FR 10

E20

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 10% 0 to 40

Notes: 1. Valid only when G01 or a numeric value is set for ZFD (or AFD) and [PECKING] is selected for TYPE in the tool sequence. 2. The feed override function is invalid when 0 is assigned to this parameter.

The amount of overlap of the wall-cutting start and end areas in closedpattern line- or face-machining
Example: Defined closed pattern

Wall-cutting overlap in closed figure

E21
Escape point E21 Cutting start point

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 999

MPL037

[Applicable units] - LINE OUT, LINE IN, CHMF OUT and CHMF IN - Wall finishing of STEP, POCKET, PCKT MT, PCKT VLY and SLOT Override value of automatic corner overriding in line- or face-machining
Example: FR E22 10 FR

Override value of automatic corner overriding

E22
MPL038

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate % 0 to 99

Note: Automatic corner overriding is invalid when this parameter is 0.

[Applicable units] LINE RGT, LINE LFT, LINE OUT, LINE IN, STEP, POCKET, PCKT MT and PCKT VLY

2-104

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

The range of removal allowances (upper and lower limits) The automatic corner overriding becomes valid when the following line- or face-machining conditions are met: Effective removal allowance (upper limit) of automatic corner overriding
Tool Removal Tool E24 E23 diameter 100 allowance diameter 100

E23
Removal allowance

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate % 1 to 99

MPL039

Effective removal allowance (lower limit) of automatic corner overriding

Machining Line-rough machining Face-rough machining

Removal allowance (SRV-R) (FIN-R) (WID-R)

E24

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate % 1 to 99 The shape angle range (upper limit) The automatic corner overriding becomes valid when the following line- or face-machining conditions are met:

Effective angle (upper limit) of automatic corner overriding

Shape angle E25

Shape angle

E25

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 1 to 179 Axial feed rate calculation parameter for a line milling finish. Set the changing ratio of the axial feed rate with respect to the radial feed rate.
MPL040

Calculation coefficient for the finishing feed of line milling

E26 Axial feed rate = Radial feed rate 100

Tool Axial feed rate

E26

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate % 0 to 999
Radial feed rate

Workpiece

2-105

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

These parameters, the roughness code, etc. determine the finishing feed rate. Radial direction feed rate calculation reference diameter for finish cutting in line machining unit - If the radial-finishing feed rate is taken as F1, then: F1 =
E28
D E27

Kf Z

(D < E27 ) (D E27 )

E27
D Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 65535

E28 Kf Z

: Tool diameter : 0.1 (for metric specs.) or 0.01 (for inch specs.) Kf : Roughness coefficient (Refer to the list below) Z : Number of teeth

Finishing feed rate calculation reference feed rate in line machining unit

Roughness Roughness Roughness Kf Kf Kf code code code K0 0.83 K0 K0 0.83 1 4 7 K0 0.82 K0 0.8 K0 0.84 2 5 8 K0 0.81 K0 0.82 K0 0.85 3 6 9
K0=Standard data 0.5

E28
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0.001 mm/rev 0.0001 in/rev 0 to 65535

Select whether the cutting conditions in the shape sequence during VFC mode are to be modified. The selection is valid only for milling. 0: Modification of the cutting conditions in the shape sequence Selection of whether the cutting conditions in the shape sequence during VFC mode are to be modified 1: No modification of the cutting conditions in the shape sequence In the case of 0, only the cutting conditions in the tool sequence are modified. In the case of 1, both the cutting conditions in the tool sequence and the cutting conditions in the shape sequence are modified.

E29

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1

2-106

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

An element that determines the starting point and escape point of radial cutting when CLOSED is specified for the wall attributes at the starting point and ending point of open-pattern line machining. When OPEN is specified, E2 is used. <CLOSED specified>

Radial clearance for wall attributes during line machining

E30

E30

E30
<OPEN specified>

E2

E2

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 999 Element that determines the amount of OPEN attribute wall protrusion in pocket-machining shape units (POCKET, PCKT MT or PCKT VLY unit only)
Protrusion Protrusion

Element that determines the amount of OPEN attribute wall protrusion for pocketmachining shape units

Protrusion OPEN attribute wall

E31

CLOSED attribute

CLOSED attribute wall =

Tool dia. (Note) E31 10

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 10% 0 to 9

Note: Nominal tool diameter in the tool sequence is used when tool data is absent.

2-107

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

Element that automatically determines an approaching radius in a Zdirection helical approach scheme. The approaching radius value to be used in the Z-direction helical approach scheme for helical machining is automatically determined by the parameter as follows: Approaching radius = Tool dia. E32 100

Element that automatically determines an approaching radius in a Z-direction helical approach scheme

- For helical approach (Helical circle 2 + 1/4)

Approaching radius (E33/100)

E32
Clearance Z

Clearance Z + Cutting allowance Z

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After stop of movement

Approaching radius

1 to 999 Approaching gradient value for a Z-direction helical approach scheme Distance in Z-direction Distance in XY-plane

- For helical approach (Helical circle 2 + 1/4)

Approaching radius (E33/100)

Approaching gradient for a Z-direction helical approach scheme

Clearance Z

E33
Clearance Z + Cutting allowance Z

Approaching radius

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After stop of movement % 1 to 999

2-108

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

The approaching distance value to be used in a Z-direction tapered approach scheme for tapered machining is automatically determined by the parameter as follows: Approaching distance = Tool dia. E34 100

- For tapered approach (3 tapers)

Approaching distance (E35/100)

Element that automatically determines an approaching distance in a Z-direction tapered approach scheme

Clearance Z Clearance Z + Cutting allowance Z

E34

Approaching distance

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After stop of movement

1 to 999
Approaching gradient value for a Z-direction tapered approach scheme Distance in Z-direction Distance in XY-plane

- For tapered approach (3 tapers)

Approaching distance (E35/100)

Clearance Z

Approaching gradient for a Z-direction tapered approach scheme

E35

Clearance Z + Cutting allowance Z

Approaching distance

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After stop of movement % 1 to 999

2-109

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

The escape distance value to be used in the Z-direction tapered escape scheme after tapered machining is automatically determined by the parameter as follows: Element that automatically determines an escape distance in the Z-direction tapered escape scheme Escape distance = Tool dia. E36 100

E36

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate % 1 to 100
Escape distance

Clearance Z

This parameter indicates the amount of return of pecking in the Z-axial pecking mode of face machining.

Amount of return of pecking in the Z-axial pecking mode of face machining

E37

E37

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After stop of movement 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999

Pecking

E37

MPL058

Set the returning feed rate of the pecking in the Z-axial pecking mode during the face machining. [1] Returning feed rate of pecking in the Z-axial pecking mode of face machining [2] [3] [1] Cutting [2] Pecking [3] Cutting Feed rate (G1) F command (G1) E38 (G1) F command

E38
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0.01 mm/rev 0.001 in/rev 0 to 9999 Invalid

Note: This value will be handled as100 if 0 is set here.

E39 to E54
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-110

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

Feed overriding for cutting a workpiece in an axial direction using a 3-D unit
Example:

3-D Axial cutting-feed overriding

FR E55 10

FR E55 10 E59

E55
Depth of cut

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 10% 0 to 9
High-speed rough processing Finish processing MPL041

Note: Feed overriding is invalid when this parameter is 0.

This parameter is used to select whether or not an alarm message is to be displayed if the curved surface of a defined pattern points in the Z direction (normally, processing becomes impossible). 3-D Inversion check of curved-surface pattern 0: No alarm 1: Alarm

E56

Example: The curved surface of a defined pattern points in the Z direction +Z

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1

+X
Note: This parameter is invalid during high-speed rough processing.

MPL042

This parameter is used to select whether or not processing is to be performed in strict accordance with the tool-sequence pitch data setting. 0: The pitch setting is not strictly observed. 1: The pitch setting is strictly observed.

3-D Severity check of cutting pitch

E57

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1

Notes: 1. This parameter is invalid during high-speed rough processing. 2. The operation time becomes long if this parameter is set to 1.

This parameter is used to select whether or not 3-D tool-diameter compensation according to tool data is to be made for the curved surface of a defined pattern 3-D Tool-diameter compensation 0: Diameter compensation made 1: Diameter compensation not made

E58

Example:

Pattern

Pattern

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1

Diameter compensation made

Diameter compensation not made

MPL043

2-111

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

Element used to set the position in which the cutting feed in axial direction is to be started after the tool has been moved from the initial point toward the workpiece at a rapid feed rate 3-D Allowance of axial-cutting start position
Example: E59 Material height E59 Workpiece Normal-speed or high-speed rough processing Pattern Finish processing MPL044

E59

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 999

The 3-D finish processing (cutting) allowance in the direction of the normal with respect to the defined pattern of the curved surface

Example:
3-D Normal cutting allowance

E60 E60

E60

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 999 The length of a short line segment which determines the next approximation point for tool-path creation Depending on the tool-sequence selected:

MPL045

3-D Search length for parallel cutting

E61 is applicable for //-1 or //-2, or E62 is applicable for -1 or -2

E61

This value will be handled as 0.1 mm (or 0.01 in) if 0 is set here.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 999

3-D Search length for right-angle cutting

E62

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 999

2-112

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

The number of segments into which the defined pattern of a curved surface is to be divided for display of the curved-surface pattern on the TOOL PATH CHECK display 3-D Pattern display division segment (FL direction)
Example:

E64

E63

E63

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0 to 999

GL or normal to FL FL MPL046

3-D Pattern display division segment (GL direction)

Note: This parameter is used for display of a curved-surface pattern, and thus the pattern displayed may slightly differ from the actual pattern of the curved surface to be machined.

E64

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0 to 999 The allowance of cutting a workpiece along the wall of the area which has been set using the area check function
Example:

3-D Radial cutting allowance for area check

E65

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 999 Pattern Min.

E65 E65 E66 E66

Max.

3-D Axial cutting allowance for area check

E66

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 999

2-113

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

The processing error tolerance with respect to a curved-surface pattern which corresponds to a #T setting (1 through 9) of the tool sequence
#T 1 E67 2 E68 3 E69 4 E70 5 E71 6 E72 7 E73 8 E74 9 E75

E67 to E75

3-D Processing error tolerance

Address

Example:

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.01 mm/0.001 in 0 to 999 The override value which becomes valid in case that the depth-of-cut in a radial direction becomes equal to the entire width (diameter) of the tool

#T #T

Curved-surface pattern MPL048

Example:
3-D Entire-width override

E76

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 10% 0 to 9

Tool-sequence feed

E76 10

MPL049

Note: Entire-width overriding is not valid when this parameter is 0.

The clearance of high-speed rough processing (workpiece size appointment) between the tool and the figure 3-D Radial cutting allowance for high-speed rough processing (workpiece size appointment)

Workpiece

E77

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 999 0: 100%

Defined pattern E77 E77

3-D Multiplying factor set for tolerance

E78

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate % 0 to 100

2-114

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

Invalid

E79 to E82
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range That amount of offset from a curved-surface pattern which determines the region of high-speed rough processing (offset appointment) in a radial direction

E83

3-D Region of radial machining during highspeed rough processing (offset appointment)

Region to be machined Material height Curved-surface pattern

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 9999

E83
That distance from the bottom of a curved-surface pattern which determines the region of high-speed rough processing (offset appointment) in an axial direction
Example:
Region to be machined Material height

MPL051

E84

3-D Region of axial machining during highspeed rough processing (offset appointment)

E84

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 9999

E83 Curved-surface pattern MPL052

2-115

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

The factor that determines the region of high-speed rough processing (workpiece size appointment) in a radial direction 3-D Region of radial machining during highspeed rough processing: X

E88

E85

(workpiece size appointment)

E85
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 9999

E86 Curved-surface pattern

+Y

3-D Region of radial machining during highspeed rough processing: +X

+X

E87 Region to be machined

MPL053

E86

(workpiece size appointment)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 9999

3-D Region of radial machining during highspeed rough processing: Y

E87

(workpiece size appointment)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 9999

3-D Region of radial machining during highspeed rough processing: +Y

E88

(workpiece size appointment)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 9999

2-116

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

That distance from the bottom of a curved-surface pattern which determines the region of high-speed rough processing (workpiece size appointment) in an axial direction
Example:
Region to be machined Curved-surface pattern Material height +Z E89 +X E85 E86 MPL054

3-D Region of axial machining during highspeed rough processing

E89

(workpiece size appointment)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 9999 Invalid

E90

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-117

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

76543210
0: Machining from inside to outside 1: Machining from outside to inside 0: Cutting direction inversed 1: Cutting direction fixed 0: The R-point height is set always to E9. 1: The R-point height is set to E7 or E9 when there is or isnt pre-machining in the same unit, respectively. 0: The clearance on X-Y plane is set always to E2. 1: The clearance on X-Y plane is set to E5 or E2 when there is or isnt pre-machining in the same unit, respectively. 1: Rapid feed up to the intended surface + E9 0: Tool path based on inside shape 1: Tool path based on outside shape Tool-path pattern selection for end millingmountain unit
Notes: 1. If bit 0 = 0, tool path based on inside shape is selected automatically, irrespective of value of bit 7. 2. If bit 0 = 1 and bit 7 = 0, fixed direction of cutting is selected automatically, irrespective of value of bit 1. 3. Bit 4 becomes valid only for two or more rounds of cutting.

E91

Bit 4 = 0 E9

Bit 4 = 1 Initial point E7 1st cutting 2nd cutting

MPL055

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

76543210
0: Machining from inside to outside 1: Machining from outside to inside Tool-path pattern selection for pocket milling unit 0: The R-point height is set always to E9. 1: The R-point height is set to E7 or E9 when there is or isnt pre-machining in the same unit, respectively. 0: The clearance on X-Y plane is set always to E2. 1: The clearance on X-Y plane is set to E5 or E2 when there is or isnt pre-machining in the same unit, respectively. 1: Rapid feed up to the intended surface + E9

E92

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

2-118

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

76543210
0: Machining from inside to outside 1: Machining from outside to inside 0: Cutting direction inversed 1: Cutting direction fixed 0: The R-point height is set always to E9. 1: The R-point height is set to E7 or E9 when there is or isnt pre-machining in the same unit, respectively. Tool-path pattern selection for pocket milling-mountain unit 0: The clearance on X-Y plane is set always to E2. 1: The clearance on X-Y plane is set to E5 or E2 when there is or isnt pre-machining in the same unit, respectively. 1: Rapid feed up to the intended surface + E9

E93

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

76543210
0: Machining from inside to outside 1: Machining from outside to inside 0: Cutting direction inversed 1: Cutting direction fixed 0: The R-point height is set always to E9. 1: The R-point height is set to E7 or E9 when there is or isnt pre-machining in the same unit, respectively. Tool-path pattern selection for pocket milling-valley unit 0: The clearance on X-Y plane is set always to E2. 1: The clearance on X-Y plane is set to E5 or E2 when there is or isnt pre-machining in the same unit, respectively. 1: Rapid feed up to the intended surface + E9

E94

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

2-119

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

76543210
In case of a collision in the line-machining approach path: 0: Machining not aborted (conventional method) 1: Machining aborted For the 2nd and subsequent rounds of cutting: 0: Not via the approach point 1: Via the approach point For the 2nd and subsequent rounds of cutting: 0: Escape to the Z-axis initial point 1: No escape on the Z-axis 1: Rapid feed up to the intended surface + E9 1: Escape is set to a point where the tool comes out of the removal allowance. The R-point height for central, right hand, left hand, outside and inside linear machining is: 0: Set always to E9 1: Set to E7 or E9 when there is or isnt premachining in the same unit, respectively. The X-Y plane clearance for outside and inside linear machining is: 0: Set always to E2 1: Set to E5 or E2 when there is or isnt premachining in the same unit, respectively. - Bit 2

Bit 2 = 1
Tool-path pattern selection for line machining unit

Bit 2 = 0 Initial point

E95
1st removal allowance 2nd removal allowance Approach point
- Bit 3

Cutting start point

MPL501

Approach point Bit 3 = 0

Escape point Initial point

Bit 3 = 1

1st removal allowance 2nd removal allowance MPL502

- Bit 5 Bit 5 = 0

Bit 5 = 1 E2

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

WID-R

Escape point

E2

MPL503

Note: Bit 3 valid only for inside/outside line machining unit.

2-120

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

76543210
0: The R-point height is set always to E9. 1: The R-point height is set to E7 or E9 when there is or isnt pre-machining in the same unit, respectively. For the 2nd and subsequent rounds of cutting: 0: Not via the approach point 1: Via the approach point 1: Rapid feed up to the intended surface + E9 Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits Returning feed rate override of the end millingslot unit 0: Invalid 1: Valid

Tool-path pattern selection for end millingslot unit

E96

76543210
0: The R-point height is set always to E9 Tool-path pattern selection for end millingtop unit 1: The R-point height is set to E7 or E9 when there is or isnt pre-machining in the same unit, respectively. 1: Rapid feed up to the intended surface + E9

E97

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

76543210
1: The 1st cutting amount exceeds the command value at end milling-mountain or pocket valley-machining.

Cutting method selection for end millingmountain, pocket milling-valley unit

E98

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

76543210
Milling feed rate specification range for the shape sequence of the MAZATROL program 0: Valid for roughing 1: Valid for finishing Bottom/wall simultaneous finishing mode for pocket machining 0: Sequential (Conventional scheme) 1: Simultaneous Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits Interference check between the approach point and the cutting starting point of face machining 0: Invalid 1: Valid

E99

2-121

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

Invalid

E100 to E103
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

76543210
Returning position for each cutting operation during face machining. 0: Clearance point 1: Initial point Returning position during face machining. 0: Clearance point 1: Initial point Returning position during line machining. 0: Clearance point 1: Initial point Selecting an infeed position when a CLOSED attribute is assigned to the wall of line machining 0: Starting or ending point of shape + Tool radius + E30 1: Starting or ending point of shape Calculation of the ZC machining feed rate 0: Calculation based on finishing surface (MATRIX scheme) 1: Calculation based on the starting position of machining (MT Pro scheme) Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

E104

76543210
Select whether to make any angle specifiable for the B-axis during C-axis central line machining. 0: Specifiable 1: Not specifiable Selection of the surface on which to describe a line machining shape in the ZC mode 0: Developed surface of the cylinder with a radius of SHIFT-R 1: Developed surface of the cylinder with a radius of SHIFT-R + SRV-A

E105

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

2-122

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

LINE/FACE/3D
Description

Address

Invalid

E106 to E144
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-123

PARAMETER

2-3-4

User parameter
USER

EIA/ISO (F)
Display title

Classification

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Meaning

When (L74/L75) (F1/100) is assigned as the allowable acceleration attained before corner deceleration is started, the theoretical value Vo of the corner deceleration in G61.1 will be changed to the following Vo value: G61.1 corner deceleration coefficient (%) Vo = Vo F1/100

F1
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate % 0 to 500

Note: The assigned value is invalid if minus. If 0 is assigned, the deceleration coefficient will be regarded as 100, or if more than 500 is assigned, the deceleration coefficient will be regarded as 500.

When (L74/L75) (F2/100) is assigned as the allowable acceleration attained before arc radius speed clamping is started, the theoretical value Vc of the arc radius clamping speed in G61.1 will be changed to the following Vc value: G61.1 arc-clamping speed coefficient (%) Vc = Vc
(F2/100)

F2
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate % 0 to 500

Note: The assigned value is invalid if minus. If 0 is assigned, the deceleration coefficient will be regarded as 100, or if more than 500 is assigned, the deceleration coefficient will be regarded as 500.

0: High-speed smoothing control invalid 1: High-speed smoothing control valid (No deceleration at very slightly stepped sections) High-speed smoothing control 3: High-speed smoothing control invalid (Deceleration at very slightly stepped sections)

F3
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E After stop of movement 0, 1, 3 Fixed value (0)

F4
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-124

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Fixed value (0)

F5
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range Specify the minimum height of stepped sections at which the axis feed is not to be decelerated in high-speed smoothing control mode. Minimum allowable height of stepped sections for deceleration in high-speed smoothing control mode

F6
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 100 Fixed value (0)

F7
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range Corner deceleration speed Vo determined by the optimal corner deceleration function is adjusted using the value set in this parameter.
F8 Vo = Vo 100

Corner deceleration speed coefficient for high-speed smoothing control

The speed is not adjusted if 0 is set here. (Setting is handled as 100.) Setting more than 2000 is disposed as 2000.

F8
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E Immediate % 0 to 2000

2-125

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Circular cutting clamp speed Vc is adjusted using the value set in this parameter. Vc = Vc Circular cutting clamp speed coefficient for high-speed smoothing control
F9 100

The speed is not adjusted if 0 is set here. (Setting is handled as 100.) Setting more than 500 is disposed as 500.

F9
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E Immediate % 0 to 500

Invalid

F10
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

(I, J, K) Machining pattern

Vector constant for 3-D tool-diameter compensation

d Vector normal to face

F11
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range Next block 0.001 mm/0.0001 in (0.001) 0 to 99999999
Note: F11 =

I d 2 F11 J d y = y0 + 2 F11 K d z = z0 + 2 F11 x = x0 +

Coordinates of program (x0, y0, z0)

Coordinates of tool center (x, y, z)

MPL057

I2+J2+K2 if this parameter is 0.

Return amount of pecking in drill high-speed deep-hole cycle or in G73 tool path

Return amount of pecking in drill highspeed deep-hole cycle or in G73

F12
F12

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Next block 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999

Pecking

F12 MPL058

2-126

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

The allowance amount provided for the tool to stop moving at rapid-feed just in front of the preceding hole during a deep-hole drilling cycle or during G83/G283 tool path Allowance amount of rapid-feed stop in deep-hole drilling cycle or in G83/G283

F13
F13
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Next block 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

F13 MPL059

Rotation center of coordinates (axis of abscissa)

F14

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

At power on 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999

Rotation center of coordinates (axis of ordinate)

F15

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

At power on 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999 Vector of coordinate rotation (axis of abscissa)

Horizontal length of coordinate rotation

F16

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

At power on 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999

2-127

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Vector of coordinate rotation (axis of ordinate)

Vertical length of coordinate rotation

F17

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

At power on 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999 Angle of coordinate rotation

Angle of coordinate rotation

F18

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

At power on 0.001 0 to 180000 Maximum radius difference that causes spiral interpolation to be performed when the arc-drawing start point and end point radii that have been specified in the arc command do not agree.

Maximum permissible difference in arc radius

Specified end point

R F19: Spiral interpolation R > F19: Alarm

F19
R
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Next block 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 9999 That fixed value of the scaling factor which becomes valid in the case that no value is set (using the address P) in the same block as that of G51. b Scaling factor = a Machining pattern b
a

End point according to start point Center Start point MPL060

Fixed value of scaling factor

F20

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Next command 1/1000000 0 to 99999999

Scaling center Program pattern MPL061

2-128

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

The automatic corner override using the G62 code becomes valid when the following condition of the shape angle is met: Shape angle F21 Maximum inside-corner angle available with automatic corner override (G62)

Pattern angle

F21

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Next command 0 to 179 The area in which automatic corner overriding using the G62 code occurs

Overriding occurs here.

MPL062

Deceleration area of automatic corner overriding (G62)

F22

F22
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E Next command 0.001 mm/0.0001 in (0.001) 0 to 99999999 Invalid

Overriding occurs here.

MPL063

F23 to F26
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

0: Only the last G92SsQqRr command is enabled. 1: All the G92SsQqRr commands are enabled. 2 to 8: Not used.

Handling of G92 (spindle speed clamp value) command at restart

9: The spindle speed clamp value is invalid at restart.

F27

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0 to 9

2-129

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Set chamfering angle at thread portion in thread cutting cycle. G276 and G292 are used for thread cutting cycle, if F30 is set to 0. G76 and G92 are used for thread cutting cycle, if F30 is set to 1. Threading chamfering angle
F28

F28

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 45, 60
Note: Set 45 or 60.

Chamfering data

NM211-00219

The override value of automatic corner overriding using the G62 code

Override value of automatic corner overriding (G62)

F29 100

Specified feed rate F

F29
MPL064
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E Next command % 0 to 100 Select a G-code type. 0: G-code series for machining centers 1: G-code series for turning machines G-code type selection Settings other than the above are all handled as 0.
Note: The automatic corner overriding is invalid when this parameter is 0.

F30
Note: Do not disturb the default setting. It is a fixed value for your machine model.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E At power on Decimal number 0, 1

Select a roughing priority type for program layout (Rearrangement of milling tool sequence). 0: Rearranging a roughing tool, a normal tool, and a finishing tool, in that order 1: Rearranging a roughing tool, a normal tool, and a finishing tool, in that order Further rearranging each tool with priority given to the same tool (with roughing/finishing tool distinction) 2: Milling to be excluded from tool rearrangement. Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M After stop of movement Decimal number 0 to 3 3: Rearranging each tool with priority given to the same tool (with roughing/finishing tool distinction)

F31

2-130

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Select operation when argument R is omitted from the maximum/minimum spindle speed setting. Operation when argument R is omitted from the maximum/minimum spindle speed setting 0: Alarm 1: Handled as R1

F32

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0, 1

76543210
Select whether to make the incorporation of the tool length into current-position counter Z valid when tool length correction is in a canceled status, irrespective of whether the program selected on the POSITION display is EIA/ISO or MAZATROL. 0: Valid 1: Invalid Type of the tool to be automatically set in the MATRIX program, created by loading an M640T or T-NEXUS program, for a unit which corresponds to the original units BAR FCE, CPY FCE, EDG FCE, EDG BAK, BAR BAK, and CPY BAK. 0: Facing tool 1: Outside turning tool Modal indication for G-code group No. 1 in the fixed cycle mode 0: The indication at the selection of the fixed cycle remains as it is throughout the cycle. (No updating) 1: The indication changes to show the actual modal condition of the cycle operation. Modal indication on radius data input for X-axis in the mode of 3D coordinate conversion (G68.5) 0: The indication at the G68.5 mode selection remains as it is. 1: G122.1 (radius data input for X-axis ON) is indicated during the G68.5 mode.

F33

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

2-131

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

76543210

Cancellation of the ram spindle offset command (G52.1) when the RESET key is pressed 0: Invalid (G52.1 hold) 1: Valid The data number and value for tool length offset on the POSITION display upon execution of a G49 (Tool length offset OFF) command 0: Not changed at all 1: Reset to zero (0) (Only for the INTEGREX-e Series) To manually override the parts count (current number of machined workpieces) in the middle of automatic operation 0: Impossible (The operation caused by the ATC and RETURN settings in the end unit occurs with respect to the parts count.) 1: Possible (The operation caused by the ATC and RETURN settings in the end unit occurs irrespectively of the parts count.)

F34

Programming type for inclined-surface machining 0: Type A 1: Type B Compensating movement for a T-code with a movement command in one block 0: No compensating movement on an unspecified axis till completion of the specified movement 1: Simultaneous compensating movement on all the axes including unspecified one, on condition that the tool number is not changed Application of Z-OFFSET and C-OFFSET values for the tape operation mode 0: Application of the Z-OFFSET and C-OFFSET values prepared for the program that is currently selected from the STANDARD PROGRAM storage area for the automatic operation 1: No application of the Z-OFFSET and COFFSET values prepared on the SETUP INFORMATION display

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

Note: Bit 6 of F34 is valid only when G-code series T (Turning machines) is selected and F161 bit 2 is set to 1.

Select whether or not multiple material pieces can be arranged on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display. 0: Arrangement of a single piece Multiple material pieces arrangement on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display 1: Arrangement of multiple pieces

F35
(bit 0)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0, 1

2-132

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Automatic setting of the material model for a MAZATROL program of initial-point scheme on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display. Automatic setting of the material model for a MAZATROL program of initial-point scheme on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display 0: Valid 1: Invalid

F35
(bit 1)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M At power on 0, 1 Machine status when assigning G-code for a cutting function not to be represented with the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD being selected for automatic operation.

F35
(bit 2)

Machine status when assigning G-code for a cutting function not to be represented with the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD being selected for automatic operation

0: Continuing the operation by canceling the interference check function for material model 1: Alarm stop

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0, 1 Machine status when a program prepared and stored for the Hard Disk operation is called up as a subprogram with the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD being selected for automatic operation. 0: Continuing the operation by canceling the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD for automatic operation 1: Alarm stop

F35
(bit 3)

Machine status when a program prepared and stored for the Hard Disk operation is called up as a subprogram with the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD being selected for automatic operation

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0, 1 Representation of cutting-off or parting operation by turning on the VIRTUAL MACHINING and 3D MONITOR displays

F35
(bit 4)

Taking-off a material models part in the flow of turning operation on the VIRTUAL MACHINING and 3D MONITOR displays

0: No representation (Cut-off part remains shown in its original place and undergoes the interference check.) 1: Representation (Cut-off part is hidden and excluded from the interference check.)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1

2-133

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Invalid

F35
(bit 5)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Representation of cutting-off or parting operation by milling on the VIRTUAL MACHINING and 3D MONITOR displays

F35
(bit 6)

Taking-off a material models part in the flow of milling operation on the VIRTUAL MACHINING and 3D MONITOR displays

0: No representation (Cut-off part remains shown in its original place and undergoes the interference check.) 1: Representation (Cut-off part is hidden and excluded from the interference check.)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1 Select whether or not it is to be indicated by an alarm message that the feed-overriding value has been changed in the flow of automatic operation with the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD being active. 0: Alarming 1: No alarming

F35
(bit 7)

Alarming for a change of feed-overriding value with the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD being active for automatic operation

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1 Invalid

F36
(bit 0) to (bit 3) Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-134

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Whether or not the chuck and tailstock areas are to be displayed for an EIA/ISO program on the TRACE or TOOL PATH CHECK display Display of the chuck and tailstock areas for an EIA/ISO program on the TRACE or TOOL PATH CHECK display 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed

F36
(bit 4)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0, 1 Invalid

F36
(bit 5)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

F36 bit 6

F36
(bit 6)

Number of effective decimal digits in the tool axis vectors components (I, J, K) for tool tip point control type 2 (G43.5)

0 1

System of units mm in mm in

Command unit 0.0001 0.00001 0.0000001 0.0000001

Minimum value 99999.9999 9999.99999 99.9999999 99.9999999

Maximum value 99999.9999 9999.99999 99.9999999 99.9999999

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0, 1 0: Invalid 1: Valid

Rotational axis prefiltering

F36
(bit 7)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0, 1

2-135

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

76543210

Temporary cancellation of geometry compensation for G0 (rapid traverse) in the mode of tool tip point control 0: Invalid 1: Valid For turning machines only: Alarming for a subprogram call command given in a manual program (MANL PRG) unit 0: No alarming 1: Alarming

F37

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits Invalid

F38

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Default setting of the modal plane selection G-code to be used for an EIA/ISO program (called by a subprogram unit) and a manual program unit.

Plane to be used for an EIA/ISO program (called by a subprogram unit) and a manual program unit

F39

0: G17 1: G18 2: G19 Settings other than the above are all handled as 0.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0 to 2 0: 1: 2: 3: Tape operation Hard disc operation IC memory card operation Ethernet operation

Operating method selection in tape mode

F40

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0 to 3

2-136

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Set a threading termination waiting time.

F41 = 0 No waiting time F41 = 1 to 255 Setting 1.7 ms

X-axis F41 < F41 < F41 Incomplete thread

Threading termination waiting time processing

Complete thread

F41
F41

F41 F41 Z-axis Gradual deceleration on the Z-axis Uniform feed

Note: An excessively high setting may cause the thread of the run-out section to be destroyed.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 1.7 ms 0 to 255 Distance (r) between the starting point of movement at measuring speed and the measuring point This data is used when argument R is omitted in G37 command format.

Deceleration area r during Z-axis measurement

G37 Z_ Rr D_ F_;

F42

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E After stop of movement 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999 Range (d) where the tool should stop This data is used when argument D is omitted in G37 command format. (G37)

Measurement area d during Z-axis measurement

G37 Z_ R_ Dd F_;

F43

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E After stop of movement 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999 (G37)

2-137

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Measuring speed (f) This data is used when argument F is omitted in G37 command format.
G37 Z_ R_ D_ Ff;

Measuring speed f Standard setting

F44

1 to 60000 mm/min 1 to 2362 in/min

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E After stop of movement mm/min / in/min 0 to 120000 Distance (r) between the starting point of movement at measuring speed and the measuring point This data is used when argument R is omitted in G37 command format. (G37)

Deceleration area r during X-axis measurement

G37 X_ Rr D_ F_;

F45

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E After stop of movement 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999 Range (d) where the tool should stop This data is used when argument D is omitted in G37 command format. (G37)

Deceleration area d during X-axis measurement

G37 X_ R_ Dd F_;

F46

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E After stop of movement 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999 The name of the variable specified by the user macro SETVN is displayed (Name display only. No setting is possible on the PARAMETER display.)
F47: Name of #500

(G37)

F47 to F66

Common variable name

F66: Name of #519

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-138

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Invalid

F67 F68
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range This parameter is used to select the method of specifying the EIA/ISO program restarting position. Two methods are available: 0: EIA/ISO program restart method The whole program, including the subprograms, is subjected to this processing. Set the sequence number, block number and number of times of repetition as searched from the beginning part of the main program. The subprogram including the desired restart position can be specified. After setting the work number of the corresponding program, set the sequence number, block number, and number of times of repetition as searched from the beginning part.

F69

1:

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0, 1

When the EIA/ISO program is called up as a subprogram, this parameter is used to validate/invalidate multiple-machining and the specified number of times to restart the program. Availability of multiple-machining and designated number of repetitions in the EIA/ISO subprogram 0: Multiple-machining is ineffective for the EIA/ISO subprogram. Specified number of times to restart the EIA/ISO subprogram is effective. Multiple-machining is effective for the EIA/ISO subprogram. Specified number of times to restart the EIA/ISO subprogram is ineffective.

F70

1:

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 Tool priority and multiple-machining priority selection 0: 1: Identical-tool priority function is executed first. Multiple-machining function is executed first.

Machining order control

Example: Multiple-machining of two workpieces using a spot drill

F71 = 0 F71 = 1

F71

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1
MPL065

2-139

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

To select whether the shape correction function of the MAZATROL program is always effective or ineffective. 0: 1: Invalid Shape correction function valid

Selection of the shape correction function of the MAZATROL program

F72

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

0, 1 The tool-path check time study time that is accumulated each time an Mcode is output.

M-code execution time for time study

F73

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.01 s 0 to 10000 The tool-path check time study time that is accumulated each time an Scode is output.

S-code execution time for time study

F74

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.01 s 0 to 10000 The tool-path check time study time that is accumulated each time a Tcode is output.

T-code execution time for time study

F75

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.01 s 0 to 10000

2-140

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

The tool-path check time study time that is accumulated each time a Bcode is output.

B-code execution time for time study

F76

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.01 s 0 to 10000 The basis rate for the NC to judge whether the tool is to be displayed in reverse display mode on the TOOL DATA display to indicate that the life of that tool is approaching expiry.

Basis rate for tool life judgment

F77

If bit 2 in F82 is 0: When the rate of the operation time to the estimated life exceeds the setting of the F77 parameter, the NC will judge the tool to be approaching expiry. If bit 2 in F82 is 1: When the residual life decreases below the setting of the F77 parameter, the NC will judge the tool to be approaching expiry.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate %, min 0 to 9999

Note: The above judgment function is invalid if this parameter is set to 0.

Selection of separation ratio between side view and front view (or rear view) when two split plane indication mode has been selected.
F78 = 0 ...................... 1:1 F78 = 1 ...................... 2:1 F78 = 2 ...................... 5:1 Example: F78 = 1

Selection of separating ratio of graphic display

F78

Graphic display Side view

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate 0, 1, 2

Front view

2:1

NM211-00217

2-141

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

76543210

F79

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate (Bit 3: At power on) Bit Binary, eight digits

Holding of memory monitor address 0: No 1: Yes Selection of menu display 0: Menu for machining centers 1: Menu for turning centers Key history function 0: Yes 1: No Tool search method 0: In order of TNo. 1: In order of TNo. of tools currently in use * Only bit 3 becomes valid after power-on. Selection of tap gear 0: M32 system 1: M640M Pro system (M640M/M PLUS system) Display of tools currently in use 0: No 1: Yes Initial value of synchronous/asynchronous tapping during tapping tool registration 0: Synchronous tapping 1: Asynchronous tapping * This parameter is valid only when a sync tapping option is provided. Display of a MAZATROL monitor window 0: Yes 1: No

76543210

F80

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

MAZATROL function 0: Valid 1: Invalid (Only EIA-related displays valid) Automatic display of the navigation window on the occurrence of an alarm 0: Display off 1: Display on MAINTENANCE CHECK display at power on 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed Third page of the MAINTENANCE CHECK display 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed Automatic display of the GRAPHIC MAINTENANCE display on the occurrence of an alarm 0: Display off 1: Display on Learning of cutting conditions 0: Invalid 1: Valid Editing on the CUTTING CONDITION LEARN display 0: Invalid 1: Valid Destination of spare tool correction by the workpiece measurement 0: Tool length and tool diameter of the TOOL DATA display 1: Tool length and tool diameter correction of the TOOL DATA display

2-142

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

76543210
Program management function 0: Normal 1: Editing prohibited (in 9000s) Program management function 0: Normal 1: Displaying prohibited (in 9000s) Fixed value (0) Add-in MAZATROL 0: Invalid 1: Valid Program management function 0: Normal 1: Editing prohibited (in 8000, 9000s) Program management function 0: Normal 1: Displaying prohibited (in 8000, 9000s) Retaining the program transfer settings 0: Invalid 1: Valid Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits Input error prevention function 0: Invalid 1: Valid

F81

76543210
0: Characteristics estimation result graph display off 1: Characteristics estimation results graph display on Selection of inch/metric representation in POSITION display, TOOL DATA display, and TOOL OFFSET display modes 0: Invalid 1: Valid Basis for tool life judgment 0: Whether the rate of the operation time to the estimated life is greater than the setting of the F77 parameter 1: Whether the residual life is less than the setting of the F77 parameter X-axis diameter display on the POSITION display 0: Invalid 1: Valid Specify whether the stored tools registration function on the VISUAL TOOL MANAGEMENT display is to be made valid or invalid when the visual tool ID/data management functions are valid 0: Invalid 1: Valid Select whether to make the incorporation of tool nose width valid when grooving tool length is auto-set for the B-axis type of turret. 0: Invalid 1: Valid Index tool wear correction setup during automatic operation 0: Impossible 1: Possible M Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits
Notes: 1. Bit 1 in parameter F82 is valid only when an inch/metric unit system change simplifying function (option) is provided. 2. Bit 4 in parameter F82 is valid only for the X-axis for which bit 5 in M18 is set to 0, and the diameter value is displayed in turning mode. (Only for the INTEGREX e Series)

F82

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-143

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

76543210
Output of the alarm history data as text data 0: Valid 1: Invalid Operation record function 0: Invalid 1: Valid Select the attribute of the starting/ending point of line machining after loading a program of M640 series onto the MATRIX (only for a program of Z-offset scheme) 0: CLOSED 1: OPEN

F83

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

76543210
Tool offset data is taken into account for the POSITION counter during execution of EIA programs 0: No 1: Yes Fixed cycle (B J) 0: B 1: J Spare tool search for EIA 0: Group number assignment 1: Tool number assignment Timing to validate new workpiece offset data specified with a system variable 0: Valid when the workpiece offset is specified after a system variable is entered. 1: Valid immediately after a system variable is entered. G92 selection 0: M32, M PLUS, M640M, or M640M Pro system 1: M2 system Incremental/absolute data command in high-speed machining mode 0: Always incremental data command 1: Based on the modal G90/G91 command valid before high-speed machining mode is turned on Tape operation 0: Not operated until the buffer is full. 1: Operated at a unit of EOB. When no tool data has been designated during EIA/ISO program execution with the MAZATROL tool length data validated. 0: Operation is executed. 1: Alarm state Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits

F84

2-144

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

76543210
Table rotational machining 0: Always valid 1: Outside the area only Ignorance of radial interference check Type of coordinate system for controlling the tool tip point 0: The table coordinate system that rotates according to the particular rotation of the C-axis is defined as the programming coordinate system. 1: The work coordinate system is defined as the programming coordinate system. Tool tip point control scheme 0: Uniaxial rotation interpolation 1: Joint interpolation Fixed value (0) Reset to cancel G68.2 0: Valid 1: Invalid Display of surface definition 0: Invalid 1: Valid Output of the B-axis unclamping code before B-axis indexing 0: To output 1: Not to output (Valid only for MAZATROL programs of the INTEGREX and INTEGREX-e series.) - bit 3 = 0
Y R2 RC1

F85

Tool tip

R1 Z

In the case of uni-axis rotational interpolation, the pivot point of the machine moves as denoted by the arrow. The tool attitude vector moves in a plane including R1 and R2.

Face horizontal to R1 and R2

X

- bit 3 = 1
In the case of joint interpolation, the pivot point of the machine moves as denoted by the arrow. The tool attitude vector moves along a conical surface.

Y
RC2 R2 R1

Tool tip

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits

X

Lateral face of the cone

2-145

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

76543210
Output of M250 (Spindle Speed Confirmation) before a turning feed 0: Not to output 1: To output Milling-spindle start timing for a milling unit (with MILL&TURN. set under TYPE of UNo. 0) 0: After tool change 1: At the initial point Override scheme for G0 during tool tip point control 0: Override valid for the movement of the tool tip point 1: Override valid for the clamping speed at the machine control point Display of the PART SHAPE window 0: Display on the X-Y plane 1: Display on the X-Z plane Override scheme for G1 during tool tip point control 0: Override valid for the movement of the tool tip point 1: Override valid for the clamping speed at the machine control point Selection of rotary axis reference position for tool tip point control 0: Position during the start of tool tip point control 1: Position with the rotary axis at 0 degrees - bit 2 = 0 Makes the override function valid for the movement of the tool tip point.

F86

Tool tip point

- bit 2 = 1 Makes the override function valid for the clamping speed at the machine control point. If the moving speed of the axis exceeds the setting of machine parameter M1 (i.e., the maximum rapid feed rate), the override function will work for that setting. Machine control point

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits

2-146

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

76543210
Machine offset by each change in the deviation vector 0: Valid 1: Invalid Check for mismatch of the workpiece origin and table rotation center 0: Valid (an alarm is output in case of a mismatch) 1: Invalid Data alteration checking function (tool-related function) 0: Invalid 1: Valid Select a feed rate display method for the superposition system. 0: Display in terms of moving speed of actual axis 1: Display in terms of relative speed with respect to the workpiece Single-block mode cancellation during fixed cycle 0: Invalid (single-block stop occurs) 1: Valid (single-block stop does not occur) Common variables (#500 and on) are cleared by resetting or at the program end. 0: Invalid 1: Valid Local variables are cleared by resetting or at the program end. 0: Invalid 1: Valid Common variables (#100 to #199) are cleared by resetting or at the program end. 0: Invalid 1: Valid
Note: Variables for tool path check are not cleared even if Bit 5, 6 or 7 in F87 is set to 1.

F87

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits

2-147

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Set this parameter to specify functions related to the conversion from MAZATROL program into an EIA program.

76543210
Conversion of a part of program into sub-program (See Note.) Output method of G-code for point machining 0: G-code of fixed cycle 1: G-code in 1 digit Output of G10 and G92.5 in conversion of WPC data 0: Not to output 1: To output Output of tool diameter correction G-code 0: Not to output G-code 1: To output G-code Tool path modification caused by tool diameter correction 0: Correction is not included in path 1: Correction is included in path Fixed value (0) Fixed value (1)
Note: When bit 0 of F88 is set to 1 on converting to the EIA program, the line machining, groove machining, face machining portions in the MAZATROL program are respectively programmed as subprograms. Example:

Notes:

F88

Common unit M [1] FCE MILL [4] [2] M LINE CTR [5] M [3] END

1. Subprograms that can be called out of the MAZATROL program are not reprogrammed as subprograms of the EIA program. 2. Manual program mode unit is not programmed as subprogram. 3. It can be selected to make a subprogram with parameter. 1: To make subprogram F88 bit 0 0: Not to make subprogram

Conversion into EIA program Main program

(WNo.1001); G17G0G40G54G64G90G94; G80; M [1] N1(UNo.2FACE-MILL); M98P1001H1; G1Z-2; M98P1001H1; G0Z100; [2] N2(UNo.3LINE-CTR); M98P1001H2; G0Z-2; N3(UNo.4END);[3]

Subprogram
N1(UNo.2FACE-MILL); G0X5.Y2.; G1X50.; M [4] G0X60.Y60.; M99; N2(UNo.3LINE-CTR); G2X10.Y10.R5.; G1X50.; M [5] G2X40.Y10.R5.; M99; %

Unit of machining units

Unit of machining units

M M

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

M30; %

Note: Bit 2 and 3 of F88 are valid only for machining centers.

2-148

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Set this parameter to specify functions related to the conversion from MAZATROL program into an EIA program.

76543210
Output of shape data 0: Not to output 1: To output Synchronous tapping G-code 0: G74/G84 1: G84.2/G84.3 Output of F command 0: To output 1: Not to output Whether to generate an output for EIA conversion of the mill-turning unit 0: Alarm (No output) 1: Output of the path shifted through a distance equivalent to the tool radius EIA conversion output destination 0: Standard area 1: Backup area Returning to the second zero point before tool change (output of G30) 0: Not to return 1: To return Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits Invalid Fixed value (0)

F89

F90

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-149

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

76543210

F91

In response to move command without decimal point: 0: Tool moves by 1/1. 1: Tool moves by 10/1. Coordinate system shift using a MAZATROL program: 0: Invalid 1: Valid 0: Stroke inside check before movement 1: Stroke outside check before movement Metric/inch system (Note) 0: Metric (Initial G20 is valid/invalid) 1: Inch In response to move command without decimal point: 0: Tool moves in 0.0001 mm (0.00001 in) increments. 1: Tool moves in 1 mm (1 in) increments. 0: G00 interpolation 1: G00 non-interpolation 0: G33E command is for the number of threads per inch 1: G33E command is for thread cutting with precise lead

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits

Note: Execute zero point return operation without fail before changing the setting of bit 4 (metric/inch system selection).

76543210
Modal at power-on or at reset (Initial G18) 0: G17 or G19 1: G18 Modal at power-on or at reset (Initial G19) 0: G17 or G18 1: G19 Dwell command method 0: Modal 1: Always based on the time command Tool-length compensation (G43 or G44) axis 0: Program command axis 1: Z-axis fixed Tool-diameter compensation (G41 or G42) start up/cancel type 0: Type A 1: Type B Tool-diameter compensation (G41 or G42) interference check 0: Alarm stop occurs to prevent overcutting. 1: Tool path is changed to prevent overcutting. Fixed-cycle hole-drilling axis 0: Plane selection using G17, G18 or G19 1: Z-axis fixed Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits
ACT-/NOSE-R in the TOOL DATA display for an EIA/ISO program 0: Invalid 1: Valid

F92

2-150

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

76543210
Modal at power-on or at reset 0: G94 (Feed per minute) 1: G95 (Feed per revolution) Modal at power-on or at reset 0: G91 (Incremental-value command) 1: G90 (Absolute-value command) Tool length of tool data for an EIA/ISO program 0: Invalid 1: Valid Feed rate during machine lock 0: Specified feed rate 1: Rapid feed rate Middle point during reference-point return 0: Return through middle point to reference point 1: Return directly to reference point Single-block operation mode at user macro operation instruction 0: Single-block stop does not occur (for operation). 1: Single-block stop occurs (for test). Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits Fixed value (0)

F93

76543210

Movement to hole-drilling position in fixed-cycle mode 0: Depends on modal state (G00 or G01) 1: Fixed at rapid feed rate (G00) 0: External deceleration signal valid 1: External deceleration signal invalid Tool length offsetting during G28/G30 execution 0: Offsetting is canceled 1: Offsetting is performed

Modal at power-on or at reset 0: G01 (Linear interpolation) 1: G00 (Positioning) Tool command method using T-codes 0: Assignment of group number on TOOL DATA display 1: Tool number (or pocket number) assignment Fixed value (0) Fixed value (1) Tool offset amount effectuated in an EIA/ISO program 0: effectuates tool offset amount on the TOOL OFFSET display. 1: effectuates tool offset amount for EIA/ISO program on the TOOL DATA display

F94

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits

2-151

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

76543210
Interrupt function using user macro instruction 0: Invalid 1: Valid Handling of macroprogram interruption and call 0: Handled as interruption 1: Handled as subprogram call Automatic return position to restart the program (Fixed to 1) 0: Manual return 1: Automatic return G00 (positioning) command feed rate for dry run 0: Rapid feed rate 1: Feed rate for dry run Manual-pulse interrupt amount cancellation with reset key 0: Invalid 1: Valid With reset key 0: Coordinate system corresponding to G54 1: Coordinate system unchanged.

F95

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits

76543210
Selection of variable number for tool offset amount 0: 16001 to 16512, 17001 to 17512 1: 12001 to 12512, 13001 to 13512 Fairing function 0: Invalid 1: Valid Processing for arc command blocks in high-speed machining mode 0: Nonuniform feed 1: Uniform feed Selection of a corner judgment criterion in highspeed machining mode 0: Judgment from the angle relative to adjacent blocks 1: Judgment by excluding the small block (if present between large-angle blocks) Selection of a cutting feed clamping speed in high-speed machining mode 0: Minimum clamping speed of movable axes 1: Clamping speed based on the radius of the curvature Rotational axis shape correction 0: Invalid 1: Valid

F96

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits

2-152

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

To select G-code modal of the coordinates system to be used in the EIA conversion function. Selection of G-code of the coordinates system to be used in the EIA conversion function Setting value 1 2 3 4 Coordinates system G54 G55 G56 G57 Setting value 5 6 Coordinates system G58 G59

F97

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 255

Others

G54

Note: F97 is valid only for machining centers.

To specify the number of a macro variable to be used in the EIA conversion function. If any macro variable is not used, set to 0. In case of output with a subprogram in the EIA conversion, the height of cutting face is set with a macro variable. Set to F98 the number of the macro variable to be used.
(M) (M) (M) (S) (M) (S) (M) (S) (S) (S) (S) (S) (S) (S) (S) (S) (S) (S) (S) (M) (S) (M) Main program (S) Subprogram Rapid feed Cutting feed (M)

MPL504

Number of macro variable to be used in the EIA conversion function

Main program

Subprogram

F98
G01Z_; #_=_;

To the height of cutting face

N_(_); M G00Z_; X_Y_; G01Z#_; XY_; M M99; %

Return on Z-axis Moves to the start point of the next machining on Z-axis Machining on Z-axis specified with the variable

Height of cutting face Macro variable (F98)

M98P_H_; M30; % M

[Units that use macro variables] FCE MILL (cutting in one direction), TOP EMIL, POCKET, PCKT MT, PCKT VLY
Notes: 1. 3D machining cannot be output using subprograms. 2. Subprogram is output in the absolute mode (G90).

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 100 to 199 500 to 999

2-153

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

In case of output with subprogram in the EIA conversion function:

Example: WNo. 10 When F99 is 20. EIA conversion (The WNo. of the converted program is assumed to be 1000.)

F99

Offset amount for the subprogram WNo. to the main WNo. concerned in case of output with subprogram in the EIA conversion function

Main Sub

WNo. 1000 WNo. 1020

Offset amount: 20 Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate 1 to 99999998 If the commanded distance in a block exceeds the spline cancel length (F100), spline interpolation is not realized in this block even in the spline interpolation mode. Spline cancel length
Curve with spline interpolation

For the subprogram of the EIA conversion function, refer to F88 bit 0.

F100
P2 P1

P3

P4 P5 (P3-P4) > F100

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 999999

P6 Straight line when the distance between P3 and P4 exceeds the value of F100. MPL505

If the angle formed by two blocks exceeds the value set by the parameter F101, spline interpolation is not realized in these blocks even in the spline interpolation mode.
3

P4
4

P4 P3 P5
4 F101

P3
2

P5 P2
5

Cornered

P2 P1

P6 P1

P6 P7 P4

6 P7

Spline cancel angle

F101

When F101 is not set.

P3 P5

P2 P6 P1 P7

MPL506

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0 to 179

2-154

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Fine spline interpolation curve error (Block including the point of inflection)

During block checking in the fine spline interpolation mode, if the spline curve of a specific block is judged to include an inflection point and the maximum chord error between the spline curve and the block is larger than the value of F102, the shape of the curve will be modified to reduce the maximum chord error below the value of F102.
Original spline curve Modified spline curve

F102

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

A
F102 or less

D735S0001 If a block whose length is less than the value of F103 is detected during fine spline interpolation, that block will be skipped and integrated (faired) into the preceding and succeeding blocks to create a spline curve. Suppose that the i-th block in the fine spline interpolation mode has a block length of li: If Ii 1 is greater than F103 2 Ii is equal to or less than F103 Ii + 1 is greater than F103 2 then the ending point of the i 1 th block and the starting point of the i + 1 th block will be modified to the middle point of the i-th block and this block will be deleted. A spline curve will be created from the sequence of points updated this way.

Ii 1 > F103 2

Ii F103 Ii + 1 > F103 2

Spline interpolation fairing block length

After-modification of relay points

Created spline curve

F103

D735S0002
If the length of the starting block or ending block in the fine spline interpolation mode is smaller than the value of F103, processing will slightly differ from that described above. Refer to the relevant specification for further details. This parameter is effective when bit 1 of F96 is 1.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

2-155

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Fine spline interpolation curve error (Block including no inflection point)

During block checking in the fine spline interpolation mode, if the spline curve of a specific block is judged to include no inflection point and the maximum chord error between the spline curve and the block is larger than the value of F104, the shape of the curve will be modified to reduce the maximum chord error below the value of F104.
Original spline curve Modification Modified spline curve B F104 or less

F104

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0.000 1mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

D735S0003 Invalid

F105 F106
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range In a small-segment machining program, if a small block is present between large-angle blocks, optimum corner deceleration can be achieved by excluding the small block and then judging the total corner angle. Judgment length for judging the small block

Small block judgment length

F107

Small block

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999 Specify by what degrees the angle of corner deceleration is to be incremented when the shape correction function is valid. This parameter is valid when bit 4 of F96 is 1.

Corner deceleration angle increment value

F108

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 99999999

2-156

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Set the number of common variables which can be read and written between the turrets. Example: Number of common variables between turrets (#100 onward) If 10 is set in F109 #100 to #109: Common variables that are valid for both turrets #110 to #199: Common variables that are valid only for one turret

F109

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate Number of variables 0 to 100 Set the number of common variables which can be read and written between the turrets. Example:

Number of common variables between turrets (#500 onward)

F110

If 10 is set in F110 #500 to #509: Common variables that are valid for both turrets #510 to #999: Common variables that are valid only for one turret

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate Number of variables 0 to 500 On the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display: F111 (bit 0) = 0: Simplified display of tapping tool

F111
(bit 0)

Selection of display type of tapping tool on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display

F111 (bit 0) = 1: Detailed display of tapping tool

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 F111 (bit 1) = 0: Disuse of dry run during thread cutting cycle F111 (bit 1) = 1: Use of dry run during thread cutting cycle

Use/disuse of dry run during thread cutting

F111
(bit 1)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1

2-157

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

F111 (bit 2) = 0: The feed hold function causes the threading operation not to be stopped till completion of the next step. Use/disuse of feed hold during thread cutting F111 (bit 2) = 1: The feed hold function causes the threading operation to be changed into run-out and then stopped. Note: With TC82 = 0, the same operation as that for setting 0 will occur even if 1 is set for F111 bit 2.

F111
(bit 2)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1

Select the direction of rotation of the C-axis during C-axial threading based on G01.1. F111 (bit 3) = 0: The C-axis rotates CW (forward). F111 (bit 3) = 1: The C-axis rotates CCW (backward).

Direction of rotation of the C-axis during Caxial threading with G01.1

F111
(bit 3)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0, 1 Specify whether the assignment of the tool identification code (suffix) by the T-command is valid or invalid. F111 (bit 4) = 0: The EIA tool command suffix is invalid.

EIA tool command suffix valid/invalid

F111
(bit 4)

F111 (bit 4) = 1: The EIA tool command suffix is valid.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0, 1 Select whether the wear correction data on the TOOL DATA display is to be added during execution of the EIA/ISO program when using the tool length that has been entered on the TOOL DATA display.

Tool correction amount selection for EIA/ISO programs

F111
(bit 5)

F111 (bit 5) = 0: Wear correction data is not added F111 (bit 5) = 1: Wear correction data is added

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0, 1

2-158

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

In the fixed turning cycle mode (G290/G292/G294) F111 (bit 6) = 0: The fixed turning cycle is executed for each block (G66 type). Execution mode selection for a fixed turning cycle F111 (bit 6) = 1: The fixed turning cycle is executed only for movement blocks (G66.1 type).

F111
(bit 6)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0, 1 This parameter specifies whether single-block operation during a fixed turning cycle (G290, G292 or G294) is to be stopped after the entire cycle has been executed, or for each block.

Form of single-block stop during a fixed turning cycle

F111 (bit 7) = 0: After execution of the cycle F111 (bit 7) = 1: For each block

F111
(bit 7)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0, 1 Selection of printout items in measurement data printout

76543210
Selection of measurement data items to be printed out

(0: Not printout 1: Print out) Work No., Unit No. Tool No., Work counter Measurement mode Target data Measured data

F112

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

Offset data Tolerance upper/lower Day and time of measurement F113 (bit 0) = 0: Counting each type of use under the same tool number individually.

F113
(bit 0)

Counting all types of use under the same tool number for the tool life management on the TOOL DATA display executed/not executed

F113 (bit 0) = 1: Counting all types of use under the same tool number integratingly.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1

2-159

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

F113 (bit 1) = 0: Operation will be continued. F113 (bit 1) = 1: Operation will be stopped.

Data handling on the milling tool of a group that has expired in tool life

F113
(bit 1)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1 F113 (bit 2) = 0: Operation will be continued. F113 (bit 2) = 1: Operation will be stopped.

Data handling on the turning tool of a group that has expired in tool life

F113
(bit 2)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1 Select whether the FLASH tool that has been registered under the same tool number for the tool life management function is to be included in spare tools.

Tool life management of the FLASH tool

F113
(bit 3)

F113 (bit 3) = 0: The FLASH tool will be included in spare tools. F113 (bit 3) = 1: The FLASH tool will not be included in spare tools.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1 Select whether the life time on the TOOL DATA display is to be included in the life judgment items listed for the tool life management function. F113 (bit 4) = 0: The life time will be included in the life judgment items. F113 (bit 4) = 1: The life time will not be included in the life judgment items.

Tool life management Life time

F113
(bit 4)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1

2-160

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Select whether the maximum available wear offset data X on the TOOL DATA display is to be included in the life judgment items listed for the tool life management function. Tool life management Maximum available wear offset data X F113 (bit 5) = 0: The maximum available wear offset data X will be included in the life judgment items. F113 (bit 5) = 1: The maximum available wear offset data X will not be included in the life judgment items.

F113
(bit 5)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1

Select whether the maximum available wear offset data Y on the TOOL DATA display is to be included in the life judgment items listed for the tool life management function. Tool life management Maximum available wear offset data Y F113 (bit 6) = 0: The maximum available wear offset data Y will be included in the life judgment items. F113 (bit 6) = 1: The maximum available wear offset data Y will not be included in the life judgment items.

F113
(bit 6)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1

Select whether the maximum available wear offset data Z on the TOOL DATA display is to be included in the life judgment items listed for the tool life management function. Tool life management Maximum available wear offset data Z F113 (bit 7) = 0: The maximum available wear offset data Z will be included in the life judgment items. F113 (bit 7) = 1: The maximum available wear offset data Z will not be included in the life judgment items.

F113
(bit 7)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1

Specify the maximum C-axial cutting feed rate that can be selected for the inch system. F114 (bit 0) = 0: The maximum selectable C-axial cutting feed rate is 88 min1. F114 (bit 0) = 1: The maximum selectable C-axial cutting feed rate is 400 min1.

Selection of the maximum C-axial cutting feed rate for the inch system

F114
(bit 0)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1

2-161

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

F114
(bit 1)

Selection of the operation occurring during the control of the tool tip point when command G49 is issued (when the tool length offset value is canceled)

Select the type of operation occurring during the control of the tool tip point when command G49 is issued (when the tool length offset value is canceled). F114 (bit 1) = 0: The axis moves according to the tool length offset value. F114 (bit 1) = 1: The axis does not move.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1

Select whether the B-axis angle is to be checked during measurement of the turning tool for which OUT is specified in section to be machined. B-axis angle check during measurement of the turning tool for which OUT is specified in section to be machined F114 (bit 2) = 0: During measurement for OUT turning tool, alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL DESIGNATED occurs if the B-axis angle is not 90. F114 (bit 2) = 1: The measurements for OUT turning tool are possible irrespective of the B-axis angle. Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At power on 0, 1 Moving axes by using G49 (tool length offset cancel) in G43 (tool length offset) mode Moving axes by using G49 (tool length offset cancel) in G43 (tool length offset) mode F114 (bit 3) = 0: Valid F114 (bit 3) = 1: Invalid Turning tools for which IN or EDGE is specified in section to be machined can be measured irrespective of the B-axis angle.

F114
(bit 2)

F114
(bit 3)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E At power on 0, 1 Selecting a rethreading function F114 (bit 4) = 0: Using the rethreading function

Rethreading function

F114
(bit 4)

F114 (bit 4) = 1: Not using the rethreading function

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1

2-162

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Output timing of a tool life alarm F114 (bit 5) = 0: At the time of the next tool change Output timing of a tool life alarm

F114
(bit 5)

F114 (bit 5) = 1: When the program ends.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1 F114 (bit 6) = 0: Invalid. Initially, the G50-specified coordinate system is selected. F114 (bit 6) = 1: Valid. Initially, the MAZATROL coordinate system (G53.5) is selected.

Initial G53.5

F114
(bit 6)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1 F114 (bit 7) = 0: The life of the tool is judged from its machining count. F114 (bit 7) = 1: The life of the tool is not judged from its machining count.

Judging tool life from the count of machined workpieces

F114
(bit 7)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1 Set the approach speed existing before cutting feed is started in restart/TPS mode.

Restart/TPS approach speed

F115

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate mm/min / 0.1 in/min 0 to 65535

2-163

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Specify the X-axial feed rate for the runout of the threading cycle. A quarter (1/4) of the rapid traverse (as set in parameter M1) applies when this parameter is set to zero (0). Feed rate of the threading runout X-axis In case of M1 < F116, the feed rate will be clamped with the M1 value.

F116

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate mm/min 0 to 240000 Specify the Y-axial feed rate for the runout of the threading cycle. A quarter (1/4) of the rapid traverse (as set in parameter M1) applies when this parameter is set to zero (0).

Feed rate of the threading runout Y-axis

In case of M1 < F117, the feed rate will be clamped with the M1 value.

F117

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate mm/min 0 to 240000 Specify the Z-axial feed rate for the runout of the threading cycle. A quarter (1/4) of the rapid traverse (as set in parameter M1) applies when this parameter is set to zero (0).

Feed rate of the threading runout Z-axis

In case of M1 < F118, the feed rate will be clamped with the M1 value.

F118

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate mm/min 0 to 240000 Specify the runout feed rate for the inside diameter threading cycle. This parameter is valid only when chamfering is not specified in the inside diameter threading unit of the MAZATROL program.

Runout feed rate for the inside diameter threading cycle

A quarter (1/4) of the rapid traverse (as set in parameter M1) applies when this parameter is set to zero (0). In case of M1 < F119, the feed rate will be clamped with the M1 value.

F119

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate mm/min 0 to 240000

2-164

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Specify the X-axial clamping speed for the threading cycle.

Clamping speed for the threading cycle X-axis

F120

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate mm/min 0 to 99999999 Specify the Y-axial clamping speed for the threading cycle.

Clamping speed for the threading cycle Y-axis

F121

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate mm/min 0 to 99999999 Specify the Z-axial clamping speed for the threading cycle.

Clamping speed for the threading cycle Z-axis

F122

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate mm/min 0 to 99999999 Invalid

F123

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-165

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

The data input in the following items are checked based on the permissible data alteration amount set in this parameter. TOOL DATA: LENGTH, ACT-, TOOL SET X, TOOL SET Z, LENG COMP., LENG.CO., ACT-CO. TOOL OFFFSET: GEOMETRIC OFFSET

Permissible data alteration amount 1 for input error prevention function

F124

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999 The data input in the following items are checked based on the permissible data alteration amount set in this parameter. TOOL DATA: WEAR COMP. X, WEAR COMP. Y, WEAR COMP. Z TOOL OFFFSET: WEAR COMP.

Permissible data alteration amount 2 for input error prevention function

F125

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999 Invalid

F126 to F132
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Set the pitch of tapping tool displayed when the tapping tool is displayed in detail (F111 bit 0 = 1) in solid mode on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display.

Pitch of tapping tool for display in detail on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display

F133

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 65535

2-166

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Set the thread depth of tapping tool displayed when the tapping tool is displayed in detail (F111 bit 0 = 1) in solid mode on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display Thread depth of tapping tool for display in detail on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display

F134

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 65535 Specify tool-drawing accuracy on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display As the specified value is greater (maximum value: 9), accuracy increases progressively.

Tool-drawing accuracy on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display

F135

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0 to 9 It is possible to change the size of the workpiece created automatically on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display.

Amount of offset for dummy workpiece shape on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display

Workpiece automatically set by NC

F136
Workpiece displayed in solid display mode X This offset function is valid for both X-axial and Y-axial directions.

F136
F136
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 99999999 to 99999999 Specify the number of jaws indicated on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display automatically. If 0 is entered, three jaws will be displayed as standard. Number of jaws indicated on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display for No. 1 turning spindle

F137

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Jaws 0 to 9

2-167

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Specify the number of jaws indicated on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display automatically. If 0 is entered, three jaws will be displayed as standard. Number of jaws indicated on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display for No. 2 turning spindle

F138

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Jaws 0 to 9 Specify the amount of C-axial angle offset for the jaws indicated on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display automatically.

Angle offset for the jaws indicated on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display for the No. 1 turning spindle

F139

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 0 to 3599 Specify the amount of C-axial angle offset for the jaws indicated on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display automatically.

Angle offset for the jaws indicated on the VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display for the No. 2 turning spindle

F140

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 0 to 3599 Specify the roughness level of bottom when the precision rapid boring tornado cycle (created by M640) is program-converted into the MATRIX tornado milling cycle.

Roughness level of the circular milling unit (precision tornado cycle)

F141

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 9

2-168

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Invalid

F142

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Operation when workpiece counting is made valid while the automatic operation INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD (ISS) is enabled. <If workpiece counting is selected manually>

F143
(bit 0)

Operation when workpiece counting is made valid while the automatic operation INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD is enabled

0: Workpiece counting is activated while the ISS is disabled, and the automatic operation continues. 1: Workpiece counting is not activated, the alarm 1129 MEMORY PROTECT (SAFETY SHIELD) is displayed and the automatic operation continues. <If workpiece counting is specified in the program> 0: Workpiece counting is activated while the ISS is disabled, and the automatic operation continues. 1: Workpiece counting is not activated, the alarm 1824 UNWRITABLE SYSTEM VARIABLE (ISS) is displayed and the automatic operation stops. Select the status of the [STORE WORKPCE MATERIAL] menu function when the power is turned on.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1

F143
(bit 1)

Status of the [STORE WORKPCE MATERIAL] menu function when the power is turned on

0: Disabled (The condition of the material model cut with the ISS enabled is not maintained.) 1: Enabled (The condition of the material model cut with the ISS enabled is maintained.)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0, 1 Operation when a specific G-code is issued while the automatic operation INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD (ISS) is enabled.

F143
(bit 2)

Operation when a specific G-code is issued while the automatic operation INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD is enabled

0: The automatic operation continues with the ISS left enabled. 1: The alarm 1127 INVALID SAFETY SHIELD is displayed, the ISS is disabled and the automatic operation continues.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0, 1

2-169

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Invalid

F143
(bit 3) to (bit 7) Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

76543210
Setting a minus value for argument Q (module/ diametral pitch) in hobbing 0: Invalid If a minus value is set for Q, alarm 809 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT will be caused. 1: Valid E Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits The rapid feed rate override is reduced to the value set here, when data alteration is detected. This value will be handled as100 if 0 is set here. Rapid feed override when data alteration is detected

F144

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

F145

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate % 0 to 100 Representation of cutting-off or parting operation under synchronization of both turning spindles on the VIRTUAL MACHINING and 3D MONITOR displays 0: No representation (Cut-off part remains shown in its original place and undergoes the interference check.) 1: Representation by taking-off the material from the 2nd spindle, with the material remaining on the 1st spindle (Cut-off part is hidden and excluded from the interference check.) 2: Representation by taking-off the material from the 1st spindle, with the material remaining on the 2nd spindle (Cut-off part is hidden and excluded from the interference check.)

F146

Selection of the material models part to be taken off (hidden) on the VIRTUAL MACHINING and 3D MONITOR displays in the flow of turning operation under synchronization of both spindles

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 2

2-170

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

F147

Selection of the material models part to be taken off (hidden) on the VIRTUAL MACHINING and 3D MONITOR displays in the flow of milling operation

Representation of cutting-off or parting milling operation with the workpiece gripped by both chucks on the VIRTUAL MACHINING and 3D MONITOR displays 0: No representation (Cut-off part remains shown in its original place and undergoes the interference check.) 1: Representation by taking-off the material from the 2nd spindle, with the material remaining on the 1st spindle (Cut-off part is hidden and excluded from the interference check.) 2: Representation by taking-off the material from the 1st spindle, with the material remaining on the 2nd spindle (Cut-off part is hidden and excluded from the interference check.)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 2

Reference data for the calculation of compensation amount for G41/G42 given in a manual program unit F148 = 0: NOSE-R setting on the TOOL OFFSET display F148 = 1: NOSE-R or ACT- setting on the TOOL DATA display

Compensation amount for G41/G42 given in a manual program (MANL PRG) unit

F148

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 Invalid

F149 to F151
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Fixed value (0)

F152

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-171

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Fixed value (0)

F153

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Parameter for system internal setting Setting prohibited

F154

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Invalid

F155 to F158
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Set the timing of data creation for the MACHINING NAVIGATION RESULT display when 1 is specified for both CONTI. and NUMBER items of the end unit (program repetition with workpiece counting made valid). 0: At the end of the first piece machining 1: At the end of the last piece machining

F159
(bit 0)

Timing of data creation for the MACHINING NAVIGATION - RESULT display with workpiece counting made valid

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1

2-172

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Invalid

F159
(bit 1) to (bit 3) Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

When an output diagram is displayed for continuous rating in the spindle load meter area of the POSITION display, a spindle output diagram registered in the setting file is:

F159
(bit 4)

Whether or not to display on the POSITION display a spindle output diagram stored in the setting file

0: Not displayed (An output diagram is displayed using the values set with the parameters SA67 to SA80.) 1: Displayed (An output diagram is displayed using the values stored in the setting file.) Note: This parameter is available only to models that allow the operator to switch between load meter ratings and are capable of displaying a spindle output diagram on the POSITION display. Invalid

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1

F159
(bit 5) to (bit 7) Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Invalid

F160

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-173

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Lathing tool offset functions

76543210
Shape/wear offset number separation 0: Invalid 1: Valid Shape offset handling 0: Coordinate shift 1: Tool movement Tool offset timing 0: When move command is executed following Tcode command 1: When T-code command is executed Tool offset vector handling if reset function is executed 0: Vector cleared 1: Vector not cleared Shape offset handling if offset number 0 is entered 0: Offset cleared 1: Offset not cleared Simplified wear offset 0: Invalid 1: Valid C/Z offset when a MAZATROL program is called from an EIA program 0: C/Z offset set in the MAZATROL program is valid 1: C/Z offset set in the EIA program is valid C/Z offset when an EIA program is called from a MAZATROL program 0: C/Z offset set in the EIA program is valid 1: C/Z offset set in the MAZATROL program is valid

F161

F161 bit 0: T$$%% command: - For offset number separation $$ is used for shape offset. %% is used for wear offset. Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits - For offset number non-separation Offset number %% is used for both shape offset and wear offset.

2-174

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

76543210
During independent start of tool tip point control 0: Movement according to the particular amount of offset 1: No movement according to the particular amount of offset Type of passage of tool tip point through singular point Chamfer/corner R-command address selection 0: (I), (K), (R), (,R), (,C), (,A) 1: (R), (C), (A) Fixed hole-machining cycle return selection 0: Initial point 1: R-point 6 digits in T-command for turning Use of the M Pro scheme as the method of selecting the Length correction axis bit 0: Invalid 1: Valid MAZATROL program check for missing Z-offset 0: Valid 1: Invalid Encoder polarity selection 0: Pulse rate increase for forward rotation command 1: Pulse rate reduction for forward rotation command F162 bit 1 - Type of passage of tool tip point through singular point 0: The same primary rotary axis angle sign as that existing during the start of tool tip point control is selected as the angle of the rotary axis for implementing the tool axial vector specified during tool tip point control. Example: B = positive
B=0 B = positive

F162

C=0

C = 180

1: The angle that provides a smaller amount of rotational movement of the secondary rotary axis on a singular point is selected as the angle of the rotary axis for implementing the tool axial vector specified during tool tip point control. (Both positive and negative signs are available for the primary rotary axis.) Example: B = positive B=0 B = negative

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement Bit Binary, eight digits C=0 C=0

2-175

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

76543210
Bar feeder scheduling function 0: Invalid 1: Valid Incorporation of wear offset data into the current position display in EIA/ISO program mode 0: Invalid 1: Valid Incorporation of wear offset data into the current position display in MAZATROL program mode 0: Valid 1: Invalid Position of thread turning tool nose on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display 0: Tool tip 1: Position measured using TOOL EYE Barrier check on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display 0: Invalid 1: Valid Menu on the DATA I/O display (floppy disk) 0: Hidden 1: Displayed Menu on the DATA I/O display (tape) 0: Hidden 1: Displayed Menu on the DATA I/O display (CMT) 0: Hidden 1: Displayed

F163

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement Bit Binary, eight digits

76543210
Search for magazine (turret) tool No search for invalid tool Automatic tool data setting conditions No search for broken tool No search for tool that has expired in life No search for tool for which life warning has been issued Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M After stop of movement Bit Binary, eight digits Note: This parameter is used for automatic setting of the following tool data during MAZATROL program editing: - Nominal diameter and Suffix in tool sequence of turning tool - Suffix in tool sequence of point machining

F164

2-176

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

76543210
High-speed synchronous tapping function 0: Valid 1: Invalid X-axis movement to minus side during polar coordinate interpolation 0: Enabled 1: Disabled Polar coordinate interpolation of the C-axis 0: Specification in terms of radius value 1: Specification in terms of diameter value C-axis indexing when EIA subprogram is called from MAZATROL program 0: Not executed 1: Executed Modal or non-modal state of Q command in deep hole drilling cycle 0: Modal 1: Non-modal Conversion of tool set data for milling tool based on head swivel angle when G53.5 is commanded 0: Disabled 1: Enabled Behavior of automatic operation of an EIA program when Z-offset is not set 0: Z-offset = 0 1: Alarm stop Setting at CONTI. of the END unit during tool path check 0: Invalid 1: Valid

F165

Supplemental explanation of F165 Bit 4 This bit is used to select whether the depth of infeed per pass (address Q command) in deep hole drilling cycles (G83, G283, and G287 for G-code series M; G83 and G87 for G-code series A) is modal or non-modal. 0: Modal The modal value is used if the Q command is not specified. If the modal value of the Q command is 0 (typically, in cases where the Q setting is omitted in the initial deep hole drilling cycle command), or if the Q value is set to 0, an alarm ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT occurs. 1: Non-modal If the Q setting is omitted, or if the Q value is set to 0, the workpiece is cut to the preset infeed depth in a single pass.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After stop of movement Bit Binary, eight digits

2-177

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

76543210
Alteration of tool set value (tool length) on the TOOL DATA display in the automatic operation mode 0: Enabled 1: Disabled Type of wear offset indicated in the milling tool list on the TOOL DATA display 0: Cutting edge offset 1: Wear offset ID No./Tool name selection on the TOOL DATA display 0: ID No. 1: Tool Name Select whether the to-be-drawn plane that has been selected during plane selection on the TRACE or TOOL PATH CHECK display is to be held as the same plane between the two displays or independently between them. 0: Hold as the same plane 1: Independent hold Operation conducted when the [RESTART] menu key is pressed following completion of the search in EIA modal restarting mode 0: Retains the completed status of the search 1: Cancels search results Tool diameter auto-setting for the end mill, face mill, and ball end mill on the TOOL DATA display (these tool diameters are set up during suffix setting automatically.) 0: Automatic setting to nominal diameter 1: No automatic setting Display of the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD status specification menu in the manual operation mode 0: Displayed by the menu selection key 1: Displayed by the [SAFETY SHIELD CANCEL] menu function Automatic backup function 0: Invalid 1: Valid

F166

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

2-178

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

76543210
Threading (by turning) shift angle (Q-command) unit 0: 1/1000 1: 1 Handling the diameter/radius of point R during the hole-machining fixed cycle 0: Based on the settings for the X-axis 1: Fixed at the radius value Handling the tool measured using the G137H command 0: Regarding the tool as broken 1: Not regarding the tool as broken Handling the single-process mode when operation is completed/reset 0: Not holding the mode 1: Holding the mode If the arc internal correction value is greater than the arc radius 0: Connecting the path linearly 1: Regarding the status as an alarm Handling the X-axis command in G68.5 0: Radius value 1: Diameter value Wear correction direction in the lathe-based machine model 0: Actual axis direction 1: Virtual axis direction Updating the current position by a press of the reset key in manual operation mode 0: Valid 1: Invalid Invalid

F167

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After stop of movement Bit Binary, eight digits

F168
(bit 0) (bit 1) Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Select whether the rotational center offset is to be added to the tool length when the tool axial tool length offset command (G43.1) is issued

F168
(bit 2)

Rotational center offset is added/not added to the tool length when the tool axial tool length offset command (G43.1) is issued

F168 (bit 2) = 0: Offset is added. F168 (bit 2) = 1: Offset is not added.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1

2-179

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Select axis for the milling tool wear correction and TOOL EYE compensation amount for the B-axis rotational turret. Axis for the milling tool wear correction and TOOL EYE compensation amount for the B-axis rotational turret F168 (bit 3) = 0: Virtual axis F168 (bit 3) = 1: Actual axis

F168
(bit 3)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 Invalid

F168
(bit 4)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Select whether to hold the amount of shift in spite of pressing the RESET key when manual handle pulse interruption is valid. F168 (bit 5) = 0:

F168
(bit 5)

Holding the amount of manual handle pulse interruption

Hold F168 (bit 5) = 1: No hold (M640T compatible mode) The same operation as that of the M640T can be selected. This parameter is valid when F95 bit 6 = 0 (holds the amount of manual handle pulse interruption, in spite of the RESET key operation/M30/M02).

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1

Select whether the [RESTART2NONMODAL] menu function during stop of an EIA program execution is to be made valid or invalid. [RESTART2NONMODAL] menu function during stop of an EIA program execution invalid/valid F168 (bit 6) = 0: Invalid F168 (bit 6) = 1: Valid

F168
(bit 6)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0, 1

2-180

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

EIA/ISO
Description

Address

Whether to allow for groove/protrusion width measurement the selection of a correction pattern which assumes that both ends of the groove or protrusion are machined with the same tool Correction pattern for groove/ protrusion width measurement F168 (bit 7) = 0: Impossible to select the correction pattern F168 (bit 7) = 1: Possible to select the correction pattern Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0, 1

F168
(bit 7)

2-181

PARAMETER

2-3-5

User parameter
USER

SOFT LIMIT (I)

Display title

Classification

SOFT LIMIT
Description

Address

Meaning

Shift amount of unidirectional positioning (G60)

The amount and direction of shift from the final setting position during unidirectional positioning of the point-machining or during execution of G60. I1 < 0: Positioning in minus direction I1 > 0: Positioning in plus direction Example: +y Machine coordinate system Shift amount +x I1

I1
Final setting position MPL091

Note: For the axes which operate in submicrons in the case of submicron machine specifications, the setting unit of this parameter is reduced to 1/10 times. Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in (0.0001) 0 to 99999999 The parameter used to define the machine working zone in order to prevent machine interference with the workpiece or jigs. Set the coordinate values of the machine coordinate system. Example: +Y Machine coordinate system M8 +X (Y-axis) I3 (X-axis)
M9 (Y-axis)

Upper (plus direction) user soft-limit

I2
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in (0.0001) 0 to 99999999

Machining working zone

I2 (X-axis)

M9 (X-axis)

M8 (X-axis) MPL092

Manufacturer soft-limit

Lower (minus direction) user soft-limit

I3
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in (0.0001) 0 to 99999999

If the machine is likely to overstep its working zone, an alarm will occur and the machine will stop. Notes: 1. These parameters are valid only when bit 2 of I14 is 0. 2. These parameters are invalid if I2 = I3. 3. For the axes which operate in submicrons in the case of submicron machine specifications, the setting unit of this parameter is reduced to 1/10 times.

2-182

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SOFT LIMIT
Description

Address

Invalid

I4

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Override (%)

Function for making the G0 speed variable Variable override: Minimum value
100

I5
I5 0 I9 I7 I10 I7 Axis position

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate % 0 to 100 Invalid

I6

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Override (%)
Function for making the G0 speed variable Variable control area

100

I7
I5 0 I9 I7 I10 I7 Axis position

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

2-183

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SOFT LIMIT
Description

Address

Invalid

I8

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Override (%)

Function for making the G0 speed variable Variable control area lower limit 100

I9
I5 0 I9 I7 I10 I7 Axis position

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

Override (%) Function for making the G0 speed variable Variable control area upper limit 100

I10
I5 0 I9 I7 I10 I7 Axis position

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

Set the rotary center of a workpiece at a table angle of 0 for each axis in the machine coordinate system. (Valid only with dynamic offset function and in manual operation) Rotary center of a workpiece

I11
Note: For the axes which operate in submicrons in the case of submicron machine specifications, the setting unit of this parameter is reduced to 1/10 times.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

2-184

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SOFT LIMIT
Description

Address

Set the clamping value for the amount of handle interruption.

Clamping value for the amount of handle interruption

I12

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999

76543210
Execution of G28 (reference-point return): 0: Memory-type zero-point return 1: Watchdog-type zero-point return Manual zero-point return operation: 0: Memory-type zero-point return (After power-on, however, watchdog-type zero-point return) 1: Watchdog-type zero-point return Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits Removal of control axes 0: No (Not removed) 1: Yes (Removed)

I13

76543210
Mirror image with respect to the machine zeropoint 0: Invalid 1: Valid User software limits (I2, I3) 0: Valid 1: Invalid Tool-tip relief after spindle orientation during execution of G75, G76, G86 or point-machining (boring or back-boring) 0: Required 1: Not required Direction of the relief mentioned above 0: Plus 1: Minus

I14

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement Bit Binary, eight digits

2-185

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SOFT LIMIT
Description

Address

Invalid

I15 I16
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range Enter the error between the zero point of the actual workpiece and the FRM zero point that has been automatically calculated as a result of the workpiece transfer unit (with work hand angle of 0). X X Automatically calculated workpiece position Z Y Actual workpiece position

Amount of work hand rotational error correction (Work hand angle: 0)

I17

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 32768 to 32767

I17 (X) I17 (Z) I17 (Y)

(Only for machines with a workpiece handling device) Enter the error between the zero point of the actual workpiece and the FRM zero point that has been automatically calculated as a result of the workpiece transfer unit (with work hand angle of 45). X X Automatically calculated workpiece position Z Y Actual workpiece position

Amount of work hand rotational error correction (Work hand angle: 45)

I18
I18 (X)
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 32768 to 32767

I18 (Z)

I17 (Y)

(Only for machines with a workpiece handling device) Enter the error between the zero point of the actual workpiece and the FRM zero point that has been automatically calculated as a result of the workpiece transfer unit (with work hand angle of 90). X X Automatically calculated workpiece position Z Y Actual workpiece position

Amount of work hand rotational error correction (Work hand angle: 90)

I19

I19 (X)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 32768 to 32767

I19 (Z)

I19 (Y)

(Only for machines with a workpiece handling device)

2-186

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SOFT LIMIT
Description

Address

Invalid

I20

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Specify the position of the fixed point which is used when 9 is specified in parameter SU10 or that [USER 1 (I21)] is specified in Change position of the manual program unit.

Fixed point 1 specified by the user

I21

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 99999999 to 99999999 Specify the position of the fixed point which is used when 9 is specified in parameter SU10 or that [USER 2 (I22)] is specified in Change position of the manual program unit.

Fixed point 2 specified by the user

I22

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 99999999 to 99999999 Invalid

I23 I24
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-187

PARAMETER

2-3-6

User parameter
USER

SYSTEM (SU)
Display title

Classification

SYSTEM
Description

Address

Meaning

Set the reference axis of abscissa.

Reference axis of abscissa for plane selection

SU1

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0 to 255 Set axis 1 parallel to the axis of abscissa.

Axis 1 parallel to the axis of abscissa for plane selection

SU2

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0 to 255 Set axis 2 parallel to the axis of abscissa.

Axis 2 parallel to the axis of abscissa for plane selection

SU3

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0 to 255 Set the reference axis of ordinate.

Reference axis of ordinate for plane selection

SU4

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0 to 255

2-188

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SYSTEM
Description

Address

Set axis 1 parallel to the axis of ordinate.

Axis 1 parallel to the axis of ordinate for plane selection

SU5

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0 to 255 Set axis 2 parallel to the axis of ordinate (cylindrical interpolation).

Axis 1 parallel to the axis of ordinate for plane selection

SU6

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0 to 255 Set the reference height axis.

Reference height axis for plane selection

SU7

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0 to 255 Set axis 1 parallel to the height axis.

Axis 1 parallel to the height axis for plane selection

SU8

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0 to 255

2-189

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SYSTEM
Description

Address

Set axis 2 parallel to the height axis.

Axis 2 parallel to the height axis for plane selection

SU9

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0 to 255

2-190

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SYSTEM
Description

Address

Selection of tool change command output position

Specify tool change command output position from [0] through [10] below.
M5 Z-axis

[6]

[1]

[3]

I21/I22 Z-axis

Machine zero point

M5 X-axis

[4]

Zc : Stock material edge projection length Dmax : Stock material maximum outside diameter : Tool turning clearance (X-axis) SU50 x + B-axis spindle edge offset value BA62 + Spindle tool length : Tool turning clearance (Z-axis) SU51 z

Fixed point

[5]

[0]

[2]
I21/I22 X-axis

[9/10]
x

[7]
Dmax

[8]
User-specified fixed point 1/2

Setting

X-axis Clearance position Machine zero point Clearance position Machine zero point Fixed point Clearance position Machine zero point End point of previous machining End point of previous machining User-specified fixed point 1 User-specified fixed point 2

Z-axis Clearance position Clearance position Machine zero point Machine zero point Fixed point End point of previous machining End point of previous machining Clearance position Machine zero point User-specified fixed point 1 User-specified fixed point 2

Zc

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

SU10

Notes: 1. SU10 = 5 or 6, Z-axis tool change command output position is identical with the end point of previous machining. In the case below, however, this may not be applied. As shown here, if the longest tool comes into the hatched portion, the position will escape in Z-axis direction by the distance determined by SU51.

SU51

Stock material length

Stock material edge protrusion length

2. The turret type of turret conducts tool turning at the tool change command output position. The ATC type of turret moves from the tool change command output position to the ATC position. Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0 to 10

2-191

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SYSTEM
Description

Address

Selection of tool change command output position

INTEGREX e-H
[11]

Specify tool change command output position from [0] through [11] below.
Zc : Stock material edge projection length Dmax : Stock material maximum outside diameter : Tool turning clearance (X-axis) SU50 x + B-axis spindle edge offset value BA62 + Spindle tool length z : Tool turning clearance (Z-axis) SU51

3rd zero point M5 Z-axis

I21/I22 Z-axis

M6 X-axis M5 X-axis [4]

[6]

[1]

[3]

Machine zero point [5] [0] [2]

I21/I22 X-axis [9/10]

User-specified fixed point 1/2

2nd zero point

x [7] [8] Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 X-axis Clearance position Machine zero point Clearance position Machine zero point 2nd zero point Clearance position Machine zero point End point of previous machining End point of previous machining User-specified fixed point 1 User-specified fixed point 2 3rd zero point Z-axis Clearance position Clearance position Machine zero point Machine zero point 2nd zero point End point of previous machining End point of previous machining Clearance position Machine zero point User-specified fixed point 1 User-specified fixed point 2 End point of previous machining

Dmax

Zc

z 3rd zero point

INTEGREX e-V
I21/I22 X-axis [8] I21/I22 Z-axis [9/10] [2]

M6 X-axis Machine M5 zero point X-axis [3] [4] M5 Z-axis

6 7 8 9 10 11

SU10

User-specified fixed point 1/2

[7] z [0]

2nd zero point [1]

[11] [5] Zc Dmax x [6] Notes: 1. Do not use the setting of SU10 = 4 for the INTEGREX eII series. A collision with the ATC cover is likely to occur since the ATC position specified in fixed-point M5 is present inside the ATC cover. 2. Since x in the case of SU10 = 0, 2, or 5 includes spindle tool length, if the tool is too long (as in the case of a long boring bar), the tool change operation may be softwarelimited in the +X direction. 3. SU10 = 5 or 6, Z-axis tool change command output position is identical with the end point of previous machining. In the case below, however, this may not be applied. As shown here, if the longest tool comes into the hatched portion, the position will escape in Z-axis direction by the distance determined by SU51.

SU51

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0 to 11
Stock material length

Stock material edge protrusion length

2-192

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SYSTEM
Description

Address

Specify the types of axes to be simultaneously moved when approaching the tool to the next machining area. 0: Movement of axes during approach 1: Three axes (X, Y, Z) move at the same time. After Z-axis movement, the X-axis and the Y-axis move at the same time.

SU11
<Supplementary description> Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0, 1 Select the rotating position specified in the index unit after tool change. 0: Rotating position specified in the index unit after tool change After the tool change, rotation occurs at the position specified in the index unit. For the movement from the completing position of the tool change to the rotating position of the index unit, three axes (X, Y, Z) move at the same time. After the tool change, rotation occurs at the position specified in the index unit. For the movement from the completing position of the tool change to the rotating position of the index unit, the X-axis and the Y-axis move at the same time following completion of Z-axis movement. After the tool change, rotation occurs at the completing position of the tool change. This parameter is valid only when workpiece scheme is selected in the common unit. If initial-point scheme is selected, three axes move simultaneously, irrespective of setting of this parameter.

SU12

1:

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1, 2 2:

Set the axis name of the transfer axis.

Axis name of the transfer axis

SU13

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement &0 to &7F Set the display color for the tool nose marks in each system indicated on the TOOL PATH CHECK and TRACE displays. 0: Red (default) 1: Green 2: Blue 3: Yellow 4: Pink 5: Cyan 6: White

Tool nose mark display color on the TOOL PATH CHECK display/TRACE display

SU14

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0 to 6

2-193

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SYSTEM
Description

Address

Specify the name of the axis used as the thrust axis for the servo axis.

Name of thrust axis for servo axis

SU15

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E After stop of movement 0 to 255 0: The tool moves to the approach position set in the machining program, without moving to the indexed swivel position. 1: The tool moves to the index swivel position and after C-axis indexing, it moves to the approach position.

Movement to C-axis index swivel position when Z-offset scheme is used

SU16

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M 0, 1 Set the background color for the MDI window. 0: Green (default) 1: Red 2: Green 3: Blue 4: Yellow 5: Pink 6: Cyan 7: White 8: Black

Background color for the MDI window

SU17

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0 to 8

Set the character color for the MDI window. 0: Black (default) 1: Red 2: Green 3: Blue 4: Yellow 5: Pink 6: Cyan 7: White 8: Black

Character color for the MDI window

SU18

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0 to 8

2-194

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SYSTEM
Description

Address

SU19 = 0: Three axes (X, Y, Z) are simultaneously moved to the tool change command output position specified in SU10 and TC62 or to the position designated at RETURN of the end unit. * When the tool nose is present at a position internal to the position of (workpiece diameter + safety profile clearance), the axes pass through the clearance point. SU19 = 1: Following the X-axis, the Y- and Z-axes are simultaneously moved to the tool change command output position specified in SU10 and TC62 or to the position designated at RETURN of the end unit. * When the tool nose is present at a position internal to the position of (workpiece diameter + safety profile clearance), only the X-axis passes through the clearance point. The Z-axis does not pass. Note: This parameter is valid only when the program is of the workpiece scheme (WPC setting) or the Z-offset scheme.

SU19

Selecting the method of axis movement to the tool change command output position or to the position designated at RETURN of the end unit

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 During polygonal machining, acceleration of the turning and milling spindle can be decreased by this parameter. Spindle acceleration for polygonal machining =

Coefficient for polygonal machining spindle acceleration

SU20 Spindle acceleration 100 Note: This value will be handled as100 if a negative value, 0 or a value more than 100 is set here.

SU20

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate % 0 to 100

<Supplementary description> If during polygonal machining alarm 43 SPINDLE MALFUNCTION 2 (52, , ) occurs for the milling spindle, set a value less than 100 in this parameter to elongate the turning spindle speed attainment time (acceleration is decreased). Specify the axis to be returned home after the execution of the workpiece transfer unit corresponding to the work hand angle to be changed, and the returning sequence.

SU21

Selection of returning operation after the execution of the workpiece transfer unit corresponding to the work hand angle to be changed

0: X-axis homing B-axis homing 1: XYZ axes simultaneous homing B-axis homing 2: X-axis homing YZ axes simultaneous homing B-axis homing

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After stop of movement 0 to 2

2-195

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SYSTEM
Description

Address

Invalid

SU22 to SU48
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range Set dwell time for the parts catcher.

Delay timer for the parts catcher

SU49

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 s 0 to 9999 Tool turning clearance is required to prevent interference between the tool and stock material during tool change in automatic operation.

SU51
Tool turning clearance (radial value) in Xaxis

Chuck SU50 Stock material shape

SU50

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

Dmax

l0

NM211-00220

l0:
Tool turning clearance in Z-axis

Dmax: Stock material maximum outside diameter Stock material edge projection length

SU51

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

2-196

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SYSTEM
Description

Address

Set the tool to be retracted to the fixed position for the automatic lowerturret retraction function. Specify the tool number of the lower turret.

SU52: Tool number of Retraction tool 1

Lower-turret retraction function Tool number of the retraction tool

SU53: Tool number of Retraction tool 2

SU52 SU53
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0 to 960 Invalid

SU54 to SU96
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range Set the position where the turret is to be retracted for the turret retraction function. Specify coordinates in the machine coordinate system based on the machine zero point.

Fixed point 1

Fixed point 2

SU97
Lower-turret retraction function Fixed point of the retraction position

SU98

SU100

SU99

Machine zero point

SU97 to SU100

SU97: SU98: SU99: SU100:

X-axis retraction point Fixed point 1 Z-axis retraction point Fixed point 1 X-axis retraction point Fixed point 2 Z-axis retraction point Fixed point 2

Specify a minus value if the fixed point of the retraction position is located in a minus direction when viewed from the zero point of the machine coordinates.

Note: Set this parameter for the system of the lower turret.
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999

2-197

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SYSTEM
Description

Address

Return distance (radial value) in X-axis at wall during rough cutting in bar machining or in corner machining of EIA/ISO program

Example 1: Standard type cutting Prior to cutting up along the wall in the end of final cycle, escape will be made by specified distance.

SU101
SU101

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 65535

SU102

Example 2: High speed rough cutting Escape will be made by SU101 and SU102 specified distance during return after reaching the wall.

Return distance in Z-axis at wall during rough cutting in bar machining or in corner machining of EIA/ISO program

SU102
SU101

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 65535 If a cutting depth has not been specified in the program, operation will occur in accordance with the setting of this parameter.
SU102

* For MAZATROL programs refer to TC67 and TC68.

Cutting depth in the composite-type fixed cycle (G271/G272, G71/G72)

SU103

SU103

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 65535

Pecking return distance in grooving (G274/G275, G74/G75) of EIA/ISO program

Tool

SU104
SU104

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 65535 * For MAZATROL programs refer to TC74.

NM211-00248

2-198

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SYSTEM
Description

Address

Cut depth (diametral value) for final cut in composite-type thread cutting cycle G276, G76 of EIA/ISO program

1st cut

SU105
(n/2-1)th cut (n/2)th cut

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 65535

SU105/2

nth cut NM211-00247

* For MAZATROL programs refer to TC78. Clamping will follow the setting of SU106 if the calculated value of the cut depth with the composite type thread cutting cycle G276 is smaller than the setting of SU106. This parameter is valid only for the infeed operation of the fixed volume chip production scheme.

Minimum cut depth clamping value (radial value) in composite-type thread cutting cycle G276 of EIA/ISO program

SU106

* For MAZATROL programs refer to TC79.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 65535 Set the spindle safety clamp speed of a tool whose diameter (nominal diameter) is not specified in the tool data. This clamp speed is invalid for the tools with tool diameter (or nominal diameter, if diameter cannot be specified) setting in the tool data.

Safety clamp speed

SU107

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate min1 0 to 99999999 Set the machine safeguarding strength to be used during the calculation of the safety speed for the spindle.

Remark: Spindle safety speed calculation expression

Safeguarding strength N= 60 103 D 2E 1 m (min )

SU108

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate J 0 to 99999999

Tool diameter D (mm): ACT- in MAZATROL tool data (For a tool whose tool diameter cannot be registered in tool data: Nominal diameter) Safeguarding strength E (J): Parameter SU108 Tip mass m (kg): Parameter SU109/1000

2-199

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SYSTEM
Description

Address

Set the tip mass used to calculate the spindle safety clamp speed.

Tip mass

SU109

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate g 0 to 99999999 Set the desired data range.

Note: Although entered data is checked for the range that has been set in SU110 - SU113, the check is conducted only when the Tool length setting range check function is valid (SU154 bit 1 = 1). Example of setting (SU111 = 0):

Tool length setting range check function Settable data range

SU110 to SU113

SU110 Max. tool length (+X-axis) SU111 Min. tool length (X-axis) SU112 Max. tool length (+Z-axis) SU113 Min. tool length (Z-axis)
SU112 SU110 SU113

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 19999999 Invalid

SU114 to SU122
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-200

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SYSTEM
Description

Address

Set the limit for the amount of motion on the primary rotational axis for workpiece placement error correction. Admissible motion range on the primary rotational axis for workpiece placement error correction

SU123

Note: Set zero (0) in SU123 if no restriction is to be imposed on the range of correcting motion on the primary rotational axis for workpiece placement error correction.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.0001 0 - 1799999 Set the limit for the amount of motion on the secondary rotational axis for workpiece placement error correction.

Admissible motion range on the secondary rotational axis for workpiece placement error correction

SU124

Note: Set zero (0) in SU124 if no restriction is to be imposed on the range of correcting motion on the secondary rotational axis for workpiece placement error correction.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.0001 0 - 1799999 Invalid

SU125 to SU152
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-201

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SYSTEM
Description

Address

M-code selection for tapping cycle. If the command block of G284/G288 (machining G-codes, F30 = 0) or of G84/G88 (turning G-codes, F30 = 1) does not contain spindle forward/ reverse rotation M-codes, one of the following M-codes will be output, depending on the status of bit 0 in parameter SU153:

BA59 = 3 BA60 = 4 SU153 bit 0

M-code selection for tapping cycle 0 1 Tapping cycle of turning Inverse tapping cycle of turning

BA59 = 203 BA60 = 204

Tapping cycle of milling Inverse tapping cycle of milling

SU153
(bit 0)

- If 0 is set in BA59, 3 will be regarded as having been set, and M03 will be output. - If 0 is set in BA60, 4 will be regarded as having been set, and M04 will be output.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E After stop of movement 0, 1 Display of BUFFER/REMAIN/POSITION on the POSITION display 0: Display in the machine axial direction 1: Display in the axial direction in the coordinates system that has been converted by the inclination of the B-axis

Actual axis X Virtual axis Z

Bit 1: Display of BUFFER on the POSITION display

Virtual axis X

SU153
(bit 1) (bit 2) (bit 3)

Bit 2: Display of REMAIN on the POSITION display Bit 3: Display of POSITION on the POSITION display

Actual axis Z

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1

2-202

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SYSTEM
Description

Address

The retraction of the lower turret in the execution of a MAZATROL program is determined according to the program contents and this parameters setting as detailed below. Program contents Retraction of the lower turret

Retraction to the position as specified with the [TURRET 2 POS. 1] or [TURRET 2 POS. 2] menu With a retraction item command POS. 1: X = SU97, Z = SU98 POS. 2: X = SU99, Z = SU100 Automatic retraction of the lower turret for MAZATROL programs - SU153 bit 4 = 0: No retraction - SU153 bit 4 = 1: Retraction Without retraction Movement to the position of automatic retraction as below. commands MULTIPLEX: X/Z = 2nd zero point (M5) Others: X/Y/Z = Machine zero point (M4)

SU153
(bit 4)

Note: Set this parameter for the system of the lower turret.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 Set the C-axis Clamp machining method for MAZATROL programs (line/linear machining for the C-axis CYLIND mode).

SU153
(bit 5)

C-axis Clamp machining method for MAZATROL programs (Line/Linear machining for the C-axis CYLIND mode)

0: Machining with C-axis braked 1: Machining with C-axis clamped (only for machining without C-axis movement)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 MAZATROL point machining with C-axis clamped (M210) 0: Output of M210 1: No output of M210

SU153
(bit 6)

MAZATROL point machining with C-axis clamped (M210)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1

2-203

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SYSTEM
Description

Address

Set the C-axis Clamp machining method for MAZATROL programs (line/linear machining for the C-axis FACE mode). C-axis Clamp machining method for MAZATROL programs (Line/Linear machining for the C-axis FACE mode) 0: Machining with C-axis braked 1: Machining with C-axis clamped (only for machining without C-axis movement)

SU153
(bit 7)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1

76543210
Displaying tool-setting values for ATC-type turret 0: Invalid 1: Valid Tool length setting range check function 0: Invalid 1: Valid Display of BUFFER during G18.2/G18.3 mode 0: Actual axis 1: Virtual axis Display of REMAIN during G18.2/G18.3 mode 0: Actual axis 1: Virtual axis Display of POSITION during G18.2/G18.3 mode 0: Actual axis 1: Virtual axis Display of BUFFER during G17.1 - G17.5 mode 0: Actual axis 1: Virtual axis Display of REMAIN during G17.1 - G17.5 mode 0: Actual axis 1: Virtual axis Display of POSITION during G17.1 - G17.5 mode 0: Actual axis 1: Virtual axis

SU154

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits Fixed value (1)

SU155
(bit 0)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-204

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SYSTEM
Description

Address

SU155
(bit 1)

Correction timing of the touch sensor tool length during EIA/ISO programmed or MDI operation (for machining center specifications only)

Select the timing in which the tool length of the touch sensor is to be made valid during EIA/ISO programmed or MDI operation when the following conditions are satisfied: - F93 bit 3 = 1 (using MAZATROL tool length) - F94 bit 7 = 0 (using tool offsets) 0: When a move command is executed for any controlled axis (X, Y, Z, or rotational axis) 1: When a move command is executed for the Z-axis

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0, 1 Select whether the zero point return is to be executed at an EIA subprogram call from a MAZATROL program. 0: Executed

SU155
(bit 2)

Operation at an EIA subprogram call from a MAZATROL program

1: Not executed

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 Select whether the index angle of the spindle is to be checked during MAZATROL programmed operation when a judgment on whether a tool change is necessary.

SU155
(bit 3)

Judgment method for tool change command output during MAZATROL programmed operation

0: No check (No tool change command is output when the tool is the same in tool name, nominal size, and suffix.) 1: Check (No tool change command is output when the tool is the same in tool name, nominal size, suffix, and spindle index angle.)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 Select whether the tool change command is to be output during MAZATROL programmed operation when the machining unit is executed for the first time.

SU155
(bit 4)

Tool change command output at the start of MAZATROL programmed operation

0: Output of the tool change command except for the same tool 1: Unconditional output of the tool change command

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1

2-205

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SYSTEM
Description

Address

Invalid

SU155
(bit 5) (bit 6) Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Select a method of judging tool breakage during laser tool measurement. 0: Judging from the setting of parameter L6 1: Judging from the tolerance specified in the program

SU155
(bit 7)

Reference value for judging tool breakage during laser tool measurement

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1

76543210
Type of deep hole drilling cycle G83/G87 0: Normal type 1: High-speed type Execution of the restarting search for a block in the mode of G68 when tool length compensation (G43/G44) remains valid with a turning tool mounted. 0: Alarm 1: Possible (however, the return to the restarting position is not conducted) Execution of the restarting search for a block after the cancellation of the cross command 0: Alarm 1: Possible (however, the return to the restarting position is not conducted)

SU156

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

2-206

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SYSTEM
Description

Address

76543210

The scheme of axis movement during an approach and during movement to the tool change command output position for machining at the work hand side 0: Compliant with SU11 and SU19. 1: Approach with priority assigned to the Z-axis (SU11 = 1) Movement to the tool rotating position with priority assigned to the X-axis (SU19 = 1) (Only for machines with a workpiece handling device)

Operation pattern with [NO RETURN] selected for CHANGE-PT in the manual program unit (MANL PRG) 0: NO RETURN to the tool change command output position is effective only when the tool need not be changed for another one, nor in the index angle. 1: NO RETURN to the tool change command output position is effective when there is no need of changing the tool, irrespectively of whether its index angle is to be altered or not. Response to a tool change command for the same tool number (TNo.) 0: No movement to the tool rotating position 1: Movement to the tool rotating position when either of the following three conditions is satisfied: a. The value of tool length/tool setting data differs. b. The value of nose R/tool diameter differs. c. The section to be machined differs. Select the kind of operation to be performed if either TURN POS X, Y, or Z of the indexing unit is left blank (only when a tool change is not conducted in immediate front of the indexing unit). 0: The unspecified axis moves to the position of the third home position (M6) before the B/C-axes are swiveled. (Conventional operation) 1: The B/C-axes are swiveled without any motion having been conducted on the unspecified axis. (New operation) Preparatory C-axis positioning to 0 for a manual program unit (MANL PRG) with a milling tool after a turning unit 0: Positioning to 0 on the C-axis 1: No movement on the C-axis. Select whether or not the B-axis rotation radius is to be included into the clearance position, a component of the tool change position (when TC62 = 0, 1, 2, 5 or 7) for changing the indexed cutting edge on one and the same FLASH tool. 0: Included 1: Not included

SU157

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

76543210
Checking the rotational axes correction values in workpiece placement error correction for MAZATROL programs 0: Invalid 1: Valid Note: Admissible motion ranges are to be specified in SU123 and SU124 respectively for the primary and secondary rotational axis.

SU158

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

2-207

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SYSTEM
Description

Address

Invalid

SU159 to SU168
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-208

PARAMETER

2-3-7

User parameter
USER

TURNING (TC)
Display title

Classification

TURNING
Description

Address

Meaning

Cut depth can be reduced as remaining workpiece thickness becomes less in rough cutting in bar machining unit, corner machining unit, and copy machining unit. Reduced cut depth (A) can be expressed by Cut depth reduction rate for rough cutting in bar machining unit, corner machining unit, and copy machining unit

TC1 A = T 100
where T = Remaining thickness (radial value).

TC1

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate % 0 to 100

F2 F1
Acceleration rate in up-going taper for rough cutting in bar machining unit

b a
NM211-00262

TC2
TC2 100

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate % 0 to 500

F 2 = F1

b a

F1 : Feed rate for rough cutting F2 : Increased feed rate

This is effective only when TC141 (bit 0) = 1.

F2
Acceleration rate in up-going wall slope (90) for rough cutting in bar machining unit

F1 : Feed rate for rough cutting F2 : Increased feed rate F1

TC3
TC3 F2 = F1 100
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate % 0 to 500

NM211-00263

Note: Up to 500 % can be set.

This is effective only when TC141 (bit 0) = 1.

This parameter will be used to select escape pattern (0, 1 or 2) when wall is vertical in G71/G72 mode. Selection of escape pattern from wall (90) in rough cutting cycle

TC4

TC4 = 0: Identical with ordinary path TC4 = 1: Escape at 45 from wall TC4 = 2: Feed rate accelerated at wall Accelerated feed rate F is expressed as follows. TC3 F = F0 100
(where F0 = Feed rate specified in program)
(!TC3)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0 to 2

2-209

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

a b F1
Deceleration rate in down-going taper for rough cutting in bar machining unit

F3

TC5
F 3 = F1
TC5 100

NM211-00264

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate % 0 to 500

a b

F1 : Feed rate for rough cutting F3 : Reduced feed rate

This is effective only when TC141 (bit 0) = 1.

F3 F1
Deceleration rate in down-going wall slope (90) for rough cutting in bar machining unit

F1 : Feed rate for rough cutting F3 : Reduced feed rate

TC6
F 3 = F1
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate % 0 to 500 This is effective only when TC141 (bit 1) = 1.
TC6 100

NM211-00265

Stock material shape F2

Acceleration rate on outside stock contour for rough cutting in copy machining unit

F1

TC7
F 2 = F1
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate % 0 to 500
TC7 100

F1 : Feed rate inside stock contour F2 : Feed rate outside stock contour
NM211-00266

Used to calculate acceleration distance in thread cutting unit L = L0 { Acceleration pitch error ratio in thread cutting unit

ln ( 1000 ) 1 +

TC8

TC8 1000

L : Acceleration distance L0 : Distance over which feed rate become constant

TC8

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1% 0 to 100

2-210

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

PS [1]
Rough cutting residue ratio in cutting off cycle in groove cutting unit

[2] PE

l
d

PS : Programmed start point PE : Programmed end point

l : Groove machining depth l = PSPE

d : Rough cutting residue
d=l

TC9

TC9 100
NM211-00267

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate % 0 to 100

[1] [2]

Cutting at rough cutting feed rate to a point short of end point PE by distance d Cutting off at finish cutting feed rate to end point PE

Used to calculate minimum cutting frequency in groove cutting unit, edge machining unit and copy machining unit Cut depth allowable incremental rate for rough cutting in groove cutting unit, edge machining unit and copy machining unit d = d ( 100 + TC10 ) 100

TC10

d : Cut depth per cycle d : Allowable maximum cut depth

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate % 0 to 100

TC11 F = F 100 F : Specified feed rate

F' : Feed rate at cutting start

End point

Programmed start point

Deceleration rate at cutting start in turningdrilling unit

Drill

TC11
l
Feed rate at F' over distance l from the programmed start point
l=
NM211-00268

D 2 tan/2

(0 < < 180) ( 180)

l=0

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate % 0 to 100

2-211

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

TC12 F = F 100 F : Specified feed rate

F' : Feed rate at cutting start

Programmed end point End point

Programmed start point

Deceleration rate at cutting end in turningdrilling unit

Drill

TC12

l Feed rate at F' to the point distant by l from the end point
l=
NM211-00269

D D + 10 2 tan/2

(0 < < 80) ( 180)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate % 0 to 100

D l = 10

F Deceleration clearance (TC15)

NM211-00270

Deceleration rate at rough cutting start in bar machining unit and copy machining unit

TC13 F = F 100
F: Specified feed rate F': Feed rate at cutting start

TC13

(!TC15)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate % 0 to 100

2-212

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

This parameter is valid during initial cutting in a bar roughing cycle. If the remainder obtained by dividing the thickness of cutting during the roughing cycle by the corresponding cutting depth stays within the range specified by this parameter, that value will be added to the initial cutting depth to reduce the cutting repeat times.

Example 1:

TC14 = 0 (R-depth.: 5)

Example 2: TC14 = 10% (R-depth.: 5)

5
Maximum permissible rate of increase of the initial cutting depth during roughing

5.1 10.1 5

10.1

5 0.1

TC14

Cutting to a depth of 10.1 is executed in 3 rounds of cutting (5, 5, and 0.1).

Cutting at a depth setting of 5 results in a final cutting depth of 0.1. Since 10% of the depth setting of 5 is 0.5 and this value is larger than the final cutting depth, this final cutting depth is added to the initial cutting depth.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate % 0 to 100

Note: Up to 100% can be set. When a value larger than 100% is set, it is regarded as 0.

Block separated F F

Front clearance (TC39) F F (Feedrate decelerated for the initial contact with workpiece)

Deceleration clearance at start of rough cutting in bar machining unit and copy machining unit

TC15

TC15

NM211-00256

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

Note: Using this parameter will reduce load in the initial contact between the tool and workpiece.
(!TC13)
TC16

Escape

P1

Tolerance for escape in high speed rough cutting cycle of bar machining unit

P2 P3 d d : Distance in cutting direction between P1 and P2

NM211-00257

TC16

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535 If TC16 d, tool escape from the workpiece. If TC16 < d, tool doesnt escape from the workpiece.

2-213

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

Set the starting pitch error rate of threading.

[1]
Pitch error correction during threading acceleration

TC17

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm 0 to 40 Fixed value (0) Ideal pitch = Starting pitch of threading ([1]) + TC17

TC18

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Used for automatic determination of first cut depth in turning-drilling

TC19 d1 = D 100
Turning-drilling cut depth calculation coefficient D : Drilling hole diameter d1 : Cut depth of first cut

TC19

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate % 0 to 1000
F1

Reamer return speed calculation coefficient in the turning-drilling unit

P2

P1

TC20
TC20 F2 = F1 100
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate % 0 to 999

F2

NM211-00271

F1 : Specified feed rate F2 : Return speed P1 : Start point P2 : End point

2-214

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

Incomplete threading portion length calculation coefficient for turning-tap tip

TC21 Programmed 10 end point P : Tapping pitch l : Incomplete thread portion length

l=P

Programmed start point

Tap

TC21

l
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate Pitch/10 0 to 99

Cutting end point specified farther by this length l

NM211-00273

Turning-tapper elongation calculation coefficient

T C22 10 P : Tapping pitch l : Tapper elongation

l=P

Tap

Normal state Pressed state during cutting, etc.

Tap

TC22
l
NM211-00274

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Pitch/10 0 to 99

TC23 h = P 10000
Thread height calculation coefficient for outside diameter, face/rear thread cutting (metric) h : Thread height P : Thread pitch

TC23

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.01% 0 to 65535

TC24 h = P 10000
Thread height calculation coefficient for inside diameter thread cutting (metric) h : Thread height P : Thread pitch

TC24

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.01% 0 to 65535

2-215

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

TC25 h = P 10000
Thread height calculation coefficient for outside diameter, face/rear thread cutting (inch) h : Thread height P : Thread pitch

TC25

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.01% 0 to 65535

TC26 h = P 10000
Thread height calculation coefficient for inside diameter thread cutting (inch) h : Thread height P : Thread pitch

TC26

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.01% 0 to 65535 <#1>

P TC28

Recessing width for #1 to #3

TC27
NM211-00277

TC27
<#2>
TC28

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

TC27 P
NM211-00278

<#3>

Recessing depth #1 to #3

TC28

TC27 TC28

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

TC28 P: Programmed end point

TC27

NM211-00279

2-216

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

<#4>

Recessing width for #4

P TC30

TC29
TC29

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

P: Programmed end point

NM211-00280

Recessing depth for #4

TC30

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535 <#5>

Recessing width for #5

TC32

TC31

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

TC31 P

NM211-00278

P: Programmed end point

Recessing depth for #5

TC32

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

2-217

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

<#6>

Recessing width for #6

TC33

TC33 TC34

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

P: Programmed end point TC34 TC33
NM211-00279

Recessing depth for #6

TC34

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535 Invalid

TC35 TC36
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-218

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

Safety contour clearance Outside diameter clearance (radial value)

Safety contour clearance is provided for outside of the stock material shape specified by common data in program. Tool approach and escape paths for each unit will be automatically determined according to set data (outside diameter, inside diameter, front clearance, back clearance) for parameters from TC37 to TC40.

TC37

TC40

l
Safety contour

TC39

TC37
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

Stock material shape

Dmin

TC38

Dmax

l0

Safety contour clearance Inside diameter clearance (radial value)

NM211-00221

TC38

Dmax: Stock material maximum outside diameter Dmin: Stock material minimum inside diameter l0: Stock material edge projection length l: Stock material length
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

Safety contour clearance Front clearance

TC39

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

Safety contour clearance Back clearance

TC40

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

2-219

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

Thread cutting clearance is provided to specify tool return distance for each cycle in thread cutting unit. Thread cutting clearance will be added to the highest portion of thread and repeating path will be determined automatically. <OUT>

TC41

Programmed shape Thread cutting acceleration distance

NM211-00222

<IN>
Programmed shape Thread cutting acceleration distance

TC41

Thread cutting clearance (radial value)

NM211-00223

TC41

<FCE>

Programmed shape

TC41

Thread cutting acceleration distance

NM211-00224

<BAK>
Thread cutting acceleration distance

TC41

Programmed shape

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

NM211-00225

2-220

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

Groove cutting clearance is provided at machining start portion in groove cutting unit. <OUT>
Tool path Outside diameter clearance TC37

TC42

Groove cutting clearance (radial value) in X-axis

TC42
<IN>
Front clearance TC39 Tool path

NM211-00226

TC42

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535 <FCE>

NM211-00227

Tool path

Outside diameter clearance TC37

Groove cutting clearance in Z-axis

TC43
<BAK>
Tool path

Front clearance TC39

NM211-00228

TC43

Outside diameter clearance TC37

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

Back clearance TC40

TC43

NM211-00229

2-221

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

Workpiece transfer clearance is provided to specify workpiece transfer position in workpiece transfer unit.

Workpiece transfer clearance

No. 1 spindle

Workpiece

No. 2 spindle

TC44
TC44
Workpiece transfer position NM211-00231

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535 No. 2 spindle traverses by rapid feed rate to a position distant from transfer position by clearance distance, and then transfer operation is initiated. (!TC57, TC58, TC59) After edge-machining unit roughing, this parameter works instead of safety contour clearance FCE parameter TC39. If, however, TC45 is zero, then TC39 is used.

Amount of edge clearance after roughing in the edge-machining unit

TC45

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

D dn Cut depth di d1

d1 d2 di
Drilling depth decrement in turning-drilling unit

End point n-th cycle i-th cycle 1st cycle

Start point

TC46

b dn

n Number of cutting in
NM211-00251

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

D : Drilling depth d1 : Cut depth in 1st cycle di : Cut depth in i-th cycle d1 TC46 (i 1) (di b) b (di < b) b : Drilling depth clamping value (TC48) (!TC48)

2-222

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

TC47

TC47

TC47

Pecking return distance in turning-drilling unit

G1 G0

TC47
P2
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

P1 D4 D3 D2 D1
NM211-00252

P1: Start point P2: End point Dn (n = 1 to 4) = Cut depth

Minimum turning-drilling cut depth is set.

Drilling cut depth clamp value in turningdrilling unit

TC48

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535 (!TC46) If 0 or 1 is set up in TC50: This value will be used as the spindle speed clamp value in cutting off cycle (#4/#5). If 2 or more is set up in TC50: Immediately before the cutting off area (*) is reached during the cutting off cycle, this value will be used as the spindle speed clamp value. Within the cutting off area, however, machining will be executed at the speed corresponding to this value. *: Cutting off area = (Starting position X Ending position X) TC9/100

Spindle speed clamp value in cutting off cycle (GRV)

TC49

TC49 = 0: The spindle speed will be clamped with the RPM value in the common unit. If RPM is zero, the spindle speed will be clamped with the value of parameter SA1.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate min1 0 to 65535

2-223

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

The staring feed value for cutting-off is a feed value that has been designated in unit data, and the ending feed value for cutting-off is a feed value that has been designated in sequence data. The feed rate from the start of machining to the end is reduced in steps according to the number of times that has been designated here.

Example: Feed rate set at feed item in unit data = 0.5 Feed rate set at roughness item in sequence data = 0.1 TC50 = 3
Number of times that the feed rate is to be reduced during the #4 and #5 cutting-off cycles of a grooving unit

Feed rate: 0.5 Feed rate: 0.3 Workpiece Workpiece Feed rate: 0.1

TC50

When 0 or 1 is set for TC50, the feed rate is unchanged.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Times 0 to 65535 Set the number of revolutions of the spindle during dwell time at the bottom of a hole when the #0 - #4 non-through hole drilling cycle is selected in the turning-drilling unit.

Dwell at the hole bottom during non-through hole drilling cycle of the turning-drilling unit

TC51

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Revolutions 0 to 255 Tool will stop at groove bottom while spindle rotates N times when TC52 is set to N (N=0 to 255).

Dwell (specification of spindle rotation number) at groove bottom in groove cutting unit

TC52

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Revolutions 0 to 255

Remaining at groove bottom until the spindle rotates N times.

NM211-00218

2-224

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

For escape by very short distance, G01 feed speed will be faster than G00 to complete the operation. (If G00 is used, smoothing 0 detection will be made at the end position.) Therefore, for escape very short distance, use G01 command, and set the feed speed of this command as parameter.

Example:
Escape in finish cutting of edge-machining unit Escape in rough cutting of bar machining unit
[1]

Feed rate for escape by short distance

TC53
[1] [1]: Feed speed in this block specified by G01 (TC53)
NM211-00238

Escape distance

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate mm/min / 0.1 in/min 0 to 65535 Inside diameter enlarging cycle

TC54 TC54

(!TC67, TC68)

NM211-00241

Cut depth per cycle for machining inside diameter in bar machining unit

TC54

Cutting is promoted gradually from the edge, and machining chip removal efficient.

cf. Standard inside diameter cutting

Cutting to specified depth once through, and machining chip removal not efficient

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

NM211-00242

2-225

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

Example: Outside diameter machining in normal ( Z-axis) direction

dr: Reverse feed contour data Contour

Reverse feed tolerance for contour machining

TC55
dr dr TC55 ........ No alarm dr > TC55 ........ Alarm

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

NM211-00243

PS

PE

TC56

PE
Overtravelling in X-axis direction in edge machining unit

PS

TC56
PS: Start point PE: End point
NM211-00244

TC56
Note: By setting an adequate value for TC56, uncut residue will not be produced in edge machining.

Tool

Uncut residue because of nose R. etc.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

NM211-00245

2-226

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

Example: Workpiece transferred from No. 1 spindle to No. 2 spindle

TC57 Workpiece

Workpiece pressing speed in workpiece transfer unit

No. 1 spindle

No. 2 spindle Workpiece transfer clearance (TC44) Workpiece transfer position specified in transfer display
NM211-00236

TC57

Set this parameter equal to or as close as possible to its standard value. Excessive setting may cause a contact error.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate mm/min 0.1 in/min 0 to 65535 Workpiece transferred from No. 1 spindle to No. 2 spindle

(!TC44, TC59)

Workpiece
Spindle speed (min1) of two spindles in workpiece transfer while the spindles are rotating in workpiece transfer unit

TC58

No. 1 spindle speed 1 (min ) TC58

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate min1 0 to 65535

Workpiece transfer clearance (TC44) Workpiece transfer position specified in the transfer display

No. 2 spindle speed (min1) TC58

NM211-00237

Workpiece transferred from No. 1 spindle to No. 2 spindle

Workpiece pressing distance in workpiece transfer unit

No. 1 spindle

Workpiece

No. 2 spindle

TC59
TC59

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/min 0.0001 in/min 0 to 65535

Workpiece transfer position specified in the transfer display

Workpiece transfer clearance (TC44)

NM211-00255

2-227

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

Invalid

TC60

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Simultaneous operation pattern for transfer of workpieces between two unit jobsites

TC61 = 1: Rotation of the spindle and movement of the Z-axis

Simultaneous operation pattern for transfer

TC61

TC61 = 2: Orientation of the spindle and movement of the Z-axis TC61 = 4: Positioning of the C-axis and movement of the Z-axis
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0 to 7

Note: To combine patterns, set the sum total of setting numbers corresponding the conditions.

2-228

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SYSTEM
Description

Address

Selection of tool change command output position for FLASH tool

When a FLASH tool is used, specify the position for indexing the tool, namely, the tool change command output position for indexing the tool of the same TNo. at the same B-axis angle during programmed operation. In all other cases, the tool change command output position specified by SU10 becomes valid.
M5 Z-axis

[6]

[1]

[3]

I21/I22 Z-axis

Machine zero point

M5 X-axis

[4]

Zc : Stock material edge projection length Dmax : Stock material maximum outside diameter : Tool turning clearance (X-axis) SU50 x + B-axis spindle edge offset value BA62 + Spindle tool length : Tool turning clearance (Z-axis) SU51 z

Fixed point

[5]

[0]

[2]
I21/I22 X-axis

[9/10]
x

[7]
Dmax

[8]
User-specified fixed point 1/2

Setting

X-axis Clearance position Machine zero point Clearance position Machine zero point Fixed point Clearance position Machine zero point End point of previous machining End point of previous machining User-specified fixed point 1 User-specified fixed point 2

Z-axis Clearance position Clearance position Machine zero point Machine zero point Fixed point End point of previous machining End point of previous machining Clearance position Machine zero point User-specified fixed point 1 User-specified fixed point 2

Zc

0 1 2 3

TC62

4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Notes: 1. TC62 = 5 or 6, Z-axis tool change command output position is identical with the end point of previous machining. In the case below, however, this may not be applied. As shown here, if the longest tool comes into the hatched portion, the position will escape in Z-axis direction by the distance determined by SU51.

SU51

Stock material length

Stock material edge protrusion length

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0 to 10

2. The turret type of turret conducts tool turning at the tool change command output position. The ATC type of turret moves from the tool change command output position to the ATC position.

2-229

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SYSTEM
Description

Address

Selection of tool change command output position for FLASH tool

When a FLASH tool is used, specify the position for indexing the tool, namely, the tool change command output position for indexing the tool of the same TNo. at the same B-axis angle during programmed operation. In all other cases, the tool change position specified by SU10 becomes valid.

INTEGREX e-H
[11] 3rd zero point M5 Z-axis M6 X-axis M5 X-axis [4] [5] [6] [1]

I21/I22 Z-axis

[3]

Zc : Stock material edge projection length Dmax : Stock material maximum outside diameter x : Tool turning clearance (X-axis) SU50 + B-axis spindle edge offset value BA62 + Spindle tool length z : Tool turning clearance (Z-axis) SU51

Machine zero point [0] [2]

I21/I22 X-axis [9/10]

User-specified fixed point 1/2

2nd zero point

x [7] [8] Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 X-axis Clearance position Machine zero point Clearance position Machine zero point 2nd zero point Clearance position Machine zero point End point of previous machining End point of previous machining User-specified fixed point 1 User-specified fixed point 2 3rd zero point Z-axis Clearance position Clearance position Machine zero point Machine zero point 2nd zero point End point of previous machining End point of previous machining Clearance position Machine zero point User-specified fixed point 1 User-specified fixed point 2 End point of previous machining

Dmax

Zc

z 3rd zero point

INTEGREX e-V
I21/I22 X-axis

M6 X-axis Machine M5 zero point X-axis [3] [4] M5 Z-axis

6 7 8 9 10 11

TC62
[8] I21/I22 Z-axis [9/10] [2]

User-specified fixed point 1/2

[7] z [0]

2nd zero point [1]

[11] [5] Zc Dmax x [6]

Notes: 1. Do not use the setting of TC62 = 4 for the INTEGREX eII series. A collision with the ATC cover is likely to occur since the ATC position specified in fixed-point M5 is present inside the ATC cover. 2. Since x in the case of TC62 = 0, 2, or 5 includes spindle tool length, if the tool is too long (as in the case of a long boring bar), the tool change operation may be softwarelimited in the +X direction. 3. TC62 = 5 or 6, Z-axis tool change command output position is identical with the end point of previous machining. In the case below, however, this may not be applied. As shown here, if the longest tool comes into the hatched portion, the position will escape in Z-axis direction by the distance determined by SU51.

SU51

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0 to 11
Stock material length Stock material edge protrusion length

2-230

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

Set the amount of relief after executing the workpiece transfer unit.

Example: Transfer from HD2 to HD1

Amount of relief after transfer using the workpiece transfer unit (Spindle mode 0 to 5)

Spindle No. 1

Spindle No. 2

TC63
Workpiece
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M After stop of movement 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 65535

Gripping position

Amount of relief

Amount of relief after transfer using the workpiece transfer unit (Spindle mode 6 and 7)

TC64

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After stop of movement 0.01 s 0 to 65535 It is a parameter to automatically control the parts catcher. If the set value of TC65 is n, M-code of No. n (parts catcher forward) is outputted at the start of cutting off (#4, #5), and M-code of No. n+1 (Parts catcher backward) is outputted at the end.

Specification of first M-code for parts catcher control

TC65

Note: If 0 is set in TC65 no M-code is outputted.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0 to 255 This parameter is used as the basis for judging whether the index angle entered in TOOL DATA display is acceptable. An alarm will be displayed if the entered value is judged to be unacceptable. (Specify 900 for 4-segment splitting.)

Minimum index angle of the FLASH tool

TC66

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.1 0 to 3599

2-231

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

TC67

Return distance (radial value) in X-axis at wall during rough cutting in bar cutting unit, in corner machining unit or in mill-turning unit of MAZATROL programs

Example 1: Standard type cutting Prior to cutting up along the wall in the end of final cycle, escape will be made by specified distance.

TC67

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

TC68

Example 2: High speed rough cutting Escape will be made by TC67 and TC68 specified distance during return after reaching the wall.

TC68

Return distance in Z-axis at wall during rough cutting in bar cutting unit, in corner machining unit or in mill-turning unit of MAZATROL programs
TC67

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

TC67

* For EIA/ISO programs (fixed cycle) refer to SU101 and SU102.

Set number of revolutions during dwell for each cutting operation for machining #0, #1, #2, #3, #4, or #5 groove (T. GROOVE unit) with pecking return distance (TC74) of 0. Number of revolutions during dwell for pecking of grooving The tool stops moving until the spindle makes revolutions set in this parameter.

TC69

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Revolutions 0 to 255 Number of cutting edges to be used if the tool file data for the corresponding tool is not yet registered during FLASH tool selection.

FLASH tool Number of cutting edges to be used for the tool not registered in the tool file

TC70

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Number of cutting edges 0 to 99

2-232

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

Specify the feed stopping rotation dwell time during the chip cutting cycle. Feed is stopped while the spindle rotates for the specified time.

Feed stopping rotation dwell time during the chip cutting cycle (valid only for roughing)

TC71

Note: If 0 is entered, the dwell time will be handled as 0. However, the feed rate will be reduced since the dwell function itself will be executed.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Revolutions 0 to 65535 If the number of times of roughing has not been specified in the program, operation will occur in accordance with the setting of this parameter.

Number of times of roughing in the composite-type fixed cycle (G273, G73)

TC72

Number of times of roughing

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate Times 0 to 65535 Pecking speed [1] [2] [3] Cutting: (G1) F command data Pecking: (G1) TC73 Cutting: (G1) F command data

When executing groove cutting with grooving pattern #0 (only for oblique groove) the tool returns from the groove bottom also at the G1 feed rate determined by this parameter. Return speed at pecking portion in groove cutting unit and turning-drilling unit Grooving #0 (Right-angled groove) Grooving #0 (Oblique groove) Returns at G1 Returns at G0

TC73

Note: In turning-drilling unit, TC73 setting will be used only for #2 and [#2] types.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/rev 0.0001 in/rev 0 to 65535

2-233

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

Tool

Pecking return distance in groove cutting unit of MAZATROL programs

TC74
TC74

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

d d: Tool diameter l : Groove width
NM211-00248

* For EIA/ISO programs (fixed cycle) refer to SU104.

Overlap distance for machining wide groove in groove cutting unit

Tool

TC75
TC75

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535 <Rough cutting> <Finish cutting>

l
NM211-00249

TC76
Escape value after machining in edge machining unit

TC76

TC76

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

TC76

TC76
NM211-00250

TC77
L
Acceleration distance clamp value for thread cutting unit

L0

TC77
L : Effective thread length L0: Acceleration distance Program start point Thread cutting start point
NM211-00246

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Lead/10 0 to 255

If L0 > TC77, alarm will be caused. If, however, TC141 (bit 2) = 0, alarm will not be caused. (!TC141 (bit 2))

2-234

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

Cut depth (radial value) for final cut in thread cutting unit of MAZATROL programs

1st cut

TC78
(n/2-1)th cut (n/2)th cut

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

TC78

nth cut NM211-00247

* For EIA/ISO programs (fixed cycle) refer to SU105. Clamping will follow the setting of TC79 if the calculated value of the cut depth with the threading unit is smaller than the setting of TC79. This parameter is valid only for the infeed operation of the fixed-area scheme.

Minimum cut depth clamping value (radial value) in thread cutting unit of MAZATROL programs

* For EIA/ISO programs (fixed cycle) refer to SU106.

TC79

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535 If, during the composite-type fixed cycle G276/G76 mode, a tool nose angle has not been specified in the program, the setting of this parameter will become the angle of the tool nose.

Angle of the tool nose during the G276/G76 mode

TC80

Angle

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0, 29, 30, 55, 60, 80 If the number of times of repetition has not been specified in the program, operation will occur in accordance with the setting of this parameter. The setting must be either 0, 29, 30, 55, 60 or 80.

Final finishing repeat times in the composite-type fixed cycle (G276, G76)

Number of times

TC81

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate Times 0 to 65535

2-235

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

L2 End point

L1

Start point

NM211-00272

Chamfering data calculation coefficient in thread cutting unit and thread cutting cycle (G276/G292, G76/G92)

TC82

L L1 L2 L2 = L0

: : : :

Effective thread length Same pitch incomplete thread length (follow-up delay) Chamfering data Chamfering angle

TC82 10

L0 : Thread lead

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate Lead/10 0 to 40 During a finishing process based on the standard pattern (#0) of the threading unit, TC78 cutting (final cutting diameter in threading unit) is repeated the number of times that has been specified in TC83.

TC83 = 0 or 1: Cutting based on the setting of TC78 occurs once. TC83 2: Finish-cutting is repeated the number of times specified in TC83, and with the depth-of-cut setting of TC78/TC83.
Number of cutting operations to be performed on finishing allowance corresponding to standard pattern (#0) of threading unit <Supplementary description> - Parameter TC83 is valid only for #0, [#0]: it does not function for #1, [#1] or #2, [#2]. - If TC78 = 0, TC83 is valid. For thread refinishing, one cutting operation is performed as before.

TC83

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Times 0 to 65535

2-236

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

Specify the feed rate to be auto-set for finishing (turning) in the MAZATROL program.

Feed rate to be auto-set for finishing

TC84

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/rev / 0.0001 in/rev 0 to 65535 Specify the number of the magazine pocket holding the adapter for the long boring bar.
Address Description Pocket No. 1 for long boring bar Pocket No. 2 for long boring bar Pocket No. 3 for long boring bar Pocket No. 4 for long boring bar Pocket No. 5 for long boring bar Pocket No. 6 for long boring bar Pocket No. 7 for long boring bar Pocket No. 8 for long boring bar Pocket No. 9 for long boring bar Pocket No. 10 for long boring bar

TC85 to TC94

Specification of the pocket for the long boring bar

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 960 Fixed value

TC85 TC86 TC87 TC88 TC89 TC90 TC91 TC92 TC93 TC94

TC95 TC96
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range Specify the sequence of retraction during workpiece transfer on machines with the lower turret.

TC97 = 0: The upper and lower turrets return simultaneously.

Type of retraction during workpiece transfer

TC97

TC97 = 1: The upper turret returns prior to the lower turret. TC97 = 2: The lower turret returns prior to the upper turret.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0 to 2

The setting is regarded as 0 if out of range.

2-237

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

Specify the sequence of the returning operation set in the ATC and RETURN items in the end unit for machines with the lower turret.

Returning operation after machining specified in the END unit

TC98 = 0: The upper and lower turrets return simultaneously. TC98 = 1: The upper turret returns prior to the lower turret. TC98 = 2: The lower turret returns prior to the upper turret.

TC98

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0 to 2

The setting is regarded as 0 if out of range.

Specify the ATC operation after machining when the ATC item in the end unit is not set.

ATC operation after machining when not specified in the END unit

TC99 = 0: The same operation as when the item is set to 0 is followed. (The tool is not returned.) TC99 = 1: The same operation as when the item is set to 1 is followed. (The tool is returned and axes move to the returning position.)

TC99

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0 to 2

TC99 = 2: The same pattern as when the item is set to 2 is followed. (The axes move to the returning position and the tool is returned).
The setting is regarded as 0 if out of range. Invalid

TC100

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Select a droop sampling axis.

Selection of droop sampling axis (For detecting imbalance)

TC101

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E At power on 0 to 16

2-238

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

Select a cycle counter sampling axis.

Selection of cycle counter sampling axis (For detecting imbalance)

TC102

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E At power on 0 to 16 Set the amplitude limit of table vibration.

Amplitude limit of table vibration (For detecting imbalance)

TC103

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E At power on 0 to 9999 Set the clearance for rechucking the workpiece using the workpiece transfer unit. Movement to the clearance position occurs in the G0 mode. Movement from the clearance position to the gripping position occurs in the G1 mode using the feed rate specified in parameter TC57. - Spindle No. 1 specification

G0

G1

Gripping position

Clearance for rechucking using the workpiece transfer unit

Workpiece

TC104
Clearance + Direction TC104 - Spindle No. 2 specification

Gripping position

G1

G0

Workpiece
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 32768 to 32767

Clearance + Direction TC104

2-239

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

Invalid

TC105

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Select whether or not to enable the specification of MOVE C which becomes valid after the workpiece has been moved using the workpiece transfer unit (CHUCK/BAR/MOVE) in a program of workpiece scheme.

Designation of MOVE C in a workpiece transfer unit of a program of workpiece scheme

0: Not to be enabled 1: To be enabled MOVE C can be specified only when the workpiece transfer unit is set as follows: [CHUCK WORK] or [BAR LOOP] is selected for PAT. Either [3 ORIENT], [4 C-AXIS POSITION], or [5 KEEP POSITION] is selected for SPDL. Also, MOVE C needs to be specified in incremental data terms with respect to the value of C in the immediately preceding fundamental coordinate unit (WPC). (Only for the INTEGREX e-H Series) Invalid

TC106

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1

TC107 to TC110
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range Specify the workpiece length range displayed on the CUTTING CONDITON LEARN display. Specify the range so that the relational expression of TC111 < TC112 < TC113 is established.

TC111 to TC113

CUTTING CONDITON LEARN display Workpiece length range

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate mm/0.1 in 0 to 65535

2-240

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

Specify the maximum outside diameter range of the workpieces displayed on the CUTTING CONDITON LEARN display. Specify the range so that the relational expression of TC114 < TC115 < TC116 is established.

TC114 to TC116

CUTTING CONDITON LEARN display Max. workpiece outside diameter range

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate mm/0.1 in 0 to 65535 The settings of these parameters will be used if the amount of release is not specified in the program.

Composite-type fixed cycle amount of X-axial release (G273)

TC117

TC117

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

TC118

Composite-type fixed cycle amount of Z-axial release (G273)

TC118

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535 Invalid

TC119

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-241

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

Distance to the front end of the long boring bar

Specify the distance from the B-axis rotational center of the milling spindle to the front end of the long boring bar.

Shift stroke Z

Distance from B-axis rotational center to the spindle edge (BA62)

Milling spindle

Milling spindle

B-axis rotational center

Long boring bar Long boring bar Shift stroke X Shift stroke Y

TC120 to TC137

Address TC120 TC121 TC122 TC123 TC124 TC125 TC126 TC127 TC128 TC129 TC130 TC131 TC132 TC133 TC134 TC135

Description Long boring bar No. 1 - Shift stroke X

Long boring bar Long boring bar Long boring bar Long boring bar

No. 1 No. 1 No. 2 No. 2 -

Shift stroke Y Shift stroke Z Shift stroke X Shift stroke Y

Long boring bar No. 2 - Shift stroke Z Long boring bar No. 3 - Shift stroke X Long boring bar No. 3 - Shift stroke Y Long boring bar Long boring bar Long boring bar Long boring bar No. 3 No. 4 No. 4 No. 4 Shift stroke Z Shift stroke X Shift stroke Y Shift stroke Z

Long boring bar No. 5 - Shift stroke X Long boring bar No. 5 - Shift stroke Y Long boring bar No. 5 - Shift stroke Z Long boring bar No. 6 - Shift stroke X Long boring bar No. 6 - Shift stroke Y Long boring bar No. 6 - Shift stroke Z

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 99999999 Invalid

TC136 TC137

TC138 to TC140
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-242

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

TC141 (bit 0) = 0: Disuse

F1

F1

No acceleration

TC141 (bit 0) = 1: Use Use/disuse of acceleration in up-going slope during rough cutting cycle in bar machining unit

F2

TC141 (bit 0)

F1

F 2 > F1 F1 : Feed rate for rough cutting cycle F2 : Feed rate after acceleration
NM211-00208

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 TC141 (bit 1) = 0: Disuse

(!TC2, TC3)

F1

F1 No deceleration

TC141 (bit 1) = 1: Use Use/disuse of deceleration in down-going slope during rough cutting cycle in bar machining unit
F3 < F1 F1 : Feed rate for rough cutting cycle F3 : Feed rate after deceleration
NM211-00209

F1

F3

TC141
(bit 1)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1
(!TC5, TC6)

2-243

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

TC141 (bit 2) = 0: Disuse Alarm not caused even if acceleration distance at start of thread cutting unit exceeds clamp data TC141 (bit 2) = 1: Use Alarm caused when acceleration distance at start of thread cutting unit exceeds clamp data Example:

Lc
Selection between use/disuse of acceleration distance check at start of thread cutting unit

Alarm not caused

TC141
(bit 2)

Lo
Alarm caused

Lo Start of thread cutting

Lo : Acceleration distance Lc : Acceleration distance clamp data

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 TC141 (bit 3) = 0: Start position shift Thread number offset adjusted by moving thread cutting start position
(!TC77)

1st thread 2nd thread 3rd thread

Acceleration distance changes according to the thread number

TC141
(bit 3)

Selection between start position shift/start angle shift for thread number offset in thread cutting unit

TC141 (bit 3) = 1: Start angle shift Thread number offset adjusted according to thread cutting start angle

1st thread 2nd thread 3rd thread

Acceleration distance is same for any thread number

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1

2-244

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

An angle margin for nose shape compensation can be selected by setting data in bits 4 and 5.

TC141
(bit 4) (bit 5)

Selecting an angle margin for nose shape compensation

Setting Bit 5 0 0 1 Bit 4 0 1 0 1

Angle margin for nose shape compensation 3.0 2.0 1.0 0.5

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1

TC141 (bit 6) = 1 A code can be selected. TC141 (bit 6) = 0 A name can be selected.

CHUCK JAW DATA display name/code selection

TC141
(bit 6)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1 TC141 (bit 7) = 1 Partition plate and the workpiece barrier valid TC141 (bit 7) = 0 Partition plate and the workpiece barrier invalid

Whether to make the partition plate and the workpiece barrier valid

TC141
(bit 7)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 Fixed value (0)

TC142
(bit 0)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-245

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

TC142
(bit 1)

Selecting an inter-unit relief path when a succession of I.D. turning units using the same tool exist and there is no movement to the rotating position of the tool

TC142 (bit 1) = 0 The relationship between the starting position of machining with the next unit and the ending position of machining with the previous unit is examined and if interference is judged to be likely, the tool will escape to a clearance point. TC142 (bit 1) = 1 The tool escapes to the clearance point each time the I.D. turning unit is executed to completion.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 Specify the jaw data reference method. TC142 (bit 2) = 0: Reference using the code number of the jaw.

Selection of the jaw data reference method

TC142 (bit 2) = 1: Reference using the name of the jaw.

TC142
(bit 2)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 TC142 (bit 3) = 0: Angle tool holder cannot be used. TC142 (bit 3) = 1: Angle tool holder can be used.

Using angle tool holder valid/invalid

TC142
(bit 3)

Use BA63 to set the angle of the angle tool holder.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1 Invalid

TC142
(bit 4)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-246

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

TC142 (bit 5) = 0: An alarm will not be issued even if the ending position of workpiece pressing is reached during the transfer of the workpiece. Selection whether an alarm is to be issued if the ending position of workpiece pressing is reached during transfer of the workpiece TC142 (bit 5) = 1: An alarm will be issued if the ending position of workpiece pressing is reached during the transfer of the workpiece.

TC142
(bit 5)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1 TC142 (bit 6) = 0: When the workpiece is transferred as specified in the workpiece transfer unit of the MAZATROL program, the X-axis moves to the machine zero point. TC142 (bit 6) = 1: When the workpiece is transferred as specified in the workpiece transfer unit of the MAZATROL program, the X-axis moves to the third zero point.

TC142
(bit 6)

X-axis retraction position during workpiece transfer as specified in the workpiece transfer unit of the MAZATROL program

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 TC142 (bit 7) = 0: Upper turret moves to the X-axis zero point during machining with the lower turret.

Upper turret retraction during machining with the lower turret

TC142
(bit 7)

TC142 (bit 7) = 1: Upper turret retraction does not occur during machining with the lower turret.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 Whether the end tool of the long boring bar can be changed by ATC (1: Changeable, 0: Not changeable)

76543210
Whether the end tool of the long boring bar can be changed

(1: Changeable, 0: Not changeable) Long boring bar No. 1 Long boring bar No. 2 Long boring bar No. 3 Long boring bar No. 4 Long boring bar No. 5 Long boring bar No. 6

TC143

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

2-247

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

76543210
Automatic selection of the relief path for the continuous I.D. machining Movement of the workpiece transfer axis for opposed turret machine 0: Z-axis return to zero point, 1: Compliant with TC63/TC64 C-axis clamping during workpiece transfer with Caxis positioning 0: Valid 1: Invalid Automatic output of spindle rotation command when turning tool is used in the manual program unit 0: Valid 1: Invalid ATC and RETURN of the end unit after singleprocess operation 0: Not executed 1: Executed ATC and RETURN of the end unit for repetition (CONTI. = 1). 0: Not executed 1: Executed Relief path G00/G01 selection for edging 0: G00 1: G01 Handling when no tools are specified for the manual program unit 0: Returning the tool 1: Inheriting the mounted tool

TC144

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After stop of movement Bit Binary, eight digits

2-248

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

76543210
OFFSET unit Z-axial inversion during turning 0: Valid 1: Invalid Handling of the G04 command in the manual program unit 0: Dwell per rev 1: Dwell per min Operation by cutting-feed override 0 in G31 command mode 0: Normal operation 1: Alarm stop After C-axis transfer using the workpiece transfer unit 0: Milling mode 1: Turning mode Selection of a calculation method for tail barrier end reference 0: Spindle edge 1: Z-offset Output of maximum spindle speed command specified in the common unit 0: At the beginning of each unit 1: Only at the program head (or at the restart position) Handling when tools different in shape (infeed angle, nose angle and nose R) are designated for the upper and lower turret in balanced cutting 0: Machining continues with the alarm ILLEGAL BALANCE CUT displayed 1: Machining continues without alarm Operation of the path inversed with respect to the traveling direction of the tip (only for copy machining) 0: Inversed path ignored 1: Alarm stop Description of TC145 bit 7 Operation of the path inversed with respect to the traveling direction of the tip 0: Inversed path ignored During roughing with the copy-machining unit, if the path is automatically created that is inversed with respect to the traveling direction of the tip, this path will be ignored and the next path executed. In this case, roughing will be executed with a smaller number of cutting operations than the specified number of cutting operations. 1: Alarm stop During roughing with the copy-machining unit, if the path is automatically created that is inversed with respect to the traveling direction of the tip, operation will stop with the display of alarm 714 ILLEGAL SEQUENCE DATA to indicate that the path is incorrect. The shape sequence number of the section where the inversed path has been created will be output. Correct the machining program.

TC145

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

2-249

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

76543210
Selection of the turning spindle rotation timing when the relay point for the turning approach is specified 0: Spindle rotation after movement to relay point 1: Spindle rotation before movement to relay point X-axis command in the manual program unit 0: Radial value 1: Diametral value Select the process to be performed when the infeed angle or the relief angle is 0 or less. 0: Tool path output assuming that the infeed angle or the relief angle is 90 1: Alarm stop Select whether to render C-axis command output valid for the second workpiece transfer unit onward when workpiece transfer units of a BAR moving pattern exist in succession. 0: Invalid 1: Valid Automatic setting of M8 as an M-code to be outputted at the beginning of a unit which is selected for the single-process operation. 0: No setting 1: Setting C-offset values to be used on HD1 and HD2 for a two-workpiece machining unit of MAZATROL programs 0: Use of the C-OFFSET setting in the preceding workpiece transfer unit for both sides. (If the setting in question is omitted, the C-OFFSET setting on the SET UP MANAG. display is used for both sides.) 1: Use of the C-OFFSET settings in the preceding workpiece transfer unit and on the SET UP MANAG. display as appropriate for the respective sides. Whether or not to modify the numeric positional indication with respect to the workpiece coordinate system according to the tool offset setting in the TPC data. 0: Modification 1: No modification Note: For mill-turning unit or turning-drilling unit in which a milling tool is used, spindle rotates after movement to the relay point, even when TC146 bit 0 = 1. Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

TC146

2-250

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

76543210
Modal condition about diameter/radius value input for the unit succeeding a manual program or subprogram unit 0: The condition of the manual program or subprogram unit is retained. 1: The condition of the unit preceding a manual program or subprogram unit is used. Z/C offset value to be used in the EIA/ISO subprogram after workpiece transfer in the MAZATROL program 0: Z/C offset value set in the workpiece transfer unit 1: Z/C offset value for the MAZATROL program set on the SET UP MANAG. display Whether pressing is to be made selectable for workpiece transfer units of a BAR moving pattern. 0: Not to be made selectable 1: To be made selectable Tool nose position of an inside-turning grooving tool for machining on the back side 0: Upper right corner of the tip-width section

TC147

1: Upper left corner of the tip-width section (compatible with M640T, MT, T NEXUS, and MT Pro)

Z-axial withdrawal after M-code unit execution when the tool nose is positioned at the edge clearance including the workpiece edge protrusion (See example below.) 0: Invalid 1: Valid

Example: The tool will be withdrawn after execution of the M-code unit when the tool nose has been positioned in the area between the front clearance point and the workpiece zero point (the hatched section in the figure) using the manual program unit, or when the program is restarted from the M-code unit with the tool nose positioned in that area.

O.D. clearance (TC37)

Workpiece edge

protrusion
Rear clearance (TC40) OFF path ON path Workpiece length Front clearance (TC39)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M (Bit 1: E) Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

Note: TC147 bit 1 is valid only when F161 bit 7 is set to 1.

2-251

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

TURNING
Description

Address

76543210
Whether or not an icon is to be displayed as long as the threading position is stored for the rethreading function. 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed The icon shown below is displayed:

Display of an icon for threading position storage

TC148

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

76543210
Machine operation on tool path check of a program for which workpiece scheme is selected and T. CENTER is specified for X and Y, but Z is left blank in the basic coordinates system unit (WPC). 0: Alarm 613 DATA MISSING IN WPC UNIT occurs. 1: Setting of Z is handled as 0.

TC149

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits Invalid

TC150 to TC154
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-252

PARAMETER

2-3-8

User parameter
USER

SOLID (SD)
Display title

Classification

SOLID
Description

Address

Meaning Invalid

SD1 to SD48
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range Set the type of coordinate system used for position display. 0: MAZATROL coordinate system 1: Machine coordinate system Machine coordinate system setting

SD49

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1 Select a table type for 3D setup display. 0: Square table 1: Round table

Table type

2: Chuck

SD50

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 2 Select a table axial direction for 3D setup display. 0: X-axis 1: Y-axis

Table axial direction

2: Z-axis

SD51

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 2

2-253

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SOLID
Description

Address

Invalid

SD52 to SD96
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range Set the default value for the models movement distance per time that is to be displayed in the movement distance assignment dialog box.

Distance of the model movement per time

SD97

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999 Set the default value for the amount of model rotation per time that is to be displayed in the amount-of-rotation assignment dialog box.

Amount of model rotation per time

SD98

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 0 to 3600000 Invalid

SD99 to SD124
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-254

PARAMETER

Classification

USER
Meaning

Display title

SOLID
Description

Address

Set the table size for 3D setup display. - Vertical type

+Z SD125 +Y SD128 +X SD126 SD130 SD129

Table size SD125: Minimum table dimension X SD126: Maximum table dimension X SD127: Minimum table dimension Y SD128: Maximum table dimension Y SD129: Minimum table dimension Z SD130: Maximum table dimension Z

SD127

SD125 to SD130

- Horizontal type

+Y SD129 +X SD126 +Z

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

SD130 SD128

SD125 SD127

Set the amount of table chamfer for 3D setup display. - Top view of the table

Length of the shorter side in vertical and horizontal directions Amount of chamfer

Amount of table chamfer

SD131

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

2-255

PARAMETER

2-3-9

Machine parameter
MACHINE

CALL MACRO (J)

Display title

Classification

CALL MACRO

G-code macroprogram call

No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 No.5 No.6 No.7 No.8 J29 J1 J5 J9 J13 J17 J21 J25 No.9 J33 No.10 J37 0 to 999999999 M, E Unit Setting range Program Conditions type Description

100009590 100009599 100009401 (Fixed (Fixed (Fixed value) value) value)

Work number of Immediate the program to be called The G-code number to be used for program call Immediate Note: Not possible to set G-codes whose uses are predefined. Calling type Immediate 0: M98 2: G66 1: G65 3: G66.1 Invalid

J2

J6

J10 J14 J18 J22 J26

J30 136
(Fixed value)

J34 137
(Fixed value)

J38 130
(Fixed value)

0 to 999

M, E

J3 J4

J7 J8

J11 J15 J19 J23 J27 J12 J16 J20 J24 J28

J31 1
(Fixed value)

J35 1
(Fixed value)

J39 2
(Fixed value)

0 to 3

M, E

J32

J36

J40

M-code macroprogram call

No. 1 No .2 No. 3 No. 4 No. 5 Unit Setting range 0 to 999999999 Program Conditions type M, E Immediate Description Work number of the program to be called The M-code number to be used for program call 0 to 9999 M, E Immediate Note: Not possible to set Mcodes whose uses are predefined. Calling type Immediate 0: M98 2: G66 1: G65 3: G66.1 Parameter for system internal setting Setting prohibited Description Work number of the program to be called The M-code number to be used for program call 0 to 9999 M, E Immediate Note: Not possible to set Mcodes whose uses are predefined. Calling type Immediate 0: M98 2: G66 1: G65 3: G66.1 Invalid

J41 J45 J49 J51 J57 100000090 100000091 100000092 100000093 100000001
(Fixed value) (Fixed value) (Fixed value) (Fixed value) (Fixed value)

J42 90
(Fixed value)

J46 91

J50 92

J54 93

J58 153
(Fixed value)

(Fixed value) (Fixed value) (Fixed value)

J43 0
(Fixed value)

J47 0 J48 0

J51 0 J52 0

J55 0 J56 0

J59 0
(Fixed value)

0 to 3

M, E

(Fixed value) (Fixed value) (Fixed value)

J44 0
(Fixed value)

J60 0
(Fixed value)

Setting range 0 to 999999999

(Fixed value) (Fixed value) (Fixed value)

No. 6 J61 100000002

(Fixed value)

No. 7 J65

No. 8 J69

No. 9 J73

No. 10 J77

Unit

Program Conditions type M, E Immediate

J62 154
(Fixed value)

J66

J70

J74

J78

J63 0
(Fixed value)

J67

J71

J75

J79 0 to 3 M, E

J64 0
(Fixed value)

J68

J72

J76

J80

2-256

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

CALL MACRO
Description

Address

Invalid

J81 to J88
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Parameter for system internal setting Setting prohibited

J89 to J107
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Invalid

J108

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-257

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

CALL MACRO
Description

Address

Set the chuck reference position 1 on the No. 2 spindle side or the NC tailstock position with respect to the machine zero point of the upper turret. Use BA79 to BA86 for machines with the No. 2 spindle set as System 2.

- Setting the chuck reference position 1 on the No. 2 spindle side

Machine zero point of the upper turret

J111

J109

J110

J112

J109 to J112

Barrier setup chuck reference position 1 on the No. 2 spindle side Barrier setup NC tailstock position

- Setting the NC tailstock position

Machine zero point of the upper turret

J111 J110

J109

J112

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 99999999 to 99999999 Set the chuck reference position 2 on the No. 2 spindle side with respect to the machine zero point of the upper turret. Use BA79 to BA86 for machines with the No. 2 spindle set as System 2.

J113 to J116

Barrier setup chuck reference position 2 on the No. 2 spindle side

Machine zero point of the upper turret

J115

J113

J114

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 99999999 to 99999999

J116

2-258

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

CALL MACRO
Description

Address

Invalid

J117 J118
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range Specify the ID number of the barrier-setting and barrier-cancelling Mcodes to be used for barrier teaching function. J119: Barrier-setting M-code to be used for barrier teaching (If a value other than 1 - 999 is set, the value will be regarded as 846.) J120: Barrier-cancelling M-code to be used for barrier teaching (If a value other than 1 - 999 is set, the value will be regarded as 847.) Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate 1 to 999

J119 J120

Barrier-setting/cancelling M-code to be used for barrier teaching

Invalid

J121 to J130
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Specify the ID number of the M-code for making the interference check function valid/invalid.

J131 to J140

Setting the M-code for making the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function valid/invalid during automatic operation

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate

J131: J132: J133: J134: J135: J136: J137: J138: J139: J140:

INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function invalid Material model cutting invalid Machine interference check invalid Machine interference check valid Material model interference check invalid Material model interference check valid Fixture model interference check invalid Fixture model interference check valid Tool model interference check invalid Tool model interference check valid

2-259

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

CALL MACRO
Description

Address

Select whether the M-code registered in parameter J131J138 to make the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function valid/invalid during automatic operation is to be output from the NC to the PLC ladder. 0: Invalid (No output to the PLC ladder) 1: Valid (Output to the PLC ladder)

76543210
M-code registered in J131 M-code registered in J132 Selecting whether to output the M-code for making the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function valid/invalid during automatic operation M-code registered in J133 M-code registered in J134 M-code registered in J135 M-code registered in J136 M-code registered in J137 M-code registered in J138

J141

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits Select whether the M-code registered in parameter J139 and J140 to make the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function valid/invalid during automatic operation is to be output from the NC to the PLC ladder. 0: Invalid (No output to the PLC ladder) 1: Valid (Output to the PLC ladder)

J142

Selecting whether to output the M-code for making the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function valid/invalid during automatic operation

76543210
M-code registered in J139

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

M-code registered in J140

Invalid

J143 J144
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-260

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE

Display title

CALL MACRO

M-code macroprogram call (extended) [Option]

No. 11 J145 No .12 J149 No. 13 J153 No. 14 J157 No. 15 J161 Unit Setting range 0 to 999999999 Program Conditions type M, E Immediate Description Work number of the program to be called The M-code number to be used for program call J146 J150 J154 J158 J162 0 to 9999 M, E Immediate Note: Not possible to set Mcodes whose uses are predefined. Calling type Immediate 0: M98 2: G66 1: G65 3: G66.1 Invalid Description Work number of the program to be called The M-code number to be used for program call J166 J170 J174 J178 J182 0 to 9999 M, E Immediate Note: Not possible to set Mcodes whose uses are predefined. Calling type Immediate 0: M98 2: G66 1: G65 3: G66.1 Invalid

J147 J148 No. 16 J165

J151 J152 No. 17 J169

J155 J156 No. 18 J173

J159 J160 No. 19 J177

J163 J164 No. 20 J181

Unit

0 to 3 Setting range 0 to 999999999

M, E

Program Conditions type M, E Immediate

J167 J168

J171 J172

J175 J176

J179 J180

J183 J184

0 to 3

M, E

Address

Meaning Invalid

Description

J185 to J264
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-261

PARAMETER

2-3-10 Machine parameter

Classification

MEASURE (K)
Display title

MACHINE
Meaning

MEASURE
Description

Address

Distance from the center of the C-axis (spindle) to the nose of the tool

Z Tool

Rotational radius of the C-axis

K1 X Spindle center K1

K1

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999 The minimum rotational angle of the C-axis at shaping block connections Rotational angle of the C-axis at block connections: The C-axis does not rotate if l l < K2.

90 K2
Minimum rotational angle

180 K2

If K2 < < K2, C-axis does not rotate.

K2

270

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0.001 0 to 90000

2-262

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

Set identification number of the shaping control axis. Specify the shaping control axis as follows: Example: Set 4 for a three-axis machine. Set 5 for a four-axis machine. Note: Set the type of the axis which has been set on this parameter to the rotational axis (M17 bit 4 = 1). Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E Immediate Invalid

Shaping control axis

K3

K4 to K6
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Specify the axis that moves vertically 1 : The X-axis acts as the unbalanced axis. 2 : The Y-axis acts as the unbalanced axis. 4 : The Z-axis acts as the unbalanced axis.

Unbalanced axis

K7

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 1, 2, 4

Invalid

K8 K9
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-263

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

Fixed value

K10

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Set this parameter to change the display language. Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Language English Japanese German French Italian Spanish Norwegian Swedish Finnish Chinese (traditional character) Dutch Setting 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 25 Language Korean Portuguese Danish Czech Turkish Polish Romanian Hungarian Russian Slovak Chinese (simplified character) Bulgarian

Selection of language to be displayed

K11

9 10

Note: To display Japanese characters, traditional and/or simplified Chinese characters, Korean characters, Russian characters, or Bulgarian characters the appropriate OS (display language) must be installed in your personal computer. Program type Conditions Unit Setting range Immediate 0 to 21, 25 Fixed value (0)

K12

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-264

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

(1) Workpiece measurement Sensor path fa Measurement skip feed rate (X-axis, Z-axis) K13 Workpiece

K13
Measurement stroke (K19) Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate mm/min 0 to 20000 (2) Tool tip measurement Tool path fa: Measurement approach speed (K14)

NM211-00233

Measurement approach speed (X-axis, Zaxis)

K13 Sensor Measurement stroke (K20)

NM211-00234

K14

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate mm/min 0 to 20000 (!K19, K20)

Sensor path [1]

Measurement skip speed (C-axis)

K15

[3] [2] [4] Workpiece

[1], [3] : Rapid feed [2] : Measurement approach speed (K16) [4] : K15

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate /min 0 to 65535

NM211-00235

Measurement approach speed (C-axis)

K16

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate /min 0 to 65535

2-265

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

Specification of measuring tolerance (lower limit)

(1) Tool compensation will be made in cases below. a1 a2 a a2 K18 Compensation data 1 K17 100 100 a a2 a a2 1 K17 Compensation data 1 K18 100 100 (2) Tool compensation will not be made in cases below. a1 a2 a a2 K17 > Compensation data > 1 K17 100 100 (3) Alarm will be caused in cases below. a a2 Compensation data > 1 K18 100
a1 a2 K18 > Compensation data 100

K17

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate % 0 to 100

where a1 = Tolerance upper limit a2 = Tolerance lower limit (Specified in program) Notes:

Specification of measuring tolerance (upper limit)

1. Up to 100 % can be set. 2. Offset judgement occurs only when L106 bit 6 ist set to 1.

K18

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate % 0 to 100

Measurement stroke for workpiece measurement

b K19

K19
c

a : Approach point b : Measurement start point c : Measurement point (target data) d : Measurement end point

Measurement region K19

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

d

NM211-00259

TOOL EYE reference point #2 K20

Measurement stroke for tool nose measurement

TOOL EYE reference point #1

K20

K20

K20
K20 TOOL EYE reference point #4 TOOL EYE reference point #3

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 65535

2-266

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

During approach operation to measurement start point, if touch sensor is actuated, the C-axis will rotate by angle determined by the measurement object shape angle and setting value K21. Coefficient to determine rotation angle when retrying measurement C reference face Example: CW programmed as measurement direction : Measurement object shape angle : K21/100 C-axis rotation by angle in this direction
NM211-00261

K21
ON

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate % 1 to 1000 When touch sensor is actuated before reaching target point in C offset measurement, set retry frequency. When K22 is set to N (N = 0 to 255), measurement alarm will be indicated when touch sensor is actuated before reaching measurement target point in (N+1)th retry operation.

Measurement retry frequency when retrying reference face C measurement

K22

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Times 0 to 255 Specify the number of times the workpiece measurement is to be retried if a measurement error occurs.

Retry frequency for workpiece measurement

K23

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate Times 0 to 99999 Parameter for system internal setting Setting prohibited

K24 to K28
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-267

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

Delays master/slave axis position matching during automatic error correction (parameter K103 bit 1 = 0). Simultaneous control: Delay counter for automatic correction of synchronizing errors

K29

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 1.7 ms 0 to 99999 Specify the approach speed and pre-measuring speed for laser tool length (diameter) measurement. Note: The delay time will be 3 seconds if 0 is set.

K30 to K33

K30 Approach speed for laser tool length measurement K31 Approach speed for laser tool diameter measurement K32 Pre-measuring speed for laser tool length measurement K33 Pre-measuring speed for laser tool diameter measurement Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At power on mm/min / 0.1 in/min 99999999

Specify the pre-measuring spindle speed for laser tool length (diameter) measurement. K34 Pre-measuring spindle speed for laser tool length measurement K35 Pre-measuring spindle speed for laser tool diameter measurement

K34 K35

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on min1 0 to 65535 Parameter for system internal setting Setting prohibited

K36

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-268

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

The upper-limit value of the feed rates available while the external deceleration signal is ON

Feedrate
External deceleration speed

K37
K37
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E After stop of movement mm/min 0 to 120000

ON

External deceleration signal

MPL508

Work number called during S-code macroprogram appointment

The work number of the macroprogram to be called during S-code macroprogram appointment (Programming of S0000; causes execution of the macroprogram whose work number is set using this parameter.)

K38

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 999999999 Note: This parameter is valid only when bit 2 of parameter K105 is 1. The work number of the macroprogram to be called during T-code macroprogram appointment (Programming of T0000; causes execution of the macroprogram whose work number is set using this parameter.)

Work number called during T-code macroprogram appointment

K39

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 999999999 Note: This parameter is valid only when bit 3 of parameter K105 is 1. The work number of the macroprogram to be called during macroprogram appointment using the second auxiliary function

Work number called during second auxiliary function macroprogram appointment

K40

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 999999999

Notes: 1. This parameter is valid only when bit 4 of parameter K105 is 1. 2. See the description of parameter K56 for details of the addresses available with the second auxiliary function.

2-269

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

The feed rate during axis movement by G31 (skip function) If the same block as that of G31 contains an F command, then that feed rate becomes valid. G31 skipping speed

K41

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement mm/min 0 to 120000 The feed rate during axis movement by G31.1 (multi-step skip function) If the same block as that of G31.1 contains an F command, then that feed rate becomes valid.

G31.1 skipping speed

K42

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E After stop of movement mm/min 0 to 120000 The feed rate during axis movement by G31.2 (multi-step skip function) If the same block as that of G31.2 contains an F command, then that feed rate becomes valid.

G31.2 skipping speed

K43

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E After stop of movement mm/min 0 to 120000 The feed rate during axis movement by G31.3 (multi-step skip function) If the same block as that of G31.3 contains an F command, then that feed rate becomes valid.

G31.3 skipping speed

K44

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E After stop of movement mm/min 0 to 120000

2-270

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

The feed rate during axis movement by G31.4 (skip function) If the same block as that of G31.4 contains an F command, then that feed rate becomes valid. G31.4 skipping speed

K45

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E After stop of movement mm/min 0 to 120000 Set the excessive pressing error spread (the amount of drooping).

Excessive pressing error spread (Amount of drooping)

K46

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm 0 to 32767 Invalid

K47

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

0: Monitoring based on acceleration 1: Monitoring based on speed 2: Ignoring alarms

Spindle FB alarm detection method

K48

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 2

2-271

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

Set the first number of the M-codes to be used for the M-code standby function. Example: To use M950 to M995 as the standby M-codes set 950 in K49 and 46 in K50.

First number of the standby M-codes

K49

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 31 to 1000 Set the total number of M-codes to be used for the M-code standby function. Example: To use M950 to M995 as the standby M-codes set 950 in K49 and 46 in K50.

Total number of the standby M-codes

K50
Note: If 0 is set, the M-code standby function will be invalid. Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E After stop of movement 0 to 1000 Set the M-code to be output if workpiece measurement results in an error and is to be retried. Note: If 0 is set, this function will be invalid.
M-code output

M-code during workpiece measurement retry operation

K51
If workpiece measurement results in an error and is to be retried

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0 to 1000

M-code output

Parameter for system internal setting Setting prohibited

K52

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-272

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

Set the type of vocal output language. Setting 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Language English Japanese German French Italian Spanish Setting 8 9 10 11 12 13 to 20 21 Language Finnish Chinese (traditional character) Korean Portuguese Chinese (simplified character)

Language selection (vocal output)

K53

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 21

Note: Output will be in English (0) if the selected value is for a language not supported. Set the vocal output sound level. Note: Entry of 0 means no sound level.

Sound level (vocal output)

K54

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 100 A vocal warning will be output if the value of the spindle load meter exceeds the percentage value set in K55.

Warning reference value (vocal output)

K55

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate % 0 to 200 Select the address name of the second auxiliary function from among the following three types:

Name of second auxiliary function

Address name Invalid A B C

Setting (HEX) 0 41 42 43

K56
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E At power on Hexadecimal two-digit 0, 41, 42, 43

Note: Do not use the same address for the axis name and the second auxiliary function.

2-273

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

This parameter is used during S-code macroprogram appointment to select the method of calling the macroprogram whose work number has been set using the K38 parameter. Type of S-code macroprogram appointment call Setting 0 1 2 3 Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate 0 to 3 This parameter is used during T-code macroprogram appointment to select the method of calling the macroporgram whose work number has been set using the K39 parameter. Type of T-code macroprogram appointment call Setting 0 1 2 3 Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate 0 to 3 This parameter is used during the second auxiliary function macroprogram appointment to select the method of calling the macroporgram whose work number has been set using the K40 parameter. Type of second auxiliary function macroprogram appointment call Note: Valid only when bit 3 of K105 is 1. Calling method M98 G65 G66 G66.1 P"""" P"""" P"""" P"""" Note: Valid only when bit 2 of K105 is 1. Calling method M98 G65 G66 G66.1 P"""" P"""" P"""" P""""

K57

K58

Setting 0 1 2

Calling method M98 G65 G66 G66.1 P"""" P"""" P"""" P""""

K59

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 3 Fixed value (4)

Note: Valid only when bit 4 of K105 is 1.

K60

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-274

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

Fixed value (1)

K61

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Fixed value (1)

K62

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Fixed value (1)

K63

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Fixed value (2)

K64

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-275

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

Fixed value (1)

K65

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Fixed value (1)

K66

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Fixed value (1)

K67

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

76543210
Coordinate system with reference to which the offset amounts are to be used in tool length offset for the selected machining surface. (For machines of five-surface machining by angular tools) 0: Machine coordinate system 1: Workpiece coordinate system All the barrier cancel data in the program is cleared by executing the MMS unit in a MAZATROL program. 0: Invalid 1: Valid

K68

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

2-276

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

76543210

(0: Invalid

1: Valid)

G31.1 skip conditions

SKIP-2 SKIP-10 SKIP-3 Select the skip signal for G31.1 command. HR353

K69

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E After stop of movement Bit Binary, eight digits

76543210

(0: Invalid

1: Valid)

G31.2 skip conditions

SKIP-2 SKIP-10 SKIP-3 Select the skip signal for G31.2 command. HR353

K70

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E After stop of movement Bit Binary, eight digits

76543210

(0: Invalid

1: Valid)

G31.3 skip conditions

SKIP-2 SKIP-10 SKIP-3 Select the skip signal for G31.3 command. HR353

K71

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E After stop of movement Bit Binary, eight digits

76543210

(0: Invalid SKIP-2

1: Valid)

G31.4 skip conditions

SKIP-10 SKIP-3 SKIP-11 SKIP-5 SKIP-13

K72

HR353

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E After stop of movement Bit Binary, eight digits

SKIP-6 SKIP-14 Select the skip signal for the G31.4 command.

2-277

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

76543210

(0: Invalid

1: Valid)

G4 skip conditions

SKIP-2 SKIP-10 SKIP-3 Select the skip signal for G4 command. QX721

K73

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E After stop of movement Bit Binary, eight digits

Emergency stop contactor cutoff time (Safety supervisory function)

Set the desired time from an emergency stop to the start of cutting off the contactor of the main power to the driving section during the execution of a safety supervisory function when all-axis zero-speed confirmation is impossible. A contactor cutoff signal will be immediately output if all-axis zero-speed confirmation is executable earlier than the set time.

K74

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement s 0 to 60 Specify a remote I/O device that is to output a contactor activating/deactivating signal when the safety supervisory function is executed.

Contactor control output device 1 (Safety supervisory function)

K75

Note: The signal will not be output if &0 is specified.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement &0 to &7F Specify another remote I/O device that is to output the contactor activating/deactivating signal when the safety supervisory function is executed.

Contactor control output device 2 (Safety supervisory function)

K76

Note: The signal will not be output if &0 is specified.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement &0 to &7F

2-278

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

Door switch input device (Safety supervisory function)

Enter the device number of the remote I/O device to be activated to input a door open/closed status signal. The device of the entered serial device number will be reserved according to the particular setting of K78 (the parameter for setting the number of door switches).

K77

Note: Door switch input will be invalid if &0 is entered.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement &0 to &7F Set the number of doors for which the door open/closed status signal is to be output.

Number of door switches (Safety supervisory function)

K78

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0 to 16 Set the filtering time for the speed that is to be monitored in a servo-off status during safety speed monitoring.

Supervisory speed filtering time during servo-off (Safety supervisory function)

Note: Input of 0 means 200 ms.

K79

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 1.777 ms 0 to 1000 A vocal warning will be output when the value of the load meter for servo axis control reaches or exceeds the percentage value set in K80.

Warning reference value (Vocal output)

K80

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate % 0 to 200

2-279

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

Fixed value

Timer for machining management

K81

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After stop of movement ms 0 - 32767 Fixed value

K82

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Specify the maximum amount of compensation for workpiece thermal expansion. In order to prevent eventual collision, the maximum amount should not exceed the distance between software limit and mechanical end on any axis concerned. Notes: 1. If 0 is set here, compensation will not be made for workpiece thermal expansion. 2. This parameter is valid for machining centers with the capability of compensating for workpiece thermal expansion.

Maximum amount of compensation for workpiece thermal expansion

K83

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.00005 mm 0 - 32767 Specify the maximum amount of compensation for workpiece thermal expansion in each interpolating cycle.

Maximum allowable amount of compensation for workpiece thermal expansion in each interpolating cycle

If the compensation amount computed exceeds the maximum value (as set with K84), compensation will be executed by dividing the interpolation motion into multiple sections. Notes: 1. If 0 is set here, the amount is set to 0.001 mm. 2. This parameter is valid for machining centers with the capability of compensating for workpiece thermal expansion.

K84

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.00005 mm 0 - 32767

2-280

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

If the setting of K85 is from 1 to 300 ms, this setting will be used as the linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for the G32 threading block. If the setting is outside the valid range, however, the normal linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for G01 will be used.

Special linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for threading

K85

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement ms 0 to 32767 Invalid

K86

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Parameter for system internal setting Setting prohibited

K87 to K89
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

The overriding value for return from the hole bottom during a synchronous tapping cycle

Return override during synchronous tapping

K90
Programmed K90 feed rate 100

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E After stop of movement % 0 to 999

MPL509 Note: This parameter is valid only when bit 6 of F94 is 1.

2-281

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

Specify an alternative M-code for M96 when user macro interruption is valid.

Alternative M-code for M96

K91

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 127 Specify an alternative M-code for M97 when user macro interruption is valid.

Alternative M-code for M97

K92

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 127 Fixed value (2)

K93

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

76543210
If the menu function does not need to be made invalid to restart the automatic operation that has been stopped by the [ATC STOP] menu function, set this parameter to 1 (only for applicable machines). 0: [ATC STOP] is to be made invalid 1: [ATC STOP] is not to be made invalid M, E Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits Command code to be displayed in the MDI window in response to the selection of the [W SUB] MDI menu item 0: G110B2 1: G110Z[B]2

K94

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-282

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

76543210
Select whether the difference in angle between the upper and lower turrets is to be incorporated into the current C-axis position display of HD2. 0: Yes (Incorporated) 1: No (Not incorporated) Fixed value (0) Tool position compensation during T-command execution 0: Not performed 1: Performed Coordinate system update during handle pulse interrupt 0: Not performed 1: Performed Fixed value (0) Acceleration/deceleration time constant for handle pulse feed 0: Time constant for cutting feed 1: No time constant Software limits for G30 execution 0: Invalid 1: Valid In-position check 0: Invalid 1: Valid

K95

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits

76543210
G0 command in-position check 0: Check 1: Non-check Timing of manual free feed finish signal 0: Smoothing 1: Distribution finish (equivalent to DEN) Fixed value (0) Axis/Cutting interlock alarm display 0: Valid 1: Invalid Suppression of lost motion in modes other than the G1 command mode 0: Valid 1: Invalid Fixed value (0) Fixed value (0) Fixed G0 inclination

K96

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement Bit Binary, eight digits

2-283

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

Specify the name of the axis to be made parallel with respect to the direction of the spindle when the angle of the B-axis is 0 degrees. B-axis misalignment correction Name of parallel axis

K97

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate Hexadecimal, two digits &41 to &5A Specify the name of the axis to be made orthogonal with respect to the direction of the spindle when the angle of the B-axis is 0 degrees. Note: If 0 is entered, the axis will be regarded as the Z-axis (&5A).

B-axis misalignment correction Name of orthogonal axis

K98

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate Hexadecimal, two digits &41 to &5A Specify the name of the rotational axis to undergo dynamic offset. Note: If 0 is entered, the axis will be regarded as the X-axis (&58).

Dynamic offset Name of rotational axis

K99

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate Hexadecimal, two digits &41 to &5A Specify the name of the axis to be made parallel with respect to the rotational plane of the rotational axis to undergo dynamic offset.

Dynamic offset Name of parallel axis

K100

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate Hexadecimal, two digits &41 to &5A

2-284

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

Specify the name of the axis to be made orthogonal with respect to the rotational plane of the rotational axis to undergo dynamic offset. Dynamic offset Name of orthogonal axis

K101

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate Hexadecimal, two digits &41 to &5A Fixed value (0)

K102
(bit 0) to (bit 2) Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

How to use the data of compensation for the sensing tools eccentricity and stylus radius in workpiece measurement and coordinate measurement. 0: M Pro scheme For workpiece measurement: No use of eccentricity settings; Use of stylus radius settings for both longitudinal (workpiece-axial) and transverse (workpiece-radial) directions. For coordinate measurement: Use of eccentricity setting for the direction of measuring feed; Use of stylus radius setting for transverse (workpiece-radial) direction. 1: MATRIX scheme Full use of the eccentricity and stylus radius settings for both workpiece measurement and coordinate measurement. * Setting of this parameter and compensation method

K102
(bit 3)

Compensation method for the sensing tools eccentricity and stylus radius in workpiece measurement and coordinate measurement

Eccentricity K102 Measurement Other bit 3 direction directions 0 Invalid Invalid Workpiece measurement 1 Valid Valid 0 Valid Invalid Coordinate measurement 1 Valid Valid
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0, 1

Stylus radius Radial Valid Valid Invalid Valid Axial Valid Valid Valid Valid

2-285

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

Z-axis direction for setting the TPC relay points for a measurement unit. 0: Direction opposite to the program coordinate system

X
Z-axis direction for setting the TPC relay points for a measurement unit

K102
(bit 4)

Z
1: Direction of the program coordinate system Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0, 1 Barrier information for EIA/ISO programs is to be set 0: in the relevant parameters, 1: on the SET UP MANAGE. display. Barrier information setting for EIA/ISO programs

K102
(bit 5)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0, 1 Whether or not, on the TOOL DATA display, the direction of rotation can be specified for milling tools mounted on the turret. 0: No

Setting the direction of rotation for milling tools

1: Yes (Normal/Reverse)

K102
(bit 6)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M At power on 0, 1 Fixed value (0)

K102
(bit 7)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-286

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

76543210
Handling of the sign assigned to hobbing address D (Note 1) 0: If plus (+), the workpiece spindle and the milling spindle rotate in opposite directions. If minus (), both spindles rotate in the same direction. 1: If plus (+), the workpiece spindle and the milling spindle rotate in the same direction. If minus (), both spindles rotate in opposite directions (MT Pro compatible). Synchronous control error auto-correction (Note 2) 0: Valid 1: Invalid Fixed value DDB micron unit 0: Interpolation 1: Microns

Thermal displacement compensation interval 0: 0.5 m 1: Unit of compensation Output of S-code and T-code at restart 0: Invalid 1: Valid * Set 0 for machining center specifications. Whether FIXED PT can be selected at RETURN of the end unit of the MAZATROL program 0: Possible to select 1: Impossible to select Notes: 1. K103 bit 0 is valid, only when M17 bit 5 = 1. 2. Even with K103 bit 1 = 0, unless M17 bit 4 is set to 0 (linear axis) for the axis concerned, auto-correction is not made valid.

K103

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

2-287

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

76543210

Output of a laser measurement B-axis 0-degree command after ATC 0: Output invalid 1: Output valid Direction of the laser axis of the laser measuring instrument 0: Depends on the setting of parameter L16. L16 = 1: Parallel to the Y-axis, L16 = 2: Parallel to the X-axis 1: Depends on the setting of bit 2 in parameter K104. Direction of the laser axis of the laser measuring instrument 0: Parallel to the Y-axis 1: Parallel to the X-axis Note: This parameter is valid when K104 bit 1 = 1.

Voice Adviser (Vocal output function) 0: Invalid 1: Valid Type of voice 0: Males voice 1: Females voice Vocal guidance for warm-up operation 0: Invalid 1: Valid Machine status when rapid feed command is given with cutting feed override set to 0% 0: Operation is executed. 1: Alarm stop Feed rate for an approach to the starting point in EIA modal restarting mode 0: Approach at the feed rate during manual operations 1: If the modal command during the search is G0, approach at G0, or if the modal command is other than G0, approach at G1

K104

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

76543210
Specification of incremental axis radius value Fixed value (1) 0: S-code macro call invalid 1: S-code macro call valid 0: T-code macro call invalid 1: T-code macro call valid Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits 0: Second auxiliary function macro call invalid 1: Second auxiliary function macro call valid Fixed value (0) 0: Input in millimeter 1: Input in inch

K105

2-288

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

76543210
Execution conditions for user macroprogram interrupt 0: Edge triggering (Performed just once when the interrupt signal is turned ON) 1: Status triggering (Repeatedly performed while the interrupt signal is ON) Start timing for user macroprogram interrupt 0: The block under execution is aborted and then the interrupt occurs immediately. 1: Interrupt occurs after completion of the block being executed. Fixed value (0) Fixed value Fixed value (0) Fixed value (0) Fixed value (0) Fixed value (0)

K106

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits

76543210
Fixed value (0) Motion distance in the manual pulse feed mode for the axis whose position is displayed in diameter value. (Note) 0: In radius values 1: In diameter values At power on
(Bit 5: After stop of movement)

K107
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Deceleration for arc valid/invalid Fixed value (0) Note: Invalid for the axis for which bit 5 of M18 is set to 1. Specify the maximum permissible error range for the master and slave axes for synchronous control (Tandem driving system). If the specified range is overstepped, the alarm EXCESS SIMULTANEOUS ERROR will be displayed. Note: Error checking will not occur if 0 is set.

Bit Binary, eight digits

Permissible error range for synchronous control

K108

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm 0 to 65535

2-289

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

Invalid

K109

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Set the judgment angle near a singular point. The setting, if 0, will be handled as 1.

Judgment angle near a singular point (Tool tip point control)

K110

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E After stop of axis movement 0 to 360 Set the clamping speed (speed command) in safety supervisory mode 3.

Clamping speed in safety supervisory mode 3

K111

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement mm/min 0 to 1000 Invalid

K112

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-290

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

Set the type of machine. 1: Tool tilt type 2: Mixed type 3: Table tilt type Example:
1 = Tool tilt type
1st rotary axis for the tool

2 = Mixed type

Machine type (Tool tip point control)

2nd rotary axis for the tool Tool Workpiece

Rotary axis for the tool Tool Workpiece Table Rotary axis for the table

K113

Table

3 = Table tilt type

Table Tool Workpiece 1st rotary axis for the table

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 1 to 3
2nd rotary axis for the table

Set the axis number of the horizontal axis in the rectangular coordinate system. A setting of 0 is invalid. Axis number of the horizontal axis in the rectangular coordinate system (Tool tip point control)

K114

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0 to 16 Set the axis number of the vertical axis in the rectangular coordinate system. A setting of 0 is invalid.

Axis number of the vertical axis in the rectangular coordinate system (Tool tip point control)

K115

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0 to 16

2-291

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

Set the axis number of the height axis in the rectangular coordinate system. A setting of 0 is invalid. Axis number of the height axis in the rectangular coordinate system (Tool tip point control)

K116

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0 to 16 12: 2nd rotary axis ...... Rotates about horizontal axis, 1st rotary axis ....... Rotates about vertical axis. 13: 2nd rotary axis ..... Rotates about horizontal axis, 1st rotary axis ....... Rotates about height axis. 21: 2nd rotary axis ...... Rotates about vertical axis, 1st rotary axis ....... Rotates about horizontal axis. 23: 2nd rotary axis ...... Rotates about vertical axis, 1st rotary axis ....... Rotates about height axis.

Rotational direction of the rotary axis (Tool tip point control)

K117

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate

31: 2nd rotary axis ...... Rotates about height axis, 1st rotary axis ....... Rotates about vertical axis. 32: 2nd rotary axis ...... Rotates about height axis, 1st rotary axis ....... Rotates about horizontal axis. Invalid

K118 to K120
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Set the axis number of the first rotary axis. A setting of 0 is invalid.

Axis number of the first rotary axis (Tool tip point control)

K121

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0 to 16

2-292

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

<If the first rotary axis rotates for tool control> Set the distance from the rotational center of the tool control rotary axis (at the tool side) in the direction of the horizontal axis to the rotational center of the tool control rotary axis (at the opposite side). <If the first rotary axis rotates for table control> Set the distance from the spindle tip point in the direction of the horizontal axis to the rotational center of the table control rotary axis (at the opposite side) when all axes are in the machine home position. Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E Immediate 0.0001 mm 99999999 <If the first rotary axis rotates for tool control> Set the distance from the rotational center of the tool control rotary axis (at the tool side) in the direction of the vertical axis to the rotational center of the tool control rotary axis (at the opposite side). <If the first rotary axis rotates for table control> Set the distance from the spindle tip point in the direction of the horizontal axis to the rotational center of the table control rotary axis (at the opposite side) when all axes are in the machine home position. Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E Immediate 0.0001 mm 99999999 <If the first rotary axis rotates for tool control> Set the distance from the rotational center of the tool control rotary axis (at the tool side) in the direction of the height axis to the rotational center of the tool control rotary axis (at the opposite side). <If the first rotary axis rotates for table control> Set the distance from the spindle tip point in the direction of the height axis to the rotational center of the table control rotary axis (at the opposite side) when all axes are in the machine home position. Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E Immediate 0.0001 mm 99999999 Set the axis number of the second rotary axis. A setting of 0 is invalid.

Horizontal axis rotational center offset of the first rotary axis (Tool tip point control)

K122

Vertical axis rotational center offset of the first rotary axis (Tool tip point control)

K123

Height axis rotational center offset of the first rotary axis (Tool tip point control)

K124

Axis number of the second rotary axis (Tool tip point control)

K125

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0 to 16

2-293

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

MEASURE
Description

Address

<If the second rotary axis rotates for tool control> Set the distance from the spindle holder end in the direction of the horizontal axis to the rotational center of the tool control rotary axis (at the tool side). <If the second rotary axis rotates for table control> Set the distance from the rotational center of the table control rotary axis in the direction of the horizontal axis to the rotational center of the table control rotary axis (at the workpiece side) when all axes are in the machine home position.

Horizontal axis rotational center offset of the second rotary axis (Tool tip point control)

K126

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0.0001 mm 99999999

<If the second rotary axis rotates for tool control> Set the distance from the spindle holder end in the direction of the vertical axis to the rotational center of the tool control rotary axis (at the tool side). Vertical axis rotational center offset of the second rotary axis (Tool tip point control) <If the second rotary axis rotates for table control> Set the distance from the rotational center of the table control rotary axis in the direction of the vertical axis to the rotational center of the table control rotary axis (at the workpiece side) when all axes are in the machine home position.

K127

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0.0001 mm 99999999 <If the second rotary axis rotates for tool control> Set the distance from the spindle holder end in the direction of the height axis to the rotational center of the tool control rotary axis (at the tool side).

Height axis rotational center offset of the second rotary axis (Tool tip point control)

<If the second rotary axis rotates for table control> Set the distance from the rotational center of the table control rotary axis in the direction of the height axis to the rotational center of the table control rotary axis (at the workpiece side) when all axes are in the machine home position.

K128

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0.0001 mm 99999999 Invalid

K129 to K144
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-294

PARAMETER

2-3-11 Machine parameter

Classification

TABLE (L)
Display title

MACHINE
Meaning

TABLE
Description

Address

The eccentricity of the stylus of the touch sensor with respect to the center of the spindle Touch sensor Stylus eccentricity of touch sensor (X-component)

L1
+Z Stylus
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M At power on 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

+X Stylus centerline

Spindle centerline L1

Stylus eccentricity of touch sensor (Y-component)

L2 +Y +X

L2
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M At power on 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

MPL093

Note: These data are automatically set when calibration measurement is performed using the MMS unit. The true radius value of the stylus ball of the touch sensor

Touch sensor
Radius of stylus ball of touch sensor (X-component)

L3
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M At power on 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

+Z Stylus ball +X

L4 2
Radius of stylus ball of touch sensor (Y-component)

+Y

L4
+X L3 2
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M At power on 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

MPL094

Note: These data are automatically set when calibration measurement is performed using the MMS unit.

2-295

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

The distance from the spindle taper gage line to the table surface, No. 1 turning spindle chuck edge, or the reference block on the pallet existing when the Z-axis is in the machine zero-point position

Spindle

L5

Machine zero point

Machine zero point

Z-axis stroke for tip position memory (TEACH function)

Spindle L5 Pallet Reference block

L5

Table

MPL095 Machine zero point

L5

Spindle edge
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

Machine zero point L5

Spindle edge

Chuck edge Table (Horizontal composite machine) (Vertical composite machine)

The minimum tool displacement by which the tool is judged to be a broken one as a result of execution of the tool breakage detection function If (registered tool length data) (tool length data that has been measured during the detecting operation) L6, then the tool is judged broken.

Tool-breakage judgment distance for TBR function

L6

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999 The parameter for selecting the type of restoration to be performed after tool breakage has been detected as a result of execution of the external tool breakage detection function (M35)

Tool-breakage restoration mode for TBR function (for M35 external tool breakage detection)

L7

1: 2: 3:

Single-block stop Machining restarts from the next process. Single-block stop occurs in a state where machining can be restarted from the next process.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 1 to 3

2-296

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

The maximum skipping movement distance for the measurement with the MMS unit An alarm message will appear if the touch sensor has not come into contact with the workpiece within this distance. Skipping stroke limit for MMS

L8

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999 Set to 1 when the machine of the random ATC specifications is used. 0: 1: Standard machine Machine of random ATC specifications

Selection of random ATC specifications

L9

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0, 1 Set the interval between magazine pockets.

Interval between magazine pockets

L10
L10
MPL511 Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate 1 mm/0.1 in 0 to 999 Set the touch sensor's interference direction. 0: 1: Touch sensors interference direction 2: Non-interference (normal diameter) To jut out in the direction of a pocket of higher number (Positive direction of magazine) To jut out in the direction of a pocket of lower number (Negative direction of magazine)

L11

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 2

2-297

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

Tolerance for Z coordinate value in circle measurement

L12
Tolerance for measured coordinate value in face measurement Tolerance for manual measurement

L12
L12 X
MPL512

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999 Set the allowable angle for calculation of parallelism and right angle to be measured manually.

Allowable angle for parallelism and right angle in manual measurement

L13

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.0001 0 to 900000

Note: When error angle is smaller than the setting angle, the parallelism and right angle are calculated.

Set an escape amount from a measurement point to the next point in straightness measurement.

Escapement for straightness measurement

L14

L14
MPL513 Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

2-298

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

Set macro program number for straightness measurement. Before shipment, the macro program is numbered 9999 at the factory. Macro program number for straightness measurement

L15

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0 to 99999999 Parameter for system internal setting Setting prohibited

L16

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Set a command unit of head indexing angle.

Minimum angle of head indexing command

L17

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Next block 0.1 0 - 3600 0: 1: Tailstock absent. Tailstock present. (For INTEGREX j)

Presence/absence of tailstock

L18

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1

2-299

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

Invalid

L19 L20
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range Select the output type for the angle command of the indexing unit and the end unit of the MAZATROL program. 0: 1: 2: To select servo axis (4th axis) To select the code (the second auxiliary function) set by K56 To select servo axis (4th/5th axis)

Output type of index (rotary) table

L21

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0 to 2

2-300

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

Use L22 and L23 to set the dimensions of the sensor for tool nose measurement. L24 and L25 are provided to set in machine coordinates the reference point of the sensor (see the diagram below). [INTE IV, INTE e-HII, lathes] Example 1: For No. 1 turning spindle

Machine zero point

Sensors reference point L25

Data of the tool nose measurement sensor L22 : Sensor width along the X-axis L23 : Sensor width along the Z-axis L24 : X-coordinate of the sensors reference point L25 : Z-coordinate of the sensors reference point

L24

L22 Sensor for tool nose measurement L23

Set the imaginary upper left corner of the sensor as its reference point for No. 2 spindle. [INTE e-VII] Example 2:

L22 to L25

Machine zero point

L25 Sensors reference point L24 L23 Sensor for tool nose measurement L22
Note: As shown above, the X- and Z-axes must be replaced with each other between INTEGREX e-HII and e-VII. Setting of sensor reference point Y coordinate

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 99999999

Tool nose measurement sensor reference position, Y-axis

L26

Machine zero point

L26

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 99999999

2-301

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

During manual TOOL EYE measurement, even if the sensor turns on for a time shorter than that which has been specified in this parameter, that will not be regarded as sensor-on. Timer setting for manual TOOL EYE measurement

L27

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 7.1 ms 0 to 65535 In the machine configuration that will cause the arm of the TOOL EYE to interfere with the tool when the arm is extended or retracted with the tool present at the measuring approach point during automatic tool measurement with the TOOL EYE, set the distance through which the tool is to be returned in the Z-axis direction before extending or retracting the arm for the measurement. In the MAZATROL program, before the arm is extended or retracted, the tool is returned through the L28/L78-set distance from the measuring approach point. In the EIA/ISO program, when G136 command execution is completed, the tool will be returned through the L28/L78-set distance from the approach point. (In the EIA/ISO program, the tool will be retreated to a relay point, only in retraction mode, and the arm will be extended by execution of M284 in the next block onward.) (For QTN machine specifications, parameter L28 becomes valid for the #2 and #4 approach points in the Z direction.)
X

Amount of Z-axial retreat from the approach point for TOOL EYE measurement

L28

Z In case of #2, #4 approaching (QTN) TOOL EYE #1, #2 approach point AP1 AP1 L28 K20 K20 TOOL K20 EYE K20 AP3 TOOL EYE #3, #4 approach point AP3 APK1 L78 TOOL EYE #1, #2 approach point APK1

L28

APK3 TOOL EYE #3, #4 approach point APK3

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 99999999

2-302

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

Set machine efficiency. This value is used as average output calculation data for machining navigation. If the setting is 0, machine efficiency will become 90%. Machine efficiency

L29

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate % 0 to 100 Select for each machine model the appropriate case introduction messages on MACHINING NAVIGATION-PREDICTION display. Specific data is preset for each machine model. Do not disturb the presettings.

Selection of machining navigation case introduction messages

L30

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 999 The settings of these parameters can be read using system variables. Parameter System variable #3103 #3104 #3105 #3106

L31 to L34

Use in machine manufacturer macro

L31 L32 L33 L34

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 99999999 Invalid

L35 L36
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-303

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

For the command to rotate the index table, specify the minimum index angle for angle command by the M-code or B-code.

Minimum index angle of index table

L37

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M At power on 0 to 180 For the command to rotate the index table, select the turning direction and the M-code number to be output. 0 or 1: B-code (0: Turning in the direction of CW, 1: Turning in the direction of CW/CCW/shortcut) 2 to 9999: M-code (Numeric value is the M-code number to be output) Note: This parameter is ineffective for the system with an NC rotary table.

M/B-code for index of index table

L38

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M At power on 0 to 9999

Notes: 1. This parameter is ineffective for the system with an NC rotary table. 2. Turning direction of the index table can be selected in the indexing unit only when this parameter is set to 1.

Specify the execution condition of the indexing unit. Execution of the indexing unit just before starting of machining of each tool sequence or at the end of each process: Selection of execution/non execution of indexing unit 0: Wont be made when the index angle is the same as the preceding indexing unit execution. 1: Will be made unconditionally.

L39

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M At power on 0, 1 Select availability to specify the index table angle in the end unit. 0: Enables to specify the angle. 1: Prohibits to specify the angle.

Availability of specification of index table angle in end unit

L40

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 Note: Set to 0 only for index table specification.

2-304

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

For execution of the indexing unit, specify the commanding order for movement to turning position, turning of the table and ATC. 0: Movement to turning position Table turning ATC 1: Movement to turning position Table turning and ATC 2: Movement to turning position, table turning and ATC simultaneously take place.

Simultaneous operation of indexing unit with ATC

L41

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M At power on 0 to 2 Select setting of the initial value (modal) of the index table angle for cyclic operation. 0: Actual table angle of the machine 1: Table angle indexed at present taken as 0 Note: In case of setting to 2, only the X-axis coordinates can be set at turning position of the indexing unit.

Initial value of index table angle

L42

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 Select showing or not showing of the index table angle on the POSITION display. 0: Not to show

Indication of index table angle

1: To show

L43

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1 Note: Set to 1 for the machine with the index table, or set to 0 for that of the NC rotary table. Select whether automatic setting of the amount of tool nose position correction is to be made valid or invalid when entering the nose angle of a drilling tool in the tool data or when measuring the tool.

Selection of automatic setting on/off for nose position correction of a drilling tool

L44

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 2

0: Automatic setting valid When the tool nose angle is specified: The amount of correction that is appropriate for the specified angle is auto-set. When the tool nose angle is not specified: The amount of correction is not auto-set. 1: Automatic setting invalid 2: Automatic setting valid When the tool nose angle is specified: The amount of correction that is appropriate for the specified angle is auto-set. When the tool nose angle is not specified: The amount of correction that assumes a nose angle of 118 is auto-set.

2-305

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

Set the minimum unit of index table angle command for the indexing units, ANGLE in the end units and B-codes in the manual program unit. 0: 1 1 to 8: 1/1000 (MRJ2-CT specifications) Index table angle command

L45
Note: Index table angle display on the POSITION display is valid only when L43 = 1 (index table angle display on). 0: 1 index table 1 to 7: Nth axis under MRJ2-CT specs. (N = 1 to 7) 8: Positioning table

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

0 to 8

Select change or no change of the pallet and specify the maximum number of pallets. 0 or 1: Not to change pallet 2 to 255: To change pallet (Numeric value indicates the maximum number of pallets.)

Maximum number of pallets in pallet changing unit

L46

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M At power on 0 to 255 Note: When this parameter is set to 0 or 1, use of the pallet changing unit is prohibited. Select preparation of next pallet or not to do so according to the pallet change mechanism. 0: Not to prepare next pallet 1: To prepare next pallet

To prepare or not to prepare next pallet change

L47

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M At power on 0, 1 Specify the number of long boring bars mounted. Note: When this parameter is set to 1, it is possible to set the number of the next pallet in the pallet changing unit.

Number of long boring bars

L48

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 9

2-306

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

This parameter is used to select simultaneous operation of pallet change with the next ATC operation in execution of the pallet changing unit and the face definition unit, or not. Simultaneous operation of pallet change with ATC 0: To operate ATC after pallet change 1: To operate pallet change and ATC simultaneously

L49

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 Rewriting of head number in MDI mode: 0: Impossible 1: Possible

Rewriting of head number

L50

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Immediate 0, 1 Tool command system in MDI operation (Tool on the spindle and next time tool) 0: Command of pocket number 1: Command of group number (For five surface machining)

Tool command system in MDI operation

L51

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 Rewriting of machining management data with macro variable (system variable) 0: Impossible 1: Possible

Writing of machining management data with macro variable

L52

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1

2-307

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

Select showing or not showing of the work number in the PALLET MANAGEMENT display. 0: Not to show WNo. Showing of program number in PALLET MANAGEMENT display 1: To show WNo.

L53

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 0: Invalid 1: FMS pallet ID operation mode 2: Pallet management operation mode

Selection of automatic operation mode

L54

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0 to 2 0: FR-SF 1: FR-SE

Spindle load meter display type

L55

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

At power on 0, 1 0: Method by M2 tool edge memorizing function 1: Method by M32 tool edge memorizing function (for Z-axis only) 2: Method by M32 tool edge memorizing function (for X-, Y-, Z-axes)

Method of measurement of coordinates by tool edge memorizing function (TEACH)

Example:

+Z - Mothod by M2 (distance from the tool tip to the zero point with a sign) .....50 - Method by M32 (distance from the zero point to the tool tip with a sign) ............50

L56
50

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0 to 2

+Y MPL514

2-308

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

Make it possible/impossible to rewrite tool data except on tools on the spindle in automatic operation on a program. 0: Impossible Rewriting of tool data during automatic operation 1: Possible

L57

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1 Select a head angle indication system for the five surface machining system. 0: Indication corresponding to 90 index (0, 90, 180, 270)

Head index angle indication system

1: Indication corresponding to 1 (5) index

L58

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0, 1 (For five surface machining) This parameter limits input items on the HEAD OFFSET display. 0: Data just on item SPDL. CMD can be input. 1: All data can be input.

Input selection for HEAD OFFSET display

L59

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1 (For five surface machining) The total number of heads to be mounted in the spindle

Head quantity

L60

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 10 (For five surface machining)

2-309

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

Operation timing of automatic head change (AHC) and automatic pallet change (APC) 0: AHC first and then APC Output timing of AHC and APC 1: APC first and then AHC 2: Simultaneous

L61

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 2 (For five surface machining)

2-310

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

Head relay point X1

L62

When FIXED is selected at the item RELAY in the face definition unit, the head arrives at the face for next machining through the point(s) specified by the parameters (to be set in the machine coordinates system). For AGX or five-surface machining models, the relay points (X1, Y1) and (X2, Y2) can be specified in the program (in the face definition sequence). For the five surface machining, the head goes through the four corners of a face where the two specified points are positioned in its diagonal line.

Z
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

Y X

(X1, Y1)

(X2, Y2)
MPL515 Head relay point Y1 (For five-surface machining) (For AGX series)

L63

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

Head relay point X2

L64

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

Head relay point Y2

L65

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

2-311

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

After EIA/ISO subprogram execution; 0: 1: Return/No return to head indexing point Z Return to head indexing point Z (Even if the T-code command is for the same tool.) No return to head indexing point Z

L66

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 (For five-surface machining) (For AGX series) Set the length from the end surface of the spindle to the center of head rotation for respective machines. (100 mm in usual)
Y = 180 = 0 L67 Z MPL516

Length between the end surface of the spindle and the center of head rotation

L67

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

Set for respective machines.

= 180
Head correction value X

Y
= 0

L68
L68
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999 Set for respective machines. (For AGX series)

X
MPL517

Head correction value Y

L69

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999 (For AGX series)

2-312

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

Specify the axes that simultaneously move from a machining face to the next machining face or in case of tool replacement. 0: Axis movement from machining face on escapement 1: Two (three) axes simultaneously move to the safety position. Y-axis (or X- and Y-axes) moves to the safety position after Z-axis moved.

L70

The X-axis moves when a relay point (RELAY) or a fixed point (FIXED) is selected for the item RELAY in the face definition unit.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 1, 0 (For AGX series) For execution of the program for oblique face machining, specify to execute or not machining on the coordinate that is turned from the basic coordinate (set in WPC unit or in OFFSET unit) at an angle of the correction value for the B-axis. 0: 1: Machining on the coordinate that is turned from the basic coordinate at an angle of the correction value for the B-axis Machining on the basic coordinate specified in the program

Shift of basic coordinate for oblique face machining

L71

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 1, 0 Invalid (For AGX series)

L72

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Set the time constant to be used when shape correction is on. A setting of 0 is invalid.

Time constant for shape correction acceleration/deceleration filter 2

L73

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement ms 0 to 56

2-313

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

Set the cutting feed rate for pre-interpolational acceleration/deceleration control. Cutting feed rate for pre-interpolational acceleration/deceleration control

L74

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement mm/min 1 to 999999 Set the time constant to obtain acceleration/deceleration of the cutting feed rate for pre-interpolational linear control.

Time constant for pre-interpolational linear control during cutting feed rate acceleration/deceleration

L75

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement ms 1 to 5000 Set the maximum cutting speed in the G61.1 mode at percentage to the maximum cutting speed in the G64 mode. Input of 0 is regarded as 100%. 1000 or higher percent is disposed as 1000%.

Acceleration rate for high-speed cutting

L76

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement % 0 to 5000 Set an angle for decelerating cutting feed rate at a corner. Input of 0 is regarded as 5. Setting at an angle higher than 30 is disposed as 30.

Angle for deceleration at corner before interpolation

MPL518

L77

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement 0 to 30

2-314

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

In the machine configuration that will cause the arm of the TOOL EYE to interfere with the tool when the arm is extended or retracted with the tool present at the measuring approach point during automatic tool measurement with the TOOL EYE, set the distance through which the tool is to be returned in the X-axis direction before extending or retracting the arm for the measurement. In the MAZATROL program, before the arm is extended or retracted, the tool is returned through the L28/L78-set distance from the measuring approach point. In the EIA/ISO program, when G136 command execution is completed, the tool will be returned through the L28/L78-set distance from the approach point. (In the EIA/ISO program, the tool will be retreated to a relay point, only in retraction mode, and the arm will be extended by execution of M284 in the next block onward.)
X

Amount of X-axial retreat from the approach point for TOOL EYE measurement

In case of #2, #4 approaching (QTN)

L78
L28

TOOL EYE #1, #2 approach point AP1 AP1 K20

APK1 L78 TOOL EYE #1, #2 approach point APK1

K20 TOOL K20 EYE K20 AP3

L28

APK3 TOOL EYE #3, #4 approach point APK3

TOOL EYE #3, #4 approach point AP3

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 99999999 Set the In-position width for changeover of the synchronized-tapping gain. If 0 is set, 10 microns will be regarded as having been set.

In-position width for changeover of the synchronized-tapping gain

L79

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0.001 mm 0 to 255

2-315

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

Set the deceleration rate at the linear to arc or arc to linear blocks of shape correction.

Linear to arc deceleration rate

L80

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement mm/min / in/min 0 to 99999999 Parameter for system internal setting Setting prohibited

L81

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Set the thickness of the tilting table. This parameter is used for the software travel limit function provided to avoid collision between the spindle head and the tilting table (in its angular position from 90 to 120).

Table thickness

L82
Tilting table L82

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm 99999999 (For machines equipped with a tilting table) Set the radius of the spindle head. This parameter is used for the software travel limit function provided to avoid collision between the spindle head and the tilting table.

Spindle head radius

L83

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm 99999999

L83

(For machines equipped with a tilting table)

2-316

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

2#Mx

Correction value of alignment deviation X (Upper face)

L84

2#My

ey ex

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

Stylus Spindle center

MPL519 ex: ey: Mx: My: Alignment deviation correction value on X-axis Alignment deviation correction value on Y-axis Stylus radius in the X-axis direction (The setting of L3) Stylus radius in the Y-axis direction (The setting of L4)

Correction value of alignment deviation Y (Upper face)

L85

Note: The data is set automatically by execution of calibration measurement (on the upper face) with the MMS unit.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999 (For five-surface machining)

2#Mx

Correction value of alignment deviation X (0-degree face)

L86

2#My

ey ex

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

Stylus Spindle center

MPL519 ex: ey: Mx: My: Alignment deviation correction value on X-axis Alignment deviation correction value on Y-axis Stylus radius in the X-axis direction (The setting of L3) Stylus radius in the Y-axis direction (The setting of L4)

Correction value of alignment deviation Y (0-degree face)

L87

Note: The data is set automatically by execution of calibration measurement (0degree face) with the MMS unit.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999 (For five-surface machining)

2-317

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

2#Mx

Correction value of alignment deviation X (90-degree face)

L88

2#My

ey ex

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

Stylus Spindle center

MPL519 ex: ey: Mx: My: Alignment deviation correction value on X-axis Alignment deviation correction value on Y-axis Stylus radius in the X-axis direction (The setting of L3) Stylus radius in the Y-axis direction (The setting of L4)

Correction value of alignment deviation Y (90-degree face)

L89

Note: The data is set automatically by execution of calibration measurement (90-degree face) with the MMS unit.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999 (For INTEGREX series) (For five-surface machining)

2#Mx

Correction value of alignment deviation X (180-degree face)

L90

2#My

ey ex

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

Stylus Spindle center

MPL519 ex: ey: Mx: My: Alignment deviation correction value on X-axis Alignment deviation correction value on Y-axis Stylus radius in the X-axis direction (The setting of L3) Stylus radius in the Y-axis direction (The setting of L4)

Correction value of alignment deviation Y (180-degree face)

L91

Note: The data is set automatically by execution of calibration measurement (180-degree face) with the MMS unit.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999 (For INTEGREX series) (For five-surface machining)

2-318

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

2#Mx

Correction value of alignment deviation X (270-degree face)

L92

2#My

ey ex

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

Stylus Spindle center

MPL519 ex: ey: Mx: My: Alignment deviation correction value on X-axis Alignment deviation correction value on Y-axis Stylus radius in the X-axis direction (The setting of L3) Stylus radius in the Y-axis direction (The setting of L4)

Correction value of alignment deviation Y (270-degree face)

L93

Note: The data is set automatically by execution of calibration measurement (270-degree face) with the MMS unit.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999 (For five-surface machining) The X/Y travel distance can be set during the selection of EIAprogrammed fully automatic tool length measurement with the measuring table.

X/Y travel distance during EIA-programmed tool measurement

0: 1:

Invalid Valid

L94
Note: It is invalid to set this parameter under laser tool measuring equipment specifications.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0, 1

The offset number is auto-set during EIA-programmed tool measurement data setting. 0: Offset number auto-setting for EIAprogrammed tool measurement 1: Invalid Valid

L95

Note: When making the auto-setting function valid, see the description of L96. Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E Immediate 0, 1

2-319

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

The amount of shifting for TNo. during offset number auto-setting for EIAprogrammed tool measurement data setting. [Offset No.] = [TNo. setting] + [L96 setting] Amount of shifting during offset number auto-setting for EIA-programmed tool measurement

L96

Note: Valid only when L95 = 1.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0 to 4000 1 - 999: M-code of the specified number 1000: None Other than above: M149

M-code to be output when selecting menu function for the MDI tool designation

L97

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Immediate 0 to 99999999 Specify the muximum tool length for the MDI laser tool length measurement.

Max. tool length for laser tool length measurement

L98

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 99999999 Specify the cycle time at which the operational status management data for the day is to be saved as a file on the hard disk. Notes: 1. If the setting is 0, the data will be saved each minute. 2. If the setting is 1, the data will be saved only when the date changes or when NC power is turned off.

Cycle time for saving the operational status management data

L99

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate min 1 to 1439

2-320

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

[INTE e-HII]
Approach point for tool diameter measurement

L103: X L100: X

L102: Z

Machine zero point

L100 Laser sensor position X L101 Laser sensor position Y L102 Laser sensor position Z L103 Approach point X for laser tool diameter measurement L104 Approach point Y for laser tool diameter measurement L105 Approach point Z for laser tool length measurement
L98 L101: Y

L100 to L105

L105: Z

Approach point for tool length measurement

[INTE e-VII]
Machine zero point Machine zero point

L100: X

L104: Y L98 L101: Y

L105: Z

L102: Z

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 99999999 Select the measuring equipment to be used to perform MDI tool measurements and EIA tool measurements. 0: Measuring table 1: Laser tool measuring equipment
Approach point for tool diameter measurement Approach point for tool length measurement

Measuring equipment selection

L106
(bit 0)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1

2-321

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

Select a rotational reference coordinate system for WPC-th. 0: 1: Selection of a rotational reference coordinate system for WPC-th Workpiece coordinates (Index angle B) Machine coordinates

L106
(bit 1)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 0: 1: Measuring table (see L22 to L26) TOOL EYE (see BA95 to BA102)

Selection of measuring equipment

L106
(bit 2)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1 Select whether workpiece measurement results and tool measurement results are to be stored into tool data of the lower turret. 0: 1: Measurement results are stored into lower-turret tool data Measurement results are not stored into lower-turret tool data

L106
(bit 3)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1 Specify whether to enable or disable the fixed amount compensation function. 0: Disabled 1: Enabled

L106
(bit 4)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1

2-322

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

Select whether the user-defined angle setting for the B-axis in the coordinate measurement unit and workpiece measurement unit is to be made valid or invalid. B-axis user-defined angle setting in the coordinate measurement unit and workpiece measurement unit 0: Invalid 1: Valid

L106
(bit 5)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 Set the non-compensation area for the tool measurement and execution timing of tool and workpiece measurement operation. 0: MT Pro scheme Non-compensation area setting Non-compensation area for the tool measurement based on the measuring tolerance (K17 and K18) invalid (handled as if K17 = 0 and K18 = 100) Execution timing of tool and workpiece measurement operation The measurement unit is executed whenever the parts count reaches same or a multiple of the specified measurement interval in addition to the first time. 1: M Pro scheme Non-compensation area setting Non-compensation area for the tool measurement based on the measuring tolerance (K17 and K18) valid Execution timing of tool and workpiece measurement operation The measurement unit is executed whenever the program execution count reaches same or a multiple of the specified measurement interval, omitting the first time.

L106
(bit 6)

Non-compensation area for the tool measurement and execution timing of tool and workpiece measurement operation

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1 Select whether the laser measuring menu is to be displayed when laser tool measuring equipment is selected (L106 bit 0 = 1) as tool measuring equipment.

Selection of laser measuring menu display

0: Display of the laser measuring menu 1: No display of the laser measuring menu

L106
(bit 7)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1

2-323

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

In AGX machines, the tool locus (on the TRACE or TOOL PATH CHECK display) on the following coordinate is drawn by the EIA/ISO program. 0: 1: Tool path drawing Loft on the standard coordinates system Loft on the machine coordinates system

L107
(bit 0)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0, 1

Note: When 1 (drawing on the machine coordinate) is selected, the loft does not correspond to the form made on the MAZATROL coordinates system. However, 1 makes a loft corresponding to the tool movement of the machine. (For AGX series)

Set whether the tailstock function is to be made valid or invalid. 0: Tailstock function invalid 1: Tailstock function valid Tailstock function valid/invalid

L107
(bit 1)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0, 1 Select whether the tailstock included in the tailstock-equipped machine specifications is of the conventional type or the motor-driven type. 0: Conventional type

Tailstock type

1: Motor-driven type

L107
(bit 2)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1 Select whether the tail thrust is also to be displayed in pounds (lbs). 0: Display off 1: Display on

Whether tail thrust is also to be displayed in pounds (lbs)

L107
(bit 3)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1

2-324

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

LBB No. setting for the grooving I.D. tool, threading I.D. tool, or touch sensor 0: Invalid 1: Valid

L107
(bit 4)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1 0: Moves the X-axis to the third zero point and the Y/Z-axes to the respective zero points. 1: Moves the X-axis to the third zero point and the Y/Z-axes to the respective second zero points.

XYZ-axis operation for the first T-command after cycle start

L107
(bit 5)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1 0: Does not operate the A-axis. 1: Returns the A-axis to its zero point. (For AGX series)

A-axis operation for the first T-command after cycle start

L107
(bit 6)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1 0: Heavy tool designation valid 1: Heavy tool designation invalid (For AGX series)

Heavy tool designation valid/invalid

L107
(bit 7)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1

2-325

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

Fixed value (0)

L108
(bit 0) to (bit 4) Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Set whether the C-axis coordinate obtained by C-axis coordinate rotation in the indexing unit is to be incorporated into the path and shape drawings on the TOOL PATH CHECK, TRACE, and SHAPE CHECK displays of the VRX machine. 0: Incorporation valid. 1: Incorporation invalid (M640M-5X compatible).

L108
(bit 5)

Incorporating the C-axis coordinate into the TOOL PATH CHECK, TRACE, and SHAPE CHECK displays of the VRX machine

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1 Fixed value (0)

L108
(bit 6)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Set whether, during tool path check of the MAZATROL program on the TOOL PATH CHECK display of a machine having a turning function, the tool nose of the milling tool is to be displayed with the tool diameter similarly to the M640M Pro or with a tool nose mark similarly to the M640MT Pro. 0: Display with tool diameter (M640M Pro compatible) 1: Display with tool nose mark (M640MT Pro compatible) Notes: 1. A tool nose mark is always displayed when the tool path of the EIA/ISO program is checked. 2. For a machine without a turning function, this parameter is invalid and the display is always made with the tool diameter.

L108
(bit 7)

Displaying the milling tool nose in the MAZATROL program of the TOOL PATH CHECK display

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1

2-326

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

Specify the relationship between axial directions of the two axes to be used to check for interference. 0: Same direction 1: Reverse directions Even if the axes for the interference check are present on the same sliding surface, the axial directions of the two axes may differ as shown below. In this case set 1. Axial direction for checking for interference at software limit 4
W-axis

L109
(bit 0) to (bit 3)

Bit 0: Interference axial direction (1st set) Bit 1: Interference axial direction (2nd set) Bit 2: Interference axial direction (3rd set) Bit 3: Interference axial direction (4th set)

Z2-axis

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0, 1

76543210
Opposed-spindle lathe specifications Vertically inverted spindle specifications Axis name of the secondary spindle 0: Z/C-axis 1: W/U-axis Display of section to be machined in the milling tool sequence 0: Disabled 1: Enabled RAM spindle specification (e-V RAM) Correction axis for LENGTH B 0: X-axis 1: Y-axis (VARIAXIS Turning Specifications) Z-axis direction 0: Horizontal 1: Vertical

L110

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate (Bit 2: At power on) Bit Binary, eight digits

2-327

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

Invalid

L111

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

76543210
Whether traction tailstock is present or absent 0: Without traction tailstock 1: With traction tailstock Whether traction work rest 1 is present or absent 0 : Without traction work rest 1 1 : With traction work rest 1 Whether traction work rest 2 is present or absent 0 : Without traction work rest 2 1 : With traction work rest 2 Whether traction work rest 3 is present or absent 0 : Without traction work rest 3 1 : With traction work rest 3 Whether traction work rest 4 is present or absent 0 : Without traction work rest 4 1 : With traction work rest 4

L112

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits Set one of the axes to be used for the interference check. Specify the axis number by that of NC. The checking function will be invalid if the number is missing or if an invalid number is set.

L113 to L116

Interference check reference axis L113 1st set of axes L114 2nd set of axes L115 3rd set of axes L116 4th set of axes

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 16

2-328

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

L117 to L120

Interference check axis L117 1st set of axes L118 2nd set of axes L119 3rd set of axes L120 4th set of axes

Set the interference check target axis with respect to the interference check reference axis. Specify the axis number by that of NC. The checking function will be invalid if the number is missing or if an invalid number is set.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 16 Set the machine coordinate of the interference check target axis that is about to cause interference when the interference check reference axis is at its zero point. In the example shown below, if the W-axis and the Z2-axis are defined as the interference check reference axis and the interference check target axis, respectively, set the machine coordinate of the Z2-axis existing at where the lower turret and the secondary spindle are most likely to interfere. If zero is entered, the checking function will be invalid.

L121 to L124

Interference clearance L121 1st set of axes L122 2nd set of axes L123 3rd set of axes L124 4th set of axes

Example: Machine coordinate of the Z2-axis = 496 Machine coordinate of the W-axis = 100. 496 (100) = 596 Set 596000. (in case of metric specifications)

Machine coordinate W = 100.

W

Z2

X2

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 99999999

Lower turret machine zero point

Machine coordinate Z2 = 496.

W-axis machine zero point

Specify the time constant for smoothing the tool attitude during tool tip point control. This time constant is valid only when all the following conditions are satisfied: - High-speed smooth interpolation is valid (G05P02, G61.1, F3 bit 0 = 1) - Rotational axis prefiltering is valid (F36 bit 7 = 1) - Tool tip point control (G43.4, G43.5) is on - Cutting feed is on Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E Immediate ms 0 to 200 Even when the above conditions are met, if the setting of L125 is 0, rotational axis prefiltering will be invalid.

Rotational axis prefiltering time constant

L125

2-329

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

Positioning direction of the -axis for oblique plane indexing specified in ANGLE (plane angle) of the surface definition sequence. 0: Makes the sign of the plane angle value invalid and positions the axis in its minus direction. 1: Makes the sign of the plane angle value valid and if the plane angle is plus, positions the -axis in its plus direction or if the plane angle is minus, positions the -axis in its minus direction. 2: Makes the sign of the plane angle value invalid and positions the axis in its plus direction. If the setting of this parameter is other than the above, the value of L126 will be handled as 1. <Example of operation with 0 assigned to L126 and 45 as a plane angle> Head rotation -axis = 114.4698 Table rotation B-axis = 65.5302

Positioning direction of the head rotation -axis for oblique plane indexing

L126

+B +B
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate 0 to 2

+B

(For AGX series)

Invalid

L127 L128
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-330

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

This parameter functions as a filter to smoothen the waveform command specified for pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration. <Type of feed and acceleration/deceleration> Acceleration/deceleration filter (1st stage) L129 G1 time constant L130 G0 time constant L = Post-interpolation Linear acceleration/deceleration S = Pre-interpolation S-shaped acceleration/deceleration
G64 mode L L L L S-shaped acc. & dec. Speed Time Time G61.1 mode S S L

L129 L130

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement ms 0 to 200

Automatic Manual

G0 G1 Positioning to fixed points (for ATC, APC, etc.) Axis feed

Linear acc. & dec. Speed

L131 L132

Acceleration/deceleration filter (2nd stage) L131 G1 time constant L132 G0 time constant

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement ms 0 to 200 <For tool tilt type (e.g. VERSATECH)> Set the distance along the horizontal axis from the rotational center of the tool-side rotational axis (tool side) to the rotational center of the tool-side rotational axis (opposite side). If the upper- or lower-limit value is overstepped, operation will be the same as that which occurs when the upper- or lower-limit value is set.

L133

<For tool tilt type> Tool rotational axis offset horizontal axis offset amount for the 1st rotational axis

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

After stop of axis movement 0.0001 mm 30000 to 30000

2-331

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

<For tool tilt type (e.g. VERSATECH)> Set the distance along the vertical axis from the rotational center of the tool-side rotational axis (tool side) to the rotational center of the tool-side rotational axis (opposite side). Setting range: 30000 to 30000 If the upper- or lower-limit value is overstepped, operation will be the same as that which occurs when the upper- or lower-limit value is set. <For tool tilt type> Tool rotational axis offset vertical axis offset amount for the 1st rotational axis <For table tilt type (e.g. VARIAXIS)> Enter the offset between the actual central position of rotation of the Aaxis and the reference position in the Y-axis direction. Enter the offset with a minus sign if actual central position Y of rotation of the A-axis is present at the plus side with respect to reference position Y. Setting range: 10000 to 10000 If the upper- or lower-limit value is overstepped, operation will be the same as that which occurs when the upper- or lower-limit value is set.

L134

<For table tilt type> Y-axial runout of the A-axis

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

After stop of axis movement 0.0001 mm See the right column. <For tool tilt type (e.g. VERSATECH)> Set the distance along the height axis from the rotational center of the tool-side rotational axis (tool side) to the rotational center of the tool-side rotational axis (opposite side). Setting range: 30000 to 30000 If the upper- or lower-limit value is overstepped, operation will be the same as that which occurs when the upper- or lower-limit value is set.

<For tool tilt type> Tool rotational axis offset height axis offset amount for the 1st rotational axis

<For table tilt type (e.g. VARIAXIS)> Enter the offset between the actual central position of rotation of the Aaxis and the reference position in the Z-axis direction. Enter the offset with a minus sign if actual central position Z of rotation of the A-axis is present at the plus side with respect to reference position Z. Setting range: 10000 to 10000 If the upper- or lower-limit value is overstepped, operation will be the same as that which occurs when the upper- or lower-limit value is set.

L135

<For tool tilt type> Z-axial runout of the A-axis

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

After stop of axis movement 0.0001 mm See the right column.

2-332

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

L136

<For tool tilt type> Tool rotational axis offset horizontal axis offset amount for the 2nd rotational axis

<For tool tilt type only (e.g. VERSATECH)> Set the distance along the horizontal axis from the spindle edge to the rotational center of the tool-side rotational axis (tool side).

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

After stop of axis movement 0.0001 mm 30000 to 30000 <For tool tilt type only (e.g. VERSATECH)> Set the distance along the vertical axis from the spindle edge to the rotational center of the tool-side rotational axis (tool side).

L137

<For tool tilt type> Tool rotational axis offset vertical axis offset amount for the 2nd rotational axis

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

After stop of axis movement 0.0001 mm 30000 to 30000 <For tool tilt type only (e.g. VERSATECH)> Set the distance along the height axis from the spindle edge to the rotational center of the tool-side rotational axis (tool side).

L138

<For tool tilt type> Tool rotational axis offset height axis offset amount for the 2nd rotational axis

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

After stop of axis movement 0.0001 mm 30000 to 30000

L139

Minimum tool diameter of the measurable chamfering tool (For fully automatic tool measurement with measuring table)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.1 mm/0.01 in 0 to 999

2-333

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

0: 50 ms 1: 50 ms 2: 100 ms Waiting time for the completion signal of M35 (tool breakage detection) from PLC 3: 150 ms
M M

L140

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 50 ms 0 to 99999999

Stroke limit 4 (for MR-J2-CT axis) Task delay period

L141

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement 0.1 ms 0 to 99999999

Stroke limit 4 (for MR-J2-CT axis) MR-J2-CT gain

L142

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement 1/s 0 to 99999999

Stroke limit 4 (for MR-J2-CT axis) MR-J2-CT time constant

L143

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement ms 0 to 99999999

2-334

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TABLE
Description

Address

Stroke limit 4 (for MR-J2-CT axis) MR-J2-CT rapid feed rate

L144

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement mm/min 0 to 99999999

2-335

PARAMETER

2-3-12 Machine parameter

Classification

FEED VEL. (M)

Display title

MACHINE
Meaning

FEED VEL.
Description

Address

The feed rate for moving each axis under the G00 command during automatic operation The feed rate for moving each axis in either the manual rapid feed mode or the zero-point return mode Rapid feed rate

M1
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E After stop of movement mm/min (/min) 0 to 600000 The feed rate for moving each axis during initial zero-point return (reference-point return) at power on Note: Initial zero-point return is performed at the feed rate set in parameter M2.

Feed rate M2

N8
Feed rate for initial zero-point return

M2

Watchdog Zero point (reference point)

MPL520

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement mm/min (/min) 0 to 600000 The limit of cutting feed rate during automatic operation Even if a feed rate higher than this parameter setting is specified, the latter governs.

Cutting feed rate limit

M3
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E After stop of movement mm/min (/min) 0 to 600000

2-336

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

FEED VEL.
Description

Address

The machine coordinating values of the point to which each axis is to move back under G28 command (first zero-point return).

Offset of machine coordinates system

M4

First zero point

M4
Machine zero point
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At power on 0.0001 mm 99999999 The machine coordinating values of the point to which each axis is to move back under the G30 command (second zero-point return). MPL521

M4

Second zero-point coordinating value

M5

Second zero point

M5
Machine zero point M5
MPL521

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0.0001 mm 99999999

The machine coordinating values of the point to which each axis is to move back under the G30P3 command (third zero-point return).

Third zero-point coordinating value

M6

Third zero point

M6
Machine zero point M6
MPL521

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0.0001 mm 99999999

The machine coordinating values of the point to which each axis is to move back under the G30P4 command (fourth zero-point return).

Fourth zero-point coordinating value

M7

Fourth zero point

M7
Machine zero point M7
MPL521

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0.0001 mm 99999999

2-337

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

FEED VEL.
Description

Address

The maximum moving zone permissible under the machine specifications Set the machine coordinate values. Example: Maximum software limit specified by manufacturer (+ direction)

+Y

M8
M8 (Y-axis)
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.0001 99999999

+X Moving zone

M9 (Y-axis)

M9 (X-axis)

M8 (X-axis)
MPL522

Maximum software limit specified by manufacturer ( direction)

M9

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.0001 99999999 Select a unit of command from the following table and set it. Note: This parameter is invalid when M8 = M9.

* micron system
1000* Command unit 2 index 5 index Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E At power on 1 to 50000 Register the address of each axis in hexadecimal numbers in ASCII code. 10000 20000 50000 100* 1000 2000 5000 10* 100 200 500 1* 10 20 50 0.1* 1 2 5

M10

X-axis Y-axis Z-axis 4th-axis 5th-axis 6th-axis Coding of address of axis Address name Set value X &58 Y &59 Z &5A A &41 B &42 C &43

M11

Fixed value Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At power on &0 to &7F

2-338

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

FEED VEL.
Description

Address

Register the incremental axes respectively in hexadecimal numbers of the ASCII code.

Coding of incremental axis

M12

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on &0 to &7F Specify the address name of the axes to be used for display, by the appropriate hexadecimal number of the ASCII code. For reverse display, set up the most significant bit.

Axis name (for display)

Example 1: Example 2:

Reverse display of C C : &0043 Reverse display of C: &00C3 Reverse display of X1 X1 : &5831 Reverse display of X1: &D831

M13

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate &0 to &FFFF When the watchdog-less home position is set, it will be shifted through the distance

<If returning to the zero point is not yet executed>

M14

Zero point

Signal ON position

Shifting distance of the watchdog-less home position

<If returning to the zero point is executed>

M14

New M14 Ex-M14

Zero point

Ex-zero point

M14 changing position

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.0001 99999999

2-339

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

FEED VEL.
Description

Address

Specify the name of the address to be used for axis name changing (G110), by the appropriate hexadecimal number of the ASCII code.

Axis name (for axis name changing)

M15

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate &0 to &7F The distance from the grid point to the actual zero point that exists during zero-point return (reference point return) in the initial operation after power-on.

Zero-point shift amount

M16

M16

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.0001 0 to 99999999

Watchdog Grid point Zero point (Reference point)

MPL527

76543210
Unit of output from MCP to servo amplifier 0: Millimeter 1: Inch Direction of machine zero-point return 0: (+) direction 1: () direction Error correction schema with servo on 0: To correct with motor 1: To correct with counter display Type of axis 0: Linear 1: Rotational Rotational direction of servo motor (Note) (for movement in (+) direction) 0: CW 1: CCW If axis is removed: 0: Alarm 1: No alarm Note: Usually, specify the rotational direction for the motor when viewed from the front (the opposite side of the encoder). For Spindle-Cs control, however, specify the rotational direction for the motor when viewed from the rear.

Axis control flag

M17

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits

2-340

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

FEED VEL.
Description

Address

76543210
Type of C-axis 0: Motor type with frame 1: Built-in type Machine zero-point position 0: Fixed point for zero-point return using watchdogs 1: Position existing when power was turned on Watchdog-less axis Axis control flag X-axis current position display 0: Radius 1: Diameter Automatic/manual simultaneous absolute-value updating 0: Invalid 1: Valid Absolute-value detection 0: Invalid 1: Valid M18 bit 7 1 Simplified detection 0 Dog type position Absolute detection 1 Dog type position 0

M18

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits

SV17 bit 7

76543210
Select an in-position checking method 0: NC 1: Servo Homing operation starting position check 0: No check 1: Alarm if returned from the top of the watchdog Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits Backlash scheme to be adopted for watchdog-type returning to home position 0: G01 1: G0

Axis control flag

M19

2-341

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

FEED VEL.
Description

Address

76543210
Rotational direction of the rotation axis 0: Forward 1: Reverse KOMET tool axis selection 0: Normal 1: KOMET tool axis Type of stopping the motion of feed and rapid traverse for the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD (ISS) 0: With the ISS being selected, the stop is delayed by about 140 ms than otherwise. (Example: The stop position for combining the tailstock or work rest will be shifted accordingly.) 1: Independently of whether the ISS is selected or canceled, the axis movement will come to a stop in one and the same position. (Example: Independently of the ISS, the stop for combining the tailstock or work rest will occur in one and the same position. Changing the parameter setting from 0 to 1, therefore, must be followed by a readjustment of the combining position.) M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits

Axis control flag

M20

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

76543210

0: Invalid

1: Valid

Linear acceleration/ deceleration First-order lag Second-order lag Exponential acceleration/ linear deceleration Linear acceleration/ deceleration First-order lag Second-order lag Exponential acceleration/ linear deceleration Note: Time constants for each type of acceleration/deceleration control must be set using parameters N1 through N6. Cutting-feed acceleration/deceleration type Rapid-feed acceleration/deceleration type

M21

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits

2-342

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

FEED VEL.
Description

Address

76543210
Deceleration time constant for rapid-feed exponential acceleration/linear deceleration 0: Parameter N3 1: Parameter N3 2 Type of stroke-end stop 00: Linear deceleration 10: Position-loop stepped stop 01: Speed-loop stepped stop 11: Position-loop stepped stop

M22

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits Invalid

M23 M24
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-343

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

FEED VEL.
Description

Address

Set an access inhibition area in the inclined-axis control software limit area consisting of the X-axis and the Yt-axis. - Parameters M25 and M26 are valid only for the X-axis and the Yt-axis. - If the X-axial and Yt-axial upper limits (M25) and lower limits (M26) are all zeros, the illegal axis area check function is invalid. - Use the parameter BA126 to select Type A or B (BA126 bit 1). - When the selection of whether to make this interference checking function valid or invalid is to be made according to the B-axis angle, specify the interference checking B-axis angle range. The interference checking function will be valid when the following conditions are satisfied: 1. M26 (B-axis) B-axis angle M25 (B-axis) 2. M25 (B-axis) = M26 (B-axis) = 0

Illegal axis area upper limits (Type A)

M25
(Type A)

<Type A (BA126 bit 1 = 0)>

X-axial upper limit M25 (X) Yt-axial upper soft-limit M8 (Yt) Yt-axial lower limit M26 (Yt) (A) (X,Yt) = (0,0) Lower interference area (B) Yt-axial lower soft-limit M9 (Yt) X-axial lower soft-limit M9 (X) X-axial lower limit M26 (X) X-axial upper soft-limit M8 (X)

Upper interference area

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.0001 99999999

Yt-axial upper limit M25 (Yt)

Upper:

Illegal axis area lower limits (Type A)

Lower:

M26
(Type A)

Shaded area (A) in the above diagram, determined by parameters M8 (X), M8 (Yt), M25 (X), and M25 (Yt), is referred to as the illegal axis area. An alarm will result if an attempt is made to move the machine into the area. Shaded area (B) in the above diagram, determined by parameters M9 (X), M9 (Yt), M26 (X), and M26 (Yt), is referred to as the illegal axis area. An alarm will result if an attempt is made to move the machine into the area.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.0001 99999999

2-344

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

FEED VEL.
Description

Address

Set an access inhibition area in the inclined-axis control software limit area consisting of the X-axis and the Yt-axis. - Parameters M25 and M26 are valid only for the X-axis and the Yt-axis. - If the X-axial and Yt-axial upper limits (M25) and lower limits (M26) are all zeros, the illegal axis area check function is invalid. - Use the parameter BA126 to select Type A or B (BA126 bit 1). - When the selection of whether to make this interference checking function valid or invalid is to be made according to the B-axis angle, specify the interference checking B-axis angle range. The interference checking function will be valid when the following conditions are satisfied: 1. M16 (B-axis) B-axis angle M25 (B-axis) 2. M25 (B-axis) = M26 (B-axis) = 0

Illegal axis area upper limits (Type B)

M25
(Type B)

<Type B (BA126 bit 1 = 1)>

X-axial upper soft-limit M8 (X)

Yt-axial upper limit M25 (Yt)

Upper interference area

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.0001 99999999

X-axial lower limit M26 (X) (B) X-axial lower soft-limit M9 (X) Yt-axial upper soft-limit M8 (Yt)

(X,Yt) = (0,0)

(A)

Lower interference area

X-axial upper limit M25 (X) Yt-axial lower soft-limit M9 (Yt)

Yt-axial lower limit M26 (Yt)

Upper:

Illegal axis area lower limits (Type B)

M26
(Type B)

Lower:

Shaded area (A) in the above diagram, determined by parameters M8 (X), M9 (Yt), M25 (X), and M25 (Yt), is referred to as the illegal axis area. An alarm will result if an attempt is made to move the machine into the area. Shaded area (B) in the above diagram, determined by parameters M9 (X), M8 (Yt), M26 (X), and M26 (Yt), is referred to as the illegal axis area. An alarm will result if an attempt is made to move the machine into the area.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.0001 99999999

2-345

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

FEED VEL.
Description

Address

Set the value that determines the maximum allowable value (Amax) of the acceleration that occurs between blocks. Amax = M27 100 N26 60 1000 (mm/ms2) 100 N25

Optimum acceleration control (Target speed)

M27

Note: If M27 = 0, M27 is regarded as equal to M1 (rapid feed rate). If N25 = 0, N25 is regarded as equal to N1 (rapid feed time constant)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement mm/min 1 to 5000 Invalid

M28

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Set the rapid feed clamping speed 1 for superposition control. (Set value for the reference axis and superposition axis to be used during superposition control.)

Rapid feed clamping speed 1 for superposition control

- When both the reference axis and superposition axis move at a rapid feed rate and in the same direction (see Note below), the rapid feed rate for superposition will be clamped in accordance with the setting of M30. - Set M29 to M31 so that the following conditions are satisfied: M29 (RA) + M31 (SA) M1 (SA) M31 (RA) + M29 (SA) M1 (SA) M30 (RA) + M30 (SA) M1 (SA) M31 (RA) + M31 (SA) M1 (SA)

M29

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement mm/min 0 to 600000

RA: reference axis SA: superposition axis

Note: Whether the axes move in the same direction or in different directions is judged from the command and polarity (parameter N21, bit 6). Set the rapid feed clamping speed for superposition control when both the reference axis and superposition axis move at a rapid feed rate and in the same direction (see the Note). (Set value for the reference axis and superposition axis to be used during superposition control.) - Set M29 to M31 so that the following conditions are satisfied: M29 (RA) + M31 (SA) M1 (SA) M31 (RA) + M29 (SA) M1 (SA) M30 (RA) + M30 (SA) M1 (SA) M31 (RA) + M31 (SA) M1 (SA)

Rapid feed clamping speed 2 for superposition control

M30

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement mm/min 0 to 600000

RA: reference axis SA: superposition axis

Note: Whether the axes move in the same direction or in different directions is judged from the command and polarity (parameter N21, bit 6).

2-346

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

FEED VEL.
Description

Address

Set the cutting feed clamping speed for superposition control. (Set value for the reference axis and superposition axis to be used during superposition control.) Cutting feed clamping speed for superposition control - Set M29 to M31 so that the following conditions are satisfied: M29 (RA) + M31 (SA) M1 (SA) M31 (RA) + M29 (SA) M1 (SA) M30 (RA) + M30 (SA) M1 (SA) M31 (RA) + M31 (SA) M1 (SA)

M31

RA: reference axis SA: superposition axis

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement mm/min 0 to 600000 Set the safety speed to be used in safety supervisory mode 2. If the operating speed of the axis exceeds the set value in safety supervisory mode 2, this will cause a safety supervisory alarm and result in an emergency stop.

Safety speed (Safety supervisory mode 2)

M32

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement mm/min / /min 0 to 99999999 Set the safety speed to be used in safety supervisory mode 3. If the operating speed of the axis exceeds the set value in safety supervisory mode 3, this will cause a safety supervisory alarm and result in an emergency stop. (Assign a value greater than that of parameter M32 to parameter M33.)

Safety speed (Safety supervisory mode 3)

M33

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement mm/min / /min 0 to 99999999 Set the safety clamping speed to be used in safety supervisory mode 2. In safety supervisory mode 2 and while a safety clamping request is in effect, operation decelerates to the set speed. (Assign a value smaller than that of parameter M32 to parameter M34.)

Safety clamping speed (Safety supervisory mode 2)

M34

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement mm/min / /min 0 to 99999999

2-347

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

FEED VEL.
Description

Address

Set the safety clamping speed to be used in safety supervisory mode 3. In safety supervisory mode 3 and while a safety clamping request is in effect, operation decelerates to the set speed. (Assign a value smaller than that of parameter M33 to parameter M35.)

Safety clamping speed (Safety supervisory mode 3)

M35

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement mm/min / /min 0 to 99999999 Set to which door group the axis belongs in safety supervisory mode.

Speed supervisory door selection (Safety supervisory mode)

M36

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement 0 to 99999999 A speed clamping signal is output after the axis has decelerated to the clamping speed. This parameter specifies to what additional percentage of the safety clamping speed the axis is to be decelerated as the output timing of the speed clamping signal. If 0 is set, the speed clamping signal will be output when the axis decelerates to a 10% additional speed (i.e., 110% of the safety clamping speed).

Safety clamping speed reduction judgment coefficient (Safety supervisory mode)

M37

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement % 0 to 99999999

2-348

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

FEED VEL.
Description

Address

Set the machine interference detection distances for the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD. Set data so that the primary check distance is longer than the secondary check distance.

Interference check distances for INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD during manual operation

Primary interference check distance (M38)

M38 M39

M38: Primary check distance M39: Secondary check distance

Secondary interference check distance (M39)

Note: The same value as that of the primary parallel driving control axis should be assigned to the secondary axis. Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At power on 0.0001 mm/0.0001 0 to 99999999 For the machine specifications with a ram spindle, specify the maximum operating range for the ram spindle selection. When ram spindle is selected, the range specified in these parameters becomes the maximum operating range, instead of the manufacturer software limits specified in M08/M09.

M40 M41

Ram spindle stored stroke end M40: Upper limit M41: Lower limit

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement 0.0001 mm/0.0001 99999999 Set the machine interference check distance for INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD during automatic operation

Interference check distance for INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD during automatic operation

Note: The same value as that of the primary parallel driving control axis should be assigned to the secondary axis.

M42

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0.0001 mm/0.0001 0 to 99999999

2-349

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

FEED VEL.
Description

Address

Invalid

M43 to M48
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-350

PARAMETER

2-3-13 Machine parameter

Classification

TIME CONST. (N)

Display title

MACHINE
Meaning

TIME CONST.
Description

Address

Set the time constant to obtain linear acceleration/deceleration of the rapid feed rate. Speed

M1
Rapid-feed time constant (linear acceleration/deceleration)

N1
Time N1 N1
MPL523 Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate ms 4 to 1800 Set the time constant to obtain linear acceleration/deceleration of the cutting feed rate. Speed Note: This parameter is valid only when bit 0 of M21 is 1.

M3
Cutting-feed time constant (linear acceleration/deceleration)

N2
Time N2 N2
MPL523 Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate ms 4 to 1800 First-order lag time constant for rapid-feed acceleration/deceleration (Exponential acceleration/ (First-order lag) Speed Speed linear deceleration)
M1 M1 Time Time

Note: This parameter is valid only when bit 4 of M21 is 1.

Rapid-feed time constant (First-order lag)

N3
N3 N3 N3 N3 2

MPL523 Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate ms 4 to 5000 Note: This parameter is valid only when either bit 1, 2 or 3 of M21 is 1.

2-351

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TIME CONST.
Description

Address

Set the time constant for the filter that further smoothens the speed signal waveform during rapid feed (G0) operation with shape correction off and during rapid feed operation in manual operation mode. Time constant for post-interpolation rapid feed acceleration/deceleration filter The filter will be invalid if 0 is set.

N4

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement ms 0 to 455 First-order lag time constant for cutting-feed acceleration/ deceleration

(First-order lag) Speed

Cutting-feed time constant (First-order lag)

Speed

(Exponential acceleration/ linear deceleration) M3

M3 Time

N5

Time

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate ms 0 to 5000

N5

N5

N5

N5 2
MPL524

Note: This parameter is valid only when either bit 5, 6 or 7 of M21 is 1.

Invalid

N6

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

During external deceleration, the position loop is disconnected for the time interval set using this parameter and, as a result, the speed becomes zero.

OT time

N7

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate ms 1 to 32767

2-352

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TIME CONST.
Description

Address

The feed rate at which each axis is moved back to the zero-point (reference point) after the zero-point watchdog LS (limit switch) has turned on in the initial operation after power-on. Creeping speed during initial zero-point return

Feedrate M2

N8

N8
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E After stop of movement mm/min (/min) 1 to 60000

Watchdog

Zero point (Reference point) MPL525

Amount of grid ignorance during initial zero-point return

The spacing at which the grid point is ignored during zero-point return (reference point return in the initial operation after power-on) after the zero-point watchdog LS (limit switch) is turned off. With this parameter, dispersion in position deviations of the zero point can be avoided.

N9

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm (0.001) 0 to 65535

Watchdog N9

Zero point (Reference point)

MPL526

Note: The amount of grid ignorance must not exceed 1 grid spacing. Set the grid interval of the detector. Usually, set the same value as the ball screw pitch. However, set the grid interval of the detector if the grid interval differs from the pitch, as is the case, with a linear scale.

Grid interval

N10

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on mm (0.001) 0 to 32767 Invalid

N11

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-353

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TIME CONST.
Description

Address

The backlash amount to be corrected after the axis movement direction has been reversed in either the rapid-feed (G00) mode or manual mode (except handle-pulse feed mode) Rapid-feed backlash

N12

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.00005 mm/0.00005 9999 The backlash amount to be corrected after the axis movement direction has been reversed in either the cutting-feed (G01) mode or manual handle-pulse feed mode. Note: Setting conditions: N12 < N13

Cutting-feed backlash

N13

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.00005 mm/0.00005 9999 Note: Setting conditions: N12 < N13

Invalid

N14

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-354

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TIME CONST.
Description

Address

N15
Width to which the machine posture change correction is to be applied

N16 N13

N15

Machine posture change correction value Cutting-feed backlash amount Distance after reversing the axis movement direction

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.00005 mm/0.00005 0 to 32767

Machine posture change correction value

N16

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.00005 mm/0.00005 32768 to 32767 Specify the channel number of the servo amplifier. 1: 2: 3: 1 ch 2 ch 3 ch

Servo amplifier channel number

N17

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0 to 3 Specify the rotary switch number of the servo amplifier. 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: SW0 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 SW6

Servo amplifier rotary switch number

N18

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0 to 6

2-355

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TIME CONST.
Description

Address

Set the system number of the axes. 0: System 1 1: System 2 2: System 3 3: System 4

Axis system number

N19

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0 to 3 Invalid

N20

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

76543210
Linear-type rotational axis 0: Rotary type 1: Linear type Rotational axis shortcut 0: Invalid 1: Valid Fixed value (0) Fixed value Reference axis for superposition control

N21

Superposition axis for superposition control Relative polarity of control axis Current position immediately after cross machining 0: No re-acquisition 1: Re-acquisition

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits

2-356

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TIME CONST.
Description

Address

Invalid

N22 to N24
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Set the maximum allowable value, Amax, for the acceleration occurring between blocks. Amax = M27 100 N26 60 1000 (mm/ms2) 100 N25

Time constant for deceleration rate calculation

N25

Note: If M27 = 0, M27 is regarded as equal to M1 (rapid feed rate). If N25 = 0, N25 is regarded as equal to N1 (rapid feed time constant)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement ms 0 to 5000

Accuracy coefficient for deceleration rate calculation

N26

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of axis movement 32768 Set the rapid feed (linear acceleration/deceleration) time constant for superposition control. Note: Set the same value for all axes.

Rapid feed time constant for superposition

N27

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement ms 4 to 1800

2-357

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

TIME CONST.
Description

Address

Set the cutting feed (linear acceleration/deceleration) time constant for superposition control. Note: Set the same value for all axes. Cutting feed time constant for superposition

Nf28

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement ms 4 to 1800 Use of this parameter allows further smoothening of the speed signal waveform during rapid feed with shape correction on. The filter will be invalid if 0 is set.

Time constant for shape correction rapid feed acceleration/deceleration filter

N29

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement ms 0 to 455 Set the cutting feed time constant for a time constant changeover M-code command.
Feed rate

Cutting feed time constant for time constant changeover M-code command N30: for M881 command N31: for M882 command N32: for M883 command N33: for M884 command N34: for M885 command N35: for M886 command Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E After stop of movement ms 0 to 1800

N30 to N35

M3 N30 to N35 N30 to N35

Time

Invalid

N36 to N48
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-358

PARAMETER

2-3-14 Machine parameter

Classification

ANOTHER (S)
Display title

MACHINE
Meaning

ANOTHER
Description

Address

Invalid

S1 S2
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range Set for each axis the feed forward gain for acceleration/deceleration before interpolation for the MAZAK Precision Rapid Boring Tornado Option. Feed forward gain for the MAZAK Precision Rapid Boring Tornado Option

S3

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.1% 0 to 1000 Set for each axis the feed forward gain for acceleration/deceleration before interpolation.

Feed forward gain

S4

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate % 0 to 100

2-359

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

ANOTHER
Description

Address

Set the position of the rotational center of the table in the machine coordinates system.

X
S5

S5

Y
Rotational center of the table

Notes: 1. Z-axis data are not required for a machine with a tilting table. 2. This parameter is used to execute the automatic program origin calculation function (option) for a machine with a tilting table.

S5

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999

(For INTEGREX series) (For dynamic offset) (For HV machining) (For machines equipped with a tilting table) When movement is beyond the length set by this parameter during the power off, it activates the alarm mode.

Absolute position detection parameter

S6
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At power on 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in/ 0.0001 0 to 99999999 This parameter specifies the range of rotating machining for the table rotating machining (X-B machining). Set the upper limit (on Z-axis) of the machining range in the machine coordinates system. The machine recognizes that it is prohibited to move beyond this limit in the negative direction.

Upper limit (on Z-axis) of machining range for table rotating machining

S7

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0 to 99999999 (For HV machining)

2-360

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

ANOTHER
Description

Address

Specify the pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration feed-forward gain levels for each axis.

Feed-forward gain G00

S8

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate % 0 to 100 Invalid

S9

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Specify the axis of rotation of the tilting table in machine coordinates (Y and Z). This parameter is used for the software travel limit function. Note: X-axial data are not required.

Axis of rotation of the tilting table

S10

Y
S10 (Z)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm 0 to 99999999 (For machines equipped with a tilting table) Specify the corner position of the tilting table in (Y- and Z-axial) distances from its axis of rotation. This parameter is used for the software travel limit function.
S10 (Y)

Corner position of the tilting table

Note: X-axial data are not required.

S11
S11 (Z)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm 0 to 99999999 (For machines equipped with a tilting table)

S11 (Y)

2-361

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

ANOTHER
Description

Address

Axis of rotation of the tilting table (Used for the automatic program origin calculation function)

Specify the axis of rotation of the tilting table in machine coordinates (Y and Z). Use this parameter to execute the automatic program origin calculation function (option). Measure and enter data for respective machines. Note: X-axial data are not required.

S12
Y
S12 (Z) S12 (Y)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999

(For machines equipped with a tilting table) Set the in-position width for G00. The in-position check for G00 is effective when the parameter K95 bit 7 is 1 and K96 bit 0 is 0. For utilizing the in-position width of G00, set the in-position width of the servo parameter to 0 to avoid trouble.

G00 in-position width

S13

Note: This parameter is valid only when bit 3 of M19 is 0.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0.001 mm 0 to 32767 Set the inposition width for G01. The in-position check for G01 is effective when one of G09 (exact stop check), G61 (exact stop check mode) and the error detection is selected with the parameter K95 bit 7 set to 1.

G01 in-position width

For utilizing the in-position width for G01, set the in-position width of the servo parameter to 0 to avoid trouble. Note: This parameter is valid only when bit 3 of M19 is 0.

S14

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0.001 mm 0 to 32767 Fixed value

S15

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-362

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

ANOTHER
Description

Address

Set automatically after estimation of the characteristics.

Unbalanced axis torque offset

S16

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M At power on Specify torque limit buffer reduction ratio 1.

Torque limit buffer reduction ratio 1

S17

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate % 0 to 200 Specify torque limit buffer reduction ratio 2.

Torque limit buffer reduction ratio 2

S18

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate % 0 to 200 Specify the tool change completion position of the long boring bar end tool by the corresponding machine coordinates.

Tool change completion position of the long boring bar end tool

S19

Tool change completion position

S19
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 0.0001 99999999
Machine zero point S19

MPL521

2-363

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

ANOTHER
Description

Address

Set the completion position of automatic pallet change operation.

APC completion position

S20

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.0001 99999999 Set the completion position of gantry robot operation.

Completion position of gantry robot operation

S21

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.0001 99999999 Specify the critical cutting feed rate to be used during tool tip point control. During tool tip point control, speed is clamped in accordance with parameter S22 or M3 (critical cutting feed rate), whichever is the smaller.

Cutting feed clamping speed during tool tip point control

S22

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E After stop of movement mm/min (/min) 1 to 200000

2-364

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

ANOTHER
Description

Address

Set the position of a reference workpiece zero point for each axis in the machine coordinate system. Set the position of a reference workpiece zero point relating to the turret also in the machine coordinate system. For machining centers, this parameter is invalid. * Tool set value is determined based on this parameter.

X M
Reference workpiece zero point

S23 (Z) S23 (X)

S23

Reference workpiece zero point

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 99999999 Invalid

S24

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Set the central position of the tilt table upper surface on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display in terms of machine coordinates for each axis. (For machines with a tilt table) Set the central position of the table upper surface on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display in terms of machine coordinates for each axis. (For other machining centers)
+Z +Z

Central position on the upper surface of the tilt table (for machines with a tilt table)

S25

Central position on the table upper surface (for other machining centers)

+X

+Y S25 (Z)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 99999999

S25 (Z) S25 (X)

S25 (Y)

2-365

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

ANOTHER
Description

Address

Set the position of the tilt table rotational center on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display in terms of machine coordinates for each axis.
+Z +Z

Central position of tilt table rotation

+X S26 (Z) S26 (Z) S26 (Y)

+Y

S26

S26 (X)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 99999999 (Special function for machines with a tilt table) For the machine specifications with a ram spindle, specify the offsets between the main spindle and the ram spindle for each axis.
+Z +Z

+Y

+X

S27Y

S27X

Ram spindle offset amount

S27

S27Z

S27Z

Main spindle

Ram spindle

Main spindle Ram spindle (Milling spindle)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0.0001 mm 99999999

(Special function for machines with a ram spindle) For graphics on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display, set with machine coordinates of the rectangular axes, the center of the workpiece to be directly mounted on the table of the machines equipped with an additional table.
+Z

Center of the workpiece to be directly mounted on the table of the machines equipped with an additional table

+X S28 (Z) S25 (Z) S25 (X) S28 (X)

S28
Table
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M At power on 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 99999999

Additional table

Note: This parameter is only used when multiple material pieces can be arranged on the display in question (F35 bit 0 = 1). Use parameter S25 to set the center of the additional tables upper surface.

2-366

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

ANOTHER
Description

Address

Machine zero point

Position of the axis of rotation of the work hand in relation to the machine zero point

S29 (X)

Work hand

S29

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 99999999

S29 (Z)

Axis of rotation

(Only for machines with a workpiece handling device) Set the distance from the axis of rotation of the work hand to the reference position of the vice for the work hand during workpiece transfer.

S30 (Z)
Distance from the axis of rotation of the work hand to the reference position of the vice

Reference position of the vice

S30
Work hand
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 99999999

S30 (X)

Axis of rotation (Only for machines with a workpiece handling device) Specify the machine coordinates of the floating reference point. Example: G30.1X10.Z10.;

Specification of the machine coordinates of the floating reference point

S31

Entry of the above command returns the tool in rapid feed mode through the intermediate point (X10, Z10) to the floating reference point specified in this parameter.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 99999999 The general setting for rapid traverse speed in parameter M1 will be used also for the mode of tool tip point control if it is lower than the setting in parameter S32.

Rapid traverse speed for the mode of tool tip point control

S32

Note: Set zero (0) in S32 if it is desirable to use the general setting in parameter M1 for the rapid traverse in question.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate mm/min (/min) 0 - 200000

2-367

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

ANOTHER
Description

Address

Set the machine coordinate of the table edge on the negative side of the X-axis. Reference position X for the TEACH function, to be used for setting the LENGTH B item of an angular tool (For machines of five-surface machining by angular tools)

Reference position

S33 (X)

Machine zero point

S33

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm Invalid

Table

S34 to S48
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-368

PARAMETER

2-3-15 Machine parameter

Classification

SPINDLE (SA)
Display title

MACHINE
Meaning

SPINDLE
Description

Address

Number of revolutions per minute of the spindle in each speed range Address SA1 SA2 SA3 SA4 Maximum number of speed ranges 1
"

2 L H Invalid Invalid

3 L M H Invalid

4 L ML MH H

Invalid Invalid Invalid

Example:

SA1 to SA8

Maximum spindle speed in each speed range (range 1 to 8)

Output voltage

MAX H L

SA9 SA1
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At power on min1 0 to 99999

min1 (Spindle speed)

SA10 SA2

Constants for calculating each gear speed of the spindle

SA9 to SA16

Constants for calculating each gear speed of the spindle (range 1 to 8)

Address SA9 SA10 SA11 SA12

Maximum number of speed ranges 1

"

2 L H Invalid Invalid

3 L M H Invalid

4 L ML MH H

Invalid Invalid Invalid

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on min1 0 to 99999 (! SA1, SA2, SA3, SA4)

2-369

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

SPINDLE
Description

Address

The maximum number of revolutions per minute of the spindle in each speed range during a tapping cycle

SA17 to SA24

Maximum spindle speed during tapping cycle (range 1 to 8)

Address SA17 SA18 SA19

Maximum number of speed ranges 1

"

2 L H Invalid Invalid

3 L M H Invalid

4 L ML MH H

Invalid Invalid Invalid

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on min1 0 to 99999

SA20

The number of revolutions per minute of the spindle during shifting of gears thru the various ranges Address SA25 SA26 SA27 SA28 Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At power on min1 0 to 32767 Scaling factor (for high-speed coil) with respect to the reference output of the load meter Maximum number of speed range 1
"

SA25 to SA28

Spindle speed during gear shifting (range 1 to 4)

2 L H Invalid Invalid

3 L M H Invalid

4 L ML MH H

Invalid Invalid Invalid

Load meter reference output scaling factor (high-speed coil)

Output (kW) P0 P1

Output diagram at shorttime rating (reference) Output diagram at continuous rating

SA29

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate % 0 to 100 Base rotational speed (for high-speed coil) for the output changed by the parameter SA29 with respect to the reference output of the load meter

N0 SA29 = P1/P0 100 SA30 = N1

N1

Speed (min1)

Load meter reference output base rotational speed (high-speed coil)

Output (kW) P0 P1

Output diagram at shorttime rating (reference) Output diagram at continuous rating

SA30

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate min1 0 to 32767

N0 SA29 = P1/P0 100 SA30 = N1

N1

Speed (min1)

2-370

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

SPINDLE
Description

Address

Scaling factor (for low-speed coil) with respect to the reference output of the load meter

Load meter reference output scaling factor (low-speed coil)

Output (kW) P0 P1

Output diagram at shorttime rating (reference) Output diagram at continuous rating

SA31

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate % 0 to 100 Base rotational speed (for low-speed coil) for the output changed by the parameter SA31 with respect to the reference output of the load meter Output (kW) P0 P1 Output diagram at continuous rating Output diagram at shorttime rating (reference)

N0 SA31 = P1/P0 100 SA32 = N1

N1

Speed (min1)

Load meter reference output base rotational speed (low-speed coil)

SA32

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate min1 0 to 32767

N0 SA31 = P1/P0 100 SA32 = N1

N1

Speed (min1)

Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant for the synchronous tapping cycle SA33: Range 1 Acceleration/deceleration time constant for the synchronous tapping (range 1 to 8) SA34: Range 2 SA35: Range 3 SA36: Range 4

SA33 to SA40

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement ms 0 to 1800 Specify the spindle orientating speed.

Spindle orientating speed

SA41

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on min1 0 to 32767

2-371

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

SPINDLE
Description

Address

Specify the minimum spindle speed.

Minimum spindle speed

SA42

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on min1 0 to 32767 Specify the channel number for the spindle amplifier. 1: 1 ch (the setting used when connection to SV1 of the HR353 is established)

Channel number for the spindle amplifier

2: 2 ch (the setting used when connection to SV3 of the HR353 is established)

SA43

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0 to 2 Specify the rotary switch number of the spindle amplifier. 0: SW0 1: SW1 2: SW2 3: SW3 4: SW4 5: SW5 6: SW6

Spindle amplifier rotary switch number

SA44

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0 to 6

2-372

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

SPINDLE
Description

Address

76543210
Spindle speed range changing method, in relation to switching the torque factors for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type (Note 1) 0: As specified by bit 1 1: L/H coil sw. + Mecha. gear shift Spindle speed range changing method, in relation to switching the torque factors for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type 2 0: L/H coil switching scheme 1: Mecha-gear scheme (Only when 0 is set up at bit 0) (Note 2) Homing direction for synchronous tapping 00: Shorter route 01: Forward rotation 10: Reverse rotation Spindle speed range changing method, in relation to switching the torque factors for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type Defines the specified direction as the Z-phase detection direction. Spindle index gear correction 0: Invalid 1: Valid

SA45

Notes: 1. For the setting of SA45 bit 0 = 1, set the rated torque, viscous & coulomic friction coefficients of the spindle motor in the relevant parameters as tabulated below: Speed range No. 1 1 2 2 Coil L H L H Rated torque SA53 SA54 SA53 SA54 Visc. fric. coef. SA57 SA57 SA58 SA58 Coul. fric. coef. SA61 SA61 SA62 SA62

2. Bit 1 is valid only when bit 0 = 0.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement Bit Binary, eight digits

2-373

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

SPINDLE
Description

Address

76543210
Direction of orientation 00: Shorter route 01: Forward rotation 10: Reverse rotation C-axis position control changeover type 00: After return to zero point 01: After deceleration stop Synchronous tapping position control changeover type 0: After return to zero point 1: After deceleration stop Z-phase detection direction 0: Forward rotation 1: Reverse rotation C-axis homing direction 00: Shorter route 01: Forward rotation 10: Reverse rotation Synchronous tapping command polarity 0: Reverse rotation 1: Forward rotation Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E After stop of movement Bit Binary, eight digits

SA46

76543210

0: Ignoring the spindle/motor gear ratio 1: Considering the spindle/motor gear ratio

SA47

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits Specify the encoder signal input destination. 0: 1: 2: Via the HDLC-connected axis (Spindle AMP feedback data) Direct connection to encoder 1 (ENC1) Direct connection to encoder 2 (ENC2)

Encoder signal input destination

SA48

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 2

2-374

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

SPINDLE
Description

Address

Set the speed attainment detection width. If a value other than 1-99 (%) is set, the value will be regarded as 15 (%).

Speed attainment detection width

SA49

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate % 0 to 99 Specify the type of spindle corresponding to the displayed SA parameters, by the appropriate numeric value. 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: 5: 6: 7: 8: Axis not specified No. 1 milling spindle No. 1 turning spindle No. 2 milling spindle No. 2 turning spindle No. 3 milling spindle No. 3 turning spindle No. 4 milling spindle No. 4 turning spindle

Spindle type

SA50

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0 to 8

Set the number of gears on the spindle. (1) For displaying a gear selection menu in manual operation mode 0, 5 to 8: Without gear 1: 2 gear positions (without neutral) 2: 2 gear positions (with neutral) 3: 3 gear positions (with neutral) 4: 4 gear positions (with neutral) (2) For automatic gear selection with the MAZATROL program (only for milling spindle) Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At power on 0 to 8 0: Type not set. 1: C-axis type 2: Orientation type Turning spindle type

Number of gears on spindle

SA51

SA52

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 2

2-375

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

SPINDLE
Description

Address

Set the 1/4h (1/2h) rated torque for the L coils of the spindle motor. Notes: 1. Only the 1/2h rated torque, not the 1/4h rated torque, may be known for the particular motor. If that is the case, set the 1/2h rated torque. If coil selection is not possible for the spindle, enter the same value in both SA53 and SA54. An alarm will result if 0 is entered even in either one of the two parameters. 2. If bit 1 in SA45 is set to 1, set the 1/4h rated torque applied when the spindle motor gear position is 1. Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0.1 Nm 0 to 65535 Set the 1/4h (1/2h) rated torque for the H coils of the spindle motor. Notes: 1. Only the 1/2h rated torque, not the 1/4h rated torque, may be known for the particular motor. If that is the case, set the 1/2h rated torque. If coil selection is not possible for the spindle, enter the same value in both SA53 and SA54. An alarm will result if 0 is entered even in either one of the two parameters. 2. If bit 1 in SA45 is set to 1, set the 1/4h rated torque applied when the spindle motor gear position is 2. Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0.1 Nm 0 to 65535 Set the 1/4h rated torque applied when the spindle motor gear position is 3. Spindle 1/4h (1/2h) rated torque for autopecking of the cutting load detection type Spindle gear position 3 Notes: 1. Only the 1/2h rated torque, not the 1/4h rated torque, may be known for the particular motor. If that is the case, set the 1/2h rated torque. 2. This parameter is valid only when the setting of bit 1 in SA45 is 1.

Spindle 1/4h (1/2h) rated torque for autopecking of the cutting load detection type L coils

SA53

Spindle 1/4h (1/2h) rated torque for autopecking of the cutting load detection type H coils

SA54

SA55

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 Nm 0 to 65535 Set the 1/4h rated torque applied when the spindle motor gear position is 4.

Spindle 1/4h (1/2h) rated torque for autopecking of the cutting load detection type Spindle gear position 4

Notes: 1. Only the 1/2h rated torque, not the 1/4h rated torque, may be known for the particular motor. If that is the case, set the 1/2h rated torque. 2. This parameter is valid only when the setting of bit 1 in SA45 is 1.

SA56

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.1 Nm 0 to 65535

2-376

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

SPINDLE
Description

Address

If the fms value depends on spindle speeds, specify the gradient. Example: If fms is 90000 for an S value of 5000 and 140000 for S10000:
fms 140000 b 90000 a Gradient = b/a

Spindle viscous friction coefficient cms for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type Range 1

SA57

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 99999999
Since cms = (140000 90000) / (10000 5000) = 10, set 10 in the above example. 5000 10000 S

Spindle viscous friction coefficient cms for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type Range 2

SA58

Note: Set the spindle viscous friction coefficient cms when SA45 bit 0 = 1. (Enter, moreover, 1000 times the respective calculation results in this case.)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 99999999

Spindle viscous friction coefficient cms for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type Range 3

SA59

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 99999999

Spindle viscous friction coefficient cms for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type Range 4

SA60

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 99999999

2-377

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

SPINDLE
Description

Address

Set the value where the width of the flat section in the current feedback data matches estimated data. Spindle coulombic friction coefficient fms for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type Range 1

Example: If fms is 90000 for an S value of 5000 and 140000 for S10000, set c in L105.
fms 140000 Gradient = 10 b 90000 c a

SA61

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 99999999

5000

10000

Spindle coulombic friction coefficient fms for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type Range 2

Calculate c form the linear equation y = (b/a) x + c. Since c = 90000 (10 5000) = 40000, set 40000 in the above example.

SA62

Note: Set the spindle coulombic friction coefficient fms when SA45 bit 0 = 1.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 99999999

Spindle coulombic friction coefficient fms for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type Range 3

SA63

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 99999999

Spindle coulombic friction coefficient fms for auto-pecking of the cutting load detection type Range 4

SA64

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 99999999

2-378

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

SPINDLE
Description

Address

Set the filter for the data which has been sampled at 3.5-ms intervals. If the entered value is 0, the data actually used will be 4 3.5 (ms). Cutting force calculation filter for autopecking of the cutting load detection type

SA65

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 3.5 ms 0 to 65535 If the rotational speed of the milling spindle during polygonal machining exceeds the setting of this parameter, that rotational speed will be clamped at this setting.

Maximum permissible speed of milling spindle for polygonal/hobbing machining

SA66

Also, if the rotational speed of the milling spindle during hobbing exceeds the setting of this parameter, that rotational speed will be clamped at this setting.

Note: This parameter is valid only for the milling spindle.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E At power on min1 0 to 65535

Rotational speed in the following spindle output diagrams: - MACHINING NAVIGATION-RESULT - MACHINING NAVIGATIONPPEDICTION - Monitoring Functions - POSITION Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate min1 0 to 99999999

Output (kW) P1 P2

P3

P4

P5 P6

SA67 to SA73

P0 Speed (min1)

Point P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6

Output in the following spindle output diagrams: - MACHINING NAVIGATION-RESULT - MACHINING NAVIGATIONPPEDICTION - Monitoring Functions - POSITION Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate 0.01 kW 0 to 99999999

SA74 to SA80

Cross axis: speed (Unit: min1) SA67 SA68 SA69 SA70 SA71 SA72 SA73

Vertical axis: output (Unit: 1/100 kW) SA74 SA75 SA76 SA77 SA78 SA79 SA80

Note: Whether to specify these values for an output diagram at short-time rating or at continuous rating depends on the specifications of the model.

2-379

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

SPINDLE
Description

Address

Set the spindle limit speed at which the time constant for the spindle position control is to be changed Spindle limit speed selection for spindle position control time constants

[Spindle speed]

SA81 to SA83

SA81: Limit speed 1 SA82: Limit speed 2 SA83: Limit speed 3

Max. spindle speed

M, E At power on min1 0 to 99999

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

SA83 SA82 SA81 [Time] SA84 SA85 SA86

Spindle position control time constants

SA84 to SA86

SA84: Time constant 1 SA85: Time constant 2 SA86: Time constant 3

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on ms 0 to 9999

Revolutions

Spindle speed operating time constant changeover revolutions

SA9 SA88 SA87

SA87 SA88

SA87: Revolutions 1 SA88: Revolutions 2

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate min1 0 to 99999999

SA91 SA89 SA90 Time

Spindle speed operating time constant

Note: For gears 2 to 8, SA87 or SA88 is internally converted to calculate the changeover revolutions.
SA10 to 16 SA88 (SA10 to 16/SA9) SA87 (SA10 to 16/SA9)

SA89 to SA91

SA89: Time constant 1 SA90: Time constant 2 SA91: Time constant 3

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate ms 0 to 99999999

2-380

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

SPINDLE
Description

Address

Set the maximum revolutions for conducting Z-phase detection.

Z-phase detection speed

SA92

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate min1 0 to 99999 Set the amount of shifting from the Z-phase when the axis is to be returned to its zero point for synchronous tapping. Shifting is conducted in the Z-phase detection direction (specified in bit 4 of SA46).

Amount of synchronous tapping zero point shifting

SA93

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0 to 359 Set the homing speed effective when After return to zero point (SA46 bit 2 = 0) is selected as the position-changing type for synchronous tapping.

Homing speed for synchronous tapping

SA94

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate min1 0 to 99999 Set the manual operation mode maximum revolutions.

Maximum revolutions in manual operation mode

SA95

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate min1 0 to 99999

2-381

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

SPINDLE
Description

Address

Set the amount of shifting from the zero point of orientation control.

Amount of orientation position shifting

SA96
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate 0.00005 7200000 The synchronous tapping time constant for high-speed synchronous tapping is reduced with respect to the synchronous tapping time constant set in parameter SA33 to SA40. The value set in SA97 becomes the reduction ratio. Without the high-speed synchronous tapping option or for the axis combination that does not allow high-speed synchronous tapping, normal synchronous tapping is applied, in which case the data setting of SA33 to SA40 is used as it is. High-speed synchronous tapping time constant = SA33 (100 SA97)/100

Reduction ratio of the synchronous tapping time constant for high-speed synchronous tapping

SA97

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate % 0 to 100

Invalid

SA98

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Set the time constant for orientation control. If 0 is set, 300 will be regarded as having been specified.

Orientation time constant

SA99

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement ms 0 to 30000

2-382

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

SPINDLE
Description

Address

Rotational speed in the following spindle output diagrams at continuous rating: - MACHINING NAVIGATION-RESULT - MACHINING NAVIGATIONPPEDICTION - Monitoring Functions - POSITION Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate min1 0 to 65535

Output (kW) P1 P2

P3

P4

P5 P6

SA100 to SA106

P0 Speed (min1)

Point P0 P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6

Output in the following spindle output diagrams at continuous rating: - MACHINING NAVIGATION-RESULT - MACHINING NAVIGATIONPPEDICTION - Monitoring Functions - POSITION Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate 0.01 kW 0 to 99999999

SA107 to SA113

Cross axis: speed (Unit: min1) SA100 SA101 SA102 SA103 SA104 SA105 SA106

Vertical axis: output (Unit: 1/100 kW) SA107 SA108 SA109 SA110 SA111 SA112 SA113

Notes: 1. Set values for spindle output diagrams at continuous rating. 2. This parameter is valid for models that allow you to switch between load meter ratings on the POSITION display.

Set the spindle speed to be monitored in safety supervisory mode 2. If the operating speed of the spindle exceeds the set value in safety supervisory mode 2, this will cause a safety supervisory alarm and bring the machine to an emergency stop.

Spindle speed supervisory mode 2 for safety supervision

SA114

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement min1 0 to 10000 Set the spindle speed to be monitored in safety supervisory mode 3. If the operating speed of the spindle exceeds the set value in safety supervisory mode 3, this will cause a safety supervisory alarm and bring the machine to an emergency stop. Assign a value greater than the speed value to be monitored in mode 2 (i.e., specified in SA114).

Spindle speed supervisory mode 3 for safety supervision

SA115

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement min1 0 to 10000

2-383

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

SPINDLE
Description

Address

Set the spindle safety clamping speed to be monitored in safety supervisory mode 2. In safety supervisory mode 2 and while a safety clamping request is in effect, the spindle is decelerated to the set speed. Assign a value smaller than the speed value to be monitored in mode 2 (i.e., specified in SA114).

Spindle safety clamping mode 2 for safety supervision

SA116

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement min1 0 to 10000 Set the spindle safety clamping speed to be monitored in safety supervisory mode 3. In safety supervisory mode 3 and while a safety clamping request is in effect, the spindle is decelerated to the set speed. Assign a value smaller than the speed value to be monitored in mode 3 (i.e., specified in SA115). Assign a value greater than the speed value to be monitored in mode 2 (i.e., specified in SA116).

Spindle safety clamping mode 3 for safety supervision

SA117

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement min1 0 to 10000 Select the door group to which the spindle belongs in safety supervisory mode. If SP129: SFNC9/bit F is OFF, speed monitoring will not be conducted, irrespective of the setting of this parameter. [Examples of setting] 0000: The spindle does not belong to any door. 0001: The spindle belongs to the door-1 group. 0002: The spindle belongs to the door-2 group. 0003: The spindle belongs to the door-1/2 group.

Selecting the spindle door of the spindle whose speed is to be monitored

SA118

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement For safety speed clamping in safety supervisory mode, when a claming request is input, a clamping signal will be output after the spindle has decelerated to a safety clamping speed. This parameter specifies to what additional percentage of the safety clamping speed the spindle is to be decelerated as the output timing of the speed clamping signal. If 0 is set, the speed clamping signal will be output when the spindle decelerates to a 10% additional speed (i.e., 110% of the safety clamping speed).

Deceleration judgment coefficient on safety speed clamping of the spindle to be supervised for safety

SA119

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement % 0 to 100

2-384

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

SPINDLE
Description

Address

Set the number of PLG teeth per revolution. If a value less than zero is set, 1024 will be regarded as having been set. PLG pulse rate for spindle index gear tooth correction

SA120

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate Teeth 99999999 to 99999999 Set the amount of correction at the branching point where one PLG gear tooth is split into eight equal segments.

Amount of branching point correction for spindle index gear tooth

SA121 to SA128

SA121: Branching point [1] SA122: Branching point [2] SA123: Branching point [3] SA124: Branching point [4] SA125: Branching point [5] SA126: Branching point [6] SA127: Branching point [7] SA128: Branching point [8]
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate 0.0001 99999999 to 99999999 Set the notch filter frequency for the cutting-load detection pecking cycle. Notch filter frequency for cutting-load detection pecking cycle

SA129 SA131

SA129: #1 notch filter frequency SA131: #2 notch filter frequency

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.1 Hz 0 to 65535 Set the notch filter depth to be used in the cutting-load detection pecking cycle.

Notch filter depth for cutting-load detection pecking cycle

SA130 SA132

SA130: #1 notch filter depth SA132: #2 notch filter depth

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 7

2-385

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

SPINDLE
Description

Address

Set the detection torque to be used when the breakage detection distance (l) is specified for the cutting-load detection pecking cycle.

Breakage detection torque for cutting-load detection pecking cycle

SA133

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.01 N#m 0 to 65535 Set the maximum spindle orientation speed.

Notes: 1. Some other functions (such as safety speed clamping control based on a PLC ladder) may cause the spindle orientation speed to be clamped at a speed lower than the setting of this parameter. 2. Immediately after power-on, the Z-phase is detected, so the spindle is oriented at the maximum speed specified in parameter SA92, not SA134.
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate min1 0 to 99999999 Invalid

Maximum spindle orientation speed

SA134

3. Clamping based on this parameter will be invalid if the setting is 0.

SA135 to SA137
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Set the number of gears. 0 : No gears 1 or more : Actual number of gears

Number of gears

SA138 SA139

SA138: Number of spindle gears SA139: Number of motor gears

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0 to 99999999

2-386

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

SPINDLE
Description

Address

Set the gear ratio for turret indexing.

Turret indexing gear ratio

SA140

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement Invalid

SA141 to SA143
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

76543210
Encoder polarity for the spindle rotation for normal thread cutting 0: Spindle cycle counter increase 1: Spindle cycle counter decrease Gear conversion during spindle rotation valid Spindle gear changeover valid Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits Turret indexing valid.

SA144

2-387

PARAMETER

2-3-16 Machine parameter

Classification

BARRIER (BA)
Display title

MACHINE
Meaning

BARRIER
Description

Address

Setting of chuck outside diameter of the No. 1 turning spindle

Chuck outside diameter (for chuck barrier) No. 1 turning spindle

BA1

BA1
NM211-00312

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999 Setting of chuck width of the No. 1 turning spindle

BA2

Chuck width (for chuck barrier) No. 1 turning spindle

BA2

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999 Setting of chuck inside diameter of the No. 1 turning spindle

NM211-00313

Chuck inside diameter (for chuck barrier) No. 1 turning spindle

BA3

BA3

NM211-00314

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999

2-388

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

Specify the workpiece outside diameter to be used for the EIA program.

EIA program workpiece outside diameter

BA4

BA4

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999 Setting of chuck outside diameter of the No. 2 turning spindle

BA17

Chuck outside diameter (for chuck barrier) No. 2 turning spindle

BA5

BA5

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999 Setting of chuck width of the No. 2 turning spindle

NM211-00312

Note: For single turning-spindle specifications, this parameter is invalid.

Chuck width (for chuck barrier) No. 2 turning spindle

BA6

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999

BA6

NM211-00313

Note: For single turning-spindle specifications, this parameter is invalid.

Setting of chuck inside diameter of the No. 2 turning spindle

Chuck inside diameter (for chuck barrier) No. 2 turning spindle

BA7

BA7

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999

NM211-00314

Note: For single turning-spindle specifications, this parameter is invalid.

2-389

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

Setting of tail body outside diameter

Tail body outside diameter (for tail barrier)

BA8

BA8

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999 Setting of tail body length

BA9

NM211-00315

Tail body length (for tail barrier)

BA9

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999 Setting of tail spindle outside diameter

NM211-00316

Tail spindle outside diameter (for tail barrier)

BA10

BA10

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999 Setting of length with tail spindle at back end
BA11

NM211-00317

Length with tail spindle at back end (for tail barrier)

BA11

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999

NM211-00318

2-390

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

Setting of tail head outside diameter

Tail head outside diameter (for tail barrier)

BA12

BA12

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999 Setting of tail head length

BA13

NM211-00319

Tail head length (for tail barrier)

BA13

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999 Setting of tail head taper angle

NM211-00320

Tail head taper angle (for tail barrier)

BA14

BA14
NM211-00321

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 0 to 180000 Setting of biting diameter when tail head is used

Tail head biting diameter (for tail barrier)

BA15 Workpiece zero point

BA15

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999

NM211-00322

2-391

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

Set the dimensional data for forming tail barriers using an EIA/ISO program. <During tail operation>

BA17
EIA tail barrier <During tail reversing>

BA16

BA16 to BA18

Tail dimensions

Machine zero point

BA18

BA16: Tail extruding length BA17: Workpiece length BA18: Distance from the machine zero point to the leading edge position during tail reversing
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999 (Note 1) Specify the distance from the machine zero point of the Z-axis to the edge of the No. 1 turning spindle. Distance from the Z-axis machine zero point to the spindle edge No. 1 turning spindle

Notes: 1. 999999999 for BA18. 2. BA17 is valid for MAZATROL programs as well, when ONLY MILL is specified for the common unit of the MAZATROL program.

BA19 Machine zero point

BA19
Spindle edge
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 99999999

Note: Enter the distance with minus sign for the machine zero point in the minus direction with respect to the spindle edge.
Specify the distance from the machine zero point of the Z-axis to the edge of the No. 2 turning spindle.

Distance from the Z-axis machine zero point to the spindle edge No. 2 turning spindle

BA20 Machine zero point

BA20
Spindle edge
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 99999999

Note: Enter the distance with minus sign for the machine zero point in the minus direction with respect to the spindle edge.

2-392

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

Specify the jaw number that has been registered on the CHUCK JAW DATA display to be referred to in the EIA program when forming a jaw barrier for the No. 1 turning spindle. Jaw number for EIA program barrier No. 1 turning spindle

BA21

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 1 to 44 Specify the jaw number that has been registered on the CHUCK JAW DATA display to be referred to in the EIA program when forming a jaw barrier for the No. 2 turning spindle.

Jaw number for EIA program barrier No. 2 turning spindle

BA22

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 1 to 44 Set the turret dimensions for the turret-type tool post.

BA24

Turret dimensions

BA23 BA24
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999

BA23 BA23: Outside diameter of the turret BA24: Width of the turret

Specify the turret reference position from the machine zero point for the turret-type tool post. Turret reference position

BA26

Turret reference position

BA25 BA26
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999 Machine zero point

BA25

BA25: Turret reference position X BA26: Turret reference position Z

2-393

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

Setting of tool holder mounting position. When plus data is used, the tool holder is mounted horizontally, and minus data downward. Tool holder mounting position

Example: Type 1

BA27 BA30 BA33 BA36

BA27 - Type 1 BA30 - Type 2 BA33 - Type 3 BA36 - Type 4

Turret reference positon BA27 (> 0)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 99999999 Same for types 2, 3, 4 Setting tool holder width in X-axis direction

BA27 (< 0)

NM211-00327

Tool holder width in X-axis direction

Example: Type 1

Turret reference position

BA28 BA31 BA34 BA37

BA28 - Type 1 BA31 - Type 2 BA34 - Type 3 BA37 - Type 4

BA28 (where BA27 < 0)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999 Same for types 2, 3, 4 Setting of tool holder width in Z-axis direction

BA28 (where BA27 > 0)

NM211-00328

Example: Type 1
Tool holder width in Z-axis direction

Turret reference position

BA29 BA32 BA35 BA38

BA29 - Type 1 BA32 - Type 2 BA35 - Type 3 BA38 - Type 4

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999 Same for types 2, 3, 4

BA29 (where BA27 > 0)

BA29 (where BA27 < 0)

NM211-00329

2-394

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

Set the holder shape data for forming tool barriers using an EIA/ISO program. <Holder-under type> Input BA39 with a minus sign.

BA40 BA39 BA41

<Holder-side type (0 type)> EIA tool barrier

<Holder-side type (180 type)> Input BA39 with a plus sign. Input BA41 with a minus sign.

BA39 to BA41

Holder dimensions

Input BA39 with a plus sign. Input BA41 with a plus sign.

BA39 BA40

BA39 BA40

BA41

BA41

BA39: BA40: BA41:

EIA tool barrier, Holder mounting position EIA tool barrier, X-axial width of the holder EIA tool barrier, Z-axial width of the holder

Note: 0 to 99999999 for BA40.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 99999999 (Note) Select the type of barrier to be made valid. 0: Type with head B-axis (tool rotational B-axis) [INTEGREX type] 1: Type without head B-axis (tool rotational B-axis) Barrier type

BA42

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 99999999

2-395

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

Set the first tool number assigned to the first set of tools.

First tool number (in the 1st set of tools)

BA43

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 1 to 4000 Set the number of tools assigned as the first set of tools.

Number of tools (in the 1st set of tools)

BA44

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 1 to 960 Set the first tool number assigned to the second set of tools.

First tool number (in the 2nd set of tools)

BA45

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 1 to 4000 Set the number of tools assigned as the second set of tools.

Number of tools (in the 2nd set of tools)

BA46

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 1 to 960

2-396

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

Set the type of turret: 0: 1: 2: 3: 4: ATC Turret Lower turret Opposed turret Work rest

Turret type

BA47

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0 to 4 Set the axis name of the head axis to be rotated. Set &42 if the head axis to be rotated is the B-axis.

Axis name of the head to be rotated

BA48

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement &41 to &5A Set the axis number of the Y-axis to be controlled using inclined-axis control functions. The inclined-axis control is invalid when this parameter is set to 0.

Axis number of the inclined axis (Inclined-axis control)

BA49

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0 to 16 Set the axis number of the X-axis to be controlled using inclined-axis control functions. The inclined-axis control is invalid when this parameter is set to 0.

Fundamental axis number (Inclined-axis control)

BA50

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 0 to 16

2-397

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

Specify one of the vectors created by the triangles formed by inclination angles.

Vector of virtual Y (Inclined-axis control)

BA51: Vector of the inclined axis (virtual Y) in the rectangular coordinate system BA52: Vector of the fundamental axis (X-axis) corresponding to the inclined axis BA53: Vector of the real axis corresponding to the inclined axis

BA51

Y
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At power on 99999999

BA51 BA52 Yt BA53

Vector of real X (Inclined-axis control)

Set the value of BA51/BA52 assuming that 10000000 is assigned to BA53.

BA52

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 99999999

Vector of real Y (Inclined-axis control)

BA53

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on 99999999 Set the axis number of the work spindle to be used for hobbing. The hobbing is invalid when this parameter is set to 0.

Selection of work spindle for hobbing

BA54

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E After stop of movement 0 to 16

2-398

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

Set the turning spindle to be used in the D1 command mode of polygonal machining. 0: 1: 2: 3: 1: Turning spindle No. 1 Turning spindle No. 2 Turning spindle No. 3 Turning spindle No. 4 Invalid

Turning spindle number for polygonal machining (D1)

BA55

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 1 to 3 Set the turning spindle to be used in the D2 command mode of polygonal machining. 0: 1: 2: 3: 1: Turning spindle No. 1 Turning spindle No. 2 Turning spindle No. 3 Turning spindle No. 4 Invalid

Turning spindle number for polygonal machining (D2)

BA56

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 1 to 3 Set the turning spindle to be used in the D3 command mode of polygonal machining. 0: 1: 2: 3: 1: Turning spindle No. 1 Turning spindle No. 2 Turning spindle No. 3 Turning spindle No. 4 Invalid

Turning spindle number for polygonal machining (D3)

BA57

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 1 to 3 Set the turning spindle to be used in the D4 command mode of polygonal machining. 0: 1: 2: 3: 1: Turning spindle No. 1 Turning spindle No. 2 Turning spindle No. 3 Turning spindle No. 4 Invalid

Turning spindle number for polygonal machining (D4)

BA58

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate 1 to 3

2-399

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

Spindle forward rotation M-code for tapping cycle

- If the command block of G284/G288 (machining G-codes, F30 = 0) or of G84/G88 (turning G-codes, F30 = 1) does not contain spindle forward/reverse rotation M-codes, one of the following M-codes will be output, depending on the status of bit 0 in parameter SU153:
BA59 = 3 BA60 = 4 SU153 Bit 0 0 1 Tapping cycle of turning Inverse tapping cycle of turning BA59 = 203 BA60 = 204 Tapping cycle of milling Inverse tapping cycle of milling

BA59

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 255 - If 0 is set in BA59, 3 will be regarded as having been set, and M03 will be output. - If 0 is set in BA60, 4 will be regarded as having been set, and M04 will be output.

Spindle reverse rotation M-code for tapping cycle

BA60

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Enter the distance from the rotational center of the B-axis to the tool center.

B-axis rotational center

Amount of runout of the B-axis center

BA61

BA61

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm 1000 to 1000

Note: Enter the distance with a minus sign for B-axis rotational center above the tool center position.

Enter the distance from the rotational center of the B-axis to the spindle edge.
B-axis rotational center

Amount of offset for the B-axis spindle distance

BA62

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 99999999

BA62

2-400

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

Set the holder angle of the angle tool holder. According to the value set in this parameter, the holder angle is set in HLD.TYPE on the TOOL DATA display. Holder angle of angle tool holder BA63 = 45

BA63

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0 to 90

HLD.TYP: 45 (BA63 = 45)

HLD.TYP: 45 (180 BA63 = 135)

BA65

Upper turret machine zero point

B-axis tool reference position X

BA64
Upper turret

BA64

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 99999999

B-axis tool reference position

B-axis tool reference position Z

BA65

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 99999999 Set the deceleration area and measuring area in the G37 command. BA66: Set the distance between the starting point of movement at the measuring rate, and the measuring point. This value will be used when argument R is omitted from the G37 command. BA67: Set the moving distance in measuring feed mode. This value will be used when argument D is omitted from the G37 command.

G37 deceleration area G37 measuring area

BA66 BA67
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E After stop of movement 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999

2-401

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

Set the deceleration area and measuring area in the G36 command. BA68: Set the distance between the starting point of movement at the measuring rate, and the measuring point. This value will be used when argument R is omitted from the G36 command. BA69: Set the moving distance in measuring feed mode. This value will be used when argument D is omitted from the G36 command.

G36 deceleration area G36 measuring area

BA68 BA69
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E After stop of movement 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999

- Workpiece zero point: Workpiece edge center - Tool position reference point: Reference point on the turret - Turret clearance: Distance between the reference points on both turrets (radius value) - Workpiece offset: Workpiece zero point Reference point of reference turret tool position - Tool position: Tool position reference point Tool nose position Distance between the reference points on both turrets (radius value) <Schematic diagram>
Tool position

BA70
Work offset Turret clearance (BA70) Workpiece zero point Tool position

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999 0: System 1 1: System 2 2: System 3 3: System 4

System number to be used when argument L is omitted from G112

BA71

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 3

2-402

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

Set the overriding value for retracting the tap. Tap retracting feed = [Programmed feed for the interrupted synchronous tapping] BA72/100 Feed override for retracting the tap BA72 is processed as 100 (%) when the setting is equal to zero (0) or greater than 100.

BA72

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate % 0 to 100 0: Chuck, sub-chuck and tailstock invalid 1: Chuck valid 2: Sub-chuck valid

Barrier valid/invalid 1 (chuck, sub-chuck, tailstock)

3: Tailstock valid

BA73

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 3 0: Lower turret and work rest invalid 1: Lower turret valid 2: Work rest valid

Barrier valid/invalid 2 (Lower turret, work rest)

BA74

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 2

2-403

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

Set the reference position when it is viewed from the machine zero point.

BA19 (#1)

BA65 (#1) BA77 (#1)

Upper turret

Upper turret machine zero point

BA75 (#1) BA92 (#1)

BA64 (#1)

BA78 (#1) X1 Z1

BA75 to BA78

Barrier setup turret reference position

B-axis tool reference position

BA76 (#1) Lower turret/Work rest BA92 (#2) X2 Z2

BA78 (#2) BA76 (#2)

BA75 (#2)

BA77 (#2)

BA19 (#2)

Lower turret/Work rest machine zero point

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 99999999 Set the reference position 1 of the chucks with respect to the machine zero point of the upper turret. Use J109 to J112 for machines with the No. 2 spindle set as System 1.
Upper turret machine zero point

BA79 to BA82

Barrier setup chuck reference position 1

BA79 (#1) BA81 (#1) BA82 (#2) BA82 (#1) BA80 (#2) BA79 (#2) BA81 (#2)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 99999999

BA80 (#1)

Set the chuck reference position 2 to be used to set barrier around jaws for a program without jaw No. setting. Use J113 to J116 for machines with the No. 2 spindle set as System 1.
Upper turret machine zero point

BA83 to BA86

Barrier setup chuck reference position 2

BA83 (#1) BA85 (#1) BA86 (#1)

BA83 (#2) BA86 (#2)

BA85 (#2)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 99999999

BA84 (#1) BA84 (#2)

2-404

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

Set the reference position for barrier area of a powered tailstock. Use coordinates with respect to the machine zero point of the upper turret to set the position of the tailstock being not used for machining. When the tailstock is used, the barrier will be provided at the position shifted through the distance of R10366 (lower-order)/R10367 (higherorder) in the Z-axis direction, from the position specified above. For machines with multiple systems use only parameters for System 1.
Upper turret machine zero point

BA87 to BA90

Barrier reference position for a powered tailstock

BA87 (#1) BA88 (#1) BA90 (#1) R10366 (lower-order) R10367 (higher-order)

BA89 (#1)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 99999999 Set the reference position of the partition plate.
Machine zero point

Distance from spindle edge to partition plate

BA91 (System 1)

BA91
Machine zero point Partition plate

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 99999999 Set the central position X when viewed from the machine zero point.
Upper turret (HD1) machine zero point

BA91 (System 3)

Central position X when viewed from machine zero point (Barrier function)

BA92

BA92 (HD1)

X1 Z1

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in

BA92 (HD2)

Z2 X2 Lower turret (HD2) machine zero point

2-405

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

When using the C-axes of the HD1/HD2 in the lower turret system, set the offset angle with respect to the upper turret, for the lower turret system. BA93: Upper/lower turret tool angle difference (HD1) <HD1> <HD2>

BA93 BA94

BA94: Upper/lower turret tool angle difference (HD2)

BA93 BA93
Y Y

X X

C C

C C

X X

BA94 BA94
Y Y

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 0 to 99999999

Use BA95 and BA96 to set the dimensions of the sensor for tool nose measurement. BA97 and BA99 are provided to set in machine coordinates the reference point of the sensor (see the diagram below). Example 1: For horizontal type

Machine zero point

BA95: BA96: BA97: BA99:

BA95 BA96 BA97 BA99 BA100 BA102 BA103 BA104

Sensor width along the X-axis Sensor width along the Z-axis X-coordinate of the sensors reference point Z-coordinate of the sensors reference point

Sensors reference point BA99 BA99 Sensor for tool nose measurement BA96

BA97

BA103: Sensor width along the X-axis (for lower turret/HD2) BA104: Sensor width along the Z-axis (for lower turret/HD2) BA100: X-coordinate of the sensors reference point (for lower turret/HD2) BA102: Z-coordinate of the sensors reference point (for lower turret/HD2)

Example 2: For vertical type

Machine zero point

BA99 Sensors reference point BA97 BA96 Sensor for tool nose measurement BA95
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 99999999

2-406

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

Setting of sensor reference point Y coordinate BA98: Y-coordinate of the sensors reference point BA101: Y-coordinate of the sensors reference point (for lower turret/HD2)

B98

Machine zero point

BA98 BA101

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 99999999 Set adjustment FdT for holding the thrust of the servo axis. Set a value less than BA108 BA106/100. If any other value is set, the thrust may be unstable.

Adjustment FdT for servo axis thrust hold

BA105

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0.0005 mm/0.000005 in 0 to 99999999 Set the dead zone for the drooping level of the servo axis thrust. A drooping level change less than BA108 BA106/100 is ignored.

Dead zone

BA106

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement % 0 to 99999999 Set the monitoring time for changes in the drooping level of the servo axis thrust.

Filter

BA107

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 1/3.5 ms 0 to 99999999

2-407

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

Set the drooping level for holding the servo axis thrust. This drooping level is held during the application of the servo axis thrust.

Servo axis thrust hold droop

BA108

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E After stop of movement 0.00005 mm/0.000005 in 0 to 99999999 Specify the axis offset amount applied during automatic calculation of the tool setting value for the backface tool, which is difficult to measure using the TOOL EYE. This automatic calculation is done based on the tool setting value for the target tool measured in the opposite position.

Offset amount (X) during automatic tool setting value calculation

BA109

Reference workpiece zero point

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 99999999

Turret center - TOOL SET Z of the target tool

Distance to the turret center (parameter)

Offset amount (Z) during automatic tool setting value calculation

BA110

TOOL SET X = Tool setting value X for target tool + Parameter for offset amount X TOOL SET Z = (Parameter for distance to center of turret (1) 2) Tool setting value Z for target tool + Parameter for offset amount Z

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.0001 mm/0.00001 in 99999999 Set the pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration time constant for a time constant changeover M-code command. If zero is assigned to this parameter, the pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration time constant will not be changed, even when a time constant changeover M-code command is assigned. The preinterpolation acceleration/deceleration time constant existing before the time constant changeover M-code command is assigned will be held.

Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration time constant for time constant changeover M-code command BA111: For M881 command BA112: For M882 command BA113: For M883 command BA114: For M884 command BA115: For M885 command BA116: For M886 command Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E After stop of movement mm/min 0 to 999999

BA111 to BA116

2-408

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

Set the outside diameter and width for the turret which is to be indicated on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display.
BA118

Outside diameter of the turret for Virtual Machining

BA117

BA117

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999

Width of the turret for Virtual Machining

BA118

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999 0: Head 1 1: Head 2 2: Head 1/2

Selecting a head having a lower-turret TOOL EYE

BA119

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0 to 2 Set the X-axis position of mounting the HOLDER part of an assembly tool model.

Mounting position X for an assembly tool model

Machine zero point BA120

BA120

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999

Assembly tool model mounting position

2-409

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

Set the Z-axis position of mounting the HOLDER part of an assembly tool model.

BA121
Mounting position Z for an assembly tool model

Machine zero point

BA121

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999

Assembly tool model mounting position

Specify the turret reference position from the machine zero point for the turret-type tool post (for VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display). For VIRTUAL MACHINING or 3D MONITOR display

Turret reference position

BA123

BA122 Turret reference position BA123

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E Immediate 0.001 mm/0.0001 in 0 to 99999999 Fixed value (0)

BA122

Machine zero point

BA122: Turret reference position X BA123: Turret reference position Z

BA124

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-410

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

Set the types of tailstock, tool holder and chuck for which the EIA barriers are to be activated.

76543210
Tailstock usage valid/invalid (Note 1) 0: Invalid 1: Valid Tailstock present/absent (Note 2) 0: Absent 1: Present Tool holder present/absent 0: Absent 1: Present Barrier tool nose position 0: Tool length correction 1: Current tool nose Setting of BA11 is handled as tailstock extruding length Execution of spindle revolution M-code specified in same block as synchronous tapping 0: Invalid 1: Valid Barrier cancellation check (see Note 3 and 4) 0: Valid 1: Invalid Missing jaw number check (see Note 3) 0: Valid 1: Invalid Notes: 1. Tailstock usage invalid does not mean canceling the tail barriers; it means that the tail will move away prior to machining. 2. Bit 1 in this parameter is valid for the MAZATROL program as well. If bit 1 is set to 0, the tailstock function itself will become invalid. For a machine having a tailstock, be sure to set up 1 at bit 1. 3. Valid only for MAZATROL programs. Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits 4. Bit 6 of this parameter is valid only when the setup data has been entered.

EIA barrier activation

BA125

2-411

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

76543210
System to be made valid without system selection for queuing Y-axis interference type 0: Type A 1: Type B Y-axis moving range display 0: Invalid 1: Valid Tool command scheme (Note) 0: M06 required. 1: M06 not required. FLASH tool valid/invalid 0: Invalid 1: Valid Milling spindle orientation command (M219) 0: Output 1: No output System without turret Shape of the tailstock center for Virtual Machining 0: Single stage 1: Twin stage Note: T-command operation is defined as follows by the setting of bit 3: - If the setting of bit 3 is 0 T"T$M6: Replaces the current tool with " and indexes $ as the next tool. Replaces the current tool with ". T"M6: Indexes " as the next tool. T": - If the setting of bit 3 is 1 T"%: Replaces the current tool with " and set % as the tool offset number.

BA126

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E Immediate Bit Binary, eight digits

76543210
M249 command for preparing for tool change before moving the tool to the tool change position using a MAZATROL program 0: No output 1: Output For programs of Z-offset scheme: Fixed value (1) For other programs: Invalid Simultaneous output of TTM6M200 and TTM6M202 0: No simultaneous output 1: Simultaneous output NC tailstock (servo axis thrust control) 0: Invalid 1: Valid M90/M91 output for machines with turret (for QTN II series) 0: Output 1: No output Type of the clamping and unclamping M-codes that the NC automatically output for machines equipped with a spindle head of swiveling type. 0: M-codes for machine tools of composite machining 1: M-codes for machining centers Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M (Bit 3, 7: M, E) Immediate
(Bit 3: After stop of movement)

BA127

Whether or not to read the current settings (tailstock position) on the SET UP MANAG. display at the beginning of the execution of each program 0: No 1: Yes

Bit Binary, eight digits

2-412

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

76543210
NC tailstock pushing direction 0: Negative direction 1: Positive direction Select the method of automatic determination of the virtual nose point for a MAZATROL programs tool measuring unit (TOOL MES) to be executed with the TOOL EYE. 0: With reference to the PART and CUT DIR. items on the TOOL DATA display (Ex. 1) 1: With reference to PTN (measuring pattern: from [TOOL EYE #1] to [TOOL EYE #4]) in the sequence data of the tool measuring unit (Ex. 2) Display of THRUST F. and HORSE PW for the AFC function in the first set of tool data (BA43, BA44) 0: Valid 1: Invalid Display of THRUST F. and HORSE PW for the AFC function in the second set of tool data (BA45, BA46) 0: Valid 1: Invalid Ex. 1: PART: OUT, CUT DIR.: LEFT
Virtual nose point 3

BA128

Turret lathe with an ATC unit 0: Invalid 1: Valid Display of [TURRET UNCLAMP] for machines with an ATC-type turret 0: Invalid 1: Valid Note: Setting of bit 7 is valid only for machines without lower turret.

Ex. 2: PTN: [TOOL EYE #1]

Virtual nose point 3

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate
(Bit 7: At pwer on)

Bit Binary, eight digits Invalid

BA129
(bit 0)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-413

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

Fixed value

BA129
(bit 1)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Invalid

BA129
(bit 2)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Select whether or not to measure the milling tool length with the tool measuring unit.

BA129
(bit 3)

Selection of whether or not to measure the milling tool length with the tool measuring unit

0: When a milling tool is selected, its length is not be measured and the alarm 714 ILLEGAL SEQUENCE DATA is raised. 1: The tool length is measured. When BA129 bit 3 is 0, no measurement is performed on models in which parameters are set as described below. - BA47 = 0 (turret type: ATC) - BA48 = &42 (axis of the head to be rotated: B) - K52 = 0 Note: For INTEGREX i with a workpiece hand, even if BA129 bit 3 is 0, the length of a milling tool can be measured. Display of [BARRIER CANCEL] menu item with [BARRIER CANCEL TEACH] made valid 0: Invalid

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M Immediate 0, 1

BA129
(bit 4)

Display of [BARRIER CANCEL] menu item with [BARRIER CANCEL TEACH] made valid

1: Valid

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E Immediate 0, 1

2-414

PARAMETER

Classification

MACHINE
Meaning

Display title

BARRIER
Description

Address

Invalid

BA129
(bit 5) (bit 6) (bit 7) Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Invalid

BA130 to BA132
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-415

PARAMETER

2-3-17 Data I/O parameter

Parameter setting

CMT parameter (CMT)

D740H0001E Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

CMT
Description

Baud rate for RS-232C interface

Set values BAUDRATE 110 300 1200 Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At I/O startup 110 to 19200 Type of processing to be executed if the machining program of an existing work number is to be loaded SAME WNo. 2400 4800 9600 19200

Set values ALARM LOAD

Description Issues an alarm if the work number already exists. Overrides the program if the work number already exists.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup

2-416

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

CMT
Description

CMT port selection

PORT

Set values COM1 COM2 COM3

Description CF22 serial ch3 CF22 serial ch4 USB-RS232C conversion connector USB-RS232C conversion connector

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup

COM4

2-417

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

CMT
Description

Address

Invalid

CMT1 to CMT32
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-418

PARAMETER

2-3-18 Data I/O parameter

Parameter setting

TAPE parameter (TAP)

D740H0002E Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

TAPE
Description

Baud rate for RS-232C interface

Set values BAUDRATE 110 300 1200 Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At I/O startup 110 to 19200 Number of data bits (parameter for RS-232C interface initialization) 2400 4800 9600 19200

Set values DATA BITS 7 8

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 7, 8

2-419

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

TAPE
Description

Parity check (parameter for RS-232C interface initialization)

Set values PARITY NONE ODD EVEN Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At I/O startup Number of stop bits (parameter for RS-232C interface initialization)

Set values STOP BITS 1 1.5 2 Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At I/O startup This parameter is used to select the method of handshaking to control the state of data transfer between the NC system and connected device. Set values HAND SHAKE NONE DC CONTROL RTS/CTS Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At I/O startup The waiting time for replies from the connected device during inputting or outputting. An alarm occurs if this time elapses following the final reply. WAIT TIME No control Complies with control code DC1 through DC4 Complies with device connection RTS/CTS. Description

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0.1 s 0 to 65535

2-420

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

TAPE
Description

Selection of paper tape puncher output code Set values FORMAT ISO EIA ASCII Description Paper tape punching in ISO code Paper tape punching in EIA code Paper tape punching in ASCII code

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup Type of processing to be executed if the machining program of an existing work number is to be loaded Set values Description Issues an alarm if the received work number already exists. Overrides the program if the received work number already exists.

SAME WNo. ALARM LOAD Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At I/O startup Tape port selection
Set values

Tape operation Data I/O TAP24 = 0 CF22 serial ch3 CF22 serial ch4 USB-RS232C conversion connector USB-RS232C conversion connector CF22 serial ch3 CF22 serial ch4 Invalid TAP24 = 1 CF22 serial ch3 CF22 serial ch4 USB-RS232C conversion connector USB-RS232C conversion connector

PORT
COM1 COM2 COM3

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup
COM4

Invalid

2-421

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

TAPE
Description

Address

Set values Type of terminator 0 1

Terminator Without terminator EOB or EOR EOB only EOR only One character of your choice Two characters of your choice

TAP1

2 3 Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At I/O startup 0 to 5 4 5

Effective only when TAP1 is set to 4 or 5.

Terminator code 1

TAP2

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0 to 255 Effective only when TAP1 is set to 5.

Terminator code 2

TAP3

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0 to 255 This parameter is used to specify whether or not CR is to be placed in front of LF (separation of blocks) during ISO code punching. 0: No placement of CR Placement of CR

Output of CR during ISO code punching

1:

TAP4

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0, 1

2-422

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

TAPE
Description

Address

This parameter is used to specify whether or not a parity bit is to be assigned to the DC code to be output. Set values DC code parity 0 1 Parity No assignment Assignment Hole-punching pattern of DC3 code

TAP5

! !

! ! ! !

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0, 1

Note: This parameter is valid only when HAND SHAKE is set to DC CONTROL.

Select whether or not DC2 and DC4 codes are to be output to the feed sections which will be generated at the beginning and end of paper tape punching. Example:
Feed EOR (Significant EOR Feed information)
DC2 DC4

Set values

Description Neither DC2 nor DC4 is output. Only DC2 is output. Only DC4 is output. Both DC2 and DC4 are output.

Feed section DC code output

0 1

TAP6

2 3

Note: This parameter is valid only when HAND SHAKE is set to DC CONTROL.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0 to 3 Invalid

TAP7 TAP8
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-423

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

TAPE
Description

Address

This parameter is used to set a hole-punching pattern for the character code [ onto a paper tape reader/puncher using EIA. Set an eight-digit binary number in decimal form. [ code for paper tape reader/puncher for EIA

Example:

: Hole to be punched [ code

TAP9

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0 to 255

Set value
(0 27)+(1 26)+(0 25)+(0 24)+(1 23)+(1 22)+(0 21)+(0 20) = 76

MPL068
This parameter is used to set a hole-punching pattern for the character code ] onto a paper tape reader/puncher using EIA. Set an eight-digit binary number in decimal form.

] code for paper tape reader/puncher for EIA

Example:

: Hole to be punched ] code

TAP10

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0 to 255

Set value
(0 27)+(0 26)+(0 25)+(0 24)+(1 23)+(1 22)+(0 21)+(1 20)=13

MPL069
This parameter is used to set a hole-punching pattern for the character code # onto a paper tape reader/puncher using EIA. Set an eight-digit binary number in decimal form.

# code for paper tape reader/puncher for EIA

Example:

: Hole to be punched # code

TAP11

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0 to 255

Set value
(0 27)+(1 26)+(1 25)+(0 24)+(1 23)+(1 22)+(0 21)+(1 20)=109

MPL070
This parameter is used to set a hole-punching pattern for the character code onto a paper tape reader/puncher using EIA. Set an eight-digit binary number in decimal form.

code for paper tape reader/puncher for EIA

Example:

: Hole to be punched code

TAP12

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0 to 255

Set value
(0 27)+(1 26)+(1 25)+(1 24)+(1 23)+(0 22)+(1 21)+(0 20)=122

MPL071

2-424

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

TAPE
Description

Address

This parameter is used to set a hole-punching pattern for the character code = onto a paper tape reader/puncher using EIA. Set an eight-digit binary number in decimal form. = code for paper tape reader/puncher for EIA

Example:

: Hole to be punched = code

TAP13

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0 to 255

Set value
(0 27)+(1 26)+(0 25)+(1 24)+(1 23)+(0 22)+(1 21)+(1 20)= 91

MPL072
This parameter is used to set a hole-punching pattern for the character code : onto a paper tape reader/puncher using EIA. Set an eight-digit binary number in decimal form.

: code for paper tape reader/puncher for EIA

Example:

: Hole to be punched : code

TAP14

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0 to 255

Set value
(0 27)+(1 26)+(0 25)+(0 24)+(0 23)+(1 22)+(1 21)+(0 20)=70

MPL073
This parameter is used to set a hole-punching pattern for the character code ( onto a paper tape reader/puncher using EIA. Set an eight-digit binary number in decimal form.

( code for paper tape reader/puncher for EIA

Example:

: Hole to be punched ( code

TAP15

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0 to 255

Set value
(0 27)+(0 26)+(0 25)+(1 24)+(1 23)+(0 22)+(1 21)+(0 20)=26

MPL074
This parameter is used to set a hole-punching pattern for the character code ) onto a paper tape reader/puncher using EIA. Set an eight-digit binary number in decimal form.

) code for paper tape reader/puncher for EIA

Example:

: Hole to be punched ) code

TAP16

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0 to 255

Set value
(0 27)+(1 26)+(0 25)+(0 24)+(1 23)+(0 22)+(1 21)+(0 20)=74

MPL075

2-425

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

TAPE
Description

Address

Invalid

TAP17 to TAP23
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range Parameter to select the tape operation ports. If 1 is set, ports COM3 and COM4 can be used by means of a USBRS232C conversion connector. Tape operation port selection 0: Tape operation port selection COM1, COM2 1: Tape operation port selection COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4

TAP24

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0, 1

76543210

Paper tape puncher parity-V check

TAP25

0: No parity-V check during paper tape reading 1: Parity-V check during paper tape reading Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At I/O startup Bit Binary, eight digits

2-426

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

TAPE
Description

Address

76543210

Bit parameter related to paper tape reader/puncher

TAP26

Data transfer of a paper tape program which has been punched by M2 0: Tape loading impossible 1: Tape loading possible Types of data to be punched onto paper tape during all punching 0: All programs and various NC data 1: All programs only Input and output of the program name during paper tape reading and punching 0: Valid 1: Invalid Number of digits of work No. output 0: 8 digits 1: 4 digits Input/output of material data during punching/ reading 0: Output of ASCII data in hexadecimal notation 1: Output in characters

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E At I/O startup Bit Binary, eight digits

76543210
To specify whether or not M99 is to be set as the program end code in reading of paper tape 0: Set as program end 1: Not set as program end To specify whether or not M02 is to be set as the program end code in reading of paper tape 0: Set as program end 1: Not set as program end Bit parameter related to program end code (M) for paper tape reader To specify whether or not M30 is to be set as the program end code in reading of paper tape 0: Set as program end 1: Not set as program end To recognize the code O (or :) as the program end in reading of multiple programs (on one paper tape) 0: Yes 1: No

TAP27

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E At I/O startup Bit Binary, eight digits

2-427

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

TAPE
Description

Address

Invalid

TAP28

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

The number of characters in NULL (feed) that are to be punched at the beginning and end of paper tape Example:

Number of characters in feed section for paper tape puncher

TAP29 characters Feed EOR (Significant information) EOR

TAP29 characters Feed

TAP29
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E At I/O startup Character 0 to 65535

Tape setting position

End of punching MPL078

The total number of space-characters that are punched out between Onumber and program section. Number of characters in the space between O-number and program for paper tape puncher

4 SP SP SP

SP CR

Program section

TAP30
TAP30 characters
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E At I/O startup Character 0 to 65535 The total number of space-characters that are punched out between programs when more than one program are punched onto paper tape.

MPL079

Number of characters in the space between programs for paper tape puncher

2 CR SP SP

SP CR O

TAP31
Program
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E At I/O startup Character 0 to 65535

TAP31 characters

Program
MPL080

2-428

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

TAPE
Description

Address

Invalid

TAP32

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-429

PARAMETER

2-3-19 Data I/O parameter

Parameter setting

DNC parameter (DNC)

D740H0003E Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

DNC
Description

Baud rate for RS-232C interface

Set values BAUDRATE 110 300 1200 Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At I/O startup 110 to 19200 Number of data bits (parameter for RS-232C interface initialization) 2400 4800 9600 19200

Set values DATA BITS 7 8

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E At I/O startup 7, 8

2-430

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

DNC
Description

Parity check (parameter for RS-232C interface initialization)

Set values PARITY NONE ODD EVEN Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E At I/O startup Number of stop bits (parameter for RS-232C interface initialization)

Set values STOP BITS 1 1.5 2 Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E At I/O startup The waiting time for replies from the connected device during inputting or outputting. An alarm occurs if this time elapses following the final reply. WAIT TIME

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E At I/O startup 0.1 s 0 to 65535 Type of processing to be executed if the machining program of an existing work number is to be loaded Set values Description Issues an alarm if the received work number already exists. Overrides the program if the received work number already exists.

SAME WNo. ALARM LOAD Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E At I/O startup

2-431

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

DNC
Description

DNC port selection

Set values PORT COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4 Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E At I/O startup

Description CF22 serial ch3 CF22 serial ch4 Invalid Invalid

2-432

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

DNC
Description

Address

Set values Type of terminator 0 1

Terminator Without terminator EOB or EOR EOB only EOR only One character of your choice Two characters of your choice

DNC1

2 3 Program type Conditions Unit Setting range E At I/O startup 0 to 5 4 5

Effective only when DNC1 is set to 4 or 5.

Terminator code 1

DNC2

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E At I/O startup 0 to 255 Effective only when DNC1 is set to 5.

Terminator code 2

DNC3

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E At I/O startup 0 to 255 Invalid

DNC4

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-433

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

DNC
Description

Address

This parameter is used to specify whether or not a parity bit is to be assigned to the DC code to be output. Set values 0 Parity No assignment Assignment Hole-punching pattern of DC3 code

DC code parity

DNC5

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

E At I/O startup 0, 1 Invalid

DNC6 to DNC8
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range This parameter is used to set the number of times that the code or TEXT is to be repeatedly transmitted to a host system in case that the @ code is not sent from the host system within the waiting time which has been set at WAIT TIME.

Number of NC transmission retries during DNC file transfer

HOST

NC Retransmitted if @ is not received. An alarm occurs if the transmission operation is repeated up to the number of times set with this parameter. MPL081

DNC9
@
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At I/O startup Number of times 0 to 255

TEXT @ EOT

Number of NC reception retries during DNC file transfer

This parameter is used to set the number of times that the @ code is to be repeatedly transmitted to a host system in the case that the EOT-code or TEXT from the host system is not received within the waiting time which has been set at WAIT TIME. NC HOST

DNC10
@
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At I/O startup Number of times 0 to 255

Initialized if EOT or TEXT is not received. An alarm occurs if the transmission operation is repeated up to the number of times set with this parameter. MPL082

TEXT @ EOT

2-434

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

DNC
Description

Address

This parameter is used to set the number of times that transmission/reception of command messages is to be repeated in the case that it is not correctly performed. Number of NC transmission/reception retries during DNC command message transfer This parameter has almost the same meaning as that of parameters DNC9 and DNC10, except that command messages are interchanged in the case of DNC11 and files are interchanged in the case of DNC9 and DNC10.

DNC11
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At I/O startup Number of times 0 to 255

The NC waiting time from transmission of or TEXT to reception of @ from the host system.

HOST
@ waiting time during DNC transmission

NC DNC12

@ TEXT @ DNC12

DNC12
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At I/O startup 0.1 s 0 to 255 (" DNC9)

EOT

MPL083

The NC waiting time from transmission of @ or reception of EOT to reception of or TEXT from the host system. , TEXT waiting time during DNC transmission

HOST

NC @

DNC13

TEXT

DNC13
EOT
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At I/O startup 0.1 s 0 to 255 (" DNC10)

@ TEXT @ DNC13

MPL084

EOT waiting time during DNC transmission

The NC waiting time from transmission of @ to reception of EOT from the host system. HOST NC

@ TEXT @

DNC14
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At I/O startup 0.1 s 0 to 255 (" DNC10)

DNC14 EOT MPL085

2-435

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

DNC
Description

Address

The NC stop time from reception of ! from the host system to transmission of .

HOST
NC stop time after reception of !

NC

!
DNC15

DNC15
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At I/O startup 0.1 s 0 to 255

MPL086
Code is transmitted to the host system if the time that has been set with DNC15 elapses following reception of !.

The time from the moment the NC receives the digital-out command to the moment the NC internally resets this command.

NC reset time after digital-out

DNC16
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At I/O startup 0.1 s 0 to 255 [For NC transmission] The NC stop time from reception of @ from the host system to transmission of EOT or TEXT HOST NC @ DNC17 TEXT NC stop time from reception @ DNC17 EOT EOT MPL087 TEXT DNC17 @ [For NC reception] The NC stop time from reception of or TEXT from the host system to transmission of @ HOS NC DNC17 @

DNC17

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0.01 s 0 to 255

2-436

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

DNC
Description

Address

The NC waiting time from transmission of command message EOT to reception of command reply message from the host system.

HOST
DNC command reply message waiting time

NC

Command messages

@ TEXT

DNC18
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At I/O startup 0.1 s 0 to 255

@ EOT Command reply messages TEXT @ MPL088 DNC18

The numbers to be assigned to various machines in order to manage on the host system the tool data, parameters etc. that are specific to the machines being used DNC machine number

DNC19
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At I/O startup 0 to 255 The NC stop time from reception of EOT from the host system to transmission of of the next message

NC transmission stop time of DNC (from reception to transmission)

HOST *

NC

@ TEXT @

DNC20
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At I/O startup 0.01 s 0 to 255

EOT * @
The NC stop time from transmission of EOT to the host system to transmission of of the next message

DNC20

MPL089

HOST
NC transmission stop time of DNC (from transmission to transmission)

NC *

@ TEXT @

DNC21
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At I/O startup 0.01 s 0 to 255

EOT * @

DNC21

MPL090

2-437

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

DNC
Description

Address

Invalid

DNC22 to DNC24
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

76543210

DNC25

Select the type of processing to be executed if the tool quantity data within the NC memory mismatches that which has been transferred from the DNC memory. 0 : Issues an alarm if the tool quantity data mismatches. 1 : Executes loading forcibly, even if the tool quantity data mismatches. Handling of tool data and tool files in the M PLUS format 0 : Valid 1 : Invalid

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup Bit Binary, eight digits

76543210

(1: Valid, 0: Invalid) 1: After program reception, a search is made for the work number of that program. 1: Details of an alarm occurring in DNC are displayed. 1: Loading of programs having the same work number as that of the registered program in NC becomes impossible. 1: The function of the PROGRAM LOCK/ ENABLE switch is released.

DNC26

1: Three digit G-format and G10 format codes input/output for MAZAK data transfer protocol 1: Binary to ASCII format input/output of MAZAK data transfer protocol 1: All programs having work numbers smaller than No. 9000 are erased at the start of program reception. Note: When both bit 5 and bit 6 are set to 1 (enable), this functions for three digit G-format and G10 format codes input/output. Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At I/O startup Bit Binary, eight digits

2-438

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

DNC
Description

Address

Invalid

DNC27 DNC28
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Number of retry times with detection of a physical error

DNC29

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup Number of times 0 to 65535 Select a tool data/tool file message format. 0: M32 scheme 1: M Plus scheme

Tool data/tool file message format

2: M640M scheme 3: M640M Pro scheme

DNC30

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0 to 3 Set the time interval from the time the response from the COM port driver has disappeared, to the time the initialization of the COM port driver is started.

Waiting time for a response from the COM port driver

DNC31

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0.1 s 0 to 65535

2-439

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

DNC
Description

Address

Invalid

DNC32

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-440

PARAMETER

2-3-20 Data I/O parameter

OTHER (IOP/DPR/IDD)

D740H0004E Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

OTHER
Description

Address

Invalid

IOP1 to IOP4
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

76543210
Overwriting associated with loading of the same work number as that of the program(s) registered in the NC unit by hard disk, floppy disk, or memory card input/output. 0: Alarm without overwriting 1: Overwriting M, E At I/O startup Bit Binary, eight digits Overwriting associated with loading of the tool model of the same name 0: Next tool model loaded without overwriting 1: Overwriting

IOP5

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-441

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

OTHER
Description

Address

76543210
Select between M640T and M640MT for loading MAZATROL programs in text file format. 0: To load MAZATROL programs in text file format created with M640T or T NEXUS 1: To load MAZATROL programs in text file format created with M640MT M At I/O startup Bit Binary, eight digits

IOP6

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

76543210
Specify the serial port number of the NC unit that is to be used for communication with the magazine-side display unit. Bit 1 0 0 1 1 Data entry for communication with the magazine-side display unit Fixed (0) Specify the type of ID amplifier. Bit 5 Bit 4 Type 0 0 EUCHNER 0 1 Invalid 1 0 Invalid 1 1 Invalid Bit 0 0 1 0 1 Serial port COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4

IOP7

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At power on Bit Binary, eight digits Invalid

Specify whether the timing of the R-register is to be made valid during tool removal or mounting. Bit 7 Bit 6 Setting 0 0 Not used 0 1 Used 1 0 Invalid 1 1 Invalid

IOP8

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-442

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

OTHER
Description

Address

Fixed value (0)

IOP9

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Invalid

IOP10 to IOP16
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range Baud rate for RS-232C interface Baud rate
110 300 4800 9600 19200

Set values 0 1 2 3

Baud rate 110 300 1200 2400

Set values 4 5 6

Baud rate 4800 9600 19200

DPR1

1200 2400

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range Stop bit

M, E At I/O startup 0 to 6 Number of stop bits (parameter for RS-232C interface initialization)

1 1.5

Set values 0 1 2

Stop bit 1 1.5 2

DPR2

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0 to 2

2-443

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

OTHER
Description

Address

Invalid

DPR3

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

Number of data bits (parameter for RS-232C interface initialization) Set values

Data bit

Set values 0

Data bit 8 7

DPR4

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0, 1 Invalid

DPR5 to DPR7
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range This parameter specifies whether CR is to be inserted at the beginning of LF (block delimiter) in ISO code output when the output destination is a serial port (DPR14 = 0 or 1). 0: No CR insertion ISO code CR output and the output file size 1: CR insertion This parameter specifies the maximum permissible file size to be used for hard disk output using an external output command macro when the output destination is the hard disk (DPR14 = 4). Program type Conditions Unit Setting range M, E At I/O startup 0 to 255 Maximum permissible file size: Entered value 100K bytes However, this file size is 100K bytes if the entered value is 0.

DPR8

2-444

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

OTHER
Description

Address

This parameter is used to select the method of handshaking to control the state of data transfer between the NC system and connected device.
Set values Method None No control Description

Method of handshaking

0 1 2

DPR9

DC control Complies with control code DC1 through DC4 RTS/CTS Complies with device connection RTS/CTS.

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0 to 2 This parameter is used to specify whether or not a parity bit is to be assigned to the DC code to be output.

Set values
DC code parity

Parity No assignment Assignment

Hole-punching pattern of DC3 code

0 1

DPR10

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0, 1

Note: This parameter is valid only when the handshaking method is set to DC control (DPR9 is set to 1).

Select whether or not DC2 and DC4 codes are to be output to the feed sections.

Example:
Feed EOR (Significant information) EOR Feed

DC2

DC4

Feed section DC code output

Set values 0 1 2 3

Description Neither DC2 nor DC4 is output. Only DC2 is output. Only DC4 is output. Both DC2 and DC4 are output.

DPR11

Note: This parameter is valid only when the handshaking method is set to DC control (DPR9 is set to 1).

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0 to 3

2-445

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

OTHER
Description

Address

The waiting time for replies from the connected device during inputting or outputting. An alarm occurs if this time elapses following the final reply. Waiting time

DPR12

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0.1 s 0 to 65535 Selection of output code

Set values
Output format

Format ISO EIA

Description Output in ISO code Output in EIA code

0 1

DPR13

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0, 1 Port selection

Selection of an output destination port

DPR14

Set values 0 1 2 3 Set values 4

Port COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4

Description CF22 serial ch3 CF22 serial ch4 USB-RS232C conversion connector USB-RS232C conversion connector Output destination Hard disk (C:\MC_sdg\Print\)

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0 to 4

Note: 2 (COM3) and 3 (COM4) are selectable only when DPR16 (DPRNT operation port selection) is set to 1.

This parameter denotes the number of characters in NULL (feed) when the output destination is a serial port (DPR14 = 0 or 1). Example:
DPR15 characters DPR15 characters

Number of characters or the number of lines in feed section

DPR15
Feed EOR

(Significant information)

EOR

Feed

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup Character 0 to 65535

This parameter denotes the number of lines fed when the output destination is a hard disk (DPR14 = 4).

2-446

PARAMETER

Classification

DATA I/O
Meaning

Display title

OTHER
Description

Address

Parameter to select the DPRNT operation ports. If 1 is set, ports COM3 and COM4 can be used by means of a USBRS232C conversion connector. DPRNT operation port selection 0: DPR14 port selection 0: COM1, 1: COM2, 4: HDD 1: DPR14 port selection 0: COM1, 1: COM2, 2: COM3, 3: COM4, 4: HDD

DPR16

Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

M, E At I/O startup 0, 1 Invalid

IDD1 to IDD16
Program type Conditions Unit Setting range

2-447

PARAMETER

- NOTE -

2-448 E

ALARM

ALARM
If machine failures occur or if erroneous operations are carried out, appropriate alarm numbers and messages will be displayed in the alarm display section of the screen. If alarm display appears, refer to the alarm list to locate and eliminate the cause of the alarm. More than one alarm may be raised at once, depending on the particular status of alarm occurring. In the event of alarm display, therefore, it is highly recommended that the operator should call the DIAGNOSIS (USER) - ALARM display on the screen and make sure of the type of alarm.

Alarm display area

DIAGNOSIS (USER) - ALARM display

3-1

3
3-1

ALARM

Outline
1. Scope of this chapter This chapter describes all the alarms displayed on the screen of NC unit. Always refer to this chapter for eliminating an alarm. Precautions on this chapter This chapter also lists alarms related to machine model-dependent functions and optional functions. These alarms may therefore include ones not displayed for your machine. Check the type of machine purchased by you and its specifications before you read this chapter.

2.

Note 1: The contents of this list are subjected to change without notice, for NC unit or machine improvement. Note 2: Any questions about the contents of this list should be communicated to Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

3-1-1
1.

Alarm display
Machine-status indicator lamps In the event of alarm, the machine-status indicator lamp ?ALARM on the operation panel will light up. 2. Display on the screen of NC unit An alarm will be displayed on the DIAGNOSIS (USER) - ALARM display in the following format: 650 CHAMFERING IMPOSSIBLE (1234, 56, 78)
Tool sequence number or block number Unit number or sequence number Work number Alarm message Alarm number

For the DIAGNOSIS (USER) - ALARM display, refer to Part 3 OPERATING NC UNIT AND PREPARATION FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION, 10-1 DIAGNOSIS (USER) - ALARM Display of the Operating Manual. 3. Color of alarm display and its elimination Alarm display is presented in one of the following colors. Eliminate the alarm according to its display color:
Display color Red Blue Yellow White Press the reset key. Press the clear key. Press the reset key or clear key. Press the clear key. Alarm elimination

3-2

ALARM

3-1-2

Precautions
1. If program-related alarm display appears, that portion of the program in which the alarm has occurred will be displayed within the parentheses next to the alarm message. The meaning of each code in parentheses on the alarm list is listed in the table below.
Code WNo. UNo. SNo. NNo. BNo. Meaning Work number (MAZATROL or EIA/ISO) Unit number (MAZATROL) Tool sequence number (MAZATROL) Sequence number (EIA/ISO) Block number (EIA/ISO)

blank

No display, or intra-system alarm processing code

2.

The stopped status, clearing procedure, and display color for some types of alarm depend on whether the alarm-encountered program is on the foreground (program selected on the POSITION display) or on the background (program selected on the PROGRAM display). The above mentioned three types of information for the latter case are indicated with parentheses in the alarm list. The table for an alarm which does not exist remains blank. An alarm may not be displayed for certain machine models or versions of NC-software.

3. 4.

3-3

3
3-2

ALARM

Detailed Description
Structure of the alarm list
This alarm list is written in the following format:

3-2-1

No.

Message

Type of error ( , , )

Stopped status

Clearing procedure

Display

[1]
Cause

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6] [7] [1] [2] [3] Alarm number Alarm message Type of error
Code A B C D E F G Type Operation Registered data Servo Spindle NC equipment Machine (PLC) External I/O unit Description A wrong key has been pressed. Or the machine has been operated incorrectly. The program or tool data includes an error(s). Malfunctioning of the servo control mechanism Malfunctioning of the spindle control mechanism System (hardware/software) error Machine failure Malfunctioning of external I/O unit

Action

[4]

Stopped status
Code H I J K L Emergency stop Reset stop Single-block stop Feed stop (hold) Operation continued Status

[5]

Clearing procedure
Code M N O P Q S Procedure Power off Eliminate cause Power back on Eliminate cause Power off Power back on Eliminate cause Press reset key Press reset key Eliminate cause Press clear key Press clear key

[6] [7]

Cause of alarm Action to be taken to eliminate the cause. The list for alarms related to PLC machine control (No. 200 to 399 and No. 1200 to 1399) may have a different format.

Note:

3-4

ALARM

3-2-2
No. 1 Cause Action 2 Cause

No. 1 - No. 99, No. 1000 - No. 1099 (System/Drive error)

Message EMERGENCY STOP EMERGENCY STOP Trouble has occurred in the hardware. ( , , ) E H M Red ( , , ) Type of error Stopped status Clearing procedure Display

Action 3 Cause

Turn power off and then back on. If this does not clear the alarm status, contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center. EMERGENCY STOP ( , , ) A H M Red

The emergency stop button on the operating panel has been pressed.

Action 4 Cause

Release the pressed state of the emergency stop button and reset the NC unit to its initial state.

Action 5 Cause

SYSTEM SOFTWARE ERROR ( , , ) E H M Red

The contents of the system software and/or custom software have been destroyed.

Action 6 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

REMOTE I/O ERROR

Red

Action 7 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

SRAM MALFUNCTION

Red

The S-RAM mounted on the CPU card has become abnormal.

Action 8 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

RAM MALFUNCTION

Red

The RAM mounted on the CPU card has become abnormal.

Action

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

3-5

ALARM

No. 9 Cause

Message ABSOLUTE POSITION MALFUNCTION (Alarm No., Axis, )

Type of error E

Stopped status H

Clearing procedure M

Display Red

The absolute position detection system has lost absolute position data.

Action 10 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

DETECTOR MALFUNCTION

(Alarm No., Axis,

Red

The absolute position detection system has detected its detector error(s).

Action 11 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

POSITION REFERENCE MALFUNCTION

(Alarm No., Axis,

Red

The absolute position detection system has detected an error(s) by cross-checking the absolute position of its detector and the internal coordinate data of the NC unit. Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

Action 12 Cause

ABSOLUTE POSITION WARNING

(Alarm No., Axis,

Red

The absolute position detection system has detected abnormal data.

Action 13 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

PRE-PROCESSOR MALFUNCTION The software is not correctly working.

Red

Action

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

( Cause

Action 21 Cause SYSTEM ERROR Software of this system has become abnormal. ( , , ) E H M Red

Action 22 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

AMPLIFIER NOT EQUIPPED

Red

Amplifier power is not yet turned on. Or no signals are transferred yet.

Action 23 Cause

Check for an incorrectly connected cable, an incorrectly attached connector, an inadequate input supply voltage to the amplifier, an incorrect axis-number switch setting, etc. ( , , )

Action

3-6

ALARM

No. 24 Cause

Message ( , , )

Type of error

Stopped status

Clearing procedure

Display

Action 25 Cause

SAFE OPERATION SYSTEM ALARM ( , , ) E H N Red

There occurred an alarm in the safe operation system.

Action 26 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

SPINDLE SAFE OPER. SYSTEM ALARM

Red

Trouble has occurred for the spindle in the mode of safety-speed operation.

Action

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

( Cause

Action 31 Cause SERVO MALFUNCTION 1 The servo (power-off level) is abnormal. ( , , ) C H M Red

Action 32 Cause Action 33 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

SERVO PARAMETER MALFUNCTION

Red

The parameters that have been transferred from the NC unit to the servo amplifier during NC power-on are not correct.

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center. SERVO MALFUNCTION 2 The servo (NC reset level) is abnormal. ( , , ) C H O Red

Action 34 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

SERVO MALFUNCTION 3

Red

The servo (amplifier power-off level) is abnormal.

Action 35 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

OVERLOAD An extraordinary overload has been detected.

Red

Action

Check if any collision has occurred on the machine and perform the corresponding recovery, or check and reduce the cutting conditions. If measures other than the above should be taken, contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

3-7

ALARM

No.

Message ( , , )

Type of error

Stopped status

Clearing procedure

Display

Cause

Action 41 Cause SPINDLE MALFUNCTION 1 The spindle (power-off level) is abnormal. ( , , ) C H M Red

Action 42 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

SPINDLE PARAMETER MALFUNCTION

Red

The parameters that have been transferred from the NC unit to the spindle amplifier during NC power-on are not correct.

Action 43 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

SPINDLE MALFUNCTION 2 The spindle (NC reset level) is abnormal.

Red

Action 44 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

SPINDLE MALFUNCTION 3

Red

The spindle (amplifier power-off level) is abnormal.

Action

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

( Cause

Action 51 Cause E2ROM MALFUNCTION ( , , ) E L D Blue

Parameters cannot be correctly written into the E2ROM.

Action 52 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

BATTERY ALARM

Blue

The battery provided to retain parameters, machining programs and other types of data within the NC unit has reached the minimum voltage level permissible or has run down. It is required that the machining data is rechecked for possible loss or that the battery is recharged or replaced. For battery recharging or replacement, refer to the relevant description given in the Maintenance Manual. NC TEMPERATURE WARNING (Note 1, Note 2, Note 3) E L O Blue

Action 53 Cause

The temperature of the control unit or operation board has increased above the required level. (Note 1: Location of the temperature alarm, Note 2: Type of temperature alarm, Note 3: On-alarm temperature value)

Action

Reduce the temperature by turning off the NC power or by mounting a cooling unit.

3-8

ALARM

No. 54 Cause DIO5V MALFUNCTION

Message ( , , )

Type of error E

Stopped status H

Clearing procedure O

Display Blue

Action 55 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

REMOTE I/O ERROR

(Note 1, Note 2,

Blue

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center. Note 1: & 00 00 01 00 No.1 system (X0~, Y0~) No.2 system (X80~, Y80~) No.3 system (X100~, Y100~) No.4 system (X280~, Y300~) Action 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Station 1 Station 2 Station 8 The above example indicates that a communications error has occurred in station 1 of the No. 2 system. 56 Cause SYSTEM SOFTWARE CHECKING ( , , ) H Red ~ The ROMs mounted in the system ROM card are currently being checked for abnormalities. Note 2: & 00 01 No. 5 system (X380~, Y400~) No. 6 system (X400~, Y700~) The above example indicates that a communications error has occurred in station 1 of the No. 5 system.

Action 57 Cause

Wait for a while. Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center if the alarm is not cleared. NO PLC The user PLC is not stored in the NC unit. ( , , ) F H N Red

Action 58 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

CORRUPT PLC Trouble has occurred with the PLC.

Red

Action 59 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

PLC STOPPED The PLC has ceased running.

Red

Action

Run the PLC. Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center if the alarm is not cleared. ( , , )

Cause

Action

3-9

ALARM

No. 66 Cause

Message PARAMETER MALFUNCTION Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center. ( , , )

Type of error E

Stopped status H

Clearing procedure O

Display Blue

Action 67 Cause

HI-SPEED SYNCTAP AXIS ALARM

Blue

A servo with a system not applicable to high-speed synchronous tapping is connected in spite of the high-speed synchronous tapping option being valid. Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

Action 68 Cause

HI-SPEED SYNCTAP SPDL ALARM

Blue

A servo with a system not applicable to high-speed synchronous tapping is connected in spite of the high-speed synchronous tapping option being valid. Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

Action 69 Cause

Action 70 Cause

( , , )

Action 71 Cause

ILLEGAL SERVO PARAMETER ( , , ) C H M Blue

Action 72 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

SERVO WARNING The servomotor is loaded abnormally.

Blue

Action

Turn off the NC and the machine, remove the cause of the abnormal load, and then turn on the machine and the NC. Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center if the alarm is not cleared. ( , , )

Cause

Action 81 Cause ILLEGAL SPINDLE PARAMETER Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center. ( , , ) E H O Blue

Action

3-10

ALARM

No. 82 Cause SPINDLE WARNING

Message ( , , )

Type of error E

Stopped status H

Clearing procedure O

Display Blue

Action

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

( Cause

Action

3-11

ALARM

3-2-3
No. 100 Cause

No. 100 - No. 199, No. 1100 - No. 1199 (CNC machine control error)
Message ( , , ) Type of error Stopped status Clearing procedure Display

Action 101 Cause Action

SOFT LIMIT (Axis, , ) A K P Blue

Some mistake in operations during the automatic operation has caused the tool tip to overstep the area specified in the software limit parameters in the direction of the axis corresponding to the displayed axis name. Modify the program so that the tool tip may move within the area specified in the software limit parameters. ( , , )

Cause

Action 113 Cause OVER TRAVEL (Axis, , ) A K P Red

The tool tip has reached stroke limit in the direction of the axis corresponding to the displayed axis name.

Action

Move the tool tip away from the end in manual operation mode.

( Cause

Action 125 Cause ILLEGAL AXIS EXISTS ( , , ) E H O Red

During reference-point return, the proximity-point detection limit switch has overrun the position in which the watchdog is mounted. Either extend the length of the proximity-point watchdog or reduce the reference-point returning speed. After that, carry out the zero-point returning operation once again. AXIS HAS NOT PASSED Z PHASE ( , , ) E H O Red

Action 126 Cause

During initial reference-point return following the power-on action, an axis has not passed through the Z phase of the corresponding detector. First actuate the handle for manual pulse feed to move the axis back in the opposite direction to the zero-point, and then carry out the zero-point returning operation once again. ILLEGAL DIR. FOR ORIGIN RETURN ( , , ) A K P Red

Action 127 Cause

The axis-movement direction selected with the axis selector button is not correct for the reference-point return in manual operation mode. Set the correct direction (+, ) using the axis selector buttons.

Action 128 Cause Action

OUTSIDE INTERLOCK AXIS

Red

An axis is interlocked because the interlock function has become active (input signal has turned off).

Clear the active state of the interlock function.

3-12

ALARM

No. 129 Cause INSIDE INTERLOCK AXIS

Message ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status K

Clearing procedure P

Display Red

The very direction in which the manual skip function has become effective is specified in the axis-movement command. Or the servo-off function is active. Deactivate the servo-off function.

Action 130 Cause

NO OPERATION MODE

Red

This message is displayed in the event of incorrect mode selection or a mode selector switch malfunction.

Action 131 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

CUTTING FEED OVERRIDE SET AT 0

Blue

The cutting-feed override value is set to 0 on the machine operating panel.

Action 132 Cause

Change the cutting-feed override value to one greater than 0. If this alarm message is displayed when the cutting-feed override value is not 0, check the signal line for a short-circuit. FEEDRATE ZERO ( , , ) A K P Blue

An attempt has been made to execute an axis movement in the cutting feed mode or dry-run in the automatic operation mode, with the manual feedrate remaining set to 0 on the machine operating panel. Change the manual feedrate to a value greater than 0. If this alarm message is displayed when the manual feedrate is not 0, check the signal line for a short-circuit. STOP SPINDLE ( , , ) D K N Red

Action 133 Cause

Spindle rotation did not start when the spindle rotation start command was issued during automatic operation.

1. Conditions for spindle rotation start are not satisfied. Check the program and tool data. Action 2. The spindle amplifier and the encoder must be checked for normal operation. Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center. SPINDLE ROTATION EXCEEDED The spindle-speed limit has been exceeded. ( , , ) D K N Red

134 Cause

Action 135 Cause

Reduce the spindle speed. The spindle amplifier must be checked for normal operation. Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center. BLOCK START INTERLOCK ( , , ) B K N Red

The interlock signal to lock the start of the program block has been input.

Action 136 Cause

The sequence program needs checking for normal functioning. Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center. CUTTING BLOCK START INTERLOCK ( , , ) B K N Red

The interlock signal to lock the start of the cutting program block has been input.

Action 137 Cause Action

The sequence program needs checking for normal functioning. Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center. DYNAMIC COMPENSATION EXCEEDED ( , , ) A K P Red

Dynamic compensation amount exceeded 3 mm (0.12 in). Make sure that the workpiece coordinate zero point is centrally positioned in the workpiece, and set the difference between the center of the workpiece and the rotary center of the table to 3 mm (0.12 in) or less.

3-13

ALARM

No. 138 Cause CANNOT ROTATE TABLE

Message ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status K

Clearing procedure P

Display Red

There are areas where the machining with table rotation cannot be executed.

Action 139 Cause

Modify the approach point.

PRE-INTERP ACCEL/DECEL ERROR

Red

An abnormality has occurred in the NC unit during the pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration process.

Action 140 Cause

Hardware trouble is likely. Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

ILLEGAL REFERENCE RETURN No.

Blue

Returning to the second reference point has been commanded in spite of the fact that returning to the first reference point has not yet occurred. Return the axis to the first reference point first.

Action 141 Cause

EXCESS SIMULTANEOUS ERROR

Blue

The synchronization error between the master axis and the slave axis during synchronous control has overstepped a predetermined allowable value. Move either axis in the direction that the error decreases. Reduce the allowable value to zero (checking invalid), or increase the allowable value.

Action 142 Cause

NONE OR DUPLICATE OPERAT. MODE

Blue

An operation mode has not been selected, or more than one operation mode have been selected. The operation mode selector switch is malfunctioning.

Action 143 Cause

Check for incorrect wiring of the input mode switch.

ILLEGAL HANDLE FEED AXIS

Blue

A nonexistent axis has been designated as the handle feed axis. Or a handle feed axis has not been designated.

Action

Check the handle feed axis selection signal line for incorrect wiring. Or check the maximum number of axes that can be used under the current specifications.

3-14

ALARM

No. 144 ILLEGAL CYCLE START

Message (Alarm No., , )

Type of error A

Stopped status I

Clearing procedure O

Display Red

It was attempted to start automatic operation under the following conditions: Alarm No. 0 101 0 102 0 103 0 104 0 105 0 106 0 107 Cause 0 108 0 109 0 110 0 111 0 113 0 114 0 115 0 116 0 117 0 118 Cause The smoothing level is not zero. READY lamp OFF. Reset state not yet cleared. Feed hold is in operation. Hardware overtravel not yet cleared. Software overtravel not yet cleared. No operation mode selected. Two or more operation modes selected. During change in operation modes. During editing on the EIA MONITOR display. During search on the tape data. Abnormality in temperature. Operation restarted in MDI mode. A door opened. During compensation in tandem control. An alarm related to polygonal machining or hob milling not yet cleared. An alarm related to safety barrier not yet cleared.

Action 145 Cause

Remove the cause, if possible, to (re)start the automatic operation. If not, contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center. REQUIRE ABSOLUTE RECOVERY (Alarm No., , ) C K P Blue

The absolute position data has become lost. Trouble has occurred in the absolute position detector.

Action 146 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

NOT AUTO MODE

Blue

Automatic operation has been started in a mode other than automatic operation.

Action 147 Cause

Change the mode to the automatic.

C AXIS TURNING ANGLE OVER

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Blue

1. The rotational angle limit at the shaping block connections has been exceeded. 2. The radius of the arc is less than the rotational radius of the C-axis.

Action

1. Review the program. 2. Review the setting of parameter K1 (rotational radius of the C-axis).

3-15

ALARM

No. 148 CHUCK BARRIER

Message (Note 1, Note 2, )

Type of error A (B)

Stopped status K (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

1. The tool entered in the chuck barrier. Note 1: Interfering component 1 Display 1 2 4 8 No. 1 spindle chuck No. 2 spindle chuck Tailstock Turret

Note 2: Interfering component 2 Cause Display 0 1 2 Type A Tool tip Turret Type B Turret Holder Tool Type C Tool, holder, turret

Machine type A, B and C above are available according to the settings of the following parameters: Type A B C BA73 Other than 0 0 BA129 bit 1 0 1 0

2. Interference is occurring between the tool and chuck in the solid mode. Action 149 Cause Review and correct the machining program. If the program is correct, review the tool data and the barrier parameters.

TAILSTOCK BARRIER

(Note 1, Note 2,

A (B)

K (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

1. The tool entered in the tail barrier. For details of cause of the alarm, refer to 148 CHUCK BARRIER. 2. Interference is occurring between the tool and tailstock in the solid mode.

Action 150 Cause

Review and correct the machining program. If the program is correct, review the tool data and the barrier parameters.

WORK PIECE BARRIER

A, B

H (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

1. Interference is occurring between the workpiece of the No. 1 turning spindle side and the workpiece of the No. 2 turning spindle side. 2. Interference is occurring between the tool and workpiece in the solid mode.

Action 151 Cause

Review and correct the machining program. If the program is correct, review the tool data and the barrier parameters.

NO TANDEM CONTROLLING OPTION

Red

Executing the tandem driving function has been attempted despite a tandem driving option not being present.

Action 152 Cause

The tandem driving function can be used only for a special machine. If this alarm occurs in a special machine that allows the use of the tandem driving function, contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center. ILLEGAL SYNCHRONIZED AXIS NAME ( , , ) B I N Red

1. The settings of the address name parameters (M11) on each axis are illegal. 2. An attempt has been made to simultaneously control axes other than the master axis that has been set in a parameter.

Action

1. Correct the address names of the master axis and slave axis to the uppercase alphabet and the lowercase alphabet, respectively, and set the address name parameters (M11) of each axis properly. 2. Subject the specified master axis to simultaneous control.

153 Cause

TRANSFER/PUSH UNFINISHED

Red

1. The axis reached its pressing completion position before a skipping signal was generated. 2. The drooping amount during pressing operation cannot overstep the setting in parameter K46.

Action

1. Check whether the pressing completion position in the program is correct. 2. Modify the K46 setting as appropriate.

3-16

ALARM

No. 154 Cause

Message ZERO RET. NOT ALLOWED (G68 MODE) ( , , )

Type of error E

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

Zero-point return mode has been selected during three-dimensional coordinate conversion.

Action 155 Cause

1. Select an operation mode other than the zero-point return mode. 2. To execute manual zero-point return, cancel three-dimensional coordinate conversion mode. BARRIER TURRET/TOOL HEAD (Note 1, Note 2, ) A K O Red

The barriers of the upper and lower turrets interferes with each other. For details of cause of the alarm, refer to 148 CHUCK BARRIER. Correct the machining program. If the program is correct, review the parameters related to the barrier.

Action 156 Cause

ILLEGAL MEASURING SENSOR SIGNAL

A, B

Red

The measuring sensor has turned on at a position in a non-measuring area.

Action 157 Cause

If the sensor has come to contact with an object, confirm the program. In other cases, confirm the mounting status of the sensor. MEASURED RESULT MALFUNCTION Measurement results are not normal. ( , , ) A, B H O Red

Check the program. Action Check if the sensor tool length registered on the TOOL DATA display is correct. Check the mounting status of the sensor. 158 Cause ILLEGAL COMMAND CROSS MACHINING ( , , ) A K Q Blue

It was attempted to manually control an axis currently under the control for cross machining.

Action 159

The axes under the cross machining control cannot be controlled manually.

CROSS MACHINING IMPOSSIBLE Alarm No. 0 0001 0 0002

(Alarm No.,

) Cause

Red

The specified axis does not exist in the counterpart system. The self-system is specified as the system to be cross-controlled. The cross machining control is specified for an axis which is already under the control in question. A command for cross machining control is given from the counterpart system. In the mode of inclined-axis control a cross-control command is given for the fundamental axis (Xaxis) without positioning of the inclined axis (Y-axis) in its zero point. In the mode of inclined-axis control a cross-control command is given for the inclined axis (Y-axis).

Cause

0 0004 0 0010 0 0040

Action 160 Cause

Review and correct the program.

ILLEGAL NUMBER OF CROSS AXIS

Red

The number of axes in the remote system has become zero as a result of crossing command execution.

Action

Review and correct the program.

3-17

ALARM

No. 161 Cause

Message SUPERPOSITION CTRL IMPOSSIBLE (WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Type of error E

Stopped status I

Clearing procedure P

Display Red

It was attempted to start superposition control with an unavailable axis. It was attempted to start superposition control under incompatible modal conditions. Check the parameters related to the type of acceleration & deceleration and to the motion speed during superposition control. ILLEGAL SUPERPOSITION PARAMETER (WNo., UNo., SNo.) E I P Red

Action 162 Cause

Incorrect parameter settings do not allow the superposition control to be started.

Action 163 Cause

Check the parameters related to the type of acceleration & deceleration and to the motion speed during superposition control. BARRIER WORK (WNo., UNo., SNo.) A K O Red

There is a danger that one workpiece will interfere with the other. There is a danger that the partition plate will interfere with the workpiece or the lower turret. Review the barrier parameters, or for automatic operation, correct the program properly.

Action 164 Cause

ILLEGAL CMD SAFE OPER SYS ALARM

Blue

With the machine under the control for safety speed, a command for the following was given: Threading, Synchronous tapping, Cross machining, Superposition control. Close the door to operate the machine.

Action 165 Cause

CANNOT MAKE SAFE OPER SYS ACTIVE

Blue

The command signal for the control for safety speed was turned on in the following modes of machining: Threading, Synchronous tapping, Cross machining, Superposition control. Close the door to operate the machine.

Action 166 Cause

LOWER TURRET ALREADY ASSIGNED

Red

An M810 command was given from one HD side to operate the lower turret that was currently used on the other HD side.

Action 167

Give the M810 command after the use of the lower turret on the other side.

ILLEGAL OPER TOOL TIP PT CTRL

K (O)

O (S)

Blue

An attempt was made in the mode of tool tip point control to perform such an improper operation as follows: Cause 1. Manual interruption 2. Interruption using the manual pulse handle 3. MDI interruption Do not attempt to perform any of the above operations 1 to 3 in the mode of tool tip point control.

Action 168

ILLEGAL OPER 5X RADIUS COMP.

K (O)

O (S)

Blue

An attempt was made in the mode of tool radius compensation for five-axis machining to perform such an improper operation as follows: Cause 1. Manual interruption 2. Interruption using the manual pulse handle 3. MDI interruption Do not attempt to perform any of the above operations 1 to 3 in the mode of tool radius compensation for five-axis machining.

Action

3-18

ALARM

No. 169 Cause

Message HIGH SMOOTHING CTR. ILLEGAL OPE ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status K (O)

Clearing procedure Q (S)

Display Blue

In the mode of high-speed smoothing control an unavailable operation (e. g. manual interruption) was attempted.

Action 170 Cause

Manual interruption cannot be performed in the mode of high-speed smoothing control.

W AXIS THRUST FORCE ALARM W-axis thrust has not been obtained. Review and correct the program.

Red

Action 171 Cause

ILLEGAL W AXIS COMMAND

Red

W-axis operation was programmed during the application of the W-axis thrust. Review and correct the program.

Action 172 Cause

B AXIS NOT AVAILABLE

Red

The head (B) axis is used without the B-axis control option. Purchase the B-axis control option.

Action 173 Cause

2ND SPDL C AXIS NOT AVIALABLE

Red

The No. 2 spindle/C-axis is used without the No. 2 spindle/C-axis option. Purchase the No. 2 spindle/C-axis option.

Action 174 Cause

2ND SPDL 1/1000 N/A

Red

The No. 2 spindle/C-axis is used without the No. 2 spindle high-precision indexing option. Purchase the No. 2 spindle high-precision indexing option.

Action 175 Cause

TABLE UNBALANCE CHECK N/A

Red

Vibration detection is used without the rotary table vibration detection option. Purchase the rotary table vibration detection option.

Action 176 Cause

CANNOT CHANGE TIME CONSTANT

(System No.,

Red

Changing the cutting feed time constant in the system has been attempted during synchronous tapping, threading, or control axis superposition. Review and correct the program.

Action

3-19

ALARM

No. 177

Message ONE-TOUCH TUNING IMPOSSIBLE (System No., , )

Type of error B

Stopped status I

Clearing procedure P

Display Red

The inertia estimation has been attempted by G297 during movement of the axis whose inertia was to be estimated. The G298 parameter setup command has been set during movement of the parameter setup reference axis or of some axis assigned to the parameter data development system. The G298 parameter setup command has been set during cutting feed time constant changeover or control axis superposition. The G298 parameter setup command has been set during axis rotation. Action 178 Cause Review and correct the program.

Cause

INERTIA TOO LARGE

(System No.,

Red

The estimated inertia has exceeded the maximum inertia specified in the TSVC parameter or the TSPC parameter.

Action 179

Correct the settings of the TSVC parameter or the TSPC parameter.

CANNOT AUTO MEASURE INERTIA

(System No.,

Red

Resonance has not been reduced during inertia estimation. Cause The minimum inertial is not specified in TSVC or TSPC. The inertia estimation itself has failed. Action 180 Cause Correct the settings of the TSVC parameter or the TSPC parameter.

SYNCHRO TAP ILLEGAL COMMAND

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Red

An orienting command has been entered during synchronous tapping.

Action 181 Cause

Review and correct the program.

NO MDI DATA

(System No.,

Blue

Although operation has been started in MDI mode, data has been found to be missing.

Action 182

Set data in the MDI window.

CANNOT DETACH AXIS

(Axis, UNo., SNo.)

Red

Cause

The axis removal request signal has been turned on when the axis removal-in-progress signal was on (after turning off the axis removal request signal, the operator has turned the axis removal request signal back on without waiting for the axis removal-in-progress signal to turn off). After the axis removal request signal was turned on for the absolute position control axis, the axis removal request signal has been turned off during display of alarm 71 ILLEGAL SERVO PARAMETER.

Action 183 Cause

Turn on the axis removal request signal when the axis removal-in-progress signal is off. Clear the alarm. CANNOT MDI INTERRUPT ( , , ) A L Q Blue

MDI interruption has been attempted during automatic operation.

Action

MDI interruption is not possible. Return to original mode and resume operation.

3-20

ALARM

No. 184

Message ILLEGAL OPER IN G54.4 MODE ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure Q

Display Blue

An attempt was made in the mode of workpiece placement error correction to perform such an improper operation as follows: Cause 1. Manual interruption 2. Interruption using the manual pulse handle 3. MDI interruption Do not attempt to perform any of the above operations 1 to 3 in the mode of workpiece placement error correction.

Action 185

ILLEGAL OPER IN G68.2 MODE

Blue

An attempt was made in the mode of inclined-surface machining to perform such an improper operation as follows: Cause 1. Manual interruption 2. Interruption using the manual pulse handle 3. MDI interruption Do not attempt to perform any of the above operations 1 to 3 in the mode of inclined-surface machining.

Action 186 Cause

W-THERMAL COMP. OVER LIMIT

Blue

The amount of compensation for workpiece thermal expansion exceeded the effective range of +0.5 to 0.5 mm.

The operation is continued with the amount of error compensation reduced to the limit (+0.5 to 0.5 mm). Action Change the reference point for workpiece thermal expansion compensation to a point on the workpiece, or execute the workpiece thermal expansion compensation enable/disable command when the tool tip is in close proximity to the workpiece. SET W-THERMAL COMP. TOOL LENGTH ( , , ) B L S Blue

187 Cause

The workpiece thermal expansion compensation command is issued to a tool for which tool data is not entered.

Action 188 Cause

Enter the tool data (tool length). If the tool length is not specified, compensation will be made on the assumption that the tool tip is at the spindle nose (or at the center of rotation of the B-axis if the machine has a spindle head rotating mechanism). SET W-THERMAL COMP. REF. POINT ( , , ) B J P Red

Although the reference point for workpiece thermal expansion compensation was not set, the workpiece thermal expansion compensation command was issued. Set the reference point for workpiece thermal expansion compensation before issuing the workpiece thermal expansion compensation command. ( , , )

Action 189 Cause

Action 190 Cause

( , , )

Action 191 Cause

FILE SYSTEM I/O ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) E I P Red

An internal error(s) has occurred during program data change by the function of VFC, MMS etc. After checking the entire data of the program being executed, tool data, tool file, parameters, etc., save the data using the data I/O operation and then contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

Action

3-21

ALARM

No. 192 Cause Action 193 Cause EXECUTION IMPOSSIBLE

Message (WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Type of error E

Stopped status I

Clearing procedure P

Display Red

An internal error(s) has occurred during execution of the MMS unit.

After checking the entire data of the program being executed, tool data, tool file, parameters, etc., save the data using the data I/O operation and then contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center. NO TOOL IN MAGAZINE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I P Red

Tool data that correspond to the pocket numbers being displayed in the TNo. item of the POSITION display are unregistered. Register the tool data.

Action 194 Cause

NO TOOL DATA IN PROGRAM

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Red

An internal error(s) has occurred when surface speed or feedrate changing by VFC function was under way.

Action 195 Cause

After checking the entire data of the program being executed, tool data, tool file, parameters, etc., save the data using the data I/O operation (floppy disk) and then contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center. WRONG MEASURING DIRECTION ( , , ) A I O Red

During the second or subsequent rounds of manual measurement, an attempt has been made to perform skipping in a direction not available for measurement. Perform measurements in the correct direction.

Action 196 Cause

WRONG MEASURING POINT

Red

During the second or subsequent rounds of manual measurement, an attempt has been made to measure an illegal point.

Action 197 Cause

Measure correct points.

UNREGISTERED HEAD DATA

Red

Head data of the head number being used during MMS, MDI MMS or manual measurement does not exist.

Action 198 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

NO HEAD DATA

Red

Head data of the head number being used during MMS, MDI MMS or manual measurement is partly missing.

Action 199 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

DIVISION BY ZERO

Red

An attempt has been made to carry out divisions by zero inside the NC unit during measurement of the degree-ofstraightness on the MEASURE display. Check the touch sensor for abnormalities. Carry out measurements once again if the touch sensor is normal.

Action

3-22

ALARM

No. 1101 Cause Action 1102 Cause INTERFERE

Message ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status K

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

Interference occurs between <Interfering section 1> and <Interfering section 2>. Press the cancel key to clean the alarm. INTERFERE ( , , ) A I P Red

Interference occurs between <Interfering section 1> and <Interfering section 2>.

Action 1103 Cause

Press the reset key to clean the alarm.

INTERFERE CHECK DATA OVERLOAD

Blue

The 3D interference check process cannot be performed within a proper time.

Action 1104 Cause

Set a simple workpiece model or a fixture model or a tool model.

RAPID FEED OVERRIDE SET AT 0

Blue

The rapid feed override value set up on the operating panel is 0.

Action 1105 Cause

Set the override value other than 0.

SAFETY SHEILD CALCULATING

Blue

Machine operation has been stopped because of a delay in interference check process.

Action 1106

The machine will be restarted when the interference check process catches up with the operation. If this alarm recurs, set up a simplified material model, fixture model or tool model. SAFETY SHIELD FAILURE (Cause, , ) B L N Red

If the processing load of the PC is too high, it may not be possible to update the model properly. A press of the reset key returns operation to a normal state, thus allowing interference checks to be performed properly. Cause 1. Creation of the model has failed. 2. The interference check process has not been performed properly. 3. An NC-PC communications error (time-out error) has occurred. Action 1107 Cause Review and correct the parameter and model data. Then press the reset key. If this does not clear the alarm status, turn power off and then back on. INCOMPLETE TOOL DATA ( , , ) B L N Red

Manual tool measurement results cannot be calculated because of tool data items remaining blank.

Action 1108 Cause

Confirm the settings of the machining section, rotational direction, and nose R in the tool data items, and enter the correct data. CANNOT CHANGE OPERATION MODE ( , , ) A L Q Blue

The memory operation mode key has been pressed during tape operation.

Action

Changeover to memory operation mode during tape operation is prohibited. Reselect tape operation mode before restarting operation.

3-23

ALARM

No. 1109 Cause TOOL LENGTH OVER

Message ( , , )

Type of error B

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure N

Display Red

The tool length input range has been overstepped as a result of tool measurement.

Action

Use a tool of any tool length value falling within the range defined in parameters SU110SU113.

( Cause

Action 1122 Cause INTERFERE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B L N Red

Machine interference has been detected with the NC axis active in automatic operation mode.

Action 1123

Press the RESET key. Modify the program to prevent machine interference from recurring.

ILLEGAL OPE (SAFETY SHIELD)

(Cause,

Red

The operations that make interference checking impossible were performed during automatic operation when the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function was valid. The values of Cause denote the causes below. Cause 1: After an EIA modal search under the invalid status of the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD in automatic operation mode, the Automatic Operation INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function was made valid in an attempt to start automatic operation. 2: Following completion of the EIA modal search, manual operation mode was selected and after the axis was moved to a position different from that before the search, memory mode was reselected and a restart operation was attempted. 3: An attempt was made to start the MDI operation at the same time for both the upper and the lower turret. Confirm the cause of the alarm. Also, avoid performing the corresponding operations when the Automatic Operation INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function is valid. Alternatively, restart operation after making the automatic operation interference checking function invalid with the Automatic Operation INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD menu. ILLEGAL CYCLE START ( , , ) B L N Red

Action

1124 Cause

Starting either the hard disk, Ethernet, IC card, or tape operation was attempted when the Automatic Operation INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function was valid. Interference checking during automatic operation is prohibited in the hard disk, Ethernet, IC card, or tape operation mode. Restart operation after making the automatic operation interference checking function invalid with the Automatic Operation INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD menu. SAFETY SHIELD CALCULATING ( , , ) A L Q Blue

Action 1125 Cause

Calculation for interference checking during automatic operation is in progress.

Action 1126 Cause

When the Automatic Operation INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function is valid, the start of automatic operation displays this alarm message, but the alarm will be automatically cleared when the calculation is completed. If this alarm occurs except during the start of automatic operation, change the model to a simple one. ( , , )

Action

3-24

ALARM

No. 1127 INVALID SAFETY SHIELD

Message ( , , )

Type of error B

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

The INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD for automatic operation has been canceled. 1. With the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD being valid for automatic operation, a command which is not compatible with interference check was executed. 2. With the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD being valid for automatic operation, an attempt was made to start a program stored in the storage areas for Hard Disk operation, Ethernet operation, and IC Card operation, or a program prepared for Tape operation. Action 1128 Cause Press the clear key to clear the alarm. Be all the more cautious of allowing interference because the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD is not working. CHANGE SAFETY SHIELD CONDITION ( , , ) A L S Blue

Cause

With the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD being valid for automatic operation, the feed-overriding value has been changed. Press the clear key to clear the alarm. Be accordingly cautious of allowing interference because the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD is working under the changed conditions. ( , , )

Action

Cause

Action

3-25

ALARM

3-2-4

No. 200 - No. 399, No. 1200 - No. 1399 (PLC machine control error)
To clear the alarms indicated below, first eliminate the cause of the alarm and press the key. or

Alarm No. (SQ coil No.) 200 (F0)

Alarm message HYDRAULIC UNIT PRESSURE DOWN

Description The hydraulic pressure has dropped continuously for 2 or more seconds.

Machine status Feed hold Spindle stop Emergency stop in 1 min Single block Spindle stop

Alarm related detector SQ No. Compound oil control unit SP1 X5 Hydraulic oil temperature control unit X137 SP5 X292 Specification not supported

201 (F1)

CHILLER MALFUNCTION

Alarm related to the hydraulic oil temperature control unit has continued for more than 1 second. (option) The air pressure for milling spindle lubrication has dropped.

202 (F2) 203 (F3) 204 (F4) 205 (F5) 206 (F6)

AIR PRESSURE DOWN SPINDLE OIL PRESSURE DOWN SPINDLE OIL LOW

Feed hold Milling spindle stop

Low level of turning spindle lubricating oil

Feed hold Spindle stop

Oil control unit SP2 X1B Specification not supported

SPINDLE OIL OVERFLOW SPINDLE LUB. CHILLER MALF. Alarm related to the milling spindle or turning spindle lubrication chiller unit Feed hold Spindle stop

Compound oil control unit (KAI) X16 SP4 X15 SL4 XC SL4 XC Specification not supported

207 (F7) 208 (F8) 209 (F9) 210 (F10) 211 (F11) 212 (F12) 213 (F13) 214 (F14) 217 (F17)

IRREGULAR SLIDEWAY OIL PRESSURE SLIDEWAY OIL LOW SLIDEWAY OIL MALFUNCTION TAP COOLANT LOW SPINDLE CONTROLLER MALFUNCTION MAGAZINE DRUM MALFUNCTION INDEX TABLE DRIVER MALFUNCTION ILLEGAL TOOL DESIGNATED THERMAL TRIP

Low slideway lubricating oil pressure

Stop in the single block mode Only display of message Single block Spindle stop

Low slideway lubricating oil level After the occurrence of alarm No. 208, lubricating oil has not been added within 75 cycles of lubrication pump operation.

Alarm related to the milling spindle controller

Feed hold Milling spindle stop Magazine operation is disabled.

Spindle controller X323 Magazine driver Specification not supported

Alarm related to the magazine driver

An unusable tool has been selected. The thermal relay in one of the auxiliary motors or the 100 V circuit protector has been tripped.

Tool selection by magazine rotation stops. Feed hold Spindle stop KM11, KM12, KM18, KM76, KM33, KM18 QF7, QF11, QF14 In the compound control unit (FRI) X0

3-26

ALARM

Alarm No. (SQ coil No.) 218 (F18) 219 (F19) 220 (F20) 221 (F21) 222 (F22) 223 (F23) 224 (F24)

Alarm message CONVEYOR THERMAL TRIP MAIN TRANSFORMER OVERHEAT TABLE UNBALANCE FOUND MACHINE +24V MALFUNCTION AFC OVERLOAD TOOL MEAS. UNIT NOT IN POS

Description The thermal relay in the motor of the chip conveyor or chip screw has been tripped. The temperature of the main power transformer has exceeded 120C (248F). Unbalancing amount of the turning operation table has exceeded the specified value of the machine.

Machine status Only display of message

Alarm related detector SQ No. KM15, KM16, KM13, KM113 X1C Main transformer X10

Single block mode Spindle stop Feed hold Spindle stop

Specification not supported Spindle load does not drop even when feed override is reduced by AFC. Feed hold

Attempted operation does An attempt has been made to perform a semiautomatic tool length measurement even though not start. the measuring unit has not been extended. Attempted operation does not start.

ILLEGAL TOOL FOR 1. An attempt has been made to measure a TOOL LGTH MEAS touch sensor or chip removal tool. 2. An attempt has been made during a fully automatic tool length measurement to measure an inverted spot facing, boring, back boring, chamfering, face milling or special cutter.

225 (F25)

TOOL LIFE OVER

Accumulated tool used time has been exceeded Stop in the single block the set tool life time. mode if M58 is assigned while this alarm message is displayed. To continue operation, press the clear key and then press the cycle start button.

226 (F26) 227 (F27) 228 (F28) 229 (F29) 230 (F30)

TOOL BREAKAGE

A broken tool has been detected by the M35 command. Alternatively, a broken tool has been mounted on the spindle. M-codes have been assigned which cannot be processed simultaneously. An M-code has been assigned which is not included in the specifications.

Single block mode Milling spindle stop Operation does not start and the machine stops. No completion signal is received and the machine stops.

SIMULTANEOUS M CODE OPERATION ILLEGAL M CODE

INVALID SCREEN An attempt has been made to start (cycle start) a Feed hold FOR CYCLE START memory or tape mode operation on a display other than POSITION or TRACE. ILLEGAL MMS UNIT Some form of trouble has occurred in the MMS unit and the required signal was not output. Feed hold MMS ERROR X17 MMS LOW BATT X18 Specification not supported The machine door has been opened. Feed hold Spindle stop Single block mode Magazine rotation is disabled. SQ9 X7 SQ31 X2C1

231 (F31) 232 (F32) 233 (F33)

EXTERNAL CONTROLLER ALARM MACHINE DOOR INTERLOCK MAGAZINE DOOR INTERLOCK

While the machine is operating in the automatic mode, the magazine door has been opened.

3-27

ALARM

Alarm No. (SQ coil No.) 234 (F34) 235 (F35)

Alarm message PALLET CHANGER DOOR INTERLOCK MAGAZINE MANUAL INTERRUPT

Description The pallet changer safety door has been opened, or the door lock has been released.

Machine status Pallet changer operation is disabled.

Alarm related detector SQ No. SQ56 X2E5 SA4 X2C4

While the machine is operating in the manual Only display of message mode, the magazine is rotated manually (manual NC call stop when the operation interruption). ATC command is executed. The PALLET CHANGE HOLD switch on the pallet changer operation panel is set to ON. (option) Only display of message NC call stop when the pallet change command is executed. Only display of message Stop just before the ATC cycle. Press the [ATC STOP] menu key to cancel the function and press the cycle start button to continuously execute the ATC cycle.

236 (F36)

HOLD PALLET CHANGE

237 (F37) 238 (F38)

MAGAZINE DOOR OPENED AUTO TOOL CHANGE STOP

The magazine door is open. The [ATC STOP] menu key has been pressed and the ATC is stopped.

SQ31 X2C1

240 (F40) 241 (F41) 242 (F42)

OPERATION RESTART UNFINISHED SPINDLE ROTATION ABNORMAL SPINDLE ORIENT TIME OVER

Start-up has been performed even though the EIA restart operation has not been completed.

Feed hold

The zero speed signal remains ON even though Feed hold a milling spindle rotation command has been Spindle stop assigned.

Y3A0, Y3A1, X324

The orient check signal does not come ON even Waiting for input of spindle Y3A6, X326 after 10 seconds have elapsed from the orientation check signal 1 assignment of the milling spindle orient command. The orient check signal stays ON even after 1 second has elapsed from the time the orient command was set OFF. The spindle zero speed check signal was set OFF while the orient check signal was ON. Only display of message Specification not supported Y3A6, X326, X324

243 (F43) 244 (F44) 245 (F45)

SPINDLE ORIENT CANCEL TIME OVER ZERO SIGNAL OFF IN SPDL ORIENT SPINDLE CANNOT ROT (DOOR OPENED) TOUCH SENSOR NOT IN SPINDLE IMPOS. MEAS (TOUCH SENSOR MALF) TOOL LENGTH EXTEND SENSOR MALF.

Only display of message

Conditions necessary for starting the spindle are Only display of message not satisfied. The spindle does not Example: The operators door is open. rotate. Specification not supported Specification not supported Waiting for sensor input The forward stroke end sensor does not come signal ON even when the measuring unit forward command is assigned. Alternatively, the forward stroke end sensor does not go OFF even when the measuring unit reverse command is assigned. (5 seconds) SQ40 Y338, X2B8

248 (F48) 249 (F49) 250 (F50)

251 (F51)

TOOL LENGTH The reverse stroke end sensor does not come Waiting for sensor input RETRACT SENSOR ON even when the measuring unit reverse signal MALF command is assigned. Alternatively, the reverse stroke end sensor does not go OFF even when the measuring unit forward command is assigned. (20 seconds)

SQ41 Y338, X2B9

3-28

ALARM

Alarm No. (SQ coil No.) 252 (F52) 253 (F53)

Alarm message DECELERATION SENSOR MALF. SKIP SENSOR MALFUNCTION

Description During tool length measuring cycle, the skip signal has been output although the skip deceleration signal is not output. The status signal (XE) of the laser tool length measurement system does not come ON even when the laser cover open command is assigned. (10 seconds)

Machine status

Alarm related detector SQ No. Specification not supported

Feed hold Spindle stop

XE

256 (F56)

TOOL CLAMP SENSOR MALFUNCTION

The clamp sensor does not come ON even when Feed hold Spindle stop the tool clamp command is assigned. Alternatively, it does not go OFF even when the tool unclamp command is assigned. (20 seconds) The clamp sensor is turned OFF during milling spindle rotation. (For other machines than VORTEX 1060V/8) The clamp sensor does not come ON even when Feed hold the tool clamp command is assigned. Spindle stop The clamp sensor or mis-clamp sensor does not go ON even when the tool unclamp command is assigned. (20 seconds) The clamp sensor is turned OFF during milling spindle rotation. (For VORTEX 1060V/8 only)

SQ11 Y311, X295

SQ11, SQ115 Y311, X295, X29E

257 (F57)

TOOL UNCLAMP SENSOR MALFUNCTION

The unclamp sensor does not come ON even when the tool unclamp command is assigned. Alternatively, it does not go OFF even when the tool clamp command is assigned. (20 seconds) The unclamp sensor is turned ON during milling spindle rotation.

Feed hold Spindle stop

SQ10 Y311, X296

258 (F58)

ATC COVER SENSOR (OPEN) MALF.

The cover open sensor does not come ON even Waiting for sensor input signal when the ATC cover open command is assigned. Alternatively, it does not go OFF even when the ATC cover close command is assigned. (30 seconds) The cover close sensor does not come ON even Waiting for sensor input signal when the ATC cover close command is assigned. Alternatively, it does not go OFF even when the ATC cover open command is assigned. (30 seconds)

SQ22 Y356, X2D2

259 (F59)

ATC COVER SENSOR (CLOSE) MALF.

SQ23 Y357, X2D3

260 (F60) 261 (F61) 262 (F62) 263 (F63) 264 (F64) 265 (F65)

ATC ARM EXTEND SENSOR MALF. ATC ARM RETRACT SENSOR MALF. GEAR SENSOR (HIGH SPEED) MALF. GEAR SENSOR (MIDDLE SPEED) MALF GEAR SENSOR (LOW SPEED) MALF. NEUTRAL SENSOR MALFUNCTION Feed hold Spindle stop Feed hold Spindle stop

Specification not supported Specification not supported Specification not supported Specification not supported Specification not supported Specification not supported

3-29

ALARM

Alarm No. (SQ coil No.) 266 (F66)

Alarm message PALLET CLAMP SENSOR MALF.

Description

Machine status

Alarm related detector SQ No. SQ54 Y339, X2B1

The pallet unclamp sensor does not go OFF Waiting for sensor input even when the pallet unclamp command is signal assigned. Alternatively, it does not come ON even when the pallet clamp signal is assigned. (Sensor ON: Input OFF, Sensor OFF: Input ON) The pallet clamp sensor does not come ON even Waiting for sensor input when the pallet unclamp command is assigned. signal Alternatively, it does not go OFF even when the pallet clamp signal is assigned. (Sensor ON: Input OFF, Sensor OFF: Input ON)

267 (F67)

PALLET UNCLAMP SENSOR MALF.

SQ55 Y339, X2B0

268 (F68) 269 (F69) 270 (F70) 271 (F71) 272 (F72) 273 (F73) 274 (F74) 275 (F75) 276 (F76) 277 (F77) 278 (F78) 279 (F79) 280 (F80) 281 (F81) 282 (F82) 283 (F83)

MAGAZINE IN POS SENSOR MALF. MAGAZINE STOP PIN SENSOR MALF. X AXIS ORIGIN A command was given for tool change (ATC), RETURN UNFINISH tool length measurement, pallet change, etc. without X-axis zero-point return. Y AXIS ORIGIN A command was given for tool change (ATC), RETURN UNFINISH tool length measurement, pallet change, etc. without Y-axis zero-point return. Z AXIS ORIGIN A command was given for tool change (ATC), RETURN UNFINISH tool length measurement, pallet change, etc. without Z-axis zero-point return. 4 AXIS ORIGIN A command was given for tool change (ATC), RETURN UNFINISH tool length measurement, pallet change, etc. without 4th-axis zero-point return. SPDL CANNOT ROT (UNCLAMPED TOOL) SPDL CANNOT ROT (SPECIAL TOOL) SPDL CANNOT ROT (ATC ARM POS) NO GEAR SHIFT (UNCLAMPED TOOL) NO GEAR SHIFT (SPECIAL TOOL) NO GEAR SHIFT (ATC ARM POS ERR) NO ORIENT (UNCLAMPED TOOL) NO SPDL ORIENT (SPECIAL TOOL) A milling spindle orient command was assigned when the tool was not clamped. Spindle orientation is disabled. Attempted operation does not start. Attempted operation does not start. Attempted operation does not start. Attempted operation does not start.

Specification not supported Specification not supported

A spindle rotation command was assigned when Spindle rotation disabled the tool was not clamped. A spindle rotation command was assigned when Spindle rotation disabled a special tool (touch sensor, chip removing tool) was mounted on the milling spindle. The spindle cannot be started since the ATC arm is not at the correct position. Spindle rotation disabled

SQ11, X295 SQ10, X296

Specification not supported Specification not supported Specification not supported SQ11, X295 SQ10, X296

A milling spindle orient command was assigned Spindle orientation is when a special tool (touch sensor, chip removing disabled. tool) was mounted on the milling spindle. Spindle orientation is disabled. Tool unclamp is disabled. SA1, X10C

NO ORIENT (ATC A milling spindle orient command was assigned ARM POS. ERROR) although the ATC arm is not in correct position. NOT UNCLAMPED (NOT STOP SPINDLE) The tool unclamp switch was set ON when the [SPDL JOG] menu key was pressed or when the milling spindle was rotating.

3-30

ALARM

Alarm No. (SQ coil No.) 284 (F84) 285 (F85) 286 (F86) 287 (F87) 288 (F88) 289 (F89)

Alarm message NOT UNCLAMPED (SPDL ORI. UNFIN) NOT UNCLAMPED (NOT MANUAL MODE) NOT AUTO MODE (UNCLAMPED TOOL) NOT AUTO MODE (MAG. MANUAL OPER) NO TOOL LOAD (TOOL IN ARM) NO TOOL LOAD (ARM/SFTER POS ERR)

Description The tool unclamp switch was set ON when the spindle was not oriented. The tool unclamp switch was set ON in a mode other than manual. The mode was switched to the automatic mode with the tool still unclamped. The mode was switched to the automatic mode while a magazine tool is changed manually.

Machine status Tool unclamp is disabled. Tool unclamp is disabled

Alarm related detector SQ No. Y3A6, X326 SA1, X10C

Mode switching is disabled. Mode switching is disabled.

SQ11, X295 SQ10, X296 SA1, X10C SA4 X2C4 Specification not supported

A tool load command was assigned although the Operation is disabled. ATC arm is not at the correct position. A tool load command was assigned although the magazine shifter is not at the correct position. A tool load command was assigned although the Operation is disabled. magazine is not indexed correctly. A tool unload command was assigned when a tool was in the indexed magazine pocket. A tool unload command was assigned although the ATC arm is not in the correct position. A tool unload command was assigned although the magazine shifter is not in the correct position. A tool unload command was assigned although the magazine is not indexed correctly. A tool was selected with a number which is higher than the number of tools accommodated by the magazine. Alternatively, a tool with the number zero has been selected although No. 0 pocket does not exist in the magazine. The magazine rotation command is executed although the magazine shifter is not in the correct position. Operation is disabled. Operation is disabled. Operation is disabled.

SQ35, X2C6 SQ36, X2C8 SQ37, X2C5

290 (F90) 291 (F91) 292 (F92)

NO TOOL LOAD (MAGAZINE POS ERR) NO TOOL UNLOAD (TOOL IN MAG.) NO UNLOAD (ARM/SHIFTER POS ERR)

SQ34, X2C0 SQ35, X2C6 SQ36, X2C8 SQ37, X2C5

293 (F93) 294 (F94)

NO TOOL UNLOAD (MAG. POS ERROR) NO TOOL SELECT (INCORRECT TNo.)

Operation is disabled.

295 (F95) 296 (F96)

NO TOOL SELECT (ARM/SFT POS ERR) NO TOOLCHANGE (AXIS NOT ATC POS)

Operation is disabled.

SQ35, X2C6 SQ36, X2C8 SQ37, X2C5 X-axis second zero point Y-axis first zero point Z-axis second zero point B-axis first zero point Specification not supported Specification not supported

With an EIA program, positioning commands for Operation is disabled. the ATC position are not specified while automatic positioning at the ATC position is not executed.

297 (F97) 298 (F98)

NO SPINDLE START (GEAR POS ERR) NO SPINDLE ORIENT (GEAR POS ERR)

3-31

ALARM

Alarm No. (SQ coil No.) 300 (F100)

Alarm message MAGAZINE SHIFTER POS. MALF.

Description The magazine shifter load or unload command was not completed. (10 seconds) The magazine shifter was not stopped at the correct stand-by position.

Machine status Waiting for sensor input signal

Alarm related detector SQ No. SQ35, X2C6 SQ36, X2C8 SQ37, X2C5

301 (F101)

MAGAZINE SHIFTER MISS OP.

Operation is disabled. 1. The ATC command was assigned in the state the magazine shifter is at the ATC side without a tool in the milling spindle and the ATC standby pocket (this is unusual state and, thus, tool loading is impossible). 2. The ATC command was assigned in the state the magazine shifter is at the magazine side with a tool held in both the milling spindle and the ATC standby pocket (this is unusual state and, thus, tool unloading is impossible). 3. In manual magazine shifter operation for maintenance, the ATC standby pocket is not in the magazine shifter operation enabled position.

302 (F102)

CARRIER VERTICAL/ HORIZON MALF.

The carrier vertical sensor is not turned ON Waiting for the sensor although the carrier vertical position command is input signal assigned. (15 seconds) The carrier horizontal sensor is not turned ON although the carrier horizontal position command is assigned. (15 seconds)

SQ28 (X2D0) SQ27 (X2D1)

303 (F103)

CARRIER TILT MISS OP.

The carrier vertical or horizontal position command was assigned although the carrier was in a position where carrier angle change is not allowed. The ATC arm stopped during rotation at an incorrect position. (10 seconds) The ATC operation has not completed within 10 seconds.

Operation is disabled.

304 (F104)

ATC ARM POSITION MALF.

305 (F105)

MAGAZINE The thermal relay of the magazine shifter motor SHIFTER THERMAL was tripped (overcurrent). TRIP The alarm state cannot be eliminated until the thermal relay is reset automatically. ATC/ CARRIE /2PC DRIVER ALARM (*1, *2, *3) An alarm occurred with the respective unit drivers. Indication of 1 at *1 area An alarm occurred with the ATC arm rotation motor driver. Indication of 2 at *2 area An alarm occurred with the carrier drive motor driver. Indication of 4 at *3 area An alarm occurred with the pallet change drive motor driver.

Operation is disabled.

FR14, X2CD

306 (F106)

Operation of the corresponding unit is disabled.

308 (F108)

M.M.S. ALARM

The skip signal for the touch sensor tool was turned on during raid traverse of an axis.

Emergency stop

Skip signal X178

3-32

ALARM

Alarm No. (SQ coil No.) 309 (F109)

Alarm message PALLET STAND ALARM (*, , ) (Option)

Description

Machine status Feed hold

Alarm related detector SQ No.

Indication of 1 at * area Although the lock pin DOWN command was assigned, there was no signal input from the lower end confirmation sensor. Indication of 2 at * area The pallet hook was in the upper position when the JOG/INDEX mode was selected. Indication of 3 at * area An alarm occurred with the inverter unit.

SQ181 (X2F7) (M4931)

SQ51 (X2E1)

A50 (X2FF) (M4939) Only display of message Waiting for the sensor input signal X14-0 15 seconds SQ50 (X2E0) UP Y374-1 X2E0-0 15 seconds DOWN Y375-1 X2E0-1 15 seconds SQ51 (X2E1) DOWN Y375-1 X2E1-0 15 15 seconds UP Y374-1 X2E1-1 15 15 seconds

311 (F111) 312 (F112)

SCALE AIR PRESSURE DOWN PALLET HOOK UP RS. MALF.

Air purge pressure has dropped for 5 seconds for the position detection scale. (option) Although the pallet hook UP command was executed, the pallet hook upper end sensor is not turned on (15 seconds). Although the pallet hook DOWN command was executed, the pallet hook upper end sensor is not turned off (15 seconds).

313 (F113)

PALLET HOOK DOWN RS. MALF.

Although the pallet hook DOWN command was Waiting for the sensor assigned, the pallet hook lower end sensor is not input signal turned on (15 seconds). Although the pallet hook UP command was assigned, the pallet hook lower end sensor is not turned off (15 seconds).

314 (F114)

PALLET HOOK POSITION MALF.

The pallet hook stopped during rotation at an incorrect position (15 seconds). Pallet hook rotation was not completed within 15 seconds.

315 (F115) 316 (F116) 317 (F117) 318 (F118)

TOOL BREAKAGE DETECT ALARM PC_MOP. (JIG UNCLAMP) The pallet 1 cycle button was pressed although the hydraulic fixture was not in the clamped state. (option) Pallet 1 cycle function cannot be set. Feed hold Spindle stop Operation is disabled.

Specification not supported Specification not supported Y315, X3A4

SP. THR. COOLANT While through-spindle coolant was discharged, PRESS. DOWN coolant pressure was dropped for 5 seconds. (option) FIXTURE JIG ALARM The pallet 1 cycle button was pressed although the hydraulic fixture was not in the clamped state. Fixture clamp or unclamp operation was attempted although the pallet change hold lamp was ON. (option)

Specification not supported

319 (F119) 320 (F120)

SPINDLE ROTATION PROHIBITED PC_MOP. (NOT TABLE 0 DEG)

A milling spindle start command was assigned although the milling spindle coupling was clamped. The pallet change command was assigned although the table is not at the 0 position.

Operation is disabled.

NC call stop

3-33

ALARM

Alarm No. (SQ coil No.) 321 (F121)

Alarm message PC_MOP. (M-ARM EXT.)

Description A pallet change command was assigned although the measuring stand was extended. A pallet change command was assigned although the measuring stand cover was open.

Machine status NC call stop

Alarm related detector SQ No. SQ40, X2B8 SQ41, X2B9 SQ145, X2BE SQ146, X2BF SQ94, X2BB SQ95, X2BC

322 (F122) 323 (F123) 324 (F124) 325 (F125) 326 (F126)

PC_MOP. (NOT X,B ZERO POSI.) PC_MOP. PC_MOP. (NOT STAND 0 DEG.) C CLAMP MOP. TOOL EYE ALARM (*1, *2, )

A pallet change command was assigned although the X- and B-axis were not at the zero point position. Operation error for 6-pallet changer (option) The pallet stand is not locked at the 0 position.

NC call stop

NC call stop NC call stop SQ57, X2F0

The C-axis clamp command was assigned in the Operation is disabled. turning operation mode. An alarm related to TOOL EYE occurred. Indication of 1 at *1 area - The TOOL EYE arm extend command was assigned although the spindle was rotating. - The TOOL EYE arm extend command was assigned although the TOOL EYE arm cover was not opened. Indication of 999 at *2 area - The TOOL EYE arm extend sensor was not turned ON or the TOOL EYE arm retract sensor was not turned OFF although the TOOL EYE arm extend command was assigned. - The TOOL EYE arm retract sensor was not turned ON or the TOOL EYE arm extend sensor was not turned OFF although the TOOL EYE arm retract command was assigned. Operation is disabled. SQ40, X2B8 SQ41, X2B9

327 (F127)

TOOL EYE EXT. COVER OPEN (*, , )

The command below was assigned although the Operation is disabled. TOOL EYE arm was in the extended position or the TOOL EYE arm cover was open. Indication of 2 at * area The turning spindle rotation command was assigned. Indication of 5 at * area The C-axis rotation command was assigned. Indication of 119 at * area The C-axis ON/OFF command was assigned. Indication of 219 at * area The turning spindle orientation command was assigned.

328 (F128)

PALLET 1 CYCLE STOP

A pallet change command is given before pallet setup is complete.

Machining cycle can be HL8, Y372 started by turning on the 1 SB9, X2F2 cycle lamp by pressing the 1 cycle switch after mounting workpieces on the pallet.

3-34

ALARM

Alarm No. (SQ coil No.) 329 (F129)

Alarm message TOOL CHANGE MISS OP.

Description The tool change command was assigned although the ATC arm was not at the specified position. Tool change was attempted manually although the magazine shifter was not at the waiting position.

Machine status Arm is not at 0 position. Arm is not at the retract position. Shifter is not at waiting position.

Alarm related detector SQ No.

330 (F130)

PALLET CLAMP/ UNCLAMP MISS OP.

Pallet clamp or unclamp was attempted although Pallet hook is not at the the pallet hook was not at the specified position. forward/reverse end. An attempt was made to unclamp a pallet although the X- or C-axis is not at the pallet change position and the table is not clamped. An attempt was made to clamp or unclamp a pallet in a mode other than the C-axis mode. The X- or C-axis is not at the second zero point Table not clamped. Not in the C-axis mode

331 (F131) 332 (F132)

TIME OVER ALM

Feed hold ATC operation does not terminate within 5 minutes after the ATC command is issued and each axis stops moving. Multiple pallet changer alarm See Operating Manual for Multiple Pallet Changer for details. The machine set up switch was set in the I position when the spindle is stopped in the orientation position. Feed hold Spindle stop C-axis connection/ disconnection operation is disabled. SA3, X10A

MULTI PALLET ALARM

333 (F133) 334 (F134)

SET UP SW. MISS. OP. (SP. ORIENT)

CAXIS CONECT/ There was no confirmation sensor signal of the DISCONECT SENS. C-axis state. MLF - The spindle is held in the C-axis connected state. - The spindle is held in the C-axis disconnected state.

SQ220 Y333, X2B3 SQ221 Y334, X2B4

335 (F135) 336 (F136)

TABLE UNCLAMP MISS OP. ANALOG INPUT ERR. (LEVEL SENSOR)

The C-axis movement command was assigned although the pallet was not clamped. Analog input voltage too high. (Alarm for 0 V line disconnection) Analog input voltage too low. (Alarm for +24 V signal line disconnection) (option) Current time is not set. (option) Oil in the hydraulic unit must be changed. (option) Spindle lubricating oil must be changed. (option)

SP54, X2B0 SP55, X2B1 R2092 bit 5 R2092 bit 6 R2092 bit F R2092 bit 0

337 (F137) 338 (F138) 339 (F139) 340 (F140) 341 (F141) 342 (F142)

NOT FINISH TIME ADJUSTED PLEASE EXCHANGE OIL (HYD. UNIT) PLEASE EXCHANGE OIL (SP. LUBE)

R2092 bit 1

PLEASE SUPPLY Slideway lubricating oil level is low. OIL (WAY LUB-UNIT (option) PLEASE SUPPLY OIL (COOLANT TANK PLEASE SUPPLY OIL (SP. LUBE) Coolant level is low. (expanded self-diagnose function; option) Spindle lubricating oil level is low. (expanded self-diagnose function; option) Only display of message

R2092 bit A R2092 bit B

Only display of message

R2092 bit 9 or C

3-35

ALARM

Alarm No. (SQ coil No.) 343 (F143)

Alarm message PALLET CHANGE ALARM (*, , )

Description Indication of 1 at * area

Machine status

Alarm related detector SQ No. SQ225 X2BA

Feed hold The pallet correct clamp sensor is not turned ON Spindle stop within 5 seconds although the pallet has been changed. Indication of 2 at * area The pallet square/round shape discrimination sensor has turned ON without a pallet. (For V6 only) Indication of 1252 at * area After upward movement of the pallet hook, the pallet hook seating sensor did not turn on within 5 seconds. Indication of 3 at * area The pallet correct clamp sensor is not turned OFF within 1 second although the hook was raised.

344 (F144) 345 (F145) 346 (F146) 347 (F147) 348 (F148) 349 (F149) 350 (F150) 351 (F151)

PARAMETER ERROR R2250R2259 CANT CLOSE ATC COVER_BIG TOOL HIGH PRE COOL SYS. PRE ALARM PC_MOP. (SPINDLE = LONG TOOL) PALLET UNCLAMP MISS OP. TRANSMIT PUMP OFF -> ON SPINDLE OVER HEAT T-SP CONECT/ There was no confirmation sensor signal of the DISCONECT SENS. turning operation spindle state. MALF - The spindle is held in the turning operation spindle connected state. - The spindle is held in the turning operation spindle disconnected state. Feed hold Spindle stop Pallet unclamp command was given while the table was unclamped. High-pressure coolant (option) Pallet unclamp command is not executed. Pressure of the high-pressure coolant unit is below the specified level. (option) Feed hold Spindle stop

Specification not supported Specification not supported X139 Specification not supported Specification not supported SP6, X292 X39C Specification not supported SQ222 Y331, X2B5 SQ223 Y332, X2B6

352 (F152)

CANT T-SP ROTATION

Although the pallet that does not allow spindle rotation in the turning spindle mode is mounted, the turning spindle rotation command was given. (option)

353 (F153) 354 (F154) 355 (F155) 356 (F156) CHIP CONVEYOR ALARM OIL AIR UNIT PRESSURE DOWN OIL AIR UNIT LEVEL DOWN The motor of the chip conveyor has been tripped. Stop in the single block mode X3 X4 (CONSEP2000) SP3, XB SL3, XA

The hydraulic pressure signal of the oil-air unit is Feed hold not turned ON/OFF. Spindle stop Oil-air unit lubricating oil level is low. (5 seconds) Only display of message

3-36

ALARM

Alarm No. (SQ coil No.) 357 (F157)

Alarm message OIL AIR UNIT ALARM

Description Oil-air unit lubricating oil level is left low. After the occurrence of alarm No. 356, lubricating oil has not been added within 75 cycles of lubrication pump operation. Filter clogged signal does not remain ON for 5 seconds or longer. After the occurrence of alarm No. 358, accumulated operation time of through-spindle coolant (milling spindle) system with filter OFF reached 3 hours.

Machine status Feed hold Spindle stop

Alarm related detector SQ No. SL3, XA

358 (F158) 359 (F159)

LINE FILTER MALFUNCTION LINE FILTER ALARM

Only display of message Stop in the single block mode Spindle stop Coolant stop

XE XE

360 (F160) 361 (F161) 362 (F162) 363 (F163) 364 (F164)

TOOL ID HEAD RETRACT SENS. MALF PAPER FILTER END HIGH PRE COOL SYS. THERMAL TRIP HIGH PRESSURE UNIT ALARM CANT OPEN/ CLOSE MNL ATC COVER Paper filter for coolant must be replaced. (option) The thermal relay tripped state of the highpressure coolant unit is detected. (option) Pressure of the high-pressure coolant unit is below the specified level. (option) Only display of message Feed hold Spindle stop Feed hold Spindle stop

Specification not supported XD XD

X13A

Only display of message The ATC cover open/close command was assigned although the carrier was in the range from position 3 to the ATC or the Y-axis is in the + range. ATC operation cannot continue. Specification not supported

365 (F165) 366 (F166) 367 (F167)

TOOL HIVE ROBOT The sensor of the mechanism that locks the LOCK SENS. MALF TOOL HIVE robot in the ATC position was defective. TOOL HIVE CONTROLLER ALARM B AXIS CLAMP/ UNCALMP SENS. MALF Alarm related to TOOL HIVE has occurred. (option)

The B-axis unclamp sensor was not turned off or Waiting for sensor input signal the B-axis clamp sensor was not turned on although the B-axis clamp command was assigned. The B-axis clamp sensor was not turned off or the B-axis unclamp sensor was not turned on although the B-axis unclamp command was assigned.

SQ210/211 (X297/298)

368 (F168) 369 (F169) 370 (F170) 371 (F171) 372 (F172)

TOOL HIVE INTERRUPT WARNING SET UP SW. ON! SPINDLE TRIAL RUN !! OVERLOAD DETECTION T-SP MODE->C AXIS MODE TIME OVR SPINDLE CLAMP MISS.OP COOLANT LEVEL TOO LOW

Manual TOOL HIVE interruption (option) The machine set up switch is turned on although the automatic mode is selected. Trial run is required (high-speed spindle, option). For details, refer to the Operating Manual for Overload Detector. (option) After the execution of the operation mode change command to select the C-axis mode, mode change has not been completed although the specified length of time has elapsed. The milling spindle clamp command was assigned although the milling spindle was not in the orient-stop state. Coolant level is low. (X3A7) OFF (Ogura filter, option) Waiting for the completion of operation SA3, X10A Specification not supported

373 (F173) 374 (F174)

Waiting for the completion X324, X326 of operation Stop in the single block mode X3A7

3-37

ALARM

Alarm No. (SQ coil No.) 375 (F175) 376 (F176) 377 (F177) 378 (F178)

Alarm message COOLANT LEVEL LOW WARNING WORK NO. SEARCH ERROR WORK NO. SET ERROR WARMING UP !!

Description Although the suction pump is turned on, coolant tank level is not raised. (option) The program specified for warm-up operation is not found. The program number of the program specified for warm-up operation is illegal; 0 or exceeding 9999. Warm-up program is being executed. (High-speed spindle option)

Machine status Only display of message

Alarm related detector SQ No. X3A5, X3A6, X3A7 R488 R2117 R488 R2117

The alarm message is cleared at the completion of warm-up operation, permitting the execution of normal operation. Spindle stop Specification not supported

379 (F179) 380 (F180) 381 (F181) 382 (F182)

SPINDLE OVER LOAD PUSH MF1 TO READ SPINDLE LOAD IMPOS. T-ID READ (T-DATA) IMPOS. T-ID READ (NO TOOL)

During the execution of warm-up operation, spindle load exceeded the specified value. (High-speed spindle option)

Tool ID readout was attempted though tool data exists. (R2080 = 101H) Tool ID readout was attempted though no tool or a tool without tool ID was mounted. The tool ID head not at the readout position. (R2080 = 102H) Alarm No. 381 occurred. (R2080 = 101H) Alarm No. 382 occurred. (R2080 = 102H) Tool ID data readout not completed within the preset time. (R2080 = 120H) Response signal remaining on. (R2080 = 121H) Read tool No. is 0 or too large. (R2080 = 122H) Communication impossible. (Response signal remaining off). (R2080 = 123H) Tool data exists. Tool ID exists. (Readout according to the command from tool transport system failed.) (R2080 = 110H)

R2080 R2080

383 (F183)

TOOL ID READ ALARM

R2080

384 (F184) 385 (F185)

IMPOS. T-ID WRITE Tool ID data writing was attempted although (NO DATA) without tool data. (R2080 = 201H) IMPOS. T-ID WRITE Tool ID data writing attempted without a tool or a (NO TOOL) tool not equipped with tool ID. The tool ID head not at the writing position. (R2080 = 202H)

R2080 R2080

3-38

ALARM

Alarm No. (SQ coil No.) 386 (F186)

Alarm message TOOL ID WRITE ALARM

Description Alarm No. 384 occurred. (R2080 = 201H) Alarm No. 385 occurred. (R2080 = 202H) Tool ID data writing not completed within the preset time. (R2080 = 220H) Response signal remaining on. (R2080 = 221H) Tool No. is 0 or too large. (R2080 = 222H) Communication impossible. (Response signal remaining off). (R2080 = 223H) No tool data. (Writing according to the command from tool transport system failed.) (R2080 = 210H)

Machine status

Alarm related detector SQ No. R2080

387 (F187) 388 (F188) 389 (F189) 390 (F190)

TOOL ID COMPARE Response signal remaining ON or OFF. ALARM PALLET ID ALARM PALLET ID UP/ DOWN SENSOR MALF. C AXIS MODE->TSP MODE TIME OVR Pallet ID head upper or lower end detection sensor does not go ON. After the execution of the operation mode Waiting for the completion change command to select the turning operation of operation mode, mode change has not been completed although the specified length of time has elapsed. Alarm No. 392 THERMAL DISPLACEMENT OFFSET ER occurred 10 times. Spindle over heat alarm Spindle temperature raised by 2C (3.6F) or more in approx. 6 min. (R2033 bit 0: ON) Spindle temperature alarm Temperature difference between spindle and base became 20C (36F) or more. (R2033 bit 1: ON) Parameter error Thermal displacement compensation parameter out of specified range. (R2033 bit 2: ON) Hardware error Disconnection, short circuit etc. occurred in the base side temperature sensor. (R2033 bit 3: ON) Breakage or short circuit occurred in the spindle side temperature sensor. (R2033 bit 4: ON) Feed hold Spindle stop Feed hold Spindle stop When R2104 bit B = 1, normal operation is possible in spite of an alarm. Compensation cannot be performed due to the alarm.

R2080 bit 5, 0 R2018

391 (F191) 392 (F192)

THERMAL DISPLACEMENT SYSTEM ER THERMAL DISPLACEMENT OFFSET ER

R4630 to R4639

R2033

393 (F193) 394 (F194) 395 (F195)

BREAKER TRIP

Stop in the single block mode An attempt was made to start automatic operation in the state the coolant stop was selected. Only display of message

Specification not supported XF X155

COOLANT STOP!!

3-39

ALARM

Alarm No. (SQ coil No.) 396 (F196)

Alarm message TOUCH SENSOR ALARM (*, , )

Description No indication at * area - Expiration of the battery life of the touch sensor tool was detected. Indication of 281 at * area - The touch sensor unit was turned OFF by M282 although the touch sensor tool was mounted in the spindle.

Machine status Feed hold

Alarm related detector SQ No. X18

Only display of message M281 clears the alarm message and turns ON the touch sensor unit. Only display of message SQ44, X2B2

397 (F197) 398 (F198)

TABLE CLAMP PRS. ALARM OPERATION SWITCH MALFUNCTION

Table clamped state cannot be detected.

Emergency stop In the switching-on processing, abnormality of, or dangerous setting at, the following operation switches has been detected: Start button, Start button for the turning/milling spindle, Axis movement buttons, Machine set up switch, Tool unclamp switch, Magazine indexing buttons, Pallet-locking pin switch (Unlock). Power supply to the motors remained shut off even after releasing of the emergency stop state. Power supply to the motors remained shut off even after closing of the operators door. Power supply to the magazine motor remained shut off even after closing of the magazine door. Power supply to the pallet changer motor remained shut off even after closing of the pallet changer door. Specification not supported

399 (F199)

POWER CUT OFF MALFUNCTION

3-40

ALARM

Alarm No. (SQ coil No.) 1210 (F210) 1211 (F211)

Alarm message TOOL FITTING ALARM

Description After the ATC of the milling spindle tool, the tool seating detection sensor did not turn on. (Tool seating detection option)

Machine status Only display of message

Alarm related detector SQ No. X299

TOOL FITTING ERR This alarm is displayed to indicate that a tool (CUTTING I.L.) seating detection sensor error has occurred. This state is maintained until the ATC (tool unclamp) command has been issued next time. (Tool seating detection option) CANT MODE CHANGE T-SP ROT. PROHIBITED (NO PALLET) RECOVERY MODE Changing the operation mode has been attempted during tapping.

Cutting startup interlock

X299

1220 (F220) 1221 (F221)

Only display of message

X202

The turning spindle rotation command has been Feed hold issued although no pallet was in the machine. Spindle stop (Palletech option) The [RECOVERY MODE] menu function has been made valid since Alarm No. 343 ( 1, , ) was raised. The foot switch of the tool removing unit has been stepped on during milling spindle tool magazine operation or with the manual interruption switch remaining set to the AUTO position. (Tool removing unit option) After issuance of the tool removing unit ON command, the tool removing unit extend sensor did not turn on within the required time. After issuance of the tool removing unit OFF command, the tool removing unit retract sensor did not turn on within the required time. (Tool removing unit option) Only display of message

1222 (F222) 1230 (F230)

TOOL EXTRACT. DEVICE MISS OP.

Only display of message

1231 (F231)

TOOL EXTRACT. DEVICE ALARM

Magazine rotation stops.

1252 (F252)

SPDL CANNOT ROT (TOOL MISSCLAMP)

During milling tool rotation, a tool mis-clamping status has been detected. The milling spindle rotation command has been assigned with the tool clamped not properly. The milling spindle rotation command has been assigned without a tool mounted. (For VORTEX 1060V/8 only)

Feed hold Spindle stop

X29E

1258 (F258)

SPDL CANNOT ROT (TAP TOOL)

The spindle rotation command has been manually assigned with a tapping tool mounted in the milling spindle.

Spindle rotation disabled

3-41

ALARM

Alarms 1300 to 1347 occur only for the ram spindle specifications.
Alarm No. (SQ coil No.) 1300 (F300) 1301 (F301) Alarm message RAM-ATC DOOR SENSOR MALF. RAM-T. CLAMP/ UNC. SENSOR MALF. Description After issuance of the ram-spindle ATC door open/close command, the door open/close sensor did not turn on within the required time. Machine status Only display of message Alarm related detector SQ No. XE8, XE9 YE8, YE9 X281, X282 Y300, Y301

After issuance of the ram spindle tool clamp Feed hold command, the tool clamp sensor did not turn on Spindle stop or the unclamp sensor did not turn off within the required time. After issuance of the ram spindle tool unclamp command, the tool unclamp sensor did not turn on or the clamp sensor did not turn off within the required time. During ram spindle rotation, the clamp sensor and unclamp sensor turned off and on, respectively.

1302 (F302)

Only display of message SHIFTER ATC/MAG- After issuance of the ram-spindle shifter ATC S. SENSOR MALF. side command, the ATC position sensor did not turn on or the magazine position sensor did not turn off within the required time. After issuance of the ram-spindle shifter magazine side command, the magazine position sensor did not turn on or the ATC position sensor did not turn off within the required time.

XFC, XFD YFC, YFD

1303 (F303)

SHIFTER EXT/RET SENSOR MALF.

After issuance of the ram-spindle shifter extend command, the extend sensor did not turn on or the retract sensor did not turn off within the required time. After issuance of the ram-spindle shifter retract command, the retract sensor did not turn on or the extend sensor did not turn off within the required time.

Only display of message

XFE, XFF YFE, YFF

1304 (F304)

RAM-SFT CLAMP/ UNCL. SONSOR MALF

After issuance of the ram-spindle shifter clamp command, the clamp sensor did not turn on or the unclamp sensor did not turn off within the required time. After issuance of the ram-spindle shifter unclamp command, the unclamp sensor did not turn on or the clamp sensor did not turn off within the required time.

Only display of message

XF0, XF1 YFA, YFB

1305 (F305)

Only display of message RAM-SFT TOOL H/V After issuance of the ram spindle tool nose SENSOR MALF. upward command, the nose UP sensor did not turn on or the nose SIDE sensor did not turn off within the required time. After issuance of the ram spindle tool nose sideways command, the nose SIDE sensor did not turn on or the nose UP sensor did not turn off within the required time.

XF6, XF7 YF7, YF8

3-42

ALARM

Alarm No. (SQ coil No.) 1306 (F306)

Alarm message RAM-CARRIER POS. SENSOR MALF.

Description After issuance of the #1 ram-spindle carrier ATC side command, the #1 carrier ATC position sensor did not turn on or the magazine position sensor did not turn off within the required time. After issuance of the #1 ram-spindle carrier magazine side command, the magazine position sensor did not turn on or the #1 carrier ATC position sensor did not turn off within the required time.

Machine status Only display of message

Alarm related detector SQ No. XE3, XE4 YEB, YEC

1307 (F307)

GRIPPER CLAMP/ UNCL. SENSOR MALF.

After turn-on of gripper clamp signal output, the gripper clamp sensor did not turn on or the gripper unclamp sensor did not turn off within the required time. After turn-off of gripper unclamp signal output, the gripper unclamp sensor did not turn on or the gripper clamp sensor did not turn off within the required time.

Only display of message

XFA, XFB YF9

1308 (F308)

RAM-MAG STAND SENSOR MALF.

(Only for 6-tool magazine specifications) The specified time or more elapsed when either of the following sensors of the machining setup unit was off: Pot UP/DOWN, pot in ATC/escape position, or tool UP/DOWN

Only display of message

1309 (F309)

RAM-MAGAZINE POSITION MALF.

The magazine for ram spindle tools was not in a Only display of message stopped status when the command for moving the ram-spindle shifter to the magazine position was assigned. Only display of message

R8768.1

1310 (F310) 1311 (F311)

RAM-SFT TOOL H/V The direction of the shifter was not sideways POSITION MALF. when the command for moving the ram-spindle shifter to the magazine position was assigned. Y-AXIS POSITION MALF. When the command for a change from ram spindle machining mode to milling mode was assigned, the machine coordinate of the Y-axis was on the positive side with reference to its home position. When the command for a change from milling mode to ram spindle machining mode was assigned, the machine coordinate of the Z-axis was on the negative side with reference to its 3rd home position.

Feed hold

1312 (F312)

Z-AXIS POSITION MALF.

Feed hold

1313 (F313)

W-AXIS POSITION MALF.

Feed hold When the command for a change from ram spindle machining mode to milling mode was assigned, the machine coordinate of the W-axis was on the positive side with reference to its 2nd home position. A tool of T800 or more has been specified in milling spindle ATC command M6. Milling spindle ATC command M6 has been assigned in ram spindle machining mode. Feed hold

1314 (F314)

ATC TOOL SELECT MISS.

1315 (F315)

RAM-MAG DOOR IS OPEN

The magazine door for ram spindle tools is open. While the magazine door is open, magazine rotation and the ATC operation are prohibited.

Only display of message

XE1

3-43

ALARM

Alarm No. (SQ coil No.) 1316 (F316)

Alarm message RAM-ATC DOOR IS CLOSE

Description

Machine status

Alarm related detector SQ No. XE8, XE9

The door for ram-spindle ATC was in a closed Only display of message status when the command for moving the #2 ram-spindle carrier to the tool change position or to the standby position was assigned. The tool unclamp command was assigned when Feed hold the ram spindle was not oriented. Indication of 1 at *1 area The milling spindle was rotating when the ram spindle machining mode select command was assigned. Indication of 2 at *2 area The turning spindle was rotating when the ram spindle machining mode select command was assigned. * Indication of 3 at *2 area The ram spindle was rotating when the ram spindle machining mode deselect command was assigned. Feed hold

1317 (F317) 1318 (F318)

RAM-SPINDLE ORIENT INCOMPLEATE SPINDLE ROTATION (*1, , )

Y6A6, X626

1319 (F319)

NO RAM-TOOL IN MAGAZINE

(Only for 6-tool magazine specifications) Detection of the specified tool at the tool index position failed when the ram spindle ATC command was assigned. A tool was detected in the magazine pocket when the command for moving the ram-spindle shifter to the magazine position was assigned.

Only display of message

1320 (F320) 1321 (F321)

NO RAM-T. UNLOAD (TOOL IN MAG.) NOT RAM-SHIFTER ATC SIDE.

Only display of message

XF9

The shifter was not in the ATC position when the Only display of message magazine rotate command for ram spindle tools was assigned. The shifter was not in the ATC position when the command for moving the #1 ram-spindle carrier to the magazine position was assigned. The shifter was not in the ATC position when the ram-spindle shifter extend or retract command was assigned.

1322 (F322)

NOT RAM-SHIFTER MAG. SIDE.

The shifter was not in the magazine position when the magazine rotate command for ram spindle tools was assigned. The shifter was not in the magazine position when the ram-spindle shifter extend or retract command was assigned. The shifter was not in the magazine position when the ram-spindle shifter unclamp command was assigned.

Only display of message

1323 (F323) 1324 (F324)

NOT RAM-SHIFTER EXT. POS. NOT RAM-SHIFTER RET. POS.

The shifter was not in the extend position when the ram-spindle shifter clamp command was assigned.

Only display of message

Only display of message The shifter was not present at the end of its retraction stroke when the command for moving the #1 ram-spindle carrier to the magazine position was assigned. The shifter was not present at the end of its retraction stroke when the command for moving the #1 ram-spindle carrier to the ATC position was assigned.

3-44

ALARM

Alarm No. (SQ coil No.) 1325 (F325)

Alarm message NOT RAM-POT STANDBY POS.

Description (Only for 6-tool magazine specifications) The ram-spindle tool pot was not present at its standby position when the magazine rotate command was assigned.

Machine status Only display of message

Alarm related detector SQ No.

1326 (F326)

NOT RAM-SHIFTER CLAMP

The shifter was not in a clamped condition when Only display of message the command for directing the ram spindle tool nose upward or sideways was assigned. The shifter was not in a clamped condition when the command for moving the #1 ram-spindle carrier to the magazine position was assigned.

1327 (F327) 1328 (F328)

NOT RAM-SHIFTER UNCLAMP NOT RAMCARRIER1 ATC SIDE

The shifter was not in an unclamped condition when the ram-spindle shifter extend or retract command was assigned. The #1 ram-spindle carrier was not present at the ATC position when the ATC arm rotate command was assigned. The #1 ram-spindle carrier was not present at the ATC position when the command for moving the #2 ram-spindle carrier to the standby position or the tool change position was assigned.

Only display of message

Only display of message

1329 (F329) 1330 (F330)

NOT RAMCARRIER1 MAG. SIDE RAM ATC MISS OP.

The #1 ram-spindle carrier was not present at the magazine end when the ram-spindle shifter unclamp command was assigned. (Only for 6-tool magazine specifications) During pot UP/DOWN operations: - The magazine for ram spindle tools was active. - The magazine door for ram spindle tools was open. - Manual interruption mode was not selected.

Only display of message

Only display of message

1331 (F331) 1332 (F332)

RAM SPIDLE CONNECTION INCOMP. RAM COOLANT MISS OP.

The key connection sensor of the ram spindle tool was off when the ram spindle rotate command was assigned. Ram-spindle air was being blown out when the ram-spindle coolant supply command was assigned. The ram-spindle coolant was supplied when the ram-spindle air blow command was assigned.

Ram spindle rotation stop

X283

Only display of message

1333 (F333)

MAG. DOOR OPEN MISS OP.

The magazine for ram-spindle tools, the ATC arm, and/or the #2 ram-spindle carrier was active when the ram-spindle magazine door open button was pressed.

Only display of message

1334 (F334) 1335 (F335)

RAM ATC POSITION The ATC arm shifted from the stopping area Only display of message MALF. when in a stopped status at an angle of 0 deg or 180 deg. RAM CARRIER2 POSITION MALF. The #2 ram-spindle carrier shifted from the stopping area when in a stopped status at the tool change position or standby position. The ram-spindle ATC door close command or ram-spindle ATC arm rotate command was assigned when the #2 carrier was absent at its standby position. Stop in the single block mode

1336 (F336)

RAM-TOOL FITTING The tool seating confirmation sensor has not ALARM turned on with the ram spindle tool clamped.

Cutting startup interlock

X29F Y304

3-45

ALARM

Alarm No. (SQ coil No.) 1337 (F337) 1338 (F338) 1339 (F339) 1340 (F340) 1341 (F341)

Alarm message RAM-SP. LUBE LEVEL LOW RAM-SP. LUBE ALARM RAM-SP. LUBE PRESSURE DOWN RAM HYDRAULIC UNIT THERMAL TRIP RAM-TOOL CLAMP TIME OVER

Description

Machine status

Alarm related detector SQ No. XBE

An oil level decrease signal from the lubricating Only display of message oil unit has been detected for at least 5 seconds in succession. An oil level decrease signal from the lubricating oil unit has been detected for at least 5 minutes in succession. The oil pressure decrease signal from the lubricating oil unit has been detected. A thermal trip signal from the ram-spindle hydraulic pump unit has been detected. Despite the elapse of 4 seconds from the turnon of the tool clamping valve after issuance of the ram spindle tool clamp command, the pressure sensor for detecting increases in clamping pressure has not turned on or the proximity sensor for the confirmation of clamping has not turned on. Stop in the single block mode Stop in the single block mode Feed hold

XBE

XBD XBC

Only display of message

1342 (F342)

RAM-TOOL UNCLAMP TIME OVER

Only display of message Despite the elapse of 4 seconds from the turnon of the tool unclamping valve after issuance of the ram spindle tool unclamp command, the pressure sensor for detecting increases in unclamping pressure has not turned on or the proximity sensor for the confirmation of unclamping has not turned on. An alarm signal from the ram-spindle magazine driver has been detected. Indication of 1 at *1 area MC alarm 1 is on. Indication of 2 at *1 area MC alarm 2 is on. Indication of 3 at *1 area Home position is lost. Indication of 4 at *1 area The battery voltage has decreased. Only display of message

1343 (F343)

RAM-MAG DRIVER ALARM (*1, , )

1344 (F344)

RAM-ATC ARM DRIVER ALARM (*1, , )

An alarm signal from the ram-spindle ATC driver Only display of message has been detected. Indication of 1 at *1 area MC alarm 1 is on. Indication of 2 at *1 area MC alarm 2 is on. Indication of 3 at *1 area Home position is lost. Indication of 4 at *1 area The battery voltage has decreased.

3-46

ALARM

Alarm No. (SQ coil No.) 1345 (F345)

Alarm message RAM-ATC CARRIER2 DRIVER ALARM (*1, , )

Description An alarm signal from the #2 ram-spindle carrier driver has been detected. Indication of 1 at *1 area MC alarm 1 is on. Indication of 2 at *1 area MC alarm 2 is on. Indication of 3 at *1 area Home position is lost. Indication of 4 at *1 area The battery voltage has decreased.

Machine status Only display of message

Alarm related detector SQ No.

1346 (F346)

T-DATA ERROR 1 When the tool was being returned to the (TOOL IN ATC ARM) standby position of the shifter, another tool was already present at the standby position. When the tool in the ram spindle was being moved to the ATC arm, another tool was already present in the ATC arm.

Only display of message

D821

1347 (F347) 1350 (F350)

T-DATA ERROR 2

When moving a tool from the ATC arm to the Only display of message ram spindle was attempted, the ATC arm did not have a tool. An error signal from the Palletech system has been detected. Refer to the Palletech system alarm list for further details. (Palletech option) Only display of message

D820

PALLETECH SYSTEM ERROR

D1999

3-47

ALARM

3-2-5
No. 400 Cause

No. 400 - No. 499, No. 1400 - No. 1499 (CNC screen operation error)
Message ( , , ) Type of error Stopped status Clearing procedure Display

Action 401 Cause

ILLEGAL FORMAT ( , , ) A L S Blue

The format of the input data is not an available one. Example: Negative data has been input to an item that rejects negative data input.

Action 402 Cause

Press the data cancellation key and then input correct data.

ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT

Blue

1. The work number of a display inhibiting program was specified. 2. The numeric value that has been input is out of the allowable range.

Action 403 Cause

1. The operation concerned cannot be performed for the program of display inhibition (Program management function). 2. Press the clear key and then input correct data. PROGRAM TOO LARGE ( , , ) A L S Blue

The limit of 2000 lines per program has been exceeded.

Action 404

Recreate the program so that it consists of 2000 lines or less.

MEMORY CAPACITY EXCEEDED

Blue

1. Additional creation of a machining program is no longer possible since the memory has already been filled up to its machining-program data storage capacity. Cause 2. Additional preparation of process control data is no longer possible since 100 sets of such data have already been stored. 3. Additional preparation of program layout data is no longer possible since 4000 sets of such data have already been stored. Action 405 Cause Make an available storage area by either erasing an unnecessary machining program from the memory or saving a machining program onto an external storage, and then create a new machining program. PROGRAM No. NOT FOUND ( , , ) A L S Blue

An attempt has been made to select a program whose work number has not been registered.

Action 406

Select a program whose work number has been registered.

MEMORY PROTECT

Blue

1. Inhibiting operation (editing, erasing, renumber of work number and entry of names) has been performed for the editinhibiting program. Cause 2. PROGRAM LOCK/ENABLE switch on the operating panel is set to the LOCK position. 3. An attempt has been made to carry out TOOL NAME ORDER operation on the TOOL DATA display while a tool remains set in the spindle. 1. The operation concerned cannot be performed for the edit-inhibiting program (program management function). Action 2. Set the PROGRAM LOCK/ENABLE switch to the ENABLE position. 3. Remove the tool from the spindle, and then carry out the operation once again.

3-48

ALARM

No. 407 Cause

Message DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

The number or character string that has been designated does not exist in the program.

Action 408 Cause

Designate an existent number or character string.

PROGRAM ERROR

Blue

The memory contents in the machining-program data storage area have been destroyed.

Action 409 Cause

Delete the corresponding program.

ILLEGAL INSERTION Program data insertion is not possible.

Blue

Action 410 Cause

It is not possible to insert data before the common unit.

ILLEGAL DELETION Program deletion is not possible.

Blue

- An attempt has been made to erase the common unit during editing of the MAZATROL program. Action 411 Cause It is not possible to delete the common unit. - Edit the program only after moving the cursor to the position where the data exists. POWER OFF DURING PROGRAM EDIT ( , , ) A L S Blue

A portion of the program may have been destroyed because power has been turned off during program editing.

Action 412 Cause

Check the corresponding program for incorrect data, and correct the program data if an error(s) exists in it.

SUB PROGRAM NESTING EXCEEDED

Blue

The number of repeats of subprogram nesting has exceeded nine times.

Action 413 Cause

Correct the program so that the total number of repeats of subprogram nesting becomes nine or less.

MAX. No. OF REGIST PROG EXCEEDED

Blue

The program registration has exceeded its maximum value available (Standard: 256 programs).

Action 414

Reduce the total number of registered programs by deleting unnecessary programs or moving them to the backup area or by saving unnecessary programs in an external storage unit and then deleting them. AUTO CALCULATION IMPOSSIBLE (Note, , ) A L S Blue

Automatic calculation of surface speed and feedrate is not possible. Note: The sub-error codes displayed when the [NAVIGATE] menu function is selected on the MACHINING NAVIGATIONPREDICTION display are listed below. 1: MAZATROL program file-opening error 2: MAZATROL program file-reading error 3: Tool materials mismatch error (when tool materials numbers are acquired) 4: Surface speed auto-setting error 5: File-opening error relating to the basic coefficients of the workpiece materials upper-limit values 6: Workpiece materials mismatch error 7: File-opening error relating to surface speed data tables 8: Tool materials mismatch error 2: Navigation file missing Check and correct the tool sequence data or machining unit of the program.

Cause

Action

3-49

ALARM

No. 415 Cause MIS-SET G CODE

Message ( , , )

Type of error B

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

A G-code not covered by the specifications has been designated.

Action 416 Cause

Check and correct the G-code addresses within the program.

AUTO PROCESS IMPOSSIBLE

Blue

Tools cannot be automatically developed because of errors of the machining-unit data.

Action 417 Cause

Check and correct the machining-unit data.

EDITING PROHIBITED

Blue

An attempt has been made to modify a program whose editing is prohibited.

Action 418 Cause

Modify the data only after canceling the parameter setting of prohibition of editing.

EIA/ISO CONVERTING

Blue

During EIA/ISO conversion, an attempt has been made to perform erasure, work number change or editing of the conversion source program. Or an attempt has been made to select the TOOL PATH CHECK display. During EIA/ISO conversion, erasure, work number change or editing of the conversion source program cannot be done. The TOOL PATH CHECK display cannot be selected. AUTO TAP PROCESS IMPOSSIBLE ( , , ) A L S Blue

Action 419

Cause

1. The pitch or other data cannot be automatically set because of incorrectness of the tap nominal diameter in the tapping-unit data. 2. Although the text file is referred to for the pipe tap auto-setting (D95 bit 0 = 1), the auto-setting function cannot be executed since the auto-setting text file (Pipescdt. txt) is incorrect or contains no data.

Action 420

1. Check and correct the tapping-unit data and tapping-tool sequence data of the program. 2. Check and correct the auto-setting text file (Pipescdt. txt). SAME DATA EXISTS ( , , ) A L S Blue

An attempt has been made to input the same data as that which has already been registered. Cause 1. 2. 3. 4. Pocket number in the TOOL LAYOUT display. Machining-program number (changed) Machining priority number Tool model name

Check and correct the data settings. Action In case 4, this alarm indicates that the tool model name the operator has attempted registering is already present under the same tool type (such as: drill, end mill, turning tool, or grooving tool) in other systems. Specify another tool model name. DATA NOT FOUND ( , , ) A L S Blue

421 Cause

An attempt has been made to designate the data that does not exist.

Action 422 Cause

Check whether the designated data exists.

MEMORY PROTECT (I/O BUSY)

Blue

An attempt has been made to edit or input the machining program, tool data, etc. during I/O operation.

Action

Wait until the I/O operation is completed, and then repeat the editing or input operation from the beginning.

3-50

ALARM

No. 423 Cause

Message MAX NUMBER OF TOOLS EXCEEDED ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

During tool layout, the number of tools used in the designated program has exceeded the maximum available number.

Action 424 Cause

Check and correct the corresponding machining program so that the maximum available number of tools is not exceeded.

ALL POCKET NUMBERS NOT ASSIGNED

Blue

It is not possible to finish the tool layout operation because the pocket number has not yet been assigned to all the required tools. Assign the pocket number(s) and then finish the tool layout operation.

Action 425

DATA MISSING

Blue

Processing is not possible because of lack of data. Cause 1. Saving or loading has been attempted without designating any data (such as work numbers, etc.) on the DATA I/O display. 2. The data to be input for restart operation is wanting. Action 426 Cause Input data correctly.

PROGRAM DATA MISSING

Blue

The tool sequence data cannot be automatically developed because of partial lack of the machining-unit data.

Action 427 Cause

Fill up all the machining-unit data items with data.

MEMORY PROTECT (AUTO MODE)

Blue

An attempt has been made to input unallowable data in the automatic operation mode.

Action 428 Cause

Change the mode over to the manual operation mode, and then input the data.

MEMORY PROTECT (AUTO OPERATION)

Blue

An attempt has been made to input unallowable data on a display (such as the TOOL DATA display) during automatic operation. Input allowable data only after placing the NC unit in its reset state or after changing the current mode over to another mode. CANNOT PERFORM MEASUREMENT The following conditions were not satisfied: Coordinate measurement 1. Automatic operation must not be in progress. 2. The spindle must have a tool mounted on it. 3. The tool data of the tool mounted on the spindle must have already been input. Tool-length measurement 1. Automatic operation must not be in progress. ( , , ) A L S Blue

Action 429

Cause

Action 430 Cause

Set the specified conditions and then make the measurement. ILLEGAL TOOL DESIGNATED ( , , ) A L S Blue

During creation of a machining program, an attempt has been made to input a tool name not available for the particular program unit, in the tool sequence. Designate a correct tool name.

Action

3-51

ALARM

No. 431 Cause ILLEGAL PALLET No.

Message ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

A nonexistent pallet number has been designated.

Action 432 Cause

Designate a correct pallet number.

ILLEGAL TOOL No.

Blue

A nonexistent tool number has been designated.

Action 433 Cause

Designate a correct tool number.

SAME PROGRAM EXISTS

Blue

The number of the machining program that has been designated for program reading from an external unit already exists within the NC memory. Check the number of the machining program.

Action 434 Cause

NO ASSIGNED TOOL IN TOOL FILE

Blue

The milling tools (face-mills, end-mills, chamfering cutters, and ball end-mills) that have been designated on the machining program include a one(s) that is not yet registered in the TOOL FILE display. Register the corresponding tools in the TOOL FILE display.

Action 435 Cause

PROGRAM CHECK NOT ALLOWED

An attempt has been made to restart on the TOOL PATH display during checking of the tool path.

Action 436 Cause

Interrupt the tool path checking operation before restarting.

UNREGISTERED TNo.

Blue

An unmeasurable tool number has been designated in the automatic tool-length (diameter) measurement mode.

Action 437 Cause

Designate a measurable tool number.

NO NOM- DATA IN PROGRAM

Blue

It has been found during tool layout that there is a tool without a nominal diameter in the designated program.

Action 438 Cause

Check if nominal diameters have been assigned to all tools registered in the designated program.

END UNIT NOT FOUND

Blue

The end unit is not included in the machining program.

Action 439 Cause

Create the end unit at the end of the program.

MAZATROL PROGRAM DESIGNATED

Blue

A MAZATROL program has been designated for copying purposes during EIA/ISO program editing.

Action

No MAZATROL programs can be designated for copying purposes during EIA/ISO program editing.

3-52

ALARM

No. 440

Message EIA/ISO PROGRAM DESIGNATED ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

1. The machining program that has been designated on the TOOL LAYOUT, PROCESS CONTROL or SET UP RECORD display is an EIA/ISO program. Cause 2. An EIA/ISO program has been designated for copying purposes during MAZATROL program editing. 3. An EIA/ISO program has been designated as the source program of EIA/ISO conversion. 4. An EIA/ISO program has been designated when writing coordinate values on the MEASURE display. Action 441 Cause No EIA/ISO programs can be designated for operation on the TOOL LAYOUT, PROCESS CONTROL, SET UP RECORD or MEASURE display or during EIA/ISO conversion or MAZATROL program editing. UNREGISTERED HEAD DATA ( , , ) B L S Blue

The head number that has been designated during MDI-MMS setting does not exist in the head data.

Action 442 Cause

Review the designated head number.

DATA RENEWAL NOT ALLOWED

Blue

No updates can be made to the machining program.

Action 443 Cause

This message may also be displayed when the NC unit is busy processing data. Press the clear key and then carry out the operation once again. HELP IS NOT AVAILABLE ( , , ) A L S Blue

No help display is prepared for the line on which the cursor is placed.

Action 444 Cause

Refer to the Programming Manual (MAZATROL Program).

EDITING PROHIBITED AREA

Blue

During automatic operation based on the EIA MONITOR display, an attempt has been made to move the cursor to the program section whose editing was prohibited. The cursor cannot be moved to the area where editing is prohibited.

Action 445 Cause

ILLEGAL UNIT

Blue

An attempt has been made to set tool layout data in a MAZATROL program containing an illegal unit(s).

Action 446 Cause

Review the program.

RESTART TIMES EXCEEDED

Blue

The block to be searched for at the time of restart of the EIA/ISO program does exist, but the designated number of times of reappearance of the block is too large. Check the number of times of reappearance of the block.

Action 447 Cause

PROGRAM ERROR

Blue

A program error(s) has occurred during EIA/ISO restart search.

Action

The program being searched for includes an error(s). Perform a tool-path check upon the program contents.

3-53

ALARM

No. 448 Cause

Message RESTART SEARCH UNFINISHED ( , , )

Type of error

Stopped status

Clearing procedure

Display

EIA/ISO restart searching has not been executed.

Action 449 Cause

Designate the restart position and press the [EIA/ISO SEARCH] button to search the intended restart position.

RESTART SEARCH FINISHED

Blue

An attempt has been made to carry out another search operation when EIA/ISO restart searching had already been finished. An attempt has been made to change the work number when EIA/ISO restart searching had already been finished. Press the reset key and then carry out the restart operation once again. Before changing the work number, press the reset key. TOUCH SENSOR NOT IN SPINDLE ( , , ) A L S Blue

Action 450 Cause

The spindle did not have a mounted touch sensor when an attempt was made to set MAZATROL coordinate measurement data on the PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display. Mount a touch sensor in the spindle before setting the data.

Action 451 Cause

SAME MATERIAL ENTERED

Blue

The materials name that has been designated on the CUTTING CONDITION - W.-MAT/T.-MAT. display already exists.

Action 452 Cause

Designate a new materials name.

NO SHAPE DATA IN UNIT

Blue

No shape data exists in the program unit that has been designated in an attempt to make a copy of shape data.

Action 453 Cause

Check the contents of the program unit for which shape copying is to be made.

NO SHAPE DATA TO COPY IN UNIT

Blue

An attempt has been made to copy shape data whose type is not available for the particular program unit.

Action 454

It is not possible to copy shape data of the pallet-changing unit, index unit, or other units that do not have a shape sequence. CURSOR POSITION INCORRECT ( , , ) A L S Blue

Processing not permissible for the current cursor position has been attempted. Cause Example 1: An attempt has been made to carry out a shape copying operation with the cursor on the tool sequence line. Example 2: The SHAPE CHECK display has been selected on a shape sequence line not actually executed during automatic operation. Action 455 Cause Example 1: No shape data can be copied on the tool sequence line. Example 2: Review the program. SAME PROGRAM No. DESIGNATED ( , , ) A L S Blue

The machining program currently being edited has been appointed for the particular program copying operation.

Action

Copying within the same program is not possible. Check the designated program number.

3-54

ALARM

No. 456 Cause NO TOOL IN SPINDLE

Message ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

The spindle does not currently have a tool mounted on it.

Action 457 Cause

After mounting a tool on the spindle, carry out the particular operation once again.

DATA ADDRESS NOT FOUND

Blue

During creation of manual program mode unit, data setting has been attempted without addressing.

Action 458

During creation of the manual program mode unit, designate an address before setting data.

INTERFERING TOOL REGISTERED

An attempt has been made to register a tool most likely to interfere with an adjacent pocket. Cause Example 1: An attempt has been made to register tool data or tool change data on the TOOL DATA display. Example 2: An attempt has been made to set such a tool on the TOOL LAYOUT display that is likely to interfere with an adjacent pocket. Action 459 Cause Select a pocket that does not cause interference with an adjacent one.

DISPLAY PROTECT

Blue

An attempt has been made to display a program whose display is prohibited.

Action 460 Cause

Display the program only after canceling the parameter setting of prohibition of display.

Action 461 Cause

PRIORITY No. OVERLAP (WNo., UNo., SNo.) A L S Blue

The same priority number is assigned to different tools.

Action 462 Cause

Within one process, the same priority number must not be assigned to different tools. Change the priority number. ILLEGAL PRIORITY NUMBER (WNo., UNo., SNo.) A L S Blue

The priority numbering order within a unit is not correct.

Action 463 Cause

The machining order within one unit has been reversed by the incorrect priority numbering. Change the priority numbers. PRIORITY No. OVERFLOW ( , , ) A L S Blue

A priority number exceeding 99 has occurred because an attempt has been made to move a priority number(s) on the PROGRAM LAYOUT display. Set priority numbers in the correct order, and then move the desired priority number(s).

Action 464 Cause

ILLEGAL ADDRESS INPUT

Blue

An address not covered by the specifications has been designated during input of subprogram unit addresses on the PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display. Check and correct the address. Check the specifications.

Action

3-55

ALARM

No. 465 Cause

Message EIA SHAPE DATA NOT FOUND ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

Although an attempt has been made to draw a workpiece shape using the selected EIA/ISO program, shape data is not present in that program. Review the program.

Action

If the program is that which has been obtained by EIA/ISO conversion output, change the setting of the bit 0 of parameter F89 to 1 and then carry out the converting operation once again. INCORRECT EIA SHAPE DATA ( , , ) A L S Blue

466 Cause

Although an attempt has been made to draw a workpiece shape using the selected EIA/ISO program, the corresponding shape data is not correct. Review the program.

Action 467 Cause

Action 468 Cause

MAINTENANCE CHECK WARNING ( , , ) L S Blue

The target time of the items which had been set on the MAINTENANCE CHECK display has been exceeded.

Action 469 Cause

Carry out periodic checks, and then after completion of the checks, reset the current time of the check items of the MAINTENANCE CHECK display to zero (0). TPC DATA EDIT IMPOSSIBLE ( , , ) A L S Blue

The TPC data setting is not possible for the designated unit.

Action 470 Cause

Check the program.

ILLEGAL TPC DATA The TPC data for the unit is not correct.

Blue

After setting the TPC data, the unit machining mode has been changed. Action 471 Cause Delete the TPC data and set correct TPC data once again whenever required.

TPC DATA NOT FOUND

Blue

While the cursor was on a line of unit not containing TPC data on the display, the [TPC] menu key was pressed during the program list mode. Press the [TPC] menu key after shifting to the programming mode.

Action 472 Cause

CALCULATION ERROR

Blue

1. The calculation expressions displayed in the desk calculator window includes expressions that result in a calculation failure. 2. Calculating tool lengths A and B has been attempted in spite of tool nose position storage not being completed.

Action

1. Review the calculation expressions, and correct nonexecutable sections, such as those which may include division by 0 or result in a negative number in SQRT. 2. Store the position of the tool nose.

3-56

ALARM

No. 473 Cause

Message FINAL POINT DATA NOT FOUND ( , , )

Type of error B

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

Although the end-point data of the preceding line was not yet set in the BAR or CPY unit, the [NEXT] menu key was pressed. Press the [NEXT] menu key after setting the end-point data of the preceding line.

Action 474 Cause

NO PROGRAM DISPLAY (TAPE MODE)

Blue

1. During tape operation mode, an attempt has been made to select the EIA MONITOR display. 2. An attempt has been made to change the operation mode to tape operation mode when the EIA MONITOR display is selected. 1. During tape operation mode, programs cannot be displayed on the EIA MONITOR display. 2. Select a display other than the EIA MONITOR display before changing the operation mode to tape operation mode. 475 Cause Action 476 Cause Action 477 Cause NO EIA/ISO OPTION ( , , ) A L S Blue

Action

An attempt has been made to use an EIA/ISO-option related function in spite of the absence of an EIA/ISO option. An EIA/ISO-option related function cannot be used since the system has no EIA/ISO option.

NO OPTION

Blue

An attempt has been made to use an optional function in spite of the absence of that option. This function cannot be used since the system does not have the option for the function.

Action 478 Cause

MEMORY PROTECT (MEASURING) ( , , ) A L S Blue

An attempt has been made to copy the coordinates data in WRITE DATA column of the MEASURE display into the designated position, while measurement using the MEASURE display is in progress. Copy the coordinates data only after the measurement has been completed.

Action 479 Cause

Action 480 Cause

CARD NOT READY ( , , )

Executing the memory card I/O function in DATA I/O display mode has been attempted when a memory card was not set.

Action 481 Cause

Set a memory card before using the memory card I/O function. If a memory card has been set, confirm the insertion direction of the memory card and set it again. If the alarm recurs even so, the memory card is likely to be damaged; replace the memory card and re-execute the I/O function. DIRECTORY NOT FOUND ( , , ) A L S Blue

Input/output operations on a directory not present in the memory card have been attempted during memory card I/O in DATA I/O display mode. Check whether the specified directory is present.

Action

3-57

ALARM

No. 482 Cause

Message ( , , )

Type of error

Stopped status

Clearing procedure

Display

Action 483 Cause

SOLID DESCRIP. IMPOSSIBLE UNIT (WNo., UNo., ) B I S Blue

On the TOOL PATH CHECK display in the solid mode, an attempt was made to check the tool path in a program containing a unit or a condition inappropriate to solid display (program of initial point scheme or with POS-B in the indexing unit set at an angle other than 0). Before checking the tool path, cancel solid mode or delete the unit concerned.

Action 484 Cause

INCORRECT SPINDLE TOOL

Blue

The [LENG-OFS TEACH] menu key has been pressed in spite of the fact that a tool not having its Length Offset Data item displayed in TOOL DATA display mode (for example, a turning tool) was mounted in the spindle. Check the tool mounted in the spindle.

Action 485 Cause

INCORRECT HEAD INDEX

Blue

Executing the tool nose position storage function (TEACH) has been attempted when the head index angle displayed in TOOL DATA display mode was neither 0, 90, nor 180. Execute the tool nose position storage function (TEACH) when the head index angle is either 0 90 or 180.

Action 486 Cause

ILLEGAL JAW DATA

Blue

The use of the jaw shape that has been specified for the program results in interference between adjacent jaws as a result of the SOLID mode PATH CHECK. Review the jaw data or the workpiece-gripping diameter value.

Action 487 Cause

LONG BORING BAR ADAPTER EXISTS

(Pocket No,

Blue

Assigning a tool other than an inside-diameter turning tool to the magazine pocket holding the adapter for the long boring bar has been attempted. Review the pocket number or the type of tool to be assigned.

Action 488 Cause

MEMORY PROTECT (MAGAZINE SETUP)

Blue

Tool data updating operations (such as editing tool data, completing the layout of tools, or downloading data on the DATA I/O display) have been attempted during magazine setup. Perform tool data updating operations after completing the magazine setup operations. Release the reverse display mode of the [MAGAZINE SETUP] menu item relating to visual tool data management.

Action 489 Cause

CANNOT SET THREAD POSITION

Blue

An attempt was made to set jaw dimensions without having selected the jaw type (OUT1/IN/OUT2).

Action 490 Cause

Select the jaw type beforehand.

REGISTRATION NUMBER EXCEEDED

Blue

The data registration has exceeded its maximum value available. An attempt was made on the TOOL FILE display to register the ninth data item of workpiece material. Delete unnecessary items to register the desired one.

Action

3-58

ALARM

No. 491 Cause ITEM NOT SETUP

Message ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

Data registration is not yet complete.

Action 492 Cause Action 493 Cause

Check if all the data items are set as required.

CANNOT EDIT 3D DATA

Blue

Editing the CAD tool model has been attempted. The CAD tool model cannot be edited.

SELECT JAW TYPE

Blue

Assigning dimensions to jaw data for which a shape has not been specified has been attempted.

Action 494 Cause

Specify some shape before assigning dimensions.

CANNOT SELECT TNO (NOT MAGAZINE)

Blue

Execution of tool selection has been attempted under the selected status of a non-magazine type turret.

Action 495 Cause

Select a magazine type of turret before executing tool selection.

INCORRECT CAD MODEL DATA

(Note,

Blue

Registered tool model data contains imperfections (a tool model cannot be drawn with the entered data). Correct the data in the corresponding section. Note: During Parametric model entry .......................The alarm-causing section is displayed. During rotating/extruding tool model entry......Causes are displayed. 11: The entered shape has overlapping elements. 12: The entered shape is clockwise (CW). 13: The line connecting the starting and ending points overlaps some other element. HEAD ANGLE INCORRECT ( , , ) A L S Blue ( , , )

Action

496 Cause Action 497

1. An attempt has been made to storage the tool tip position with the head not in its horizontal machining position (TOOL DATA or TOOL OFFSET display only). Cause 2. An attempt has been made to perform MDI-MMS operation with the head not in its horizontal or vertical machining position. <HV> Action 498 Cause Action 1. Tool tip position storage (tool length measurement) is possible only with the head in its horizontal machining position. 2. MDI-MMS is possible only with the head in its horizontal or vertical machining position. NO HEAD DATA ( , , ) A L S Blue

Offset data for the selected head is not registered on the HEAD OFFSET display. Check if the selected head data is registered on the HEAD OFFSET display.

3-59

ALARM

No. 499 Cause ILLEGAL HEAD TYPE

Message ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

An attempt has been made to perform tool tip position storage on the TOOL DATA or TOOL OFFSET display during use of the horizontal type of head. To perform tool tip position storage for tool length measurement, mount a vertical head or a cover.

Action

3-60

ALARM

No. 1400 Cause SYSTEM ERROR

Message ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

An internal trouble has occurred in the system.

Action 1401 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center with the information of the particular operation causing the alarm, and of the codes displayed in parentheses. FILE OPEN ERROR ( , , ) A L S Blue

Trouble has occurred in opening a file from the hard disk.

Action 1402 Cause

The file in question might be currently being accessed by another application. Wait for a while to repeat the same operation. If the alarm is not cleared, contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center with the information of the particular operation causing the alarm, and of the codes displayed in parentheses. FILE READ ERROR ( , , ) A L S Blue

Trouble has occurred in reading a file on the hard disk.

Action 1403 Cause

The file in question might be currently being accessed by another application. Wait for a while to repeat the same operation. If the alarm is not cleared, contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center with the information of the particular operation causing the alarm, and of the codes displayed in parentheses. FILE WRITE ERROR ( , , ) A L S Blue

Trouble has occurred in writing a file on the hard disk.

Action 1404 Cause

The file in question might be currently being accessed by another application. Wait for a while to repeat the same operation. If the alarm is not cleared, contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center with the information of the particular operation causing the alarm, and of the codes displayed in parentheses. MEMORY PROTECT (DATA IN USE) ( , , ) A L S Blue

It was attempted to edit jaw shape data of the machining program currently selected.

Action 1405 Cause

Change the selection of the program to edit the required data.

FILE SIZE ERROR The size of the loaded file is not correct.

Blue

Action 1406 Cause

The file in question might be destroyed. Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center with the information of the particular operation causing the alarm, and of the codes displayed in parentheses. LOW MEMORY Memory size currently available is too small. ( , , ) A L S Blue

Action 1407 Cause

Exit all the unnecessary applications to make the best of the NC ones. If the alarm is caused again, contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center with the information of the particular operation causing the alarm, and of the codes displayed in parentheses. FILE CREATION ERROR ( , , ) A L S Blue

Creating a file and folder on the hard disk was not successful.

Action 1408 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center with the information of the particular operation causing the alarm, and of the codes displayed in parentheses. DATA TRANSFER ERROR Data transfer to the NC was not successful. ( , , ) A L S Blue

Action

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center with the information of the particular operation causing the alarm, and of the codes displayed in parentheses.

3-61

ALARM

No. 1409 Cause MILLING ONLY SELECTED

Message ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

The designated function is not available for a program of initial-point scheme (ONLY MILL).

Action 1410 Cause

Use the function for a program of another scheme.

MILL & TURN (WPC) SELECTED

Blue

The designated function is not available for a program of workpiece scheme (MILL & TURN) with WPC setting.

Action 1411 Cause

Use the function for a program of another scheme.

MILL & TRN (Z-OFS) SELECTED

Blue

The designated function is not available for a program of workpiece scheme (MILL & TURN) with Z-offset setting.

Action 1412 Cause

Use the function for a program of another scheme.

INCORRECT G-CODE

Blue

The designated function is not available for the G-code system selected by the F30 parameter.

Action 1413 Cause

Correct the program, or change the F30 setting.

INCORRECT RUNNING MODE

Blue

The designated function is not available for the current mode of operation.

Action 1414 Cause

Change the operation mode.

PROGRAM WRITING

Blue

Storing a program on the hard disk was not successful.

Action 1415 Cause

The file in question might be currently being accessed by another application. Wait for a while to repeat the same operation. If the alarm is not cleared, contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center with the information of the particular operation causing the alarm, and of the codes displayed in parentheses. ZERO CALCULATED TOOL LENGTH ( , , ) A L S Blue

The LENGTH A item of the tool is set to zero (0).

Action 1416 Cause

Check the settings of tool length or tool set data and, if required, measure the tool in question again.

CANNOT INDEX TOOL

Blue

The tool currently indexed on the turret is not appropriate.

Action 1417 Cause

Index an appropriate tool beforehand.

PARAMETER ERROR The setting in a parameter is not correct.

Blue

Action

Check and correct the parameter setting with reference to the codes displayed in parentheses.

3-62

ALARM

No. 1418 Cause

Message CANNOT USE LOWER TURRET ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

The current selection of the headstock to which the lower turret is subordinate is not correct.

Action 1419 Cause

Change over the headstock selection concerned.

Action 1420 Cause

FILE SIZE LIMIT EXCEEDED ( , , ) A L S Blue

The size of the file is too large for new data to be written in it.

Action 1421 Cause

Delete the file, or rename the file.

Action 1422 Cause

PROGRAM LAYOUT ERROR ( , , ) A L S Blue

Creating the data for turret-by-turret display of program layout was not successful.

Action 1423 Cause

Change the display mode.

TOOL PATH CHECK NOT COMPLETE

Blue

Since the program has not yet undergone tool path check, the VISUAL TOOL MANAGEMENT display cannot perform calculations for indicating the spare tools to be additionally provided for the machining operation with the program. Execute the function for tool path check on the program.

Action 1424 Cause

BARRIER INFORMATION NOT SET

Blue

In the program-listing mode the [BARRIER INFORM.] menu function is selected without any barrier data being registered.

Action 1425 Cause

Select the program-creating mode before pressing the [BARRIER INFORM.] menu key.

ILLEGAL SETUP DATA The setup data are not correct.

Blue

Action 1426 Cause

Make a copy of the program in question on the PROGRAM FILE display, and prepare the setup data for the program copied. NO PROG LAYOUT FOR THIS PROCESS ( , , ) A L S Blue

The current process has no program layout information provided.

Action

Press the menu selector key to select a process with program layout data, or select the display mode for all processes. Alternatively, select a process with program layout data on the PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display or PROCESS CONTROL display and then call up the PROGRAM LAYOUT display from there.

3-63

ALARM

No. 1427 Cause

Message 3D INTERFRNCE CHECK MODEL ERROR ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

3D remodeling of the workpiece, fixture, or tool has failed.

Action 1428 Cause

Modify the entered data. Confirm the model. INCORRECT POCKET FOR LONG BOR. BAR ( , , ) A L S Blue

Assigning the long boring bar to a section not defined as a special pocket for the long boring bar has been attempted during the Layout Completion operations on the VISUAL TOOL MANAGEMENT display. Assign the long boring bar to the special pocket.

Action 1429 Cause

CANNOT PERFORM AUTO SET

Blue

Tool setup auto-setting for a tool not capable of using the tool setup auto-setting function (e.g., a magazine tool or a tool facing the No. 1 turning spindle) has been attempted on the TOOL DATA display. Apply the tool setup auto-setting function only to a turret tool facing the No. 2 turning spindle.

Action 1430 Cause

NOT ACTIVE PROGRAM

Blue

This alarm indicates that the machine-operating program and the program selected on the PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display differ during execution of the workpiece transfer storage function on the PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display. Match the machine-operating program and the program selected on the PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display.

Action 1431 Cause

AUTO SET ERROR

Blue

The tool for which the reference tool length was set has not been found during automatic tool length setting.

Action 1432 Cause

Set at least one tool length value before executing automatic tool length setting.

TOOLMODEL NOT SELECTED

Blue

The tool model to be used as a reference has not been selected during tool model copying, erasing, or renaming.

Action 1433 Cause

Select a reference tool model before executing tool model copying, erasing, or renaming.

SAME TOOL MODEL NAME IN USE

Blue

A registered tool name has been specified during tool model copying or renaming.

Action 1434 Cause

Specify a tool name that has not been registered.

INCOR CRS POS FOR PROG LAYOUT

Blue

When setting the PROGRAM LAYOUT display from the MAZATROL program was attempted, the layout of program data up to the first end unit has been displayed since an end unit was present at a position previous to the cursor. Move the cursor to a position previous to the end unit, and then set the PROGRAM LAYOUT display.

Action 1435 Cause

3D MONITOR MANUAL MODE ONLY

Blue

Setting the 3D MONITOR display has been attempted during automatic operation mode.

Action

Select manual operation mode before setting the 3D MONITOR display.

3-64

ALARM

No. 1436 Cause

Message DIFFERENT TYPE OF PROGRAM ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

A program of a different program type has been specified during MAZATROL program copying.

Action 1437 Cause

Specify a program of the same type.

CANNOT TRANSFER ACTIVE PROGRAM

Blue

Transferring the same program as the automatic operation program, from the backup area to the standard area, has been attempted. Before conducting program transfer, select a different program for automatic operation.

Action 1438 Cause

NO SETUP DATA

Blue

The [SETUP DATA] menu key has been pressed in program listing mode when there was no registered setup data.

Action 1439

Select programming mode before pressing the [SETUP DATA] menu key.

CANNOT CHANGE UNIT

Changing a unit has been attempted when a unit change in the MAZATROL program was prohibited. Cause - It is not allowed to change a unit for which data other than the unit name has been set up. - It is not allowed to change a unit if the current machining section is not selectable for the new unit (e.g., a unit for which an outside-diametral section has been selected as the machining section cannot be changed to a turning-drilling unit). Action 1440 Cause Review the program.

ID No. NOT FOUND

Although moving tool data from the magazine tool list to the stored-tool list has been attempted on the VISUAL TOOL MANAGEMENT display, an ID number has not been set up for the corresponding tool. Set the ID number in the tool data.

Action 1441 Cause

FILE NOT FOUND

The corresponding file does not exist during file loading on the MAINTENANCE CHECK display.

Action 1442 Cause

Create maintenance.txt under C:\nm64mdata\(language-name).

ILLEGAL TOOL- CANNOT ASSIGN

Blue

Registering an illegal tool in tool data has been attempted.

Action 1443 Cause

Confirm the type of tool to be registered.

BACKUP INCOMPLETE NC data backup has been aborted.

Blue

Action 1444 Cause

To conduct the backup, perform the backup operations once again.

PROCESS TOO LARGE -DEVIDE PROC

Blue

Assigning a priority number to the roughing tool on the PROGRAM LAYOUT display has been attempted, but the priority numbers required exceed 99. The priority number must range from 1 to 99. Otherwise, this alarm will occur. Split the process and execute the [ROUGH PRIORITY] menu function.

Action

3-65

ALARM

No. 1445 Cause

Message SAME SIMULTAN. NO IN RGH & FIN ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

Assigning a priority number to the roughing tool on the PROGRAM LAYOUT display has been attempted, but since simultaneous machining is specified in the program and the same simultaneous machining number is specified for both roughing and finishing. Roughing cannot be prioritized with the simultaneous machining number ignored. Review the specified simultaneous machining number and execute the [ROUGH PRIORITY] menu function.

Action 1446 Cause

CANNOT CHNG.WNo (SNGL PROC.MODE)

Blue

A work number change has been attempted in single-process mode.

Action 1447 Cause

Cancel the single-process mode before conducting the work number change.

RESTORE OPERATION STOPED The NC data restore process has been aborted.

Blue

Action 1448 Cause

To conduct the restore process, perform the restore operations once again.

TOOL LENGTH OVER

Blue

The tool length input range has been overstepped as a result of tool measurement.

Action 1449

Use a tool of any tool length value falling within the range defined in parameters SU110 - SU113.

NC PROGRAM MEMORY SIZE OVER

(AREA,

Blue

This alarm indicates that during hard-disk program transfer to the program storage area (NC memory), as in a power-on status, lack of the necessary NC memory space has been detected or the program storage capacity limit exceeded. Cause If AREA = 1........ indicates alarm during program transfer from the standard area to the NC memory If AREA = 2........ indicates alarm during machine manufacturer macroprogram transfer to the NC memory If AREA = 3........ indicates alarm during GL pattern file transfer to the NC memory Action 1450 Cause Use the PROGRAM FILE display to copy or move programs.

SELECT LOWER TURRET

Blue

An attempt has been made to use the [TEACH] menu function for a WPC unit in spite of the lower turret being selected.

Action

The [TEACH] menu function cannot be used for a WPC unit with the lower turret being selected. Designate the upper turret. ( , , )

Cause Action 1455 Cause ILLEGAL MAKER NAME ( , , ) A L S Blue

Invalid characters have been used in the manufacturer name in an attempt to add a tool part model.

Action 1456 Cause

The characters \ / : * ? < > | cannot be used in the manufacturer name. Use other characters to assign the manufacturer name. ILLEGAL MODEL NO ( , , ) A L S Blue

Invalid characters have been used in the model number in an attempt to add a tool part model.

Action

The characters \ / : * ? < > | cannot be used in the model number. Use other characters to assign the model number.

3-66

ALARM

No. 1457 Cause

Message CANNOT EDIT MAKER MADE DATA ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

Editing or deleting the tool part model that the manufacturer created has been attempted.

Action 1458 Cause Action 1459 Cause Action 1460 Cause

The tool part model that the manufacturer created cannot be edited or deleted.

CANNOT USE V.M. DURING AUTO OPE

Blue

Calling up the VIRTUAL MACHINING display was attempted during automatic operation (when the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function in automatic operation mode was valid). When the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function in automatic operation mode is valid, the VIRTUAL MACHINING display cannot be presented during automatic operation. Change the display mode after automatic operation has been completed or after making the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function in automatic operation mode invalid. TOOL MODEL IMPORT FAILURE Importing the CAD tool model has failed. The data to be imported is incorrect or importable data is absent at the specified location. Make sure that the data to be imported is correct or that data is saved in the specified path. ( , , ) ( , , ) A L S Blue

Action 1461 Cause Action

Cause Action

3-67

ALARM

3-2-6
No. 500 Cause

No. 500 - No. 599, No. 1500 - No. 1599 (I/O error)
Message ( , , ) Type of error Stopped status Clearing procedure Display

Action 501 Cause

ILLEGAL FORMAT ( , , ) A L S Blue

An external storage medium that contains data other than MATRIX data has been set.

Action 502 Cause

Check the contents of the external storage medium for appropriateness to the MATRIX.

CANNOT LOAD (PROG SIZE EXCEED)

(WNo.,

Blue

The contents of the external storage medium are not correct. (Loading of a MAZATROL program of more than 2000 lines of data has been attempted.)

Action 503 Cause Action 504 Cause Action 505 Cause Action 506 Cause Action 507 Cause Action

Either use another external storage medium, or save the program data once again. After that, carry out the load operation once again. CANNOT LOAD (TOO MANY PROGRAMS) (WNo., , ) A L S Blue

An attempt has been made to load more machining programs than the maximum number of programs that can be registered within the NC unit. Delete unnecessary programs, or save the programs onto an external storage and then delete them. After that, load the particular program. CANNOT LOAD (AUTO OPERATION) ( , , ) A L S Blue

An attempt has been made during automatic operation to load data other than machining programs. Load the data only after completion of automatic operation.

CANNOT LOAD (MISMATCH)

Blue

Loading has been attempted although the data within the external storage medium does not match to the NC unit (Mismatching in data size, etc.). Check if the data saved on the external storage medium is the data to be used for the machine currently in operation.

SAME PROGRAM No. DESIGNATED

(WNo.,

Blue

An attempt has been made to load the machining program that has the same work number as that of a machining program registered within the NC unit. Check for an overlapping work numbers.

NO DESIGNATED PROGRAM

(WNo.,

Blue

The machining program whose saving has been attempted does not exist in the NC unit. Check if the machining program with the specified work number exists in the NC unit.

3-68

ALARM

No. 508

Message MEMORY CAPACITY EXCEEDED (WNo., , )

Type of error A (G)

Stopped status L (L)

Clearing procedure S (S)

Display Blue (Blue)

Cause

1. An attempt has been made to load machining program data that exceeds the maximum available area for program registration within the NC unit. 2. In the middle of saving onto the external storage medium, data saving exceeding the memory capacity has been made, or the end-of-tape (or end-of-disk) code has been detected. 1. Delete unnecessary programs, or save the programs onto an external storage and then delete them. After that, load the particular program. 2. Split the data into segments according to the particular size of the free saving area within the external storage medium, and then carry out the saving operations once again.

Action

509 Cause

MEMORY PROTECT

Blue

Loading has been attempted when the PROGRAM LOCK/ENABLE switch setting was LOCK.

Action 510 Cause

Set the switch to ENABLE, and then carry out the loading operation.

DATA DO NOT MATCH

(WNo.,

Blue

Comparison between the external storage medium contents and the NC memory contents has shown disparities in data size, type of file information, etc. 1. Locate those disparities on the PROGRAM FILE display and correct them, and then make the comparison once again. 2. If the disparities exist in data other than machining program data, check if the data is for the machine being used.

Action 511 Cause

PROGRAM DATA NOT SAME

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Blue

Comparison between the cassette tape or floppy disk contents and the NC data has shown several disparities. 1. After correcting the disparities within the machining program, make the comparison once again. 2. If the disparities exist in data other than machining program data, locate those disparities on each display.

Action

Note: This alarm message may be displayed if data is saved prior to automatic operation and then subjected to comparison with that after automatic operation. This is because execution of automatic operation may cause automatic data overriding. NO EIA/ISO OPTION (WNo., , ) A L S Blue

512 Cause

An attempt has been made to load an EIA/ISO program in spite of the absence of an EIA/ISO option.

Action 513 Cause

An EIA/ISO program cannot be loaded since the system has no EIA/ISO option.

PROGRAM DATA TYPE INCORRECT

Blue

An attempt has been made to load a machining program different in structure from the programs within the NC memory.

Action 514 Cause

Check the contents of the external storage medium for appropriateness to the MATRIX.

DATA TYPE INCORRECT

Blue

An attempt has been made to load data (other than machining program data) that differs in structure from the NC memory data. Check the contents of the external storage medium for appropriateness to the MATRIX or the machine being used.

Action 515 Cause

INCORRECT DESIGNATED DATA

Blue

1. During I/O operation with a memory card, an attempt has been made to load data the structure of which is not correct. 2. During I/O operation with a floppy disk, an attempt has been made to load data the structure of which is not correct.

Action

1. Check if the data saved during I/O operation with a memory card is for MATRIX. 2. Check if the data saved during I/O operation with a floppy disk is for MATRIX.

3-69

ALARM

No. 516 Cause SYSTEM ERROR

Message ( , , )

Type of error E

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

1. When program loading was attempted, there was not a comment file (C:\MC_MachinePrograms\index.tbl). 2. An error has occurred within the system. 1. Enter any comment on the PROGRAM FILE display, and load the program. Do not edit or delete index.tbl since it is the management file for NC. 2. Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center. (At this time, also please notify them of what kind of operating procedure you had carried out before the alarm message appeared and what values were displayed in parentheses.)

Action

517 Cause

PROG. OPERATION NOT ALLOWED

(WNo.,

Blue

1. An attempt has been made to save a display inhibiting program. (Program management function) 2. An attempt has been made to save the program being edited or the program being loaded using another I/O unit. 1. Check if the specified work number is for the program of display inhibition.

Action

2. Carry out a saving operation only after completion of the program editing operation (or the program loading operation using another I/O unit). DATA OPERATION NOT ALLOWED ( , , ) A L S Blue

518

1. An attempt has been made during automatic operation to load data other than machining program data. Cause 2. An attempt has been made to save the data being loaded using another I/O unit. 3. An attempt has been made to load the data being saved using another I/O unit. Action 519 Wait until automatic operation has been completed (or until the loading or saving operation using another I/O unit has been completed). DATA SIZE EXCEEDED (WNo., Note, ) A L S Blue

Cause

The EIA/ISO machining program includes a block that consists of more than 256 characters. (EOB or EOR does not appear within 256 characters.) Note: The number displayed next to the work number is a line number, which corresponds to the number displayed in the lower right section of the PROGRAM display.

Action 520 Cause

Correct the EIA/ISO machining program. (Insert EOB within 256 characters.)

EIA/ISO CONVERT ERROR

(WNo.,

Blue

Nonconvertible sections have been found when an attempt was made to convert the MAZATROL program into an EIA/ISO program. Review the MAZATROL program.

Action 521 Cause

CANNOT LOAD (WRONG PROG TYPE)

Blue

The operator has attempted loading a machining program of a scheme different from the program scheme within the NC unit. Confirm the program scheme of the machining program.

Action 522 Cause

SAME SET No. EXISTS

Blue

An attempt has been made to load the GL setup data that has the same GL setup number as that of setup data registered within the NC unit. Rename or erase the GL setup data within the NC unit before loading the data.

Action 523

IMPOSSIBLE TO CONVERT EIA (Prg. No. Processing No., ,

Blue

1. The parameter file does not exist under the same directory as that of the program. Cause 2. The G-code is other than standard G-code Series A. 3. The program is a subprogram. 1. Save the parameter file under the same directory as that of the program. Action 2. The G-code cannot be converted since it is not supported for MATRIX. 3. The program cannot be converted since the system concerned is unknown.

3-70

ALARM

No. 524 Cause

Message ( , , )

Type of error

Stopped status

Clearing procedure

Display

Action 525 Cause

HDD I/O ERROR (Cause, , )

An error has occurred during output of data of the measurements results print-out function to the hard disk drive.

Action

Check if the available space within the hard disk drive is sufficient for the purpose.

( Cause

Action 530 Cause CMT MIS-CONNECTED ( , , ) G L S Blue

This message implies incorrect cable connection between CMT (cassette magnetic tape unit) or microdisk unit and the NC unit, or implies a power-off status or an incorrect baud-rate setting. In the case of microdisk unit, this message also implies incorrect setting of a floppy disk. 1. Check for correct cable connections.

Action

2. Check if power is turned on. 3. Check for correct baud-rate setting. (Parameter for the NC unit: Baud rate) 4. For microdisk unit, check if the floppy disk is correctly set.

531 Cause

DESIGNATED FILE NOT FOUND

(WNo.,

Blue

The machining program or another data that has been designated for the LOAD or COMPARE operation does not exist within the cassette tape or floppy disk. Carry out a DIRECTORY operation to check what type of data is stored on the cassette tape or floppy disk.

Action 532 Cause

CMT NOT CONNECTED

Blue

A cassette tape or floppy disk drive has not been mounted.

Action 533 Cause

Correctly mount a cassette tape or floppy disk drive.

NO OPERABLE DATA IN CMT

Blue

The current M640 series-use cassette tape or floppy disk does not contain a saved machining program (only machining programs can be loaded from M640 series-use cassette tape or floppy disk). The cassette tape or floppy disk that has been registered for M640 series use does not contain a registered machining program. Perform checks using the M640 series NC unit.

Action

534 Cause

CMT I/O ERROR

Blue

A hardware error has occurred in the CMT or microdisk unit.

Action

Check the CMT or microdisk unit baud rate setting (RS-232C setting parameter), and replace the cassette tape or floppy disk.

3-71

ALARM

No. 535 Cause CMT WRITE PROTECT

Message ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

Data saving onto a write-protected cassette tape or floppy disk has been attempted.

The cassette tape or floppy disk is protected against data writing. Action Release the write-protected state. (For cassette tape, fill in the hole on the tape surface with tape.) 536 Cause POWER OFF DURING CMT OPERATION ( , , ) A L S Blue

Power has been turned off during operation of the CMT or microdisk unit.

Action 537 Cause

Check the machining program being transferred. If an anomaly is found, repeat the desired operation. If this alarm state has occurred during loading of a machining program, erase the loaded portion of the program and then execute the loading again. CMT MALFUNCTION ( , , ) G L S Blue

Data cannot be read because of the presence of check sum errors, for example, within the cassette tape or floppy disk contents. Reread the data only after setting a new cassette tape or floppy disk or after saving the corresponding data.

Action 538 Cause

Action 539 Cause

( , , )

Action 540 Cause

TAPE READER MIS-CONNECTED ( , , ) G L S Blue

This message implies incorrect cable connection between tape reader or microdisk unit and the NC unit or implies a power-off state. In the case of microdisk unit, this message also implies incorrect setting of a floppy disk. 1. Check for correct cable connections.

Action

2. Check if power is turned on. 3. In the case of microdisk unit, check if the floppy disk is correctly set.

541 Cause

TAPE PUNCHER MIS-CONNECTED

Blue

This message implies incorrect cable connection between tape puncher or microdisk unit and the NC unit or implies a power-off state. In the case of microdisk unit, this message also implies incorrect setting of a floppy disk. 1. Check for correct cable connections.

Action

2. Check if power is turned on. 3. In the case of microdisk unit, check if the floppy disk is correctly set.

542 Cause

NO TAPE READER PUNCHER OPTION

Blue

An attempt has been made to carry out a tape I/O operation although the tape reader/puncher option is not provided.

Action

Provide the NC unit with a tape reader/puncher option. (Only with this option, tape I/O operations can be carried out.)

3-72

ALARM

No. 543 Cause

Message WNo. NOT FOUND ON PAPER TAPE ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

Loading or comparing is not possible since no O numbers (work numbers) are stored on the paper tape or floppy disk.

Action 544 Cause

Call the DATA I/O display (TAPE) and designate a work number(s).

SET NEW PAPER TAPE

Blue

1. The tape reader/puncher is not correctly loaded with paper tape. 2. Differences in baud-rate or other parameter settings for RS-232C exist between the tape reader/puncher (or microdisk unit) and the NC unit. 1. Check if the tape reader/puncher is correctly loaded with paper tape. 2. Check for differences in RS-232C parameter settings between the I/O unit and the NC unit. 545 Cause POWER OFF TAPE READ/PUNCH OPER. ( , , ) A L S Blue

Action

Power has been turned off during operation of the tape reader/puncher or microdisk unit.

Action 546 Cause

If power has been turned off during loading, check the machining program loaded. If an error(s) is found, delete the loaded data and then reload the program. If power has been turned off during punching, re-punch the tape. TAPE READER ERROR ( , , ) G L S Blue

A hardware error has occurred in the tape reader or the microdisk unit.

Action 547 Cause

Before operating the tape reader or microdisk unit, check that no differences in RS-232C parameter settings exist between the tape reader or microdisk unit and the NC unit and replace the paper tape or floppy disk. TAPE PUNCHER ERROR ( , , ) G L S Blue

A hardware error has occurred in the tape puncher or the microdisk unit.

Action 548 Cause

Before operating the tape puncher or microdisk unit, check that no differences in RS-232C parameter settings exist between the tape puncher or microdisk unit and the NC unit and replace the paper tape or floppy disk. MAZATROL PROGRAM DESIGNATED ( , , ) A L S Blue

An attempt has been made to punch a MAZATROL program onto paper tape.

Action 549 Cause

Designate an EIA/ISO program. (Only EIA/ISO programs can be punched on paper tape.) DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND ( , , ) A L S Blue

The designated data was not found on the paper tape or floppy disk.

Action 550

Select another set of data or make a search once again from the beginning of the paper tape or floppy disk.

PARITY H ERROR

Blue

The contents of the paper tape or floppy disk cannot be read since they include a parity-H error(s). (The number of holes on tape must always be even for ISO; it must be odd for EIA).

Cause

Sprocket

Action

Reading must be carried out only after replacing the paper tape or floppy disk or after re-punching the program.

3-73

ALARM

No. 551 PARITY V ERROR

Message ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

The contents of the paper tape or floppy disk cannot be read since they include a parity-V error(s).
E O B E O B E O B

Cause

The number of sprocket holes in this area must be even. Action 552 Cause Make reading possible by making bit 1 of parity V-check valid/invalid parameter TAP25 invalid.

PROGRAM END NOT FOUND

Blue

A machining program in which EOR precedes the end M-code (M02, M30 or M99) or the next O number (work number) was loaded. The end-of-program condition can be changed by varying the settings of the parameter (TAP27).

Action 553 Cause

Since the machining program has already been loaded, the PROGRAM display must be called and then one of the above three end M-codes must be inserted in the program. WORK No. UNITS EXCEEDED ( , , ) B L S Blue

An attempt has been made to load the program of a work number of more than four digits in spite of the fact that the maximum allowable number of digits in one work number is set to four. Check bit 3 of parameter TAP26.

Action 554 Cause

POWER OFF IN EIA/ISO CONVERT

Blue

Power has been turned off during EIA/ISO conversion.

Action 555 Cause

Check the EIA/ISO program being converted. If an anomaly is found, erase the program and repeat the conversion.

Action 556 Cause

( , , )

Action 557 Cause

DESIGNATED DIRECTORY NOT FOUND The designated directory does not exist. ( , , ) B (A) I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action

Check if the designated directory exists.

( Cause

Action

3-74

ALARM

No. 563 Cause PRINTER I/O ERROR

Message (Cause, , )

Type of error G

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

An error in printer communications has occurred during measurement result printing.

Action 564 Cause

- Check the printer for correct connection. - Check for differences in the RS-232C parameter settings between the printer and NC unit. ( , , )

Action 565 Cause

ID MIS-CONNECTED ( , , ) G L S Blue

Erroneous cable connection has occurred during connection of the ID unit and the NC unit, or power has remained turned off. Check for incorrect cable connections. Or check if the power is turned on.

Action 566 Cause

POWER STOPPED DURING ID OPER.

Blue

Power has been turned off during the operation of the ID unit.

Action 567 Cause

Check the current tool data, and if errors are found, operate the unit once again.

ID I/O ERROR

Blue

Communication between the NC unit and the ID unit has become interrupted because of hardware trouble (such as line noise). Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

Action 568 Cause

Action 569 Cause

( , , )

Action 570 Cause

NO DNC OPTION ( , , ) A L S Blue

DNC operation was attempted although DNC option is not provided.

Action 571 Cause

Provide the NC unit with a DNC option. (Only with this option, DNC operation can be carried out.)

ILLEGAL FORMAT

Blue

Data other than that of the M640 Series or of the MATRIX has been received from the host (the format of the message is incorrect). Confirm whether the received data from the host is for the M640 Series or the MATRIX.

Action

3-75

ALARM

No. 572 Cause

Message CANNOT LOAD (PROG SIZE EXCEED) (WNo., , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

The contents of the transmitted machining program from the host system are not correct. (More than 2000 lines of MAZATROL program data have been transmitted.)

Action 573 Cause

Check the size of the program which has been transmitted from the host system.

CANNOT LOAD (TOO MANY PROGRAMS)

(WNo.,

Blue

An attempt has been made to load more machining programs than the maximum number of programs that can be registered within the NC unit. Delete unnecessary programs, or save the programs onto an external storage and then delete them. After that, load the particular program. CANNOT LOAD (AUTO OPERATION) ( , , ) A L S Blue

Action 574 Cause

An attempt has been made during automatic operation to load data other than machining program data.

Action 575 Cause

Load such data only after completion of automatic operation.

CANNOT LOAD (MISMATCH)

Blue

Loading has been attempted when the transmitted data from the host system does not match to the data or other parameter settings within the NC unit (mismatching in data size, etc.). Check if the data that has been transmitted from the host system is that which is to be used for the machine being used.

Action 576 Cause

SAME PROGRAM No. DESIGNATED

(WNo.,

Blue

An attempt has been made to load the machining program that has the same work number as that of a machining program registered within the NC unit. Check for an overlapping work number. This alarm message also implies that the parameter (DNC26, bit 2) is set for the priority of the old program over a new one. If the parameter is set to 0, the old data will automatically be deleted in such a case as mentioned above and the new program data can be loaded with the specified work number. NO DESIGNATED PROGRAM (WNo., , ) A L S Blue

Action 577

Cause

- The machining program whose transmission from the NC unit to the host system has been attempted does not exist within the NC unit. - The machining program that has been designated using a control command (work number search or program deletion) does not exist within the NC unit.

Action 578 Cause

Check if the machining program with the specified work number exists in the NC unit.

MEMORY CAPACITY EXCEEDED

(WNo.,

Blue

An attempt has been made to load more machining programs than the maximum number of programs that can be registered within the NC unit. Delete unnecessary programs, or save the programs onto an external storage and then delete them. After that, load the particular program. MEMORY PROTECT ( , , ) A L S Blue

Action 579 Cause

Loading has been attempted when the PROGRAM LOCK/ENABLE switch setting was LOCK.

Action

Set the switch to ENABLE, and then carry out the loading operation. This alarm message also implies that the setting of the parameter (DNC26, bit 3) is OFF (0). Change this parameter setting to ON (1). Data loading will then become possible.

3-76

ALARM

No. 580 Cause CARD NOT READY

Message ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

A memory card has not been correctly mounted in the NC unit.

Action 581 Cause

Check if the memory card is correctly mounted.

DIRECTORY DOES NOT EXIST

Blue

The floppy disk has not been set properly in the floppy disk drive.

Action 582 Cause

Set the floppy disk properly in the floppy disk drive.

DESIGNATED FILE NOT TRANSFERED

Blue

A file different from the one that has been requested from NC unit to the host system was transferred from the latter.

Action 583 Cause

Check the details of the file that has been transferred from the host system.

PROGRAM DATA TYPE INCORRECT

Blue

An attempt has been made to load a machining program that is different in structure from those stored within the NC unit.

Action 584

- Confirm that the program to be received from the host is for the M640 Series or the MATRIX. - Check if the contents of the file transfer message (header block) are correct. RECEIVED DATA TYPE INCORRECT ( , , ) A L S Blue

Cause

- An attempt has been made to load data other than machining program data and also different in structure from the data stored within the NC unit. - The contents of the header block or data block in the file transfer message (including machining programs) are not correct. - Check if the data that has been transferred from the host system is for use with MATRIX or for use with the machining being operated. - Check the contents of the header block (version number, etc.) or data block (sequence number, etc.) in the file transfer message.

Action

585 Cause

CABLE MIS-CONNECTED

Blue

This message implies incorrect cable connection between the host system and the NC unit or implies a power-off status.

- Check if the DNC cables are correctly connected. - Check if the host system is turned on and ready for data transmission/reception. Action There may be cases that although a DNC option is provided, DNC itself is not to be used for the time being and thus the DNC cables are not yet connected. If this is the case, then set the appropriate parameter (DNC26, bit 1) to OFF (0). This will clear the alarm display. SYSTEM ERROR An error has occurred within the system. ( , , ) E L S Blue

586 Cause

Action

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center. (At this time, also please notify them of what kind of operating procedure you had carried out before the alarm message appeared and what values were displayed in parentheses.)

3-77

ALARM

No. 587

Message PROG. OPERATION NOT ALLOWED (WNo., , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

Cause

1. An attempt has been made to transmit a display inhibiting program to the host system. (Program management function) 2. An attempt has been made to transmit to the host system the program being edited (or the program being loaded using another I/O unit). 1. Check if the specified work number is for the program of display inhibition.

Action

2. Carry out the transfer operation only after completion of the program editing (or program loading using another I/O unit). DATA OPERATION NOT ALLOWED ( , , ) A L S Blue

588

- An attempt has been made during automatic operation to load data other than machining program data. Cause - An attempt has been made to transmit to the host system the data being loaded using another I/O unit. - An attempt has been made to load the data being saved using another I/O unit. Action 589 Wait until automatic operation has been completed (or until the loading or saving operation using another I/O unit has been completed). DATA SIZE EXCEEDED (WNo., Note, ) A L S Blue

Cause

The EIA/ISO machining program includes a block that consists of more than 256 characters. (EOB or EOR is not present within 256 characters.) Note: The number displayed next to the work number is a line number, which corresponds to the number displayed in the lower right section of the PROGRAM display.

Action 590

Correct the machining program. (Insert EOB within 256 characters.)

DNC COMMAND IMPOSSIBLE

Blue

The particular status of the NC unit disables execution of the control command that has been requested from the host system. Cause - A request for work number search has been made during automatic operation. - During automatic operation, a request for deleting the machining program being used for the automatic operation has been made. Action 591 Cause Wait until the NC unit becomes ready for processing or until the automatic operation is completed, and then make the request once again. NO OPTION (WNo., , ) A L S Blue

An attempt has been made to load (save) the data not supported by the current option of the DNC unit.

Action 592

Only data supported by the option can be processed.

ILLEGAL COMMAND RECEIVED

Blue

Cause

- The control command or file transfer command that has been requested from the host system is a nonexistent command. - The machine number that has been designated for the loading of data other than machining program data does not agree with any of the machine numbers within the NC unit.

Action

- Check the details of the command message that has been sent from the host system. - Check if the machine number is the same as that registered within the NC unit (parameter DNC19).

3-78

ALARM

No. 593 DNC I/O ERROR

Message ( , , )

Type of error G

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

- During use of DNC, processing has been aborted by line noise or other hardware factors. Cause - RS-232C communication parameter settings (such as those of the baud-rate, etc.) between the host system and NC unit differ. - Timer, number-of-retries or other settings are not correct. - Make line checks and hardware checks of the host system and NC unit. Action - Match the RS-232C communication parameter settings between the host system and NC unit. - Set the timer, number-of-retries, or other settings to those of the host system. (Parameters for the NC unit: DNC parameters) 594 SEND-RECEIVE ERROR ( , , ) G L S Blue

- The preset number of retries has been exceeded during transmission/reception of command messages. Cause - RS-232C communication parameter settings (such as those of the baud-rate, etc.) between the host system and NC unit differ. - Timer, number-of-retries or other settings are not correct. - Make line checks and message checks of the host systems. Action - Match the RS-232C communication parameter settings between the host system and NC unit. - Set the timer, number-of-retries or other settings to those of the host system. (Parameters for the NC unit: DNC parameters) 595 FILE TRANSFER ERROR ( , , ) G L S Blue

- The preset number of retries has been exceeded during transmission/reception of the messages. Cause - RS-232C communication parameter settings (such as those of the baud-rate, etc.) between the host system and NC unit differ. - Timer, number-of-retries or other settings are not correct. - Make line checks and message checks of the host systems. Action - Match the RS-232C communication parameter settings between the host system and NC unit. - Set the timer, number-of-retries or other settings to those of the host system. (Parameters for the NC unit: DNC parameters) 596 Cause DNC MALFUNCTION ( , , ) G L S Blue

An irretrievable hardware error has occurred during reception of the first message (ENQ) from the host system.

Action 597 Cause

After making hardware checks of the NC and host systems and line checks, turn the NC unit power back on and then restart the receiving operation. POWER OFF DURING DNC OPERATION ( , , ) A L S Blue

Power has been turned off during DNC operation.

Action 598 Cause

Check for errors in the machining program being used, and if errors are found, carry out the DNC operation once again. Note, however, that if the machining program is being loaded, then loading must be carried out once again after erasing the loaded contents of the program. NO EIA/ISO OPTION ( , , ) A L S Blue

An attempt has been made to transfer EIA/ISO program although the NC unit is not provided with an EIA/ISO option.

Action 599

Without an EIA/ISO option, EIA/ISO program processing is not possible.

DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND

Blue

The host system has issued a request for transmission/reception of data not existing within the NC unit. Cause - A drum-tool data transfer request has been issued to the NC unit though it is not provided with a drum. - A request for transfer of a larger volume of data than the control data stored within the NC unit has been made. Action Check the contents of the command messages that have been sent from the host system.

3-79

ALARM

3-2-7
No. 600 Cause

No. 600 - No. 699, No. 1600 - No. 1699 (MAZATROL program error)
Message ( , , ) Type of error Stopped status Clearing procedure Display

Action 601 Cause

SYSTEM ERROR ( , , ) E I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

A processing error has occurred within the NC unit.

Action 602 Cause

Using data I/O operation, save the program data, tool data, tool file data, parameters, etc. that are currently being used. After that, contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center. PROG. OPERATION NOT ALLOWED ( , , ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

An attempt has been made to start the program being transferred.

Action 603 Cause

After the transfer operation is completed, start the program.

NO DESIGNATED PROGRAM

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

- The program having the work number that has been set in the subprogram unit does not exist within the memory. - No work number has been set in the subprogram unit. - The work number that has been designated as the restart position does not exist within the memory. Action 604 Cause Review the machining programs to see if the designated program exists.

NO PITCH IN MULTI WORKPIECES

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

- Pitch X is not yet set in spite of the fact that multi-piece machining in the direction of the X-axis is to take place. - Pitch Y is not yet set in spite of the fact that multi-piece machining in the direction of the Y-axis is to take place. Review the particular machining program and then set an appropriate multi-piece machining pitch in the common unit.

Action 605 Cause

NO TOOL DATA IN PROGRAM

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The point-, line- or face-machining (including 3-D) unit does not contain any tool sequences.

Action 606 Cause

Review the particular machining program to see if there are units that do not contain necessary tool sequences.

NO FIGURE IN PROGRAM

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The point-, line- or face-machining (including 3-D) unit does not have any shape data.

Action 607 Cause

Review the particular machining program to see if there are units that do not contain necessary shape data.

MISSING INPUT DATA (POINT) A point-machining unit lacks data.

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Action 608 Cause

Review the particular machining program, and set data if a point-machining unit lacks data.

MISSING INPUT DATA (LINE) A line-machining unit lacks data.

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Action

Review the particular machining program, and set data if a line-machining unit lacks data.

3-80

ALARM

No. 609 Cause

Message MISSING INPUT DATA (FACE) A face-machining unit lacks data. (WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

Action 610 Cause

Review the particular machining program, and set data if a face-machining unit lacks data.

MISSING TOOL DATA FOR POINT A point-machining tool sequence lacks data.

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Action 611 Cause

Review the particular machining program, and set data if a point-machining tool sequence lacks data.

MISSING TOOL DATA FOR LINE A line-machining tool sequence lacks data.

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Action 612 Cause

Review the particular machining program, and set data if a line-machining tool sequence lacks data.

MISSING TOOL DATA FOR FACE

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

A face-machining (including 3-D) tool sequence lacks data.

Action 613 Cause

Review the particular machining program, and set data if a face-machining tool sequence lacks data.

DATA MISSING IN WPC UNIT The WPC unit lacks data.

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Action 614 Cause

Review the particular machining program, and set data if the WPC unit lacks data.

SUB PROGRAM NESTING EXCEEDED

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The maximum permissible number of repeats of MAZATROL program nesting has been exceeded nine.

Action 615 Cause

Review and correct the particular machining program so that the total number of repeats of nesting does not excess nine.

DATA MISSING IN OFFSET UNIT The offset unit lacks data.

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Action 616 Cause

Review the particular machining program, and set data if the offset unit lacks data.

DATA ERROR IN M CODE UNIT The M-code unit contains no data.

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Action 617 Cause

Review the particular machining program, and input data to the M-code unit.

EXECUTION IMPOSSIBLE

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The data processing operation cannot be performed because of contradiction in data. This condition occurs if an attempt is made to start automatic operation when the specified work number is an unregistered number. Search out the contradictory data making reference to WNo., UNo., SNo. (which are displayed together with the alarm message), and then correct the data.

Action

3-81

ALARM

No. 618 Cause

Message POINT CUTTING PARAMETER ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

The point-machining parameter setting(s) is out of its permissible range.

Action 619 Cause

LINE/FACE CUTTING PAR. ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

The line- or face-machining parameter settings are out of their permissible ranges.

Action 620 Cause

The parameter E13 is set to 0; change it to a value other than 0.

CUTTING SPEED ZERO

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Of tool sequence data (except for chip removal), the surface speed (C-SP) is unset or set to 0.

Action 621 Cause

Review the machining program and set the desired surface speed (C-SP).

FEEDRATE ZERO

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Of tool sequence data (except for chip removal), the feedrate (FR) is unset or set to 0.

Action 622 Cause

Review the machining program and set the desired feedrate (FR).

DESIGNATED UNIT NOT FOUND

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The unit that has been designated as the restart position is not present in the program with the specified work number.

Action 623 Cause

Review the machining program and designate the correct unit number.

DESIGNATED SNo. NOT FOUND

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The tool sequence that has been designated as the restart position is not present in the unit of the specified work number; two or more lines of tool sequence data are present in the line-machining chamfering unit. Review the machining program and designate the correct tool sequence number.

Action 624 Cause

RESTART IMPOSSIBLE

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

- The unit that has been designated as the restart position is the end unit. - The designated number of times of reappearance (L) is too large and the corresponding restart position is not present. - The restart data is incomplete. Action 625 Cause Check the contents of the restart data or the program.

ENDMILL DIAMETER EXCEEDED

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

- The value of (groove width) (finish allowance R) 2 of the endmill groove unit is smaller than the tool diameter value of the rough-machining tool. - The groove width value of the endmill groove unit is smaller than the tool diameter value of the finishing tool.

Action 626 Cause

DESIGNATED TOOL NOT FOUND (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

The tool(s) specified in the program is not registered in the tool data.

Action

Carry out a tool layout operation and register the necessary tool(s) on the TOOL DATA display.

3-82

ALARM

No. 627 Cause

Message TOOL DATA INPUT PROCESS ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

The data of the tool length or tool diameter is not yet input on the TOOL DATA display.

Action 628 Cause

Review the tool data and input the tool length or tool diameter.

NO ASSIGNED TOOL IN TOOL FILE

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The tool specified in the program is not registered on the TOOL FILE display.

Action 629 Cause

Register the tool data that is to be used in the program into the tool file.

TOOL FILE INPUT PROCESS ERROR The tool file lacks of data.

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Action 630 Cause

Review the data on the TOOL FILE display and fill in any empty items with data.

Z DEPTH OF CUT TOO LARGE

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Of the line- or face-machining tool sequence data, the value of the Z depth of cut is in excess of the depth of cut on the TOOL FILE display. Review the machining program and correct the value of the Z depth of cut.

Action 631

STOCK REMOVAL R TOO LARGE

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Cause

The value of (removal allowance R) (finish allowance R) in the line-machining unit is larger than the value of the tool diameter of the rough-cutting tool. The value of removal allowance R in the line-machining unit is larger than the value of the tool diameter of the finishing tool.

Action 632 Cause

Review the machining program and correct the values of removal allowance R and finishing allowance R in the linemachining unit. RADIAL DEPTH OF CUT ZERO (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Of line- or face-machining tool sequence data, the radial depth of cut is set to zero or smaller.

Action 633 Cause

Review the machining program and set the radial depth of cut to the correct value.

Z DEPTH OF CUT ZERO

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Of line- or face-machining tool sequence data, the Z depth of cut is set to zero or smaller.

Action 634 Cause

Review the machining program and set the Z depth of cut to the correct value.

FINISH DEPTH OF CUT ZERO

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The finish allowance value in the line- or face-machining unit is set to zero in spite of the fact that a finishing tool is registered. Review the machining program and set data in the finish allowance data item.

Action 635 Cause

TOOL DIAMETER ZERO Of tool data, the tool diameter setting is zero.

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Action

Review the data on the TOOL DATA display and set data in the tool diameter item.

3-83

ALARM

No. 636 Cause

Message STOCK REMOVAL Z TOO SMALL (WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

In the line- or face-machining unit, removal allowance Z is smaller than finish allowance Z.

Action 637 Cause

Review the line- or face-machining unit and increase removal allowance Z to a value greater than that of finish allowance Z. STOCK REMOVAL R TOO SMALL (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

In the line- or face-machining unit, removal allowance R is smaller than finish allowance R.

Action 638 Cause

Review the line- or face-machining unit and increase the value of removal allowance R to a value greater than that of finish allowance R. R DEPTH OF CUT TOO LARGE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Of the face-machining tool sequence data, the setting of the radial depth of cut is smaller than the tool diameter setting on the TOOL DATA display. Review the machining program and increase the radial depth of cut to a value greater than the tool diameter setting in the tool data. DESIGNATED PALLET NOT FOUND (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action 639 Cause

The pallet number that has been set in the pallet changing unit is larger than the maximum allowable number of pallets set in the parameter L46. Review the machining program and set an allowable pallet number.

Action 640 Cause

ILLEGAL INDEX ANGLE INPUT

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The data that has been set in the angle item of the indexing unit is that which cannot be divided by the parameter L37 setting (minimum allowable angle of index). Review the machining program and set an allowable angle of index.

Action 641

MISSING INPUT DATA

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The pallet changing unit or the indexing unit lacks of unit data. Cause Initial point Z is not yet set in the common unit. CPT-X, CPT-Z or rotational direction is not yet set in the mill-turning unit. Action 642 Cause Review the machining program and set all the necessary values in the unit.

ILLEGAL NEXT PALLET No. INPUT

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The same pallet number as the current pallet number has been set as the next one.

Action 643 Cause

Review the machining program and make sure of the pallet numbers.

DATA ERROR IN MAN. PROG. UNIT

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The manual program mode unit contains a sequence that has no data.

Action 644 Cause

Review the machining program, and fill in any incomplete sequence with data or erase such sequences.

NOMINAL DIAMETER NOT FOUND

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The nominal diameter item of the tool sequence data is not complete. The nominal diameter item of the MMS unit or the manual program mode unit (when a tool is set) is not complete. Review the machining program, and set data in the nominal diameter item of the MMS unit or the manual program mode unit (when a tool is set) or erase the corresponding portion.

Action

3-84

ALARM

No. 645 Cause PRIORITY No. OVERLAP

Message (WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

The same priority number is assigned to different tools.

Action

Within one process, the same priority number must not be assigned to different tools. Change the priority number.

646

ILLEGAL PRIORITY NUMBER

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)* (LNo. 1, LNo. 2, )**

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The priority numbering order within a unit is not correct. Cause * During setting the priority numbers on the PROGRAM display.

** During setting the priority numbers on the PROGRAM LAYOUT display - data in the layout lines LNo. 1 and LNo. 2 are not correct. Action 647 Cause The machining order within one unit has been reversed by the incorrect priority numbering. Change the priority numbers. END UNIT NOT FOUND The end unit is not present in the program. (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action 648 Cause

Review the machining program and set the end unit at the end of the program.

MULTI OFFSET DATA TOO LARGE

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

More than 10 sets of offset data have been input for multi-piece machining.

Action 649 Cause

The machining program is in an abnormal state. If the program is already saved onto cassette tape, floppy disk or other media, erase the program and then reload it. If the program is not yet saved, make corrections with the editing function and fully scan for more data errors. MEASURING SEQUENCE INCOMPLETE The measurement sequence lacks of data. (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action 650 Cause

Review the machining program, and input data to the measurement sequence to make it complete.

CHAMFERING IMPOSSIBLE

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Cutting is impossible because the chamfering cutter is likely to come into contact with the wall or bottom of the workpiece during chamfering. The data of the specified chamfering cutter on the TOOL DATA or TOOL FILE display is not appropriate.

Action 651 Cause

Review the machining program or the tool file, and correct inappropriate data.

GEAR PARAMETER ERROR

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

An attempt has been made to execute the point-, line- or face-machining MAZATROL program when the setting of parameter SA51 was 5 or more. Change the setting of parameter SA51 to a value between 0 and 4.

Action 652 Cause

GEAR SHIFT DATA ERROR

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The tool sequence data contains an unavailable milling spindle gear-shift M-code(s).

Change the corresponding code(s) to an available one(s).

2-gear
Action

H : M39 L : M38

3-gear

H : M39 M : M38 L : M37

4-gear

H MH ML L

: M39 : M38 : M37 : M36

3-85

ALARM

No. 653 Cause

Message ILLEGAL TOOL DESIGNATED (WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

Tools that cannot be used have been designated.

Action 654 Cause

Review the machining program and designate tools that are usable.

TOOL DATA ERROR

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The tool length and tool diameter settings on the TOOL DATA display are negative.

Action 655 Cause

Set positive tool length and tool diameter values.

PROGRAM DATA CORRUPT The program is destroyed.

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Action 656 Cause

Erase a part of the program and then re-create the destroyed part; or erase the entire program and then carry out a loading operation using the data I/O operation once again. MASURING SEQ. DATA NOT FOUND (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

The measurement units include one that has no sequence data.

Action 657 Cause

Create one or more lines of sequence data in the corresponding measurement unit, or erase the unit.

ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT The program contains incorrect data.

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Action 658 Cause

Review the machining program and make data corrections.

INITIAL Z < MATERIAL DEPTH

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The setting of the material height in the 3-D machining unit is greater than that of initial point Z in the common unit.

Action 659 Cause

Change the program to give a material height value smaller than the initial point Z value.

NO TOOL PATH CHECK (I/O BUSY)

(WNo.,

Blue

The tool path check cannot be performed since I/O operation (loading) is in progress.

Action 660 Cause

Make the tool path check after the I/O operation has been completed.

CANNOT MOVE DESIGNATED AXIS

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The Y-axis or Z-axis of the index position has been appointed using the indexing unit when the parameter L41 is set to 2.

Action 661 Cause

Using the data cancellation key, erase the Y-axis or Z-axis data of the index position.

ILLEGAL M CODE

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

M195 (tool breakage detection start command code) has been set for the M-code unit or for the manual program mode sequence. M195 cannot be executed on MAZATROL programs. Delete that command code from the program.

Action

3-86

ALARM

No. 662 Cause

Message NO INCLINED PLANE OPTION (WNo., UNo., )

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

An attempt has been made to execute the inclined-plane machining program in the absence of an inclined-plane machining option. Inclined-plane machining is not possible because of the absence of an inclined-plane machining option.

Action 663

WRONG HEAD ANGLE

(WNo., UNo.,

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

1. A corner-face unit or plane inclination measurement has been designated in unit data other than inclined-plane machining unit data. Cause 2. Table rotational machining has been designated in spite of the fact that the facial angle data in the face definition sequence is not for the top plane. 3. Calibration measurement has been designated for the top plane or an inclined plane. 4. Groove center, hole center, boss center, and step width measurements have been designated for an inclined plane. 1. A corner-face unit and plane inclination measurement can be designated only for an inclined plane. Action 2. Table rotational machining can be executed only for the top plane. 3. Calibration measurement is possible only for the side. 4. Only reference plane measurement and plane inclination measurement are possible for inclined planes. 664 Cause 3-D UNIT NOT FOUND IN PROGRAM (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

A 3-D machining unit has been set in the program in spite of the fact that 3-D machining option is not provided.

Action 665 Cause

Erase the 3-D machining unit from the machining program.

ILLEGAL DATA IN 3-D UNIT The 3-D machining unit lacks of unit data.

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Action 666 Cause

Review the machining program and set necessary data in the 3-D machining unit.

PLANE DATA NOT FOUND IN PROGRAM

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The 3-D machining unit lacks of plane definition data.

Action 667 Cause

Review the machining program and set plane definition data in the 3-D machining unit.

CHECK SURFACE DATA NOT FOUND

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The 3-D machining unit lacks of check surface data.

Action 668 Cause

Review the machining program and set check surface data in the 3-D machining unit.

ILLEGAL PLANE DATA IN PROGRAM

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The plane definition data in the 3-D machining unit is not complete.

Action 669 Cause

Review the machining program and set data in the plane definition data item.

ILLEGAL TOLERANCE DATA INPUT

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The value of the tolerance parameter that has been designated in the tool sequence is 0.

Action

Check the parameters E67 through E75, and set a value other than 0 in the parameter whose setting is 0.

3-87

ALARM

No. 670 Cause

Message ILLEGAL SEQUENCE DATA IN PRG. (WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

The tool sequence in the 3-D machining unit lacks of data.

Action 671 Cause

Review the machining program and input data to the tool sequence.

ILLEGAL MOVE SURFACE DATA

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The coordinate conversion data in the 3-D machining unit is not complete.

Action 672 Cause

Review the machining program and make the coordinate conversion data complete.

ILLEGAL AREA DATA INPUT

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

In the check surface data of the 3-D machining unit, the setting of the maximum value is smaller than that of the minimum value. Review the check surface data, and make corrections so that the setting of the maximum value is equal to or greater than that of the minimum value for each axis. FL NUMBER EXCEEDED (3-D UNIT) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action 673 Cause

In the ruled-surface unit, the number of FLs is in excess of 20, or in the line- or face-machining unit, the number of defined figures is in excess of 2. Review the machining program and correct the shape data.

Action 674 Cause

NO 5FACE CUTTING OPTION

(WNo., UNo.,

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

An attempt has been made to execute a five-surface machining program when the five-surface machining option was not present. Set the five-surface machining option to execute a five-surface machining program.

Action 675 Cause

ILLEGAL CUTTING FACE DESIGNATED

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

P (S)

Red (Blue)

A face that cannot be cut with the selected head has been designated.

Action 676

Change either the selected face or the head.

ILLEGAL UNIT

(WNo., UNo.,

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Cause

1. The face definition unit or five-surface machining unit includes illegal units and measurement sequences. Illegal units and sequences: face definition unit, pallet change unit, process end unit, index unit, WPC unit, and measurement of workpiece inclination. 2. An MMS unit has been set in the program that has table rotational machining designated in its face definition sequence. 3. Executing the mill-turning unit has been attempted in a machine not having a mill-turning option. 1. Remove all illegal units and sequences from the machining program.

Action

2. MMS measurement is not possible while table rotational machining is effective. 3. The mill-turning unit cannot be executed without a mill-turning option.

677 Cause

UNREGISTERED HEAD DATA

(WNo., UNo.,

I (L)

P (S)

Red (Blue)

Head data corresponding to the head of the designated head number does not exist.

Action

Review the designated head number.

3-88

ALARM

No. 678 Cause NO INTERSECTION

Message (WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

In the line- or face-machining unit, the coordinates of the intersection point of figures cannot be obtained because of shortage of, or contradiction, in the free-shape data. CONNECTING CORNER IMPOSSIBLE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action 679 Cause

The figures cannot be connected smoothly at corner R because of contradiction in the data of corner R or in the data of the figures in front and rear of corner R. Review the machining program and check the value of corner R of the free shapes.

Action 680 Cause

NUMBER OF HOLES EXCEEDED (>500)

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The point-machining units include one(s) that has more than 500 holes defined in it.

Action 681 Cause

Review the point-machining units, and make corrections so that the total number of hole settings in one point-machining unit in not greater than 500. CORNER R/C DEFINED AT SPT/FPT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Corner rounding or corner chamfering has been set at the starting or ending point of a figure when defining figures in the central linear machining, right-hand linear machining, left-hand linear machining, right-hand chamfering or left-hand chamfering units. Review the machining program and correct it so that the corner rounding or corner chamfering is not set at the starting or ending point. ILLEGAL REPEAT FIGURE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action 682 Cause

Contradiction presides in the figure rotation or figure shift data that has been set during defining free figures in the line- or face-machining unit. Review and correct the corresponding shape data.

Action 683

UNDEFINED CORNER

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The specified size of corner rounding or chamfering is inadmissible. Example: This alarm does not occur in general unless the specified size of rounding or chamfering exceeds the length of one of the two sides of the corner concerned. As for a rectangular line- or face-machining shape described with the aid of the [SQUARE] menu function, in particular, the size in question for corners CN1 (starting point) and CN4 (ending point) must not exceed half the length of the side between them since the cutting start position will be set in actual machining to the mid-point of that side. Cause

Specified Starting point Cutting start position chamfering size CN1 Ending point CN4 Sides of the corner to be rounded or chamfered CN3 CN2

Check the shape sequence data in question to correct the size of corner rounding or chamfering. Action In the above-mentioned particular case of rectangular shape, use the [ARBITRY] menu function, instead of [SQUARE], to describe the desired shape on multiple lines of shape sequence data.

3-89

ALARM

No. 684 Cause

Message POINT CUTTING PATTERN ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

The point-machining shape definition data is not appropriate.

Action 685 Cause

Review and correct the corresponding shape data.

SQUARE CANNOT BE DEFINED

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

When the shape pattern is square, the input data cannot be used to make shape definitions.

Action 686 Cause

Review and correct the corresponding shape data.

NO STARTING POINT

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

During input of free-shape data (open-figure data) to the line-machining unit, ? has been set as the definition of the starting point. Review the machining program and set the coordinates of the starting point of the free shape.

Action 687 Cause

NO FINISH POINT

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

During input of free-shape data (open-figure data) to the line-machining unit, ? has been set as the definition of the ending point. Review the machining program and set the coordinates of the ending point of the free shape.

Action 688 Cause

INSUFFICIENT INPUT DATA

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The coordinates of the intersection point cannot be calculated since the free-shape input data in the line- or facemachining unit is incomplete. Review the corresponding shape data and set data that is wanting.

Action 689 Cause

INPUT DATA TOO MANY

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

1. The line- or face-machining unit contains too much free-shape input data, and there is contradiction between overlapping data. 2. Too many tool sequences have been set for the line- or face-machining unit.

Action 690 Cause

1. Review the corresponding shape data and erase either one of the overlapping data sets. 2. Reduce the number of tool sequences. ILLEGAL RADIUS (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Contradiction exists in the free-shape data that have been set to define arc in the line- or face-machining units.

Action 691 Cause

Review the corresponding shape data and set correct data.

MOUNT (VALLEY) SHAPE ERROR

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The second figures (inside figures) are not yet defined in the endmilling-mountain (STEP), pocket milling-mountain or pocket milling-valley unit. Review the machining program, and define the second shape in the endmilling-mountain (STEP), pocket milling-mountain or pocket milling-valley unit. MAX POINT NUMBER EXCEEDED (>200) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action 692 Cause

The number of points which are necessary to define the shapes designated in the line- or face-machining unit exceeds 200. Review the machining program, and reduce the number of shapes within one line- or face-machining unit.

Action

3-90

ALARM

No. 693 Cause

Message NUMBER OF SHAPES TOO LARGE (WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

Among the line- or face-machining units is one(s) that contains more shapes than allowable within one unit.

Action 694 Cause

Review the corresponding shape data and check the number of shapes.

FIXED FIGURE DESIGNATED ERROR

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Fixed shapes are included in the shape data (open figures) of the central linear machining, right-hand linear machining, left-hand linear machining, right-hand chamfering, left-hand chamfering or endmilling-groove units. Change the fixed shapes to free ones.

Action 695 Cause

POINT INSIDE CIRCLE

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

It is not possible to draw a tangent line from point P1 since it is inside the arc.

Action 696 Cause

Review the machining program and check the free-shaped data.

ILLEGAL DIRECTION

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Left or right is set for the crossing point (P), though up or down should have been set.

Action 697 Cause

Review the machining program and check the value of the crossing point (P).

DATUM <P> REQUIRED

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The crossing point (P) is not yet input in spite of the fact that there are more than two points of intersection with the arc.

Action 698 Cause

Review the machining program and set the crossing point (P).

TWO POINTS OVERLAP

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The coordinate values of the start point and end point are the same.

Action 699 Cause

For the pattern of straight line, the data of X/Y are set to exactly the same end point coordinate values as X/Y present on the preceding line of the program; delete these data. PARALLEL LINE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

The two straight lines are parallel to each other, and thus the coordinates of their intersection point cannot be obtained.

Action

Review the corresponding shape data and set correct data.

3-91

ALARM

No. 1601 Cause ILLEGAL ATC MODE

Message (WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

ATC mode ID number 5 has been set in the main program.

Action 1602 Cause

ATC mode ID number 5 can be set only in subprograms. Set ATC mode ID number 0 to 4 in the main program.

SET INDEX UNIT BEFORE MACHINING

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The position of W-axis is not specified in the index unit preceding the machining unit.

Action 1603 Cause

Review the machining program and set the position of the W-axis in the index unit.

PROGRAM IS NOT WPC.

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The main MAZATROL program of the initial-point scheme has been executed under the setting of the machine model with MAZATROL-based control of the lower turret. Re-create the main MAZATROL program into a program of the workpiece scheme.

Action 1604 Cause

ILLEGAL TOOL DIRECTION (INDEX B)

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

There is a mismatch in workpiece scheme data settings between the machining direction for index unit POS-B and the machining direction for the machining section of the lower-turret milling tool. Insert an index unit in front of the desired milling unit. Next, set the value to POS-B appropriate for the lower-turret milling tool machining section, or select the appropriate lower-turret milling tool according to the particular machining direction for POS-B of the index unit. LOW TUR CANNOT EXECUTE MIRROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action 1605 Cause

Either lower-turret turning unit, the measuring unit, the manual program mode unit, or subprogram EIA call has been executed with MIRROR of the WPC shift unit made valid in a program of the workpiece scheme. Insert the WPC shift unit in front of the desired unit and then make MIRROR invalid.

Action 1606 Cause

ILLEGAL CUTTING ANGLE

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The infeed angle or relief angle during cutting is 0 or less.

Action 1607 Cause

Confirm the infeed angle or relief angle in the tool data. Change the B-axis machining angle. NEED TOOL ROTATION DIRECTION ( , , ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

The M-SP ROT. item (which is indispensable for executing a MAZATROL program when K102 bit 6 = 1) remains unset on the TOOL DATA display. Perform the required setting for the M-SP ROT. item.

Action

( Cause

Action

3-92

ALARM

3-2-8
No. 700 Cause

No. 700 - No. 799, No. 1700 - No. 1799 (MAZATROL program error)
Message ( , , ) Type of error Stopped status Clearing procedure Display

Action 701 Cause

DEFINED SHAPE TOO SMALL (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B K O Blue

The shape compensation clearance with respect to the shape of the endmilling-top is too large; or the tool diameter with respect to the size of the line-inside machining is too large. Change the shape compensation clearance (parameter E13) to an appropriate value: or use a tool of smaller diameter.

Action 702 Cause

FIGURE DEFINITION ERROR

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Blue

The input shape is contradictory to logic, that is, the radius of the arc, for example, does not agree with the distance from the center. Such contradiction usually results from arithmetic errors. Change the radial depth of cut by some micro, or use a tool of smaller diameter. PROCESS DEFINITION ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B K O Blue

Action 703 Cause

The machining conditions are incorrect (for example, the radial depth of cut is zero).

Action 704 Cause

Change the machining conditions to correct ones.

TOOL INTERFERENCE

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Blue

In area machining, the tool diameter with respect to the figure is too large.

Action 705 Cause

Replace the tool with one that has a smaller diameter; or select the M2 mode endmilling-mountain (STEP) machining pattern with setting bit 7 of parameter E91 if this error occurs in the outside machining endmilling-mountain (STEP). APPROACH POINT ERROR The approach point cannot be obtained. (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B K O Blue

Action 706

Reduce the tool diameter, the approach amount (parameters E1, E2) and/or the overlap amount (parameter E21).

ILLEGAL FIGURE DATA

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Blue

- The shape has been separated into three segments or more as a result of offsetting. Cause - The inside form does not contain the center of the outside form for outside-related fixed path. - The outside form is concave for inside-related fixed path. - The inside form is not adequate since it contains a concave or an intersection. Action 707 Cause Change the machining pattern (from inversed type to fixed type, for example); or divide the machining shape in advance so that it will not be separated by offsetting. CHAMFER CUTTER INTERFERENCE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B K O Blue

The chamfering tool interferes with the side wall or bottom.

Action

Use a tool which does not interfere with the side wall or bottom.

3-93

ALARM

No. 708 Cause

Message BLOCK DATA LIMIT EXCEEDED (WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

In the EIA program, the total number of characters within one block is in excess of 248.

Action 709 Cause

Divide the block so that one block contains 248 characters or less.

CHECK DEPTH-R

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Blue

No automatic calculations of intersection were obtained since there is no or too short a distance between end points of the shape. Change the radial depth of cut in the tool sequence by some micro.

Action 710 Cause

CORNER ROUNDING CUTTER DIA ERR

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Blue

The programmed amount of round chamfering differs from the following: (NOM- MIN-)/2. where NOM- and MIN- are the setting values of the selected tool on the TOOL FILE display. Select a tool appropriate to the chamfering amount.

Action 711 Cause

UNIT DATA NOT FOUND

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Unset unit data exists for the unit you have made an attempt to execute.

Action 712 Cause

Set all data.

ILLEGAL UNIT DATA

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Sequence data for the unit you have made an attempt to execute does not match to the unit data.

Action 713 Cause

Delete the sequence data, and then set correct sequence data.

SEQUENCE DATA NOT FOUND

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

No sequence data exists for the unit you have made an attempt to execute.

Action 714 Cause

Set sequence data.

ILLEGAL SEQUENCE DATA

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Data out of the allowable setting range exists in the sequence data of the unit you have made an attempt to execute.

Action 715 Cause

Correct the sequence data.

ILLEGAL CUTTING POINT

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The specified infeed point is outside the profile of the workpiece (approximate workpiece shape designated by common unit). Move the infeed point into the profile of the workpiece.

Action 716 Cause

ILLEGAL CUTTING START POINT

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The relative position of the starting or ending point specified by the sequence data with respect to the specified infeed point is not appropriate. Change the position of the starting or ending point of the sequence data, or change the position of the infeed point.

Action

3-94

ALARM

No. 717 Cause

Message SHAPE EXCEEDS MATERIAL SIZE (WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

The starting or ending point is outside the profile of the workpiece (approximate workpiece shape specified by common unit). Change the starting or ending point.

Action 718 Cause

CUTTING DIRECTION NOT DEFINED

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The direction of machining (forward/backward) cannot be determined using the specified infeed point and sequence data.

Action 719 Cause

Change the position of the starting or ending point.

REVERSE SHAPE CONTOUR

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Part of the defined shape is opposite in direction of machining with respect to the reference axis movement direction.

Action 720 Cause

Correct the position of the starting or ending point.

DOUBLE SHAPE CONTOUR The defined workpiece shape has overlaps.

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Action 721

Correct the position of the starting or ending point.

ILLEGAL RADIUS Arc-drawing data you have specified is illegal.

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Cause

That is, the relationship between the starting point, ending point, and radius of the arc is incorrect. It is impossible to define an arc.

Action 722

Correct the starting-point data, ending-point data, or radius data of the arc.

LLEGAL CORNER DEFINITION

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

There are the following errors related to the designated corner C data: Cause <BAR, CPY, CORNER> The arc length of the block present before or after corner C is smaller than that of corner C. <T. GROOV> Added corner C is outside the workpiece profile. Action 723 Cause Correct either the length of corner C or the sequence data set before or after corner C.

EXCEEDS NUMBER OF SHAPES

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Defined shape of machining or of the workpiece is too complicated to be processed.

Action 724 Cause

Simplify the shape of the machining or of the workpiece.

EXCEEDS NUMBER OF VALLEY SHAPES

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The total number of valleys in the machining shape is in excess of 16.

Action

Divide the machining shape in multiple units.

3-95

ALARM

No. 725 Cause

Message ILLEGAL COMMON DATA (RADIAL) OD-MAX > ID-MIN 0 Set correct data to OD-MAX, or ID-MIN. (WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

OD-MAX and ID-MIN in the common unit do not satisfy the following condition:

Action 726 Cause

ILLEGAL COMMON DATA (AXIAL) LENGTH WORK FACE + FIN-LENGTH > 0

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

LENGTH, WORK FACE and FIN-LENGTH do not satisfy the following condition:

Action 727 Cause

Set correct data to LENGTH, WORK FACE and FIN-LENGTH.

MATERIAL SHAPE CROSSING

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

There is a data overlap between the inside diameter side (IN) and outside diameter side (OUT) of the workpiece shape which has been designated in the MATERIAL unit. Change the IN or OUT shape data.

Action 728 Cause

EXCESSIVE FINISH ALLOWANCE

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The area to be rough-cut does not exist since the designated finishing allowance is larger than the shape defined by the sequence data. Either change the finishing allowance or cancel rough-cutting.

Action 729 Cause

ILLEGAL SHAPE DESIGNATED (CNR)

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

In the CORNER unit data, the relationship between the starting point and the ending point is wrong.

Action 730 Cause

Set the correct data to SPT and FPT.

ILLEGAL SHAPE DESIGNATED (EDG)

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

In the FACING unit data, the relationship between the starting point and the ending point is wrong.

Action 731 Cause

Set the correct data to SPT and FPT.

ILLEGAL NUM. OF PATHS (THR)

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The designated number of cutting times for #0, #3 thread type is less than 3.

Action 732 Cause

Change the number of cutting times to 3 or more, or change the thread type.

ACCELERATION DISTANCE EXCEED

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The calculated distance of threading acceleration is in excess of the allowable value.

Action 733 Cause

Change the related parameter setting value or reduce the surface speed to its minimum permissible value.

ILLEGAL SHAPE DESIGNATED (GRV)

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

In the T. GROOV unit data, the relationship between the starting point and the ending point is wrong.

Action

Set the correct data to SPT and FPT.

3-96

ALARM

No. 734 Cause

Message ILLEGAL SHAPE EXCEEDS MTRL SIZE (WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

For machining of multiple grooves, the second and subsequent grooves are outside the workpiece profile defined by common unit. Reduce the number of grooves.

Action 735 Cause

ILLEGAL DESIGNATED TL WID (GRV)

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The designated tool width does not match to the groove shape specified in the T. GROOV unit.

Action 736 Cause

Designate some other tool, or correct the width of the designated tool.

ILLEGAL OVERLAP

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The parameter-set amount of grooving overlap is larger than the width or diameter of the designated tool.

Action 737 Cause

Either designate some other tool, correct the width or diameter of the designated tool, or change the parameter setting (TC75). ILLEGAL DRILLING DIRECTION (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

In the T-DRILL or T-TAP unit data, the relationship between the starting point and the ending point is wrong.

Action 738 Cause

Set the correct data to SPT-Z and FPT-Z.

CORNER (R/C) DESIGNATED OVERLAP

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

In the unit (BAR, CPY, etc.), different types of corners (R and C) have been designated for portions that are identical in shape. Check the designated corner portions and delete one of the corners.

Action 739

ILLEGAL FINISHING ALLOWANCE

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

In the #0, #0 type of THREAD unit data, the following condition exists: (Finishing allowance) > (First depth-of-cut/4) Cause Calculated from the height (HGT) and the number of times (NUMBER) in unit data. Specified by parameter TC78. Action 740 Cause Change either the thread height or the setting of parameter TC78.

ILLEGAL ANGLE IN FIRST SEQUENCE

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The relationship between the thread shape and threading angle that are defined by the first sequence data of the THREAD unit is incorrect. Change the threading angle, or change the coordinates of the starting or ending point of the first sequence.

Action 741 Cause

ILLEGAL THREAD ANGLE (Tool tip angle) (Threading angle)

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

In the machining type that requires the designation of a threading angle, the following condition is not satisfied.

Action

Change either the threading angle or the data of the tool to be used.

3-97

ALARM

No. 742 ILLEGAL THREAD HEIGHT

Message (WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

In the THREAD unit data, the following condition is not satisfied. (Finishing allowance) (Thread height) Cause Designated in the unit data. Set using parameter TC78. Action 743 Cause Change the thread height or the setting of parameter TC78.

INTERSECTION NOT FOUND

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

No automatic calculations of intersection were obtained since there are shape sequence data disparities.

Action 744 Cause

Correct the shape sequence data.

DATA MISSING (INTERSECTION)

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

No automatic calculations of intersection were obtained since there are lack of data to automatically calculate a point of intersection. Correct the unit data or the sequence data.

Action 745 Cause

INTERSECTION CALCULATE IMPOSS.

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

No automatic calculations of intersection were obtained since there are illegal data in the program.

Action 746 Cause

Correct the unit data or the sequence data.

NO DEPTH OF CUT INFO.

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

A cutting depth cannot be determined for the tool since the DEPTH or CUT ANGLE data item on the TOOL DATA display is left blank. Set data in DEPTH or CUT ANGLE, or use some other tool.

Action 747 Cause

CHIP BREAKING CYCLE N/A

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Executing the chip-cutting cycle program has been attempted in spite of the chip-cutting cycle option being absent. (3 or 4 has been assigned to PAT. in the roughing tool sequence.)

Action 748

The chip-cutting cycle option must be present before the chip-cutting cycle program can be executed. (Assign either 0, 1, or 2 to PAT. in the roughing tool sequence.) CANNOT MAKE T-PATH (CHK DEPTH) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

1. A normal path cannot be created since the cutting area is wider than twice the depth of cut per pass. Cause 2. When the cutting area is equal to the clearance, a normal path cannot be created since the cutting area is wider than the depth of cut per pass. 3. A normal path cannot be created since the cutting area overlaps the deceleration distance and is wider than the depth of cut per pass. 1. Increase the cutting depth to be set in the tool sequence, or narrow down the cutting area. Action 2. Increase the cutting depth to be set in the tool sequence, or reduce the clearance. 3. Two overlapping areas must not be present. Narrow down PRE-DIA (deceleration distance) to be set in the tool sequence, or narrow down the cutting area, or increase the cutting depth to be set in the tool sequence.

3-98

ALARM

No. 749 Cause

Message

Type of error

Stopped status

Clearing procedure

Display

Action 750 Cause

Action 751 Cause

CURVE DEFINITION ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Blue

A curved surface that cannot be machined has been defined.

Action 752

No corrective actions can be taken against this error; define a curved surface that can be machined.

DESIGNATED AREA DATA IMPOSSIBLE The check surface values are incorrect.

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Blue

Cause

1. For rough-machining 1 or 2: Check surface Z min. material height 2. For finishing: Check surface Z min. > initial Z 3. Check surface X min. > X max., or Y min. > Y max., or Z min. > Z max. Set the check surface values as follows: 1. For rough-machining 1 or 2: Check surface Z min. < material height 2. For finishing: Check surface Z min. initial Z 3. Check surface X min. X max., and Y min. Y max., and Z min. Z max.

Action

753 Cause

SMALL TOOL

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Blue

In rough-machining 2, the tool diameter is extremely small in comparison with the dimensions of the defined 3-D figure.

Action 754 Cause

Use tools whose diameters are no less than 1/100 of the distance between the maximum and minimum dimensions of the 3-D figure. LARGE TOOL Tool interference has occurred. (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action 755 Cause

Set the approach path and the tool size so that the interference does not occur.

R DIRECTION PITCH SMALL

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

In rough-machining 2, the pitch in the radial direction is extremely small in comparison with the dimensions of the defined 3-D figure. Set the radial-direction pitch to a value no less than 1/200 of the distance between the maximum and minimum dimensions of the 3-D figure. Z DIRECTION PITCH SMALL (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action 756 Cause

In rough-machining 2, the pitch in the Z direction is extremely small in comparison with the dimensions of the defined 3-D figure. Set the Z-direction pitch to a value no less than 1/250 of (material height height of the Z bottom of the 3-D figure).

Action

3-99

ALARM

No. 757

Message CURVE DEFINITION LARGE (WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

1. For rough-machining 2 with designation of workpiece size, the dimensions of the defined figure are larger than those of the workpiece. Cause 2. For rough-machining 2, a material height smaller than (height of the Z bottom of the 3-D figure) + (height of a machining area outside the figure) [parameters E84, E89] has been set irrespective of designating the offset amount or the workpiece size. Change the E84 and E89 parameter settings so that: for the offset amount designation, (height of the bottom of the 3-D figure) + E84 < material height, and; for the workpiece size designation, (height of the bottom of the 3-D figure) + E89 < material height. INITIAL POINT SET ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action 758 Cause

In rough-machining 1 or 2, initial Z material height.

Action 759 Cause

Change settings to give initial Z > material height.

WPC UNIT NOT FOUND (MILL & TURN)

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The workpiece shape cannot be defined since, in a program of workpiece scheme (MILL & TURN) with WPC setting, no WPC unit is prepared before machining units. Create a WPC unit before the machining units and then enter the correct data.

Action 760 Cause

NO T. CENTER POINT IN WPC UNIT

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

1. In a program of workpiece scheme (MILL & TURN) with WPC setting, the workpiece origin specified in the WPC unit which precedes C-axis point/line machining or turning units does not correspond to the axis of turning. 2. Additional basic coordinate system or work offset value is set in the WPC unit preceded by the common unit. 1. Before creating C-axis machining or turning unit, create a WPC unit with reference to the axis of turning.

Action

2. Instead of additional basic coordinate system or work offset value, specify T. CENTER to set the WPC-zero point to the turning center in the WPC unit preceded by the common unit. HEAD ANGLE INCORRECT (C-AXIS) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

761 Cause

In a program of workpiece scheme (MILL & TURN) with WPC setting, the machining section specified in a C-axis point/line machining or turning unit does not correspond to the B-axis angle specified in an index unit. Before creating C-axis machining or turning unit, create an index unit to specify the B-axis angle appropriate for the section to be machined. PROGRAM IS NOT MILL & TURN TYPE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action 762 Cause

It was attempted to set a turning or C-axis point/line machining unit in a program of initial-point scheme (ONLY MILL).

Action 763 Cause

Delete the turning or C-axis point/line machining unit, or set it in a program of workpiece scheme (MILL & TURN) with WPC setting. START PROCESS ILLEGAL (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

It was attempted to execute restart operation from, or single-process operation of, an unsuitable unit.

Action 764 Cause

Specify an appropriate unit for the desired mode of operation.

MAIN PRG/SUB PRG TYPE MISMATCH

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

There are programming units of workpiece scheme with WPC setting and of the same scheme with Z-offset setting prepared in one and the same program. Delete the incompatible units to create a program of the required scheme.

Action

3-100

ALARM

No. 765 Cause Z-OFFSET NOT FOUND

Message (WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

The indispensable Z-offset is not yet set for a program of workpiece scheme (MILL & TURN) with Z-offset setting.

Action 766 Cause

Set the Z-offset item externally in the setup data page.

MAXIMUM NO.OF LAYOUTS EXCEEDED

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

It was attempted to run a program which contains a process with more than 4000 layout data items. The number of repetitions exceeds 9999990 for a program (CONTI. = 1 in the END unit) without workpiece transfer unit. Reduce the number of layout data items for one process to no larger than 4000. Modify the program to reduce the number of repetitions to no larger than 9999990. ILLEGAL ESCAPE TOOL No. (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action 767 Cause

The setting in the parameter for the retraction tool is not correct.

Action 768 Cause

Check the parameter concerned.

4 AXIS MACHINING PROGRAM ERROR

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The setting for simultaneous machining is not correct. (Example: Only the upper or the lower turret is specified for simultaneous machining.) Review the program and perform corrections as required (e. g. to change the turret to be used for the particular tool sequence of the unit concerned). ILLEGAL TOOL DIRECTION/SPDL ROT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action 769 Cause

The specification of the direction of turning spindle rotation differs between those tools on the upper and lower turrets which are to be used for simultaneous machining. Select another tool, or change the specification in question, on either side for the same direction of turning spindle rotation as for the other tool. FIN LEN ERROR (CHECK COM UNIT) (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action 770 Cause

For the execution of a composite program: The settings in the common unit do not satisfy the following condition: FIN-LENGTH LENGTH WORK FACE. Reduce the FIN-LENGTH setting to satisfy the above condition.

Action 771 Cause

ILLEGAL LOW TUR COMMON UNIT

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

A unit of machining with the lower turret (or including a command for its retraction) is created within a program whose common unit declares (under LOW TURR) that the lower turret is not used. Change over the LOW TURR setting, or modify the machining unit concerned in the turret selection.

Action 772 Cause

NO HEAD UNIT IN PROGRAM

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

1. For the execution of a composite program: Machining units are not preceded by a head selection unit (HEAD). 2. For the execution of a composite program: The workpiece transfer unit (TRANSFER) is not followed by a HEAD unit.

Action 773 Cause

1. Set a HEAD unit to specify the turning spindle to be used for the succeeding machining units. 2. Set a HEAD unit after the TRANSFER unit to specify the turning spindle to be used for the succeeding machining units. TRANSFER UNIT IN PROGRAM (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

For the execution of an independent program: A workpiece transfer unit (TRANSFER) is erroneously set in a program to be run independently on either HD side. Delete the inappropriate TRANSFER unit from the program.

Action

3-101

ALARM

No. 774 Cause HEAD UNIT IN PROGRAM

Message (WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

For the execution of an independent program: A head selection unit (HEAD) is erroneously set in a program to be run independently on either HD side. Delete the inappropriate HEAD unit from the program.

Action 775 Cause

TOOL CANNOT PERFORM FACING

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

For tool selection on a turret-type tool-post: The section to be machined by the selected tool differs from the corresponding setting in the unit data line. Change the setting in the unit data line with respect to the tool, or select another tool as required.

Action 776 Cause

NO Y-AXIS

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

A Y-axis machining unit is created for a turret not correspondingly executed.

Action 777 Cause

Delete the inappropriate machining unit from the program, or describe the particular machining process without using the Y-axis control. INCORRECT POSIT. CANNOT RESTART (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

The restarting function has been started from the balanced-cutting with the lower turret.

Action 778 Cause

Specify the upper turret to execute the restarting function from balanced cutting.

INCORRECT POSIT. CANNOT START

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The single-process function has been applied to the balanced-cutting with the lower turret.

Action 779 Cause

Specify the upper turret to execute the single-process function for balanced cutting.

Action 780 Cause

APPROACH PATH INTERFERENCE (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

The programmed shape of the approach path and/or retraction path interferes with the workpiece (programmed machining shape + machining allowance). Reduce the amount of approach and/or the amount of overlap or the tool diameter. Or specify another position as the approach point.

Action 781 Cause

DBL SPDL OPER ILLEGAL TUR ASIGN

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

In a 2 WORKPC unit the selection of the turret in the tool sequence does not correspond to the selection of the spindle (SP1 or SP2) in the unit data line. Select the correct turret in the tool sequence data in question.

Action 782 Cause

DBL SPDL OPER NO TRANS UNIT

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The 2 WORKPC machining unit is not preceded by a workpiece transfer unit.

Action

Set a TRANSFER unit as required.

3-102

ALARM

No. 783 Cause

Message DBL SPDL OP ILLEGAL SIMUL OP (WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

There is an instruction of simultaneous machining given in the flow of 2 Workpiece machining.

Action 784 Cause

Clear the tool sequence concerned of the instruction of simultaneous machining.

DBL SPDL OP ILLEGAL BALANCE CUT

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

There is an instruction of balanced cutting given in the flow of 2 Workpiece machining.

Action 785 Cause

Clear the tool sequence concerned of the instruction of balanced cutting.

DBL SPDL OPER ILLEGAL TUR ESC

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

There is an instruction of retraction given in the flow of 2 Workpiece machining.

Action 786 Cause

Clear the tool sequence concerned of the instruction of retraction.

DBL SPDL OP ILLEGAL MEASUREMENT

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

There is a measurement unit inserted in the flow of 2 Workpiece machining.

Action 787 Cause

Temporarily cancel the mode of 2 Workpiece machining to execute the required in-process measurement.

DBL SPDL OPER ILLEGAL TRANSFER

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

There is a workpiece transfer unit inserted in the flow of 2 Workpiece machining.

Action 788 Cause

Temporarily cancel the mode of 2 Workpiece machining to execute the required workpiece transfer.

DBL SPDL OPER ILLEGAL HEAD UNIT

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The head selection unit in the mode of 2 Workpiece machining has another setting than SINGLE under TYPE.

Action 789 Cause

Temporarily cancel the mode of 2 Workpiece machining to execute synchronous rotation of both spindles (by selecting SYNCH.). DBL SPDL OPER UNIT ERROR (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

For a flow of 2 Workpiece machining an end instruction is given before the start instruction. For a flow of 2 Workpiece machining a restart instruction is given before the end instruction. Set the 2 Workpiece machining units in correct order.

Action 790 Cause

ILLEGAL BALANCE CUT

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

1. Only a single line of tool sequence is created for balanced cutting. 2. Tools different in shape (nose angle, infeed angle and nose R) are designated for the upper and lower turret in balanced cutting. 1. Add another tool sequence line to use the other turret symmetrically for balanced cutting. Action 2. Specify tools identical in shape (nose angle, infeed angle and nose R) for the upper and lower turret in balanced cutting. MUST INPUT CUTTING SPEED (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

791 Cause

The surface speed data set in the tool sequence contains an invalid value.

Action

Set correct surface speed data in the tool sequence.

3-103

ALARM

No. 792 Cause MUST INPUT FEEDRATE

Message (WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

The feed data set in the tool sequence contains an invalid value.

Action 793

Set a correct feed data in the tool sequence.

ILLEGAL MILL SPINDLE RPM

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

If DRILL is selected as the turning drilling unit tool: 1. The milling spindle speed is less than the turning spindle speed when the rotation direction set in the tool sequence is the same as that of the milling spindle. Cause 2. The milling spindle speed has exceeded the maximum rotation speed (SA1 to SA8) when the rotation direction set in the tool sequence is the same as that of the milling spindle. 3. The milling spindle speed is set to a negative value when the rotation direction set in the tool sequence is opposite to that of the milling spindle. 1. Reduce the spindle speed for the turning spindle. Action 2. Set the milling spindle speed to a value lower than its maximum spindle speed. 3. Increase the spindle speed for the turning spindle. 794 Cause INCORRECT B AXIS POSITION (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

For ATC (BA47 = 0) turret type machines with B-axis (BA48 = B), the direction of part to be machined set with the turning drilling unit does not match with the B-axis angle set with the index unit. Reset the B-axis angle for the index unit defined prior to setting the turning drilling unit to either 0 or 180.

Action 795 Cause

SHIFT-Y TOO LARGE

When the amount of SHIFT-Y is not equal to zero in the mill-turning unit, the amount of SHIFT-Y is smaller than the radius of the tool or greater than (workpiece radius + tool radius). Modify the program so that the amount of SHIFT-Y is equal to or greater than the radius of the tool or equal to or smaller than (workpiece radius + tool radius). NO MAZATROL L TURRET OPT (WNo., UNo., SNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action 796 Cause

An attempt was made to execute a MAZATROL program with lower turret control enabled although the MAZATROL lower turret control option is unavailable. The MAZATROL program cannot be executed because the MAZATROL lower turret control option is unavailable.

Action 797 Cause

BARRIER CANCEL ON

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The cycle start button has been pressed when the barrier was canceled.

Action 798 Cause

Disable the Cancel Barrier setting.

JAW NO NOT FOUND

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The cycle start button has been pressed when a jaw No. was not assigned.

Action 799 Cause

Set the jaw No.

Action

3-104

ALARM

3-2-9
No. 800 Cause

No. 800 - No. 899, No. 1800 - No. 1899 (EIA/ISO program error)
Message ( , , ) Type of error Stopped status Clearing procedure Display

Action 801 Cause

SIMULTANEOUS AXIS EXCEEDED (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

The number of axis motion commands given in one block is in excess of the number of simultaneously controllable axes.

Action 802 Cause

Modify the program with respect to the specification concerned.

ILLEGAL AXIS NAME

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

1. The axis address names assigned in the program are different from those which have been parametrized. 2. Bit 4 of parameter M17 for the shaping control axis (the axis specified in parameter K3) is set to 0 (linear axis).

Action 803 Cause

1. Correct the axis address names in the program. 2. Set bit 4 of parameter M17 for the shaping control axis (the axis specified in parameter K3) to 1 (rotational axis). DIVIDED COMMAND ERROR (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

A distance of axis movement that cannot be divided by the preset command unit has been assigned.

Action 804 Cause

Review the program.

PARITY H ERROR

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

On paper tape, the number of holes per character is even for EIA code or odd for ISO code.

Action 805 Cause

Check the paper tape and the tape reader.

PARITY V ERROR

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

On paper tape, the number of holes per block is odd.

Action 806 Cause

Make even the hole quantity per block on the paper tape; or turn off the bit 1 of the parameter TAP25 used for parity-V selection. ILLEGAL ADDRESS (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

An address that is not covered in the specifications has been used.

Action 807

Check and correct the corresponding address in the program, and also check the specifications.

ILLEGAL FORMAT

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

1. The format in which the data has been designated in the program is incorrect. Cause 2. Under the condition of workpiece placement error correction, or tool tip point control, an axis address other than those for the five controlled axes concerned (as specified in parameters K114, K115, K116, K121, and K125) was used in a motion command block. 1. Review the program. Action 2. Do not use an axis address other than those for the five controlled axes concerned (as specified in parameters K114, K115, K116, K121, and K125) in a motion command block under the condition of workpiece placement error correction, or tool tip point control.

3-105

ALARM

No. 808 Cause MIS-SET G CODE

Message (WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

A G-code that is not covered in the specifications has been designated.

Action 809 Cause

Check and correct the corresponding G-code address in the program.

ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The assigned data for the address is out of the allowable setting range.

Action 810 Cause

Review the program.

PROGRAM END NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

EOR has been detected during tape or memory operation.

Action 811 Cause

For the main program, set M02 or M30 at the end of the program. For subprograms, set M99 at the end of the program.

ILLEGAL O/N NUMBER

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Zeroes have been designated as program or sequence numbers.

Action 812 Cause

Delete zero from N (sequence) or O (program) numbers of the program; or change O-No. (program numbers) to between 1 and 99999999, N-No. (sequence numbers) to between 1 and 99999. ERROR IN BUFFER BLOCK (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

An error has been found to exist in the pre-read block during execution of tool diameter offset.

Action 813 Cause

Review the program.

INCH/METRIC OPTION NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The inch/metric selection command has been issued using the G-code although a G-code inch/metric selection function is not provided. Check the specifications.

Action 814 Cause

INTERPOLATION OVERFLOW The specified moving distance is too long.

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Action 815 Cause

Specify a shorter distance.

G60 OPTION NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Program command G60 has been designated although a unidirectional positioning function is not provided.

Action 816 Cause

Check the software specifications and change the program command G60 to G00.

FEEDRATE ZERO The feedrate command has not been input.

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Action

Specify feedrate F for the movement command. (Since modal move command G01 is automatically set at power-on, axis movement in the modal mode is started by input of a move command, even if G01 is not designated in the program).

3-106

ALARM

No. 817 Cause INCORRECT ARC DATA

Message (WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

The relationship between the starting and ending points of the arc and the center of the arc is not appropriate.

Action 818 Cause

Check the values of the starting/ending points and the address values of center of the arc in the program, and check the address values for the correct direction (minus or plus). MISSING CENTER (NO DATA) (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

- For arc interpolation by R designation, the coordinates of the center of the arc cannot be calculated. - Axis moving by manual interruption is specified in immediate front of the arc command. The arc cannot be defined since the relationship between the starting point, ending point, and radius of the arc becomes incorrect. - Correct the value of each address in the program. - Restart the program after pressing the RESET key. 819 Cause HELICAL OPTION NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action

The helical interpolation command has been issued although such an interpolation function is not provided.

Action 820 Cause

Check the specifications, and if such an interpolation function is not available, correct the data of the block in which the arc interpolation command has been issued with designation of three axes. G02.1, G03.1 OPTION NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

The spiral interpolation command (G02.1 or G03.1) has been issued although such an interpolation function is not provided. Delete the G02.1 or G03.1 command.

Action 821 Cause

G07 OPTION NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The virtual-axis command (G07) has been issued although there are not virtual-axis specifications.

Action 822 Cause

Check the specifications, and then change the G07 command.

ILLEGAL MODAL

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

A G-code command has been specified in illegal modal data.

Action 823 Cause

Review the program.

G17 - G19 COMMAND IN M98

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

A plane selection command (G17, G18 or G19) has been issued during figure rotation.

Action 824 Cause

Delete the plane selection command (G17, G18 or G19) from the figure rotation subprogram.

G17 - G19 COMMAND IN G68

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

A plane selection command (G17, G18 or G19) has been specified in the coordinates rotation command (G68).

Action 825 Cause

IF G68 has been issued, execute the coordinates rotation cancel command (G69) before specifying the plane selection command (G17, G18 or G19). G17 - G19 COMMAND IN G38 - G42 (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

A plane selection command (G17, G18 or G19) has been specified during tool diameter offset (G41 or G42).

Action

Specify the plane selection command after the tool diameter offset command has been canceled by G40.

3-107

ALARM

No. 826 Cause G95 OPTION NOT FOUND

Message (WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

The synchronous feed command (G95) has been specified although such feed specifications are not provided.

Action 827 Cause

After checking the specifications, change the synchronous feed command (G95) to the feed-in-minutes command (G94). Also change the F command value. F0 COMMAND IN G02, G03 (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

The F 1-digit rapid-feed command (F0) has been specified during arc interpolation (G02 or G03).

Action 828 Cause

Since rapid feed cannot be ordered for arc interpolation, specify an F 1-digit command other than F0. Specify G0 or G1 if the type of interpolation is not arc interpolation. NO AUTO CORNER OVERRIDE OPTION (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

The automatic corner override command (G62) has been specified although such an override function is not available.

Action 829 Cause

Check the specifications, and delete the G62 command from the program.

ILLEGAL 2ND M CODE

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The secondary auxiliary function address that has been specified in the program is different from the corresponding address that has been parameterized. Check and correct the secondary auxiliary function address that has been specified in the program.

Action 830 Cause

G96 OPTION NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The constant surface speed command (G96) has been specified although such specifications are not provided.

Action 831 Cause

Check the specifications and change the constant surface speed command (G96) to the speed command (min1).

G45,46,47,48 OPTION NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

A tool-position compensation command (G45 to G48) has been specified although such specifications are not provided.

Action 832 Cause

Check the specifications.

G45 - G49 COMMAND IN G98

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Tool-position compensation has been specified during figure rotation or coordinates rotation.

Action 833 Cause

Review the program.

1/4, 3/4 CIRCLES IN G45 - G48

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

An arc command that is not available for tool-position compensation has been specified.

Action 834 Cause

Review the program.

G40, G41, G42 OPTION NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

A tool diameter offset command (G41 or G42) has been specified although such specifications are not provided.

Action

Check the specifications.

3-108

ALARM

No. 835 Cause

Message G41, G42, FORMAT ERROR (WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

A compensation command (G40, G41, G42) has been specified during the arc mode (G02 or G03 command).

Action 836 Cause

Set either the linear command (G01) or the rapid-feed command (G00) into the compensation command block or the cancellation block. (That is, set the modal status to linear interpolation). NO INTERSECTION (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

In tool diameter offset (G41 or G42), the coordinates of the intersection point existing when a block was skipped in processing of interference blocks cannot be calculated. Review the program.

Action 837 Cause

TOOL OFFSET INTERFERENCE ERROR

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

An interference error has occurred during execution of tool diameter offset (G41 or G42).

Action 838 Cause

Review the program.

3-D OFFSET OPTION NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The three-dimensional compensation command has been designated although such compensation specifications are not provided. Check the specifications.

Action 839 Cause

ILLEGAL OFFSET No.

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

A compensation command (G41 or G42) has been designated without a compensation number (D!!); or the compensation number is larger than the maximum number of sets of compensation numbers available in the specifications. Check the maximum available number of sets of compensation numbers, and designate a compensation number smaller than that. CANNED CYCLE OPTION NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action 840 Cause

A fixed-cycle G-code has been designated although fixed-cycle specifications are not provided.

Action 841 Cause

Check the specifications and correct the program.

DESIGNATED TOOL NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The tools that are not yet registered on the TOOL DATA display are specified using T-code command in an EIA/ISO program. Check the program and register the necessary tools on the TOOL DATA display.

Action 842

SUB PROGRAM NESTING EXCEEDED

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Cause

1. The total number of sequential calls of subprogram has exceeded eight. 2. Executing a program that includes an M99 command has been attempted in the direct operation mode of HD, IC memory card or the Ethernet. 3. Invoking a program stored within the HD, IC memory card or the host has been attempted from the HD, IC memory card or the host. 1. Check the number of subprogram calls, and correct the program so that the number of calls does not exceed eight. 2. Do not include an M99 command in the main program to be executed in the direct operation mode. 3. Do not invoke any subprograms of the HD, IC memory card or host from the main program of the HD, IC memory card or the host.

Action

3-109

ALARM

No. 843 Cause

Message DESIGNATED SNo. NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

The sequence number for subprogram call, for return from a subprogram or for the GOTO designation is not yet set.

Action 844 Cause

Set the sequence number in the appropriate block.

PROGRAM No. NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

An attempt was made to call a subprogram which was not yet registered.

Action 845 Cause

Register the subprogram.

ILLEGAL VARIABLE COMMAND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

A variables number has been designated although variables number (#!!) specifications are not provided.

Action 846 Cause

Check the specifications.

DESIGNATED NUMBER NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The designated variables number is larger than the maximum variables number permitted by the specifications.

Action 847 Cause

Check the specifications and the variables numbers in the program.

NO = CODE IN PROGRAM

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

= was not designated in the definition of a variable.

Action 848 Cause

Set = in the variables definition.

M98 OPTION NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Blue

A figure rotation command has been designated although figure rotation specifications are not provided.

Action 849 Cause

Check the specifications.

FIGURE ROTATE NESTING EXCEEDED

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Blue

One figure rotation command has been designated during execution of another such command.

Action 850 Cause

Check the program.

G68 AND M98 COMMANDS SAME BLOCK

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

A figure rotation command and a coordinates rotation command are designated at the same time.

Action 851 Cause

Check the program.

G68 OPTION NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The coordinates rotation command (G68) has been designated although coordinates rotation specifications are not provided. Check the specifications.

Action

3-110

ALARM

No. 852 Cause

Message USER MACRO OPTION NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

Macro specifications have been designated although such specifications are not provided.

Action 853 Cause

Check the specifications.

EXTERNAL MACRO OPTION NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

A user macro interruption command has been designated although such interruption specifications are not provided.

Action 854 Cause

Check the specifications.

INCORRECT USERMACRO PROGRAMMING (WNo., NNo., BNo.) An NC statement and a macro statement are present in one block.

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Action 855 Cause

Review the program and give the NC statement and the macro statement in separate blocks.

USER MACRO NESTING EXCEEDED

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The maximum permissible degree of multiplicity of user macro calls has been exceeded.

Action 856 Cause

Review the program and correct it so that the number of user macro calls does not exceed the maximum number of calls permitted by the specifications. USER MACRO ARGUMENT EXCEEDED (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

The number of sets of user macro call arguments of type is too large.

Action 857 Cause

Review the program.

INCORRECT USER MACRO G67 PROG.

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Command G67 has been designated when G66 command modal state was not yet set.

Action 858 Cause

The G67 command is the call cancellation command; after reviewing the program, designate firstly the G66 command and then the G67 command. USER MACRO [ NESTING EXCEEDED (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

The total number of [ and ] within one block has become more than five.

Action 859 Cause

Review the program, and correct it so that the total number of [ and ] within one block does not exceed five.

NUMBER OF PARENTHESIS MIS-MATCH

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The total number of [ and ] within one block differ.

Action 860 Cause

Review the program, and correct it so that the total number of [ and of ] become the same.

CALCULATION IMPOSSIBLE The operation expression is not correct.

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Action

Review the program and correct the operation expression.

3-111

ALARM

No. 861 Cause DIVISION BY ZERO

Message (WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

The denominator in the division expression is zero.

Action 862 Cause

Review the program and correct it so that the denominator in the division expression does not become zero.

INTEGER VALUE OVERFLOW

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The integral value has overstepped 231 (231 1) in the operation process.

Action 863 Cause

Review the operation expression written in the program, and correct it so that after operation, the value of the integer does not overstep 231. REAL VALUE OVERFLOW The variables data is overflowing. (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action 864 Cause

Review the variables data in the program.

IF STATEMENT ERROR

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The statement of IF [<conditional expression>] GOTO is wrong.

Action 865 Cause

Review the program.

WHILE STATEMENT ERROR

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The statement of WHILE [<conditional expression>] DO ~ END is wrong.

Action 866 Cause

Review the program.

SETVN STATEMENT ERROR

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The SETVN statement containing the variables name is wrong.

Action 867 Cause

Review the program and correct it so that the variables name in the SETVN statement consists of seven characters or less. DO-END NESTING EXCEEDED (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Of WHILE [<conditional expression>] DO ~ END, DO ~ END has appeared more than 27 times (degree of multiplicity).

Action 868 Cause

Review the program and correct it to reduce the degree of multiplicity of DO ~ END to no larger than 27 (27 times).

DO-END MIS-MATCH The DO's and END's are not formed in pairs.

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Action 869 Cause

Review the program and correct it to give DO's and END's in pairs.

NO USER MACRO IN TAPE MODE

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

During tape operation, macro command (WHILE, DO, END, IF, GOTO, POPEN, PCLOS, BPRNT or DPRNT) has been found to exist in the tape contents. Execute the program in the memory operation mode since blocks containing a macro command (WHILE, DO, END, IF, GOTO, POPEN, PCLOS, BPRNT or DPRNT) cannot be executed during tape operation.

Action

3-112

ALARM

No. 870 Cause ILLEGAL VARIABLE NAME

Message (WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

The designated variables name is not correct.

Action 871 Cause

Review the variables names in the program and correct the corresponding variables name.

VARIABLE NAME EXISTS There are overlapping variables names.

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Action 872 Cause

Correct the program so that variables names do not overlap.

G51 OPTION NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

A scaling command (G50 or G51) has been designated although scaling specifications are not provided.

Action 873 Cause

Check the specifications.

G51.1 OPTION NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

A mirror image command (G50.1 or G51.1) has been designated although programmable mirror image specifications are not provided. Check the specifications.

Action 874 Cause

CORNER R/C OPTION NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Corner chamfering or corner rounding / has been designated although such specifications are not provided.

Action 875 Cause

Check the specifications and delete corner rounding or corner chamfering from the program.

NOT FOUND GEOMETRIC OPTION

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The geometric command has been designated although geometric specifications are not provided.

Action 876 Cause

Check the specifications.

NOT FOUND GEOMETRIC OPTION The geometric setting format is wrong.

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Action 877 Cause

Review the program.

G15 OPTION NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The polar coordinates command (G16) has been designated although such command specifications are not provided.

Action 878 Cause

Check the specifications.

ADDRESS CHANGE OPTION NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Absolute/incremental axis address conversion has been designated although such conversion specifications are not provided. Check the specifications.

Action

3-113

ALARM

No. 879 Cause G10 OPTION NOT FOUND

Message (WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

Program data input has been designated although such input specifications are not provided.

Action 880 Cause

Check the specifications.

AXIS NOT ZERO RETURNED

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

A move command other than that for reference-point return has been designated for the axis that was not returned to its reference point. Manually return the axis to its reference point.

Action 881 Cause

G30 OPTION NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Second, third or fourth reference-point return has been designated although such reference-point returning specifications are not provided. Check the specifications.

Action 882 Cause

ILLEGAL COMMAND CROSS MACHINING

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The program section under the mode of cross machining contains an incompatible G-code.

Action 883 Cause

Review the program.

ILLEGAL CROSS MACHINING COMMAND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

1. A G110 command is given under modal conditions not suitable to cross machining control. 2. An unsuitable axis (since it cannot be used successfully for the counterpart) is specified for cross machining control.

Action 884 Cause

Review the program.

REFERENCE POINT RETURN CHECK

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

An axis had not returned to the zero-point when the zero-point check command (G27) was executed.

Action 885 Cause

Review the program.

G22 OPTION NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The before-movement stroke check function (G22) has been designated although such function specifications are not provided. Check the specifications.

Action 886 Cause

BEYOND AREA OF G22

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

This alarm message is displayed before execution of a movement block to indicate that the ending point of the axis movement designated in the block is likely to enter the forbidden area which has been designated using the beforemovement stroke check function (G22). Review the axis-address coordinate values in the program.

Action 887 Cause

TAPE I/O ERROR

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

B (G)

Red (Blue)

1. Errors have occurred in the tape reader or printer errors have occurred during macroprogram data printing. 2. Host computer program used for Ethernet operation has failed.

Action

1. Check for parameter errors. 2. Check for improper connection between the host computer containing the designated program, and the NC unit.

3-114

ALARM

No. 888 Cause FILE I/O ERROR

Message ( , , )

Type of error E

Stopped status I

Clearing procedure O

Display Red (Blue)

The machining program file cannot be read.

Action 889 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

G37 OPTION NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The automatic tool-length measurement command (G37) has been designated although such measurement specifications are not provided. Check the specifications.

Action 890 Cause

G31 OPTION NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The skip command (G31) has been designated although skip specifications are not provided.

Action 891 Cause

Check the specifications.

G31.1 - G31.3 OPTION NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

A multi-step skip command (G31.1, G31.2 or G31.3) has been designated although such skip specifications are not provided. Check the specifications.

Action 892 Cause

AUTO PROGRAMMING FAILURE

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

A trouble has occurred with the software of auto program during the operation.

Action 893 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

PROGRAM DATA MISSING

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Argument P was not designated in the macro call command (G65, G66, G66.1).

Action 894

Review the program and set the number of the macro program to be called to argument P.

MAZATROL PROGRAM DESIGNATED

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Cause

1. An attempt has been made to call a MAZATROL program from an EIA/ISO program which was designated as a subprogram of MAZATROL program. 2. A MAZATROL program has been specified using G65 command (subprogram call) in the manual program mode unit of the MAZATROL program.

Action 895 Cause

In cases 1 and 2 above, a MAZATROL program cannot be called as a subprogram. Review the program.

IC CARD I/O BUSY

Red

An attempt has been made to execute the IC memory card operation during data I/O operation with an IC memory card.

Action 896 Cause

Execute the IC memory card operation after stop or completion of the data I/O operation with an IC memory card.

ILLEGAL CHAMFERING

Red

1. In the thread cutting cycle command, designation for chamfering is incorrect. 2. The current plane differs from the plane of chamfering.

Action

1. Set chamfering data that ensures termination of the operation of the tool within the cycle. 2. Select the same plane as that of chamfering.

3-115

ALARM

No. 897 Cause

Message LAP CYCLE BLOCK NUMBER EXCEED ( , , )

Type of error B

Stopped status J

Clearing procedure P

Display Red

The number of blocks in the shape data of the turning fixed-cycle (G270 through G273) exceeds 100 blocks.

Action 898 Cause

Reduce below 100 the number of blocks in the shape data of the turning fixed-cycle (G270 through G273).

LAP CYCLE ILLEGAL SHAPE DESIGN.

Red

The shape defined in the turning fixed-cycle (G270 through G273) is not the shape for correct cutting.

Action 899 Cause

Recheck the shape data specified by the turning fixed-cycle (G270 through G273).

ILLEGAL TAPER LENGTH

Red

In the fixed-cycle (G290, G294), designation for the taper length or the taper height is incorrect.

Action

Set the taper length or the taper height for the fixed-cycle (G290, G294) smaller than the travel of the axis.

3-116

ALARM

No. 1800

Message CANNOT CHANGE TIME CONSTANT (WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I

Clearing procedure P

Display Red

The G-command has been set in the block containing a time constant changeover/cancellation command. Cause The time constant changeover/cancellation command has been set in the fixed cycle. The time constant changeover/cancellation command has been set during MAZATROL programmed simultaneous machining or MAZATROL programmed 2 workpiece machining. Action 1801 Cause Review and correct the program.

ILLEGAL COMMD TIME CONST. CHANGE

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Red

The G10 command has been set during time constant changeover (non-M880 mode).

Action 1802 Cause

Review and correct the program.

LLEGAL STARTUP CONDITION G12.1

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

1. The G12.1 command is set when the current position of the No. 1 axis (linear axis) on the plane is present on the negative side. 2. The No. 2 axis (rotational axis) on the plane is not a rotating type of rotational axis.

Action

1. Move the current position of the No. 1 axis (linear axis) on the plane into the positive side before setting the G12.1 command. 2. Specify a rotating type of rotational axis as the No. 2 axis on the plane. Example: G17X_C_; G12.1;

1803 Cause

ILL GCODE (2ND SPDL POS ONLY)

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

A G-code whose usage for the secondary spindle is prohibited has been entered when the secondary spindle highaccuracy index option was valid. When the secondary spindle high-accuracy index option is valid, an interpolation command cannot be issued for the secondary spindle; only a positioning command can be used. NO Z-OFFSET (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I P Red

Action 1804 Cause

With F165 bit 6 = 1 (Z-offset data presence check for EIA automatic operation), Z-offset value was missing in setup data when the G53.5 command (initial G53.5 included) was entered for EIA automatic operation. Set the Z-offset value in the setup data or change the setting of F165 bit 6 from 1 to 0.

Action 1805 Cause

G68.2 OPTION NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Executing the program has been attempted despite an inclined-surface machining option being absent.

Action 1806 Cause

The program for inclined-surface machining cannot be executed without the inclined-surface machining option.

ILLEGAL CMD TILTED PLANE CMD

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

A command (G-command or T-command) that cannot be used for inclined-surface machining has been specified during inclined-surface machining. Cancel inclined-surface machining before executing a G-command or T-command that cannot be used during inclinedsurface machining. CANNOT USE G68.2 (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action 1807

Cause

1. Inclined-surface machining has been specified in the mode that prohibits the specification of inclined-surface machining. 2. A G68.4 command (for incremental coordinate system establishment) was given with the inclined-surface machining mode being cancelled. 1. Cancel the mode that prohibits the specification of inclined-surface machining.

Action

2. With the inclined-surface machining mode being cancelled, use G68.2, instead of G68.4, to establish a particular coordinate system for ease of programming.

3-117

ALARM

No. 1808 Cause CANNOT USE G53.1

Message (WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

Inclined-surface machining has been specified in the mode that prohibits the specification of tool axial control.

Action 1809 Cause

Cancel the mode that prohibits the specification of tool axial control.

TILTED PLANE CMD FORMAT ERROR

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Blue

The inclined-surface machining command address is wrong.

Action 1810 Cause

Correct the program.

TILTED PLANE CANNOT BE DEFINED

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Blue

The inclined surface cannot be defined with the specified data.

Action 1811 Cause

Correct the program.

ILLEGAL CMD IN G43.1

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Red

Tool length correction in the tool axial direction has been specified in the mode that does not permit that command.

Action 1812 Cause

Cancel modes that cannot be used with Tool length correction in the tool axial direction.

CANNOT USE G43.1

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Red

An incorrect command (such as a G-command or a T-command) has been entered during Tool length correction in the tool axial direction. Cancel Tool length correction in the tool axial direction to execute the G- or T-command.

Action 1813 Cause

G54.4 OPTION NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The workpiece placement error correction option is not present.

Action 1814 Cause

The workpiece placement error correction cannot be used without the workpiece placement error correction option.

ILLEGAL CMD IN G54.4

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

An incorrect command (such as a G-command or a T-command) has been entered during the workpiece placement error correction. Cancel the workpiece placement error correction to execute the G- or T-command.

Action 1815 Cause

CANNOT USE G54.4

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The workpiece placement error correction has been specified in the mode that does not permit the workpiece placement error correction. Cancel modes that cannot be used with the workpiece placement error correction.

Action 1816 Cause

CANNOT USE G18.1/G18.2/G18.3

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The mode existing during plane selection (with G18.2/G18.3) for turning, or during plane cancellation (with G18.1) for turning is not valid. Review and correct the program.

Action

3-118

ALARM

No. 1817 Cause

Message ILLEGAL CMD IN G18.2/G18.3 (WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

An incorrect command has been specified during the plane selection (with G18.2/G18.3) for turning.

Action 1818 Cause

Review and correct the program.

ILLEGAL COMMAND (SAFETY SHIELD)

Red

An invalid cutting command was issued for the material model when interference checking of the material model was valid.

Action 1819 Cause

Specify the material model cutting invalid M-code in the program.

ILLEGAL C/S (SAFETY SHIELD)

Red

1. The program of either the hard disk operation or Ethernet operation area was specified as subprogram when automatic operation interference check was valid. 2. The program to be called up as a subprogram is not registered in the memory. 1. Make the Automatic Operation INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function invalid, or before specifying the program of either the hard disk operation or Ethernet operation area as subprogram, set the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function invalid M-code in the main program, to make the automatic operation interference check function invalid. 2. Register the required program.

Action

1820

ILLEGAL COMMD IN G54.4

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Cause

1. Such a command has been assigned that the travel on a rotational axis exceeds an angle of 180 before or after the correction of the tool direction. 2. The distance of correcting motion on the primary or secondary rotational axis for workpiece placement error correction is beyond the limit particularly set for MAZATROL programs. 1. Divide the move command so that the angular motion, whether it be before or after being corrected, will be up to 180 in terms of the travel per block. 2. Modify the settings of angular errors (a, b, c) in order that the distance of correcting motion on the primary or secondary rotational axis may not exceed the limit concerned. UNWRITABLE SYSTEM VARIABLE (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action

1821 Cause

Writing into a write-protected system variable has been attempted.

Action 1822 Cause

Correct the program.

Action 1823 Cause

NOT POSSIBLE SETTING ERROR (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

The workpiece setup error correction command has been issued in a MAZATROL program under inadequate conditions.

Confirm the followings: Action - Parameter K113 = 1 (Machine type: Tool tilt type) - Workpiece setup error correction for MAZATROL program (option) valid 1824 Cause ( , , )

Action

3-119

ALARM

No. 1825 Cause

Message ( , , )

Type of error

Stopped status

Clearing procedure

Display

Action 1826 Cause

HEAD-AXIS ILLEGAL COMMAND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I O (S) Red (Blue)

A G-code command that cannot be used for the head indexing axis has been specified.

Action 1827 Cause

Review and correct the program. Use G00 to index the head. HEAD-AXIS ANGLE INCORRECT (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I O (S) Red (Blue)

The angular value given for indexing the head cannot be divided by the L17 parameter setting (minimum angle of head index command). Review and correct the program.

Action

( Cause

Action

3-120

ALARM

3-2-10 No. 900 - No. 999, No. 1900 - No. 1999 (EIA/ISO program error)
No. 900 Cause Message ( , , ) Type of error Stopped status Clearing procedure Display

Action 901 Cause

INCORRECT FIXED CYCLE COMMAND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

The fixed-cycle command has been set in the program during the tool diameter offset (G41 or G42) modal status.

Action 902 Cause

Set the tool diameter offset cancellation command (G40) before the fixed-cycle command.

G10 OPTION NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The G10 command has been designated although this command is not available with the system.

Action 903 Cause

Check the specifications.

ILLEGAL G10 L NUMBER

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

An unallowable L number has been designated during input of G10 program command.

Action 904 Cause

Correct the L number in the program.

ILLEGAL G10 OFFSET No.

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Compensation numbers other than the number of sets permitted by the specifications have been designated during input of G10. After checking the number of compensation sets permitted by the specifications, change the setting of address P to a value smaller than the permissible number of sets. G11 OPTION NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action 905 Cause

The G11 command has been designated although this command is not available with the system.

Action 906 Cause

Check the specifications.

NO S DIRECTIVE IN FIXED CYCLE

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The spindle speed for the fixed cycle has not yet been set in the program.

Action 907 Cause

Program the spindle speed command in the block which precedes the block with the fixed cycle command.

DIFFERENT SPINDLE TYPE

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

An attempt has been made to machine the workpiece using the synchronous tapping method in spite of the spindle controller being an SE type. Use the appropriate tapping method for the particular type of the spindle controller.

Action 908 Cause

NO PITCH IN FIXED CYCLE

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The pitch or the number of threads has not been designated for the tapping cycle (G74 or G84) of the drilling fixed cycles.

Action

Designate the pitch using address F or E.

3-121

ALARM

No. 909 Cause

Message ILLEGAL PITCH IN FIXED CYCLE (WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status K

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

The pitch or the number of threads designated for the tapping cycle (G74 or G84) of the drilling fixed cycles is wrong.

Action 910 Cause

Check and correct the pitch or the number of threads.

Action 911 Cause

CORNER R/C OPTION NOT FOUND (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B K S Blue

Corner chamfering/corner rounding has been designated although such specifications are not provided.

Action 912 Cause

Check the specifications and delete corner rounding or corner chamfering from the program.

NO MOTION COMMAND AFTER R/C

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Blue

The block that is to succeed the corner rounding or corner chamfering command does not consist of a move command.

Action 913 Cause

Give the G01 command in the corresponding block.

INCORRECT R/C COMMAND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Blue

The length of the corner rounding or corner chamfering that has been designated in the corner rounding or chamfering command is larger than the distance of movement. Reduce the length of the corner rounding or chamfering to a value smaller than the distance of movement.

Action 914 Cause

INCORRECT COMMAND AFTER R/C

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Blue

The movement distance designated in the next block is shorter than the length of the corner rounding or corner chamfering. Reduce the length of the corner rounding or chamfering to a value smaller than the moving distance of the next block.

Action 915 Cause

ANGLE < 1 DEGREE

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Blue

In the geometric command, the difference in angle between the two straight lines which intersect with each other is less than 1. Increase the angle difference in the geometric command.

Action 916 Cause

GEOMETRIC COMMAND NOT ABSOLUTE (WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Blue

The second block of the geometric command is an incremental command.

Action 917 Cause

The second block must always consists of absolute data. Program it in units of absolute coordinates.

NO LINEAR COMMAND IN 2ND BLOCK

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Blue

The second block of the geometric command is not given the linear command (G1).

Action

Correct the program so that the linear command (G1) and the feedrate command (F) are given to the second block.

3-122

ALARM

No. 918 Cause INCORRECT ANGLE DATA

Message (WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

In address designation of the geometric command, the angle in the first block, ending point coordinates and angle in the second block are incorrectly given. Check and reprogram the corresponding data.

Action 919 Cause

INCORRECT PLANE SELECTION CMD.

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

A plane selection command (G17, G18 or G19) was given in the geometric command block.

Action 920 Cause

Program the plane selection command (G17, G18 or G19) in the block that precedes the geometric command block.

G27, M COMMANDS SAME BLOCK

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

An M independent command (M0, M1, M2 or M30) has been programmed in the same block as the G27 command.

Action 921 Cause

Correct the program so that the G27 command and the M independent command are contained in separate blocks.

G29, M COMMANDS SAME BLOCK

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

An M independent command (M0, M1, M2 or M30) and the G29 command (start-position return) have been programmed in the same block. Correct the program so that the G29 command and the M independent command are contained in separate blocks.

Action 922 Cause

SKIP SPEED ZERO

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The feedrate F has not been programmed in the G31 (skip) command block.

Action 923 Cause

Set the skip feedrate F into the G31 program block.

ILLEGAL COMMAND G37 AXIS

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

No axis settings are included in the automatic tool-length measurement block; or more than one axis setting have been made. Designate only one axis.

Action 924 Cause

G37, H COMMANDS SAME BLOCK

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The H-code is in the same block as the automatic tool-length measurement command.

Action 925 Cause

Set the H-code into a block preceding the automatic tool-length measurement block. H CODE REQUIRED (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

The H-code is not yet set for automatic tool-length measurement.

Action 926 Cause

Set an H-code into a block preceding the automatic tool-length measurement block.

ILLEGAL G37 SIGNAL

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Red

The signal of measuring-position arrival has been turned on before the tool reaches the area designated through either a D-code or the parameter for deceleration area d; or the signal has not been turned on at all. Check the program and parameters.

Action

3-123

ALARM

No. 927 Cause

Message SKIP COMMAND IN CORRECTING DIA (WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

The skip command (G31) was given during tool diameter offset (G41 or G42).

Action 928 Cause

Correct the program so that the skip command is executed only after the cutter-diameter compensation cancellation command (G40) has been executed. ILLEGAL HEAD DATA No. (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

The offset number that has been designated in the program is outside the range from 0 to 10.

Action 929 Cause

Review the machining program and set an allowable offset number.

HEAD DATA No. NOT FOUND

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

An H_ number is missing in the G45.1H_ part of the EIA/ISO program.

Action 930 Cause

Review the machining program and set an allowable offset number.

ILLEGAL HEAD TYPE

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The head type does not match to the face that has been designated in the program.

Action 931 Cause

Review the machining program and set the correct head type.

NO HEAD DATA

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The head number that has been designated in the program is not registered on the HEAD OFFSET display.

Action 932 Cause

1. Review the designated head number. 2. Check if the designated head number is registered on the HEAD OFFSET display. RETURN R POINT IN CUTTING SIDE (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Return to reference point has been designated during the surface-machining mode (G17.2 to G17.5) of the program.

Action 933 Cause

Return to reference point cannot be executed during the surface-machining mode (G17.2 to G17.5). Review the cutting program. NO 5FACE CUTTING OPTION (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

An attempt has been made to execute a five-surface machining program when the five-surface machining option was not present. Set the five-surface machining option to execute a five-surface machining program.

Action 934 Cause

NO HIGH-SPEED MODE OPTION

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

An attempt has been made to execute the high-speed mode program when the high-speed mode option was not set.

Action 935 Cause

Without the high-speed mode option, the high-speed mode program cannot be executed.

NO PRE-INTERP ACCEL/DECEL OPT.

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

An attempt has been made to execute the high-accuracy mode program when the high-accuracy mode option was not set.

Action

Without the high-accuracy mode option, the high-accuracy mode program cannot be executed.

3-124

ALARM

No. 936 OPTION NOT FOUND

Message (WNo., 0, 0)

Type of error E

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O

Display Red

Either of the following seven options is missing (identify the corresponding option from the work number displayed in parentheses): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. NURBS interpolation option Shaping option Planet tapping option Shape correction control option Auto pecking cycle of the cutting load detection type Ethernet operation Cylinder interpolation option

Cause

Action 937 Cause

Check the specifications.

ILLEGAL TOOL DESIGNATED The designated tool cannot be used.

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Action 938 Cause

Check the TOOL DATA display to see if the designated tool is an unusable one.

NO IC CARD MODE OPTION

Red

An attempt has been made to execute the IC memory card operation although the optional function of IC memory card operation is not available. This operation cannot be executed because the optional function of IC memory card operation is not available.

Action 939 Cause

NO THREAD CUTTING OPTION

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

A (A)

K (L)

P (S)

Red (Blue)

An attempt has been made to execute operation or tool path check of the program that contains G33 command (threading), although G33 option is not provided. Without G33 option, G33 threading command cannot be used.

Action 940 Cause

NO INVERSE TIME OPTION

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

Inverse time feed program was attempted although inverse time feed option is not provided.

Action 941 Cause

Inverse time feed program cannot be executed because inverse time feed option is not provided.

G93 MODE

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

G-code of inhibition during G93 mode has been designated.

Action 942 Cause

Review the program and delete G-code of inhibition.

NO 3-D CONVERSION OPTION

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

An attempt has been made to execute the three-dimensional coordinate conversion program in the absence of a threedimensional coordinate conversion option. Three-dimensional coordinate conversion is not possible because of the absence of a three-dimensional coordinate conversion option. CONVERTING IN 3-D COORDINATES (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action 943 Cause

An illegal G-code in the G68 mode has been designated.

Action

Review the program, and delete the illegal G-code.

3-125

ALARM

No. 944 Cause

Message WRONG CMD. IN 3-D COORDINATES (WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

A G68 command has been designated during the modal information that does not permit G68 to be set.

Action 945 Cause

Review the program, and modify the modal information existing when the G68 command was designated.

NO HV MACHINING FUNC. OPTION

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

An attempt has been made to execute A-axis/B-axis automatic, sequential control or A-axis direct programming in the absence of an HV machining option. Neither A-axis/B-axis automatic, sequential control, nor A-axis direct programming is possible because of the absence of the option. NO MAZ. SUB PROGRAM OPTION ( , , ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action 946 Cause

An attempt has been made to call up a MAZATROL program from the EIA/ISO program in spite of the absence of a MAZATROL call option. Since a MAZATROL call option is not present, MAZATROL programs cannot be called up from EIA/ISO programs using the subprogram call function. NO BLOCK SKIP OPTION ( , , ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action 947 Cause

An attempt has been made to carry out block skip operations in spite of the absence of a block skip option.

Action 948 Cause

Block skipping is not possible because of the absence of a block skip option.

NO G54.1 OPTION

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

An attempt has been made to use a G54.1 code in spite of the absence of a G54.1 (additional workpiece coordinate system) option. A G54.1 code cannot be used because of the absence of a G54.1 (additional workpiece coordinate system) option.

Action 949 Cause

NO G52 IN G54.1 MODE

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

An attempt has been made to use an additional workpiece coordinate system and a local workpiece coordinate system at the same time. An additional workpiece coordinate system and a local workpiece coordinate system cannot be used at the same time.

Action 950 Cause

NO SPLINE CUTTING OPTION

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

An attempt has been made to specify a spline interpolation command in spite of the absence of a spline interpolation option. A spline interpolation command cannot be used because of the absence of a spline interpolation option.

Action 951 Cause

NO CORNER C/R COMMAND IN G0/G33

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

A corner chamfering/rounding command has been designated in the G0 or G33 mode.

Action 952 Cause

A corner chamfering/rounding command cannot be designated in the G0 or G33 mode.

NO SYNCHRONIZED TAP OPTION

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

An attempt has been made to perform synchronized tapping in spite of the absence of a synchronized tapping option.

Action

Synchronized tapping cannot be performed because of the absence of a synchronized tapping option.

3-126

ALARM

No. 953 Cause

Message TOOL DATA INPUT PROCESS ERROR ( , , )

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

During EIA/ISO program or MDI execution, data is not entered in the tool data item LENGTH (TOOL SET X, TOOL SET Z) or ACT- (NOM-). (Only when the MAZATROL tool length and tool diameter are valid and parameter F84 bit 7 = 1) Review the tool data and enter necessary data if missing. (Related parameters: F84 bit 7, F92 bit 7, F93 bit 3)

Action

Enter a value in ACT- (NOM-) if the MAZATROL tool diameter is valid (F92 bit 7 = 1). Enter a value in LENGTH (TOOL SET X, TOOL SET Z) if the MAZATROL tool length is valid (F93 bit 3 = 1). If F84 bit 7 = 0, any missing data is ignored and the program and MDI are executed.

954 Cause

SCREW PITCH ERR

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The thread lead (thread pitch) that has been designated in the threading command data is not correct.

Action 955 Cause

Set the correct thread lead in the threading command data.

START AND END POINT NOT AGREE

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

Red

The ending point of the block immediately preceding the G06.2 command data, and the command data in the starting block of G06.2 do not match. Modify the program so that the coordinate command data in the starting block of G06.2 matches the ending point of the immediately preceding block. RESTART OPERATION NOT ALLOWED (WNo., NNo., BNo.) E I (L) O Red

Action 956

1. Restarting from the block containing the G06.2/G43.4 mode data has been attempted. Cause 2. During the control of cross machining, restarting the program containing another cross machining command has been attempted in the corresponding command sequence or subsequent. 3. During the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD for automatic operation is valid, EIA modal restarting from the block preceded by the M660 block has been attempted. 1. Restart from a block not containing G06.2/G43.4 mode data. Action 2. Modify the program so that the control of cross machining is canceled before another cross machining command is executed. 3. Cancel the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD for automatic operation and execute EIA modal restarting search. 957 Cause MANUAL INTERRUPT NOT ALLOWED (WNo., NNo., BNo.) E I (L) O Red

Manual handle or MDI interruption from the block containing the G06.2 mode data has been attempted.

Action 958 Cause

Perform manual interruptions only at blocks not containing G06.2 mode data.

AUTO PECKING IMPOSSIBLE

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

Red

1. The threshold value for load detection-based auto-pecking is not set to 0 or no such value is set. 2. The parameter is not set appropriately.

Action

1. Set the appropriate threshold value either in the drill monitoring mode of the MACHINING-MONITORING display or on the TOOL DATA display. 2. For parameter setting, contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

959 Cause

WORKPIECE COORDINATE ERROR

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The origin of the workpiece coordinate system does not lie on the axis of rotation of the table.

Action

Review the settings on the WORK OFFSET display.

3-127

ALARM

No. 960 Cause

Message SUPERPOSIT CTRL ILLEGAL COMMAND (WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

The program section under the mode of superposition control contains an incompatible G-code.

Action 961 Cause

Review the program.

ILLEGAL COMMAND 5X RADIUS COMP.

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

A command was given which is incompatible with the current mode of tool radius compensation for five-axis machining.

Action 962 Cause

Cancel the tool radius compensation for five-axis machining if the command in question (a G-code or T-code) must absolutely be given. CANNOT USE 5X RADIUS COMP. (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

A command of tool radius compensation for five-axis machining has been designated under incompatible modal conditions. Check the modal conditions for compatibility with the tool radius compensation for five-axis machining to cancel all the interlocking modes. TURRET MIRROR IMAGE N/A (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Action 963 Cause

The optional mirror image function for the opposed turret is not provided.

Action

Provide the NC unit with the mirror image option.

( Cause

Action 970 Cause TOOL TIP CTRL PARAMETER ERROR (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

The parameter settings on the composition of controlled axes for the following modes are not correct: tool tip point control, inclined-surface machining, tool radius compensation for five-axis machining, and workpiece placement error correction. Correct the parameter settings concerned.

Action 971

CANNOT USE TOOL TIP PT CONTROL

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

1. A command of tool tip point control is given under incompatible modal conditions. 2. A G43.5 command is given in spite of the selection of the workpiece coordinate system for programming. Cause 3. Under selection of the G-code system for turning machines, a command of tool tip point control is given with the parameter setting F161 bit 1 = 0 (Geometric offset by logically shifting the coordinate system). 4. A command of circular interpolation is given under the mode of G43.5 or with the table coordinate system selected for programming. 1. Check the current modal conditions and cancel the unsuitable mode. Action 2. Use the other preparatory function G43.4, or select the table coordinate system for programming. 3. Set F161 bit 1 to 1 (Geometric offset by physically shifting the tool). 4. To use circular interpolation, give a G43.4 command, or select the workpiece coordinate system for programming. 972 Cause ILLEGAL CMD TOOL TIP PT CTRL (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

An unavailable command (of preparatory or tool function) is given in the mode of tool tip point control.

Action

Cancel the mode of tool tip point control to give the required command with G- or T-code.

3-128

ALARM

No. 973

Message ILLEGAL TOOL AXIS VECTOR (WNo., NNo., BNo.)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

An inappropriate command relevant to the vector of tool axis is given in the mode of tool tip point control. 1. In the mode of G43.4 with single-axis interpolation selected, the resulting tool path will not pass through the singular point although the sign of the angular position of the primary rotary axis is to be reversed. 2. The command of the vector of tool axis is not correct (as it will reverse the direction of the tool). 3. With single-axis interpolation selected, the command in a single block will cause a motion through more than 180 on the rotary axis of linear type. 1. Modify the program for a tool path through the singular point, or select joint interpolation. Action 2. Divide the command block concerned in order that the resulting rotation of the tool direction per block will not exceed 180. 3. Modify the program for a per-block motion angle of 180 or less on the rotary axis of linear type, or select joint interpolation. 974 TOOL TIP PT CTRL FORMAT ERROR (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

Cause

1. Arguments I, J, and K are specified in the mode of G43.4, or a command of rotary axis motion is given under G43.5. 2. The code G49 is given in a block with other commands. Cause 3. A rotary axis is specified in the mode of circular interpolation. 4. Under the modal condition of G43.4 or G43.5, an axis address other than those for the five controlled axes concerned (as specified in parameters K114, K115, K116, K121, and K125) was used in a motion command block. 1. The attitude of the tool cannot be specified with I, J, and K in the G43.4 mode, nor can a rotary axis be explicitly specified in the G43.5 mode. Action 2. Give the cancellation command G49 in a single-command block. 3. A rotary axis cannot be specified in the mode of circular interpolation. 4. Do not use an axis address other than those for the five controlled axes concerned (as specified in parameters K114, K115, K116, K121, and K125) in a motion command block under the modal condition of G43.4 or G43.5. 975 Cause TOOL TIP PT CTRL N/A (WNo., NNo., BNo.) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

The optional function for tool tip point control is not provided.

Action

The program with a command for tool tip point control can only be executed on a correspondingly executed machine.

( Cause

Action 979 Cause MACRO USER ALARM ( , , ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

#3000 = n (alarm message) in the user macroprogram was executed. n 21

Action 980 Cause

Refer to the relevant user macroprogram instruction manual to check the alarm.

MACRO USER ALARM 1

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

#3000 = 1 (alarm message) in the user macroprogram was executed.

Action 981 Cause

Refer to the relevant user macroprogram instruction manual to check the alarm.

MACRO USER ALARM 2

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

#3000 = 2 (alarm message) in the user macroprogram was executed.

Action

Refer to the relevant user macroprogram instruction manual to check the alarm.

3-129

ALARM

No. 982 Cause MACRO USER ALARM 3

Message ( , , )

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

#3000 = 3 (alarm message) in the user macroprogram was executed.

Action 983 Cause

Refer to the relevant user macroprogram instruction manual to check the alarm.

MACRO USER ALARM 4

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

#3000 = 4 (alarm message) in the user macroprogram was executed.

Action 984 Cause

Refer to the relevant user macroprogram instruction manual to check the alarm.

MACRO USER ALARM 5

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

#3000 = 5 (alarm message) in the user macroprogram was executed.

Action 985 Cause

Refer to the relevant user macroprogram instruction manual to check the alarm.

MACRO USER ALARM 6

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

#3000 = 6 (alarm message) in the user macroprogram was executed.

Action 986 Cause

Refer to the relevant user macroprogram instruction manual to check the alarm.

MACRO USER ALARM 7

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

#3000 = 7 (alarm message) in the user macroprogram was executed.

Action 987 Cause

Refer to the relevant user macroprogram instruction manual to check the alarm.

MACRO USER ALARM 8

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

#3000 = 8 (alarm message) in the user macroprogram was executed.

Action 988 Cause

Refer to the relevant user macroprogram instruction manual to check the alarm.

MACRO USER ALARM 9

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

#3000 = 9 (alarm message) in the user macroprogram was executed.

Action 989 Cause

Refer to the relevant user macroprogram instruction manual to check the alarm.

MACRO USER ALARM 10

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

#3000 = 10 (alarm message) in the user macroprogram was executed.

Action 990 Cause

Refer to the relevant user macroprogram instruction manual to check the alarm.

MACRO MEASUREMENT ALARM 1

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

1. During execution of the MMS unit, the touch sensor has not come into contact with the workpiece (the skip signal has not turned on) when the maximum feed distance available at the skipping speed is exceeded. 2. #3000 = 11 (alarm message) in the user macroprogram was executed.

Action

1. Check the machining program. 2. Refer to the relevant user macroprogram instruction manual to check the alarm.

3-130

ALARM

No. 991 Cause

Message MACRO MEASUREMENT ALARM 2 ( , , )

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

1. During execution of the MMS unit, the touch sensor came into contact with the workpiece (the skip signal turned on) when another feeding than that at the skipping speed was taking place. 2. #3000 = 12 (alarm message) in the user macroprogram was executed.

Action 992 Cause

1. Check the machining program. Also check the touch sensor for proper mounting on the spindle. 2. Refer to the relevant user macroprogram instruction manual to check the alarm. MACRO MEASUREMENT ALARM 3 ( , , ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

1. Correct signals were not output because of trouble with the touch sensors, receivers or other such MMS unit components. 2. #3000 = 13 (alarm message) in the user macroprogram was executed.

Action 993 Cause

1. Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center. 2. Refer to the relevant user macroprogram instruction manual to check the alarm. MACRO MEASUREMENT ALARM 4 ( , , ) B I (L) O (S) Red (Blue)

#3000 = 14 (alarm message) in the user macroprogram was executed.

Action 994 Cause

Refer to the relevant user macroprogram instruction manual to check the alarm.

MACRO MEASUREMENT ALARM 5

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

#3000 = 15 (alarm message) in the user macroprogram was executed.

Action 995 Cause

Refer to the relevant user macroprogram instruction manual to check the alarm.

MACRO MEASUREMENT ALARM 6

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

#3000 = 16 (alarm message) in the user macroprogram was executed.

Action 996 Cause

Refer to the relevant user macroprogram instruction manual to check the alarm.

MACRO MEASUREMENT ALARM 7

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

#3000 = 17 (alarm message) in the user macroprogram was executed.

Action 997 Cause

Refer to the relevant user macroprogram instruction manual to check the alarm.

MACRO MEASUREMENT ALARM 8

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

#3000 = 18 (alarm message) in the user macroprogram was executed.

Action 998 Cause

Refer to the relevant user macroprogram instruction manual to check the alarm.

MACRO MEASUREMENT ALARM 9

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

#3000 = 19 (alarm message) in the user macroprogram was executed.

Action 999 Cause

Refer to the relevant user macroprogram instruction manual to check the alarm.

MACRO MEASUREMENT ALARM 10

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

#3000 = 20 (alarm message) in the user macroprogram was executed.

Action

Refer to the relevant user macroprogram instruction manual to check the alarm.

3-131

ALARM

No. 1991

Message NOT POSSIBLE CROSS MACHINING (WNo., NNo., Cause)

Type of error B

Stopped status I (L)

Clearing procedure O (S)

Display Red (Blue)

During the tool path check, the system in which the crossing command was set and/or the remote system for which the crossing command was to be executed has been set to the following status: 1: The specified axis does not exist in the remote system. Cause 2: The local system is specified as the system for which the crossing command was to be executed. 4: A crossing control command is set for the axis currently undergoing the crossing command. 16: The G110 command is set when the local system/remote system is in the modal environment that does not allow crossing control. 32: The crossing control command is set under the prohibited status of recalculation. Action 1992 Cause Review and correct the program.

ILLEGAL AXES QTY. FOR CROSS

(WNo., NNo., BNo.)

I (L)

O (S)

Red (Blue)

The number of axes in the remote system became zero during the tool path check when the crossing command was executed. Review and correct the program.

Action

( Cause

Action

3-132

ALARM

3-2-11 No. 2000 - No. 2099 (3D setup error)

No. 2001 Cause Message CAD FILE FORMAT ERROR ( , , ) Type of error A Stopped status L Clearing procedure S Display Blue

Loading an incorrect CAD file has been attempted.

Action

Load the correct CAD file.

( Cause

Action 2028 Cause ILLEGAL WORKPIECE DIMENSION ( , , ) A L S Blue

Incorrect dimensions have been entered in the material database or there are sections in which dimensions are missing.

Action 2029 Cause

Enter the correct dimensions.

ILLEGAL FIXTURE DIMENSION

Blue

Incorrect dimensions have been entered in the fixture database or there are sections in which dimensions are missing.

Action 2030 Cause

Enter the correct dimensions.

CANNOT REGISTER (NUMBERS FULL)

Blue

Despite 9999 sets of data already existing, registering further data has been attempted.

Action 2031 Cause

Up to 9999 sets of data can be registered. Delete unnecessary data to register desired one.

SELECT REGISTERED DATA

Blue

Adding (copying) data has been attempted without selecting source data when editing the material database or the fixture database. Select source data before adding (copying) data.

Action 2032 Cause

SELECT DATA TO CHANGE

Blue

Changing data has been attempted without selecting source data when editing the material database or the fixture database. Review the machining program.

Action 2033 Cause

SELECT DATA TO DELETE

Blue

Deleting data has been attempted without selecting source data when editing the material database or the fixture database. Select data before deleting the data.

Action 2034 Cause

CANNOT ADD WORKPCE MATERIAL

Blue

Adding data to the material database has been attempted when an existing number was selected.

Action

Specify a new number to add data.

3-133

ALARM

No. 2035 Cause CANNOT ADD FIXTURE

Message ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

Adding data to the fixture database has been attempted when an existing number was selected.

Action 2036 Cause

Specify a new number to add data.

SURFACE SELECTION ERROR

Blue

Selecting the shape surface to be moved or disposed has been attempted during surface matching when a shape was not selected. Select the shapes to be surface-matched.

Action 2037 Cause

DATA NOT REGISTERED

Blue

Adding (copying) data or deleting data has been attempted when no data was present in the material database or the fixture database. Add new data.

Action 2038 Cause

FILE WITH SAME NAME EXISTS

Blue

The file name that has been entered during the name changing or copying process of model management is the same as the selected file name. Enter a file name different from the selected file name.

Action 2039 Cause

FILE NAME TOO LONG

Blue

Too long a file name has been entered during the model saving, renaming, or copying process of material model management or fixture model management. Enter a file name in less than 256 characters.

Action 2040 Cause

WRITING ERROR

Blue

The model saving process of material model management or fixture model management has failed.

Action

Confirm the capacity of the HDD and save the model properly.

( Cause

Action 2049 Cause NUMBER OF JAWS = 0 ( , , ) A L S Blue

Displaying jaws has been attempted when the number of jaws was zero.

Action 2050 Cause

Specify one to nine jaws.

Action

3-134

ALARM

No. 2051 Cause

Message MODEL SELECTION ERROR ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

Parallel move surface matching, X-axis rotation surface matching, Y-axis rotation surface matching, or Z-axis rotation surface matching has been attempted when the shape to be moved or the surface of the shape to be moved was not selected. Select the shape to be moved.

Action 2052 Cause

MODEL SELECTION ERROR

Blue

Parallel move surface matching, X-axis rotation surface matching, Y-axis rotation surface matching, or Z-axis rotation surface matching has been attempted when the shape to be disposed or the surface of the shape to be disposed was not selected. Select the shape to be disposed.

Action 2053 Cause

ILLEGAL SURFACE TYPE

Blue

Parallel move surface matching, X-axis rotation surface matching, Y-axis rotation surface matching, or Z-axis rotation surface matching has been attempted when a surface other than a plane or cylindrical surface was selected. Select a plane or a cylindrical surface.

Action 2054 Cause

ILLEGAL SURFACE ORIENTATION

Blue

Parallel move surface matching has been attempted when surfaces that are not parallel were selected. X-axis rotation surface matching, Y-axis rotation surface matching, or Z-axis rotation surface matching has been attempted when a surface perpendicular to the rotational axis was selected. Select surfaces whose relationship in position is correct.

Action 2055 Cause

NO PARALLEL PLANE

Blue

The parallel surfaces to be moved in parallel for surface matching do not exist.

Action 2056 Cause

Parallel moving cannot be executed without parallel surfaces.

ILLEGAL FILE NAME

Blue

Illegal characters or symbols are included in the file name.

Action 2057 Cause

Enter the characters and symbols that can be used in the file name.

NUMBER ALREADY REGISTERED

Blue

A registered number has been designated during database registration.

Action

Designate a new number.

( Cause

Action 2061 Cause WORK MATL. LARGER THAN BARRIER ( , , ) A L S Blue

The specified parametric model or CAD model is outside the workpiece information of the common unit.

Action

Dispose the parametric model or the CAD model so as to stay internally to the workpiece information. Even if the model is outside the information, the specification itself of that model is possible.

3-135

ALARM

No. 2062 Cause

Message FIXTURE LARGER THAN BARRIER ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

The specified CAD model is outside the jaw shape based on the setup information.

Action 2063 Cause

Dispose the CAD model so as to stay internally to the setup information. Even if the model is outside the information, the specification itself of that model is possible. CANNOT MOVE MODEL ( , , ) A L S Blue

It is not possible to manually dispose a material model that has been created from the workpiece information, or a fixture model that has been created from setup information. Modify the Z-offset or WPC-Z to move the material model. Modify the settings of BA19 and BA20 to move the fixture model. ( , , )

Action 2064 Cause

Action 2065 Cause

NO 2ND SPINDLE ( , , ) A L S Blue

The menu function for the secondary spindle has been selected under machine specifications not having the secondary spindle. The menu function for the secondary spindle can be used only under the machine specifications not having the secondary spindle. ( , , )

Action

Cause

Action

3-136

ALARM

3-2-12 No. 2100 - No. 2199 (Interference error)

No. 2100 Cause MACN INTRF Message (WNo., UNo., SNo.) Type of error A Stopped status L Clearing procedure S Display Blue

Execution of the machining program results in the interference occurring between <Interfering section 1> and <Interfering section 2>. Review and correct the program.

Action 2101 Cause

NEAR MISS

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Blue

Execution of the machining program results in <Interfering section 1> and <Interfering section 2> being present within the specified interference distance. Review and correct the program.

Action 2102 Cause

WORK INTRF

(WNo., UNo., SNo.)

Blue

Execution of the machining program results in the interference occurring between <Interfering section 1> and <Interfering section 2>. Review and correct the program.

Action

( Cause

Action 2110 Cause ILLEGAL FORMAT The entered data is incorrect. ( , , ) A L S Blue

Action 2111 Cause

Review the range of the data to be entered.

NO SOLID CHECK IN AUTO OPER

Blue

Execution of Virtual Machining has been attempted during automatic operation of the NEXUS machine.

Action 2112 Cause

Terminate automatic operation before executing Virtual Machining.

Z-OFFSET NOT FOUND

(WNo.,

Blue

A Z-offset is not set in the program of Z-offset scheme.

Action 2113 Cause

Set the Z-offset.

JAW NO NOT FOUND Jaw No. is not set.

(WNo.,

Blue

Action

Set Jaw No.

( Cause

Action

3-137

ALARM

No. 2120 Cause

Message RESTART PT SEARCH INTERRUPTED ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

The restart position search function has been aborted.

Action 2121 Cause RESTART POINT NOT FOUND The restarting point is not found. ( , , ) A L S Blue

Action

Review the restrictions on the restart or review the machining program itself.

( Cause

Action 2130 CANNOT DISPLAY WORKPIECE MODEL 1. Lack of available memory space Cause 2. Arithmetical incapability 3. Entered data imperfections 1. Divide the program. Action 2. Confirm parameters. 3. Confirm tool data. ( Cause , , ) ( , , ) A L S Blue

Action 2140 CANNOT DISPLAY MACHINE MODEL 1. Lack of available memory space Cause 2. Arithmetical incapability 3. The machine model file is missing. 1. Divide the program. Action 2. Confirm parameters. 3. Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center. ( Cause , , ) ( , , ) A L S Blue

Action 2150 Cause CANNOT DISPLAY TOOL MODEL ( , , ) A L S Blue

The shape cannot be created since the entered tool data is insufficient or incorrect.

Action

Review and correct the tool data.

3-138

ALARM

No. 2151 Cause

Message CANNOT DISPLAY TAILSTOCK MODEL ( , , )

Type of error A

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

The shape cannot be created since the entered machine parameters on the tailstock shape are incorrect.

Action

Modify the data settings of machine parameters BA12 to BA14.

( Cause

Action 2190 Cause NO MACHINE MODEL A machine model is not registered. ( , , ) B L N Blue

Action 2191 Cause

Register a machine model and then turn power back on.

CANNOT SELECT CHECK UNITS

Blue

In spite of the setting for a material piece to be mounted on the machine table, it was attempted to selectively turn off the function of checking for interference with respect to the material piece. Clear the setup setting for the material piece in question beforehand.

Action 2192 Cause

CHECK UNITS SET ERROR

Blue

A machining program is searched for, or selected, for which a material piece is arranged in a position where the function of checking for interference is currently specified as being cancelled for the material piece. Turn on the function of interference check for the material piece in the particular mounting position.

Action

( Cause

Action

3-139

ALARM

3-2-13 No. 2200 - No. 2299 (CAM data output error)

No. 2201 Cause READ-ONLY MEDIA The external memory is write-protected. Message ( , , ) Type of error G Stopped status L Clearing procedure S Display Blue

Action 2202 Cause

Remove the write protection from it.

NETWORK LOGON FAILED

Blue

A user failed to log on to another PC when storing data on it.

Action 2203 Cause

Check if the user in question is allowed to log on to the PC specified as the destination device.

NETWORK PATH NOT FOUND

Blue

The folder specified as the destination folder is not found on the network.

Action 2204 Cause

Check again if the destination folder on the network is correctly specified.

HARDWARE NOT INSTALLED The memory device is not inserted correctly.

Blue

Action 2205 Cause

Insert the device correctly and make a retry.

CANNOT ACCESS FILE

Blue

The user does not have the authority to access the PC specified.

Action 2206 Cause

Check if the user in question has the authority to access the PC specified.

FILE CONFIGURATION ERROR The file is not found or it is corrupted.

Blue

Action 2207 Cause

Contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

CANNOT ACCESS CNC

Blue

A communication error occurred between the NC and the PC.

Check if NC displays can be smoothly switched from one to another. Action If this alarm is displayed again after the NC has been turned off and back on, check what operation was performed when the error occurred and also the value displayed in ( , , ), and then contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center. MACHINE DATA TRANSFER ERROR ( , , ) E L S Blue

2208 Cause

An error occurred while machine data was being transferred.

Action

Make a retry. If this alarm is displayed again after a retry, check what operation was carried out when the error was occurred and also the value displayed in ( , , ), and then contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center.

3-140

ALARM

No. 2209 Cause

Message CANNOT SAVE MACHINE DATA (Note) ( , , )

Type of error G

Stopped status L

Clearing procedure S

Display Blue

Sub error codes related to the storage of machine data 300 to 399: Error in storing data on the destination device caused by lack of storage space 400 to 499: Error in extracting or compressing machine data

For sub error codes of 300s: Check if there is enough free space in the memory device, and if the device is correctly recognized. Action For sub error codes of 400s: Check if there is enough free space on the hard disk and make a retry if there is no problem. If this alarm is displayed again after a retry, check what operation was carried out when the error was occurred and also the value displayed in ( , , ), and then contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center. 2210 Cause INVALID DRIVE SPECIFIED An invalid drive is specified. ( , , ) E L S Blue

Action 2211 Cause

Specify a drive available.

FILE SAVINGFAILURE

Blue

A user failed to write data on the destination device specified.

Action 2212 Cause

Check if you have the authority to write data to the destination. If the authority is present, check the presence or absence of invalid folders or files, the free space left in the destination device, and if the device is correctly recognized. FILE NOT FOUND ( , , ) B L S Blue

Some are missing from the files to be saved as CAM machine data.

Action

The data you want to copy may be corrupted. If this alarm is displayed again after a retry, check what operation was carried out when the error was occurred and also the value displayed in ( , , ), and then contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center. ( , , )

Cause

Action

3-141

ALARM

- NOTE -

3-142 E

M-CODE LIST

M-CODE LIST
M-code M00 Program stop Stops reading and execution of a program; the PROGRAM STOP in the CNC Signal window goes on. At this time, the spindle will also stop rotating. M01 Optional stop To use this function, set the [OPTIONAL STOP] menu item to ON. A function similar to that of M00 will be performed. At this time, the spindle will also stop rotating. M01 will be ignored when the [OPTIONAL STOP] menu item is set to OFF. M02 End of program When this function code is loaded, spindle rotation will be stopped and coolant injection, air blasting and the operation of the oil mist will also be stopped. Finally, the function of the NC unit will be reset to stop all operation. Except in tape operation mode, a function similar to that of M30 is performed (rewind operation). M03 Start of forward milling spindle (machining center spindle) rotation This function code rotates the milling spindle (machining center spindle) forward. M04 Start of backward milling spindle (machining center spindle) rotation This function code rotates the milling spindle (machining center spindle) backward. M05 Stop of milling spindle (machining center spindle) rotation This function code stops the milling spindle (machining center spindle) whose rotation was started by M03 or M04. M06 Automatic tool change command for the milling spindle This function code mounts the specified tool in the milling spindle (machining center spindle) and returns the tool to the magazine for the milling spindle. When the next tool command is present, this ATC command moves the next tool to the standby position for ATC. Sample program: 1. T** Specified tool T** M06 T M06 M06 M06 T Next tool Function

2.

Machining program

3.

T** (If T0 is specified in T**, this command will return the spindle tool and the standby tool to the magazine.)

Notes: - Any value from 1 to the greatest pocket number in the magazine can be specified in T**, T. (Pocket number scheme) - A tool change command targeted for a combination of the milling spindle tool and the ram spindle tool is invalid. The combination of the milling spindle tool and the ram spindle tool applies when the milling spindle tool is specified to be used for the current machining operation and the ram spindle tool is specified to be used for the next operation, or vice versa. M07 Mist coolant ON (option) Starts the oil-mist coolant system if the machine is equipped with the oil-mist coolant system. M08 Flood coolant ON Starts the flood coolant system to discharge coolant from the nozzles.

4-1

M-CODE LIST

M-code M09 All coolant OFF

Function

Turns off all coolant systems and air blast system. Although up to four M-codes may be specified in the same block, it is not allowed to specify a coolant supply M-code preceding M09 in the same block. M10 Milling spindle tool clamp Clamps a tool in the milling spindle. M11 Milling spindle tool unclamp Unclamps a tool from the milling spindle. M15 ATC cover close Closes the ATC cover. M16 ATC cover open Opens the ATC cover. M19 Milling spindle (machining center spindle) orientation To perform ATC operations, the position of the keyway in the tool and the position of the key at the end of the milling spindle (machining center spindle) must be matched. The milling spindle is orientated for that position by this function code. M23 Error detect ON Selects the exact stop mode. For details of the exact stop mode, refer to the Operating Manual for the NC unit. M24 Error detect OFF Cancels the M23 mode. M30 Reset and rewind This function code stops the machine similarly to M02, resets the function of the NC unit, and returns control to the beginning of the program. The PROGRAM HEAD lamp on the NC screen display lights up. M33 Laser tool length measurement unit cover open (option) Opens the cover of the tool length measurement unit for the execution of tool breakage detection and tool length measurement. M34 Laser tool length measurement unit cover close (option) Closes the cover of the tool length measurement unit. M35 Tool breakage detection (Valid only for MAZATROL programs) (option) Calls the tool breakage detection cycle. In the first ATC cycle after the execution of the M35 command, the selected tool is checked for breakage. For details of this function, refer to the Operating Manual of the NC unit. M48 M49 cancel This function code cancels the M49-specified override cancel function. The override function, therefore, becomes valid. M49 Override cancel This function code cancels the override command. Therefore, the machine operates with programspecified data. Both the feed override and spindle override functions are canceled. Note: When power is switched on or after emergency stop, the NC is (re)set in the M48 mode. M50 Air blast ON (option) Starts the air blast system. To stop the air blast system, execute M09.

4-2

M-CODE LIST

M-code M51

Function Through-spindle (machining center spindle) coolant ON (option) Supplies coolant through the through-coolant tool. To stop coolant supply, execute M09. For the high-pressure through-spindle (machining center spindle) coolant system with two selectable pressure levels, M51 is used to select low pressure level. To select high pressure level, specify M131. Related parameter RB9 bit 6: Turns off the through-spindle coolant command for each ATC operation (1: valid). The through-spindle coolant (through milling-spindle coolant) usually does not turn off until the M09 (all coolants OFF) command is assigned. Setting up 1 at PLC parameter RB9 bit 6, however, allows the through-spindle coolant to be turned off for each ATC operation. This parameter relates to the machine specifications. To change the setting of the parameter, please contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center beforehand. To turn the through-spindle coolant back on after assigning an ATC command to the machine having 1 set up at PLC parameter RB9 bit 6, assign M51 (through-spindle (machining center spindle) coolant ON) once again.

M53

Air blast 2 ON (option) Starts the air blast system 2 (mainly used for air blast for cutting). To stop the air blast system 2, execute M09.

M58

Tool life check This function code will bring the machine to a single-block stop if an alarm is displayed to indicate that the life of the tool mounted in the milling spindle (machining center spindle) has expired. In this case, the operation of the machine can be continued by pressing the cycle start button after pressing the clear key.

M68

Pallet clamp (option) Clamps a pallet.

M69

Pallet unclamp (option) Unclamps a pallet.

M71

Pallet No. 1 selection (option) Selects pallet No. 1 for pallet change operation. (Positioning the axes to the pallet change position is required.)

M72

Pallet No. 2 selection (option) Selects pallet No. 2 for pallet change operation. (Positioning the axes to the pallet change position is required.)

M73

Pallet No. 3 selection (option) (For the machine with 6PC) Selects pallet No. 3 for pallet change operation. (Positioning the axes to the pallet change position is required.)

M74

Pallet No. 4 selection (option) (For the machine with 6PC) Selects pallet No. 4 for pallet change operation. (Positioning the axes to the pallet change position is required.)

M75

Pallet No. 5 selection (option) (For the machine with 6PC) Selects pallet No. 5 for pallet change operation. (Positioning the axes to the pallet change position is required.)

M76

Pallet No. 6 selection (option) (For the machine with 6PC) Selects pallet No. 6 for pallet change operation. (Positioning the axes to the pallet change position is required.)

M90

Mirror image cancel Cancels the mirror image function called by M91 or M92.

M91

Mirror image X-axis ON Calls the X-axis mirror image function. When this function is active, axis motion direction is reversed for the X-axis.

4-3

M-CODE LIST

M-code M92 Mirror image Y-axis ON

Function

Calls the Y-axis mirror image function. When this function is active, axis motion direction is reversed for the Y-axis. M98 Subprogram call Calls a subprogram. M99 Return to main program Indicates the end of a sub-program and returns the program execution to a main program. M107 B-axis clamp Clamps the B-axis coupling. B-axis is clamped in the specified position. M108 B-axis unclamp Unclamps the B-axis coupling. B-axis positioning is enabled. M110 Milling spindle (machining center spindle) clamp (for machines other than VORTEX 1060V/8) Clamps the milling spindle (machining center spindle) when it holds a turning tool. The milling spindle (machining center spindle) is fixed. (Turning spindle mode) M111 Milling spindle (machining center spindle) unclamp (for machines other than VORTEX 1060V/8) Unclamps the milling spindle (machining center spindle) when it holds a milling tool. The milling spindle (machining center spindle) can rotate. (Milling spindle (machining center spindle) mode) M120 Automatic power shut-off Shuts off the main power to the machine if the AUTO POWER OFF switch is set to the ON position. M130 NIAGARA coolant ON (option) Starts the NIAGARA coolant system if equipped. M131 High-pressure through-spindle (machining center spindle) coolant ON (option) For the high-pressure through-spindle (machining center spindle) coolant system with two selectable pressure levels, M131 is used to select high pressure level. To select low pressure level, specify M51. If the coolant system does not have the pressure level selection function although the high-pressure through-spindle (machining center spindle) coolant system is installed, it is possible to turn on the highpressure coolant by specifying M51. Related parameter RB9 bit 6: Turns off the through-spindle coolant command for each ATC operation (1: valid). The through-spindle coolant (through milling-spindle coolant) usually does not turn off until the M09 (all coolants OFF) command is assigned. Setting up 1 at PLC parameter RB9 bit 6, however, allows the through-spindle coolant to be turned off for each ATC operation. This parameter relates to the machine specifications. To change the setting of the parameter, please contact Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center beforehand. To turn the through-spindle coolant back on after assigning an ATC command to the machine having 1 set up at PLC parameter RB9 bit 6, assign M131 (high-pressure through-spindle (machining center spindle) coolant ON) once again. M132 Through-spindle (machining center spindle) air ON Discharges through-spindle (machining center spindle) air. M134 IN station pallet ID read (option) Reads the pallet data stored in the data carrier on the pallet placed at the IN station. M137 IN station pallet ID write (option) Writes the pallet data to the data carrier on the pallet placed at the IN station. M138 OUT station pallet all ID data write (option) Writes all the pallet data to the data carrier on the pallet placed at the OUT station. M139 Heavy tool mode cancel Cancels the heavy tool mode. M140 Heavy tool mode designation Designates the heavy tool mode.

4-4

M-CODE LIST

M-code M149 Magazine rotation Selects the tool in the magazine. M149 T selects No. tool. M160 M161, M162 cancel

Function

Sets the milling spindle (machining center spindle) speed arrived completion level at 85% of the specified spindle speed. M161 Milling spindle (machining center spindle) speed arrived setting at 70% Sets the milling spindle (machining center spindle) speed arrived completion level at 70% of the specified spindle speed. M162 Milling spindle (machining center spindle) speed arrived setting at 50% Sets the milling spindle (machining center spindle) speed arrived completion level at 50% of the specified spindle speed. M169 M170 cancel Makes the AFC function valid. (AFC is usually valid.) M170 AFC cancel Cancels the AFC function. M173 Dynamic compensation valid (option) Makes the dynamic compensation valid (C-axis). M174 M173 cancel Cancels the dynamic compensation function called out by M173. M180 M181 cancel Cancels the M181 mode. M181 Next tool index invalid This mode is used to avoid influence of vibration due to magazine rotation or shifter movements during machining to the finish surface. When this command is executed, the next tool command is ignored. M187 M195 Preparation for measuring using laser (option) Tool breakage detection ON (option) Valid only for the tool length measurement unit. Executes a tool breakage detection cycle. This command is automatically specified right before the ATC cycle when M35 is entered in a MAZATROL program. Usually, this command is not used by the customer. M200 C-axis connection Switches the table mode from the turning operation mode to the C-axis mode. M202 C-axis release (for machines other than VORTEX 1060V/8) Switches the table mode from the C-axis mode to the turning operation mode. M203 Start of forward turning spindle (table) rotation (for machines other than VORTEX 1060V/8) Rotates the turning spindle in the forward direction. M204 Start of backward turning spindle (table) rotation (for machines other than VORTEX 1060V/8) Rotates the turning spindle in the backward direction. M205 Turning spindle (table) stop (for machines other than VORTEX 1060V/8) Stops the turning spindle, which was started by M203 or M204. M210 C-axis clamp Clamps the C-axis when the table is in the C-axis mode. M212 C-axis unclamp Unclamps the C-axis when the table is in the C-axis mode. M219 Turning spindle (table) orientation (for machines other than VORTEX 1060V/8) Stops the turning spindle at the orientation position. The turning spindle stops at the position where C-axis connection is executed.

4-5

M-CODE LIST

M-code M281 MMS unit ON (option)

Function

Turns ON the touch sensor unit when this command is executed with the touch sensor tool mounted in the spindle. M282 MMS unit OFF (option) Turns OFF the touch sensor unit when this command is executed with the touch sensor tool mounted in the spindle. The status that the touch sensor unit is OFF is indicated by the alarm message TOUCH SENSOR ALARM. M283 TOOL EYE measurement arm extend (option) Extends the arm where the TOOL EYE measurement unit is mounted. M284 TOOL EYE measurement arm retract (option) Retracts the arm where the TOOL EYE measurement unit is mounted. M303 Ram spindle forward rotation start This function rotates the ram spindle forward in accordance with the value specified in an S-command code. M304 Ram spindle reverse rotation start This function rotates the ram spindle in reverse in accordance with the value specified in an S-command code. M305 Ram spindle stop Stops the ram spindle rotation started by M303 or M304. M319 Ram spindle orientation stop The position of the keyway in the ram spindle tool and the phase of the ram spindle key must be matched to perform the ATC operation for the ram spindle tool. Command M319 provides ram spindle orientation for that position. M600 Ram spindle tool change command This command mounts the program-specified tool in the ram spindle and returns the current tool in the ram spindle to the magazine for the ram spindle. Sample program: M600 T8** Specified tool Notes: - Any value from 801 to the greatest pocket number in the magazine can be specified in T**. (Pocket number scheme) - Since some tool must be mounted in the ram spindle, such a command that only returns the ram spindle tool cannot be assigned. - A tool for lidding the ram spindle is provided in the #0 pocket of the magazine for the ram spindle. If machining with the ram spindle is unnecessary, mount the lidding tool in the ram spindle. M645 Tool seating confirmation cancel command Cancels the confirmation of tool seating during the next ATC. M646 M645 cancel Cancels M645. M650 Ram spindle tool load command Moves the indexed tool from the ram spindle tool magazine to the standby position. M651 Ram spindle tool unload command Returns the tool from the standby position to the ram spindle tool magazine. M652 Ram spindle tool change command Rotates the ATC arm to replace the current tool in the spindle with the specified one. M660 Ram spindle tool clamp Clamps the tool in the ram spindle. M661 Ram spindle tool unclamp Unclamps the tool in the ram spindle.

4-6

M-CODE LIST

M-code M670 Ram spindle ATC cover close Closes the ram spindle ATC cover. M671 Ram spindle ATC cover open Opens the ram spindle ATC cover. M672 Ram spindle-through coolant ON

Function

Jets out the ram spindle-through coolant when the menu function [RAM COOLANT AUTO] is valid. M673 Ram spindle-through coolant OFF Stops supplying the ram spindle-through coolant (command M9 also stops the supply). M674 Ram spindle-through air ON Activates ram-spindle through air blasting when the menu function [RAM AIR AUTO] is valid. M675 Ram spindle-through air OFF Stops ram-spindle through air blasting (command M9 also stops the blasting). M700 Ram spindle machining mode select Changes the current operation to ram spindle machining mode. When the C-axis is in a connected status, the ram spindle rotate command can be specified. Command M700 also changes the stroke ends of the Z-, Y-, and W-axes. M702 Ram spindle machining mode cancel Cancels ram spindle machining mode. M840 Start of unbalanced load detection (for machines other than VORTEX 1060V/8) Makes the unbalanced load detection function valid. M841 End of unbalanced load detection (for machines other than VORTEX 1060V/8) Makes the unbalanced load detection function invalid. M911 Pallet No. 1 select (Option) Selects pallet No. 1 during a pallet change. Unlike M71, this command moves each axis to the pallet change position automatically for the pallet change, even when the axis is absent at the pallet change position. Use M911 to specify all FMS-adaptable pallet changes, irrespective of the pallet number. M912 Pallet No. 2 select (Option) Selects pallet No. 2 during a pallet change. Unlike M72, this command moves each axis to the pallet change position automatically for the pallet change, even when the axis is absent at the pallet change position.

4-7

M-CODE LIST

Note 1: M-codes that cannot undergo simultaneous processing MAZATROL permits the entry of up to four M-codes in a single block. However, if Mcodes which cannot be processed simultaneously are entered in the same block, the alarm message 227 SIMULTANEOUS M CODE OPERATION is displayed and operation is suspended. This alarm occurs in the following cases: - M00 and M01 - Any combination of M06 with M15, M16, M17 or M18 - Any combination of M03, M04, M05 and M19 - Any combination of M203, M204, M205 and M219 - M200 and M202 - Any combination of M200 with M03, M04, M203 or M204 - Any combination of M202 with M03, M04, M203 or M204 - M15 and M16 (opposing operation) - M17 and M18 (opposing operation) - Any combination of M160, M161 and M162 - M23 and M24 (opposing operation) - M33 and M34 (opposing operation) - M38 and M39 - M48 and M49 (opposing operation) - M15 and M33 (opposing operation) - M06 and M149 (opposing operation) - M68 and M69 (opposing operation) - Any combination of M71 to M76 (for pallet changer specification) - M139 and M140 (opposing operation) - M195 to M198, specified with other M-code - M840 and M841 (opposing operation) Note 2: When entering more than one M-code in the same block, there is a restriction on entry order when entering M-codes related with coolant and air blast system (M09, M07, M08, M50, M51, M52, M130, M131, M132, etc.). An M-code starting the coolant system or air blast system must not be entered before M09. To enter M08 before M09, for example, enter M08 in a block preceding the M09 block. M08 M09 M51 M08 M09 M51 ......

4-8 E